TWI245997B - IP communication system, IP transfer network, gateway device, server, network point device, medium router, terminal device and terminal communication method - Google Patents

Abstract

There is provided a terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method that can be applied to multimedia communication such as communication between IP phones, audio visual communication and IP multicast communication. A connection server and a relay connection server are installed in an IP transfer network, a function similar to line connection control of a subscriber exchanger (LS) is applied to the connection server, a function similar to the line connection control of a relay exchanger (TS) is applied to the relay connection server, and a terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method using the IP transfer network is realized in such a manner that a telephone set and a terminal such as an IP terminal and a video terminal transmit/receive an initial address message (IAM), an address completion message (ACM), a call pass message (CPG), an answer message (ANM), a release message (REL) and a release completion message (RLC), which can be made in a 1-to-1 correspondence relationship with line connection control messages of the common line signal system. Furthermore, while an address administration table is set to a network node apparatus of an IP transfer network, means for registering addresses of the terminals into this address administration table is employed, so that an IP packet communication by a multicast manner can be realized with improving information security performance.

Description

1245997 V. Description of the invention (1) Description of the invention The present invention relates to a method for controlling communication between terminals used in an Internet Protocol transmission network. The above Internet Protocol transmission network can be applied to the IPUnternet Protocol, Internet Protocol. ) IP communication between 2 terminals such as terminals, IP telephones, audio and video equipment, and IP communication using i: n using Multicast IP technology. Conventional technology The present inventors proposed a method for implementing various types of communication between terminals such as mail sending and receiving, telephone, and image communication using an IP transmission network in Japanese Patent Application No. 1 1-1 28956 (hereinafter referred to as the "previous case"). The "Unified IP Transmission Network" which realizes internal separation and includes a plurality of IP transmission networks with various characteristics such as IP telephone network, IP video network, and IP electronic data universal network is disclosed. In order to realize an IP transmission network that integrates communication between various terminals, the content disclosed in the previous case is briefly described with reference to FIG. 339. In the integrated IP transmission network 901, a plurality of IP transmission networks having different characteristics, such as an IP video network 902, an IP electronic data universal network 903, and an IP telephone network 904, are set up. The IP transmission network 901 externally sets various address management tables internally to the node devices 905-χ and 905-Y on the input point of the integrated IP transmission network 901. In this address management table, The address and the like of the registered terminal are compared on the integrated IP transmission network 9 by comparing the address of the IP packet written to the input integration transmission network 901 with the address registered on the address management table. Internal 1 can send separate messages to individual jp transmission networks. Next, a brief description of the public telephone exchange network (pSTN) related to the present invention

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd $ 5 pages 1245997 5. Description of the invention (2) Inter-terminal communication connection control method (No. 7-common communication signal method) 0 In Figure 340, 98-1 and 98-3 series exchanges (joiner exchanges), 98-2 series relay exchanges, 98-4 and 98-5 series telephones. 98-6 and 98-8 series call control unit ng to gm series switch internal control unit, 9 8-1 2 to 9 8-1 4 series for telephone terminal indirect continuous control ## 局 （SP 'Signaling Point). The internal control unit of the exchange, together with the internal operation control of the parent switch, exchanges information for setting and repairing the communication circuit between the communication path control unit and the signal office.

98-12 and 98-14 are specially used as signal end offices (SEp, SignaHng End Point), 98-1 3 are specially used as signal relay offices (stp,

Signaling Transfer Point). 98-15 is other signal end office. These signal stations 98-12 to 98-15 are connected to the network No. 9 8-16 through each of the signal circuits 98_24 to 98-27, and will be used for control of communication between terminals and information for network conservation and operation. It is stored in the signal unit (su ·· signal ing Un 11), and is sent to and received from each other. A 16-bit signal station code (pC: point code) for identification with other # stations is granted on the signal station. On the one hand, 98-21 and 98-22 are communication circuits that transmit telephone sounds, and they do not transmit information for control of communication connection between terminals. The telephone circuits 98-20 and 98-23 are integrated with the communication control information between the terminals. The two sides are called the UNI and the communication control information between the sound and the terminals. In the public telephone switching network (psTN), the signal f channels 98-24 to 98-26 and the communication circuits 98-21 and 98-22 are separated into No. 7-common line signal mode characteristics.

1245997 V. Description of Invention (3)

The signal unit shown in Figure 341 includes "Received Signal Office Code" (DPC: Destination Point Code), "Transmitted Signal Office Code" (〇pc ·· Or igin Point Code), and "Circuit Identification Code" (CIC: Circui t Identification Code), message type (MSG: message), message parameters. The "" is 彳 § station code indicates the destination of the signal unit sent, the signal station code indicates the transmission unit of the signal unit, and the circuit identification code (c 丨 c: Circuit Identification Code) identifies the signal set on the transmission unit. The identification number of the calling circuit between the office and the trusted signal office. The so-called message type is, for example, AM, ACM, CPG, ANM, REL, RLC, SlIS, RES, and CON used for communication connection control between terminals. The signal unit of I AM is written in the message type field of the signal unit as the initial address message (I AM). Similarly, in the message type field of the signal unit, the signal unit of the ACM is an address end message (ACM), the signal unit of the CPG is a call progress message (CPG), and the signal unit of the ANM is a response message ( ANM), the signal unit written in REL is a release message (REL), the signal unit written in RLC is a release complete message (RLC), the signal unit written in SUS is an interrupt message (SUS), and the signal unit written in RES is Re-open message (RES), the signal unit written in CON is a continuation message (CON). A method for controlling communication connection between terminals for telephone communication with the telephone set 98-5 from the telephone set 98_4 shown in FIG. 34 through the switches 98-1, 98-2, and 98-3 will be described with reference to FIG. 342. Each signal office sets the signal office code granted to each signal office to indicate the address of the receiving and transmitting cells, and exchanges the signal units through the signal circuits 924 to 98-27 and the common line signal network 98-16. Phone 98-4 and pay

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd

Page 7 1245997

= Connected by the telephone circuit 98-20, the terminal of the telephone line -4 Z connection: The control system is supported by the signal office 98_12 in the switch 98_ 丨. Similarly, the lightning machine 98_5 and the switch 9 are connected to the terminal indirectly by the telephone -23. The control of the terminal indirect continuation is under the control of the 1 Luhui Bureau 98-1 4. If the user makes a call request from the telephone 9 8-4, write 垆 qq? = Letter (step X1 in Figure 342), according to the communication of the exchange secretary]; The function of the unit 98_9 determines the communication circuit for receiving the party letter telephone number from the telephone 4, forming a signal unit written with the communication circuit identification code (cic) as the initial address information (IAM): (IAM) In the parameter field, at least the telephone number of telephone 98-5 is written, that is, the trusted telephone number "Tel_N0-98-5". In addition, the telephone number of telephone 98-4 can also be written, which is the sending telephone number " Tel -No-98-4 丨 丨 〇 and then the "signal station 9 8 -1 2" will be used for the initial call The address information (IAM) is sent to the signal office 98-13 in the switch 98-2 (step X2). The I AM contains the circuit number of the communication circuit which is the logical communication circuit within the communication circuit 98-21. "98-4 -98-5", the trusted telephone number; Tel-N0-98-5 '' , Send phone number "1 ^ 14〇-98-4" (optional options), etc.

. After the signal station 98-12 sends the IAM, the ACm wait timer starts as soon as it transitions to the wait state of the address end message (ACM) described later. The signal station 98-13 in the parent switch 98-2 receives the aforementioned IAM and informs the call circuit control unit 98-7 of the circuit number "98-4-98-5" via the switch internal control unit 98-10. The control section 98-7 conducts a continuity test, and

1245997 V. Description of the invention (5) ---- Live circuit 98-21 can talk, then the signal office 98-13 sends the aforementioned iam to the signal office 98-14 in the switch 98-3 (step χ3), the signal office 98 —Η investigate the content of the received UM. If the control unit 98 and the call circuit control unit 98-8 are used, the call circuit 98-22 can talk, and the signal station 98-14 can connect the telephone 98-5 to the exchange 98-3. , Check if incoming calls are allowed, and when incoming calls are allowed, call setting request is made to telephone 98-5 (step) 'Further, the signal office 98-14 calls back to notify the receiving of the address end message (ACM) of am (step X5) ACM arrives at signal station 98-12 via signal station 98-13 (step X6). If the signal station 98-12 receives the ACM, the ACM wait timer that has been set will stop. Also, at the point before receiving the ACM, the acm waits for the timer to expire when the call circuit is released. If the signal station 98-14 in the exchange 98-3 receives the information indicating that the outgoing call from the telephone 98-5 is in motion (step χ7), it sends a call progress message (CPG) to the signal station 98-13 (step χ8). Office 98-13 sends the received CPG to the signal office 98-12 (step χ9), and the signal office 98-12 in the switch 98- 丨 receives the CPG, and then the signal office 98-12 sends the outgoing midrange to the telephone 99- 4 (Step XI). If the telephone set 98_5 responds to the aforementioned call setting request (step XII), and if the call circuit 98-23 between the telephone set 98-5 and the exchange 98-4 can talk, the telephone set 98_5 further sends an answer message (ANS) indicating a response to the signal station. 98-13 (step X12). The signal station 98-13 sends the received ANM to the signal station 98-12 (step X13). The signal station 98-12 notifies to stop sending the outgoing call tone to the telephone 98-4 (* step X14), so that the telephone 98-4 and the telephone set 98-5 can send and receive the voice of the phone, and shift to the call state (step χ15). Pickup and Delivery on Phone 98-4

1245997

5. Description of the invention (6) The microphone is hung up (hook), and the release request (REL) is sent out (step χ16). Letter 98-12 —Receive a release request (REL) 'Send the next release request (REL) to the signal office 98-13 (step X17), and notify the release end (RLC) that the call circuit is idle Telephone 98-4 (step χΐ8). Then 'Signature Office 98-13—Receive a release request (REL), send the next release request (REL) to Signal Office 98-14 (step X19), and will release the end of the release (RLC) indicating that the call circuit is idle Notify signal office 98-12 (step X20) 'Number office 98-14—Receive a release request (rel), then send the next release request (REL to telephone 98-5 (step X21), and will indicate that the call circuit is Idle state release end (RLC) notifies signal station 98-13 (step X22). Terminals transmitting and receiving between telephone 98-4 and signal station 98-12 and signal station 9 8 -1 4 and telephone 9 8-5 The sequence of continuous communication control varies depending on the type of telephone. For example, after the foregoing steps, a confirmation notification of the end of release can be output from telephone 98-4 to signal station 98-12, or it can also be performed in the foregoing steps. After χ23, a confirmation notification of the end of release is output from the signal station 98-14 to the telephone 98-5. Fig. 343 illustrates the communication with the telephone 98-5 from the telephone 98-4 through 98- to "^". Β-type for a method for controlling communication connection between terminals. The method for controlling communication connection between terminals is illustrated in FIG. 296: Steps X5 and 5 are removed from the communication connection control method, which is equivalent to β removing the address end message ACM. However, in step 乂 2, the device starts with Instead of the ACM wait timer, the signal station 9 "stops the CPG wait timer after step X9. The control method described above is that the switch is an analog switch, instead of deleting < 1

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 10 1245997

5. Description of the invention (7) The method adopted. Figure 344 is a diagram illustrating the method of telephone set 98_4 and telephone set 98-5 = ..., the communication connection between the terminals 2 has not yet waited for the series of steps of the last name L in the description of the connection control method of the communication between the terminals X and X ( Examples of steps X16 to X23). ΪΙ345 is a method for controlling communication connection between other terminals for telephone communication with telephone 98-5 via telephone 98-4 through switches 98-1 through "-3", and during the call (step XI 5) the receiver of telephone 98-4 Only be placed (hook) for a short time, transmit the interruption message (steps X30 to X33) to temporarily suspend the telephone communication, retrieve the handset (off hook), and transmit the reopen message (steps χ35 to X38) to resume the telephone communication, The display returns to the call (step χ39). The steps for the next release (REL) and end of release (RLC) are the same as those described in Figure 343 (steps χ4〇 to χ47). Next, 'About IP telephone communication, "TTC standard" according to the JT_H323 packet multimedia communication system ", for example, as described in the ITU-T Η323 ΑΝΝχ D standard (April 1999 version). The "signal protocol and the encapsulation of media signals" technology for controlling call connection in communication between multimedia terminals is specified as JT-H225, and in the communication between multimedia terminals, the control protocol for multimedia communication is The specification is jT-H245. Next, referring to the present invention, the basic functions of the JT-H323 gateway according to the ITU will be described with reference to Figures 346 to 349. The block 800 in Figure 346 is a JT-H323 gateway, which can be obtained from The audio and video signals input by the SCN circuit 801 are converted into numbers in the SCN terminal function 802.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 11 1245997 V. Description of Invention (8) " '—

The bit data signal is converted into a data format and a signal transmission / reception rule in the conversion function 803, and is converted into an IP packet format in the terminal function 804 and sent to the IP communication circuit 805. In addition, the reverse flow, that is, the ip packet including the audio and video data input from the IP communication circuit 805 is restored to the form of digital data in the terminal function 804, and converted into the data form in the conversion function 803 And signal transmission and reception rules, etc., are converted into signals flowing in the SCN circuit in the SCN terminal function 802 and sent to the SCN power span 80 1. Here, audio and video signals can be divided into call control data " actual data " which is used in conversation with the telephone number of the communication partner, etc., and constitutes such audio and video. The communication circuit 805 circulates an IP packet 810 (Figure 347) as call control data, an IP packet 811 (Figure 348) as actual data constituting sound, and an IP packet as actual data constituting video. 81 2 (Figure 349). When using an ISDN circuit, the SCN terminal function 802 is equivalent to a data circuit terminal device (Dsu). In addition, the terminal function 804 has a terminal communication function necessary for carrying out the opposite communication with the JT-323 telephone and the JT-323 audiovisual device. Next, the integrated information and communication network of Patent No. 3804681 which is closely related to the present invention will be briefly described with reference to FIG. The system of block 191 and the IP communication network, the IP terminal 192- 丨 has an IP address " EA01 ", and the IP terminal 192-2 has an IP address "EA〇2". This example is an example of transferring IP packet 193-1 from IP terminal 192-1 to IP terminal 192-2 via the integrated IP communication network. The IP addresses " EA01 " and " EA02 " The external use of 9 1 is called the external IP address. In the records in FIGS. 3 0 to 353, the header portion of the IP records the IP address portion itself.

2049-3793-PF: RAY.ptd Page 12 1245997 V. Description of Invention (9) Other items are omitted. Network point device 195-1 —Receive external IP packet ^ Input the logical communication circuit of IP packet 193-1 ...] Terminal: Make sure that the internal IP address of the IP packet is "IA01", and the logical W address of the IP packet 193M is " EA02 ", retrieve the address management table shown in Figure 350 丨" ^ :: / Retrieve the internal IP address of the sending cell containing the beginning is "丨 A0 丨 ", then ...,: The external IP address of the letter is " EA02 " record, and then check whether the IP packet's external IP. Address " EA01 " received in the IP packet is included in the previously detected record. It is also possible to omit the operation of checking whether the external cell address " EAA " in the IP packet 193-1 is included in the detected record. In this example, there is a record containing "EA01, EA02, IA01, IA0 2" in the second line above. Use "u〇l" and "ia〇2 lf" of the IP address inside this record, and Form the IP packet ι93-2 (the capsuleization of the ιρ packet) with the IP header of the sending cell " IA 0 Γ and the trusted 丨 p address " IA02 ". Here 'IA 0 1 and' IA 0 2 '' is called the internal IP address of the integrated IP communication network 1 9 1. The internal IP packet 193-2 arrives at the branch device 195-2 via the routers 197-1, 197-2, 197-3. The branch Device 195-2 removes the IP header of the received internal IP packet 1 9 3-2 (inverse encapsulation of the IP packet), and sends the obtained external packet 193-3 to the communication circuit 194-2, so that the IP terminal 192-2 receives an external IP packet 193-3. Furthermore, 197-6 is an example of a server with an external IP address of "ΕΑ8Γ" and an internal IP address of "IA8 Γ." Figure 3 5 1-series address management For other examples of the table, the address management table 196-1 of FIG. 350 becomes the address management table 196-3 of FIG. 351, and the address management table 196-2 of FIG. 350 becomes the address management table 196 of FIG. 351. 4, other Part is the same

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 13 1245997

. The address management tables 196-3 and 196-4 are applicable to (address mask) technology. At the beginning of the known address mask, the internal IP address " IA01 " containing the terminals of the granting communication circuit 194 is retrieved from the address management table 196 ^, ^^ in the logic: Record of Shaw line 2 =

', In the record of line 1, check the trusted external IP mask " " Second = trusted external IP within IP packet i 9 3-i ϊ P address I, EA 〇2 " " a η Yin The result of, is inconsistent with the trusted external Iρ address " ΕΑ8ΐχ " in the record of the i-th line (the following (1)), which is inconsistent in this example. Then, regarding the second line, check the trusted external IP The result of the calculation of "Mask2" and the external IP packet 193-1 ^ I trusted external IP address " ΕΑ02 " is consistent with the trusted external IP address " EA02y " (Expression (2)), which is consistent with you. The transmission cell IP address is also the same as described above, and is compared according to the following formula (3). I f (丨 ’Mask81” and " EA02 丨 丨 = ”ΕΑ81χπ) · · · (1)

If (" Mask2i 丨 and 丨 丨 ΕΑ02 ’, =” EA02y ”) · · · (2)

If (" Maskly " and " EAOl " = " EAOly ") · · · (3)

According to the above comparison result, the record in the second line is selected. The internal record “IAAΓ ,, IA02” in the record in the second line is used for encapsulation to form an internal IP packet 193-2. FIG. 352 is another embodiment of the address management table, wherein the address management table 196-1 of FIG. 350 becomes the address management table 196-5 of FIG. 352 and the address management table 196-2 of FIG. 350 becomes FIG. 351 The address management table 196-6 is the same for other parts. In this example, the address management tables 1 9 6 _ 5 and 1 9 6-6 send mail internally

2049.3793.PF; RAY.ptd Page 14 1245997 V. Description of the invention (11) Meta external IP address is marked with "don't care", which is sent as meta external IP address in IP encapsulation and is not referenced. When the IP packet 193-1 is encapsulated, the internal IP address of the sending cell " IA〇1 " and the external IP address " ΕΑ02Π, which is the internal IP address " in the management table 196_5, are determined by the bit 70.丨 A〇2 ". Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the external IP address of the transmitting cell is not used, the address management table may not include the field for transmitting the external IP address of the cell. Fig. 353 is another embodiment of the address management table, in which the integrated IP communication network of Fig. 35 becomes an You network, and the internal IP packet becomes an internal optical code frame. Block 19 lx is an IP packet transfer network, that is, an optical network that uses an optical code frame to forward IP packets. The optical code frame transfers the optical communication path with the functions of communication layer 1 to communication layer 2 inside the optical network 191χ. The optical link address is given in the optical code box ^ header section. In the case where the optical code frame is an HDLC code frame, the optical link address becomes the HDLC address used in the HDLC code frame. 1? At the end, the terminal 192-lx has an IP address " EA1 ", and the IP terminal 192-2x has an IP address ΠΕΑ2". This example is an example in which an external 1 {> packet 193-1χ is transferred from the IP terminal 192_1} (to the 1 {) terminal 192 — & via the optical network 191χ. In the record of Figure 353, the IP header section records the IP address section itself, the optical code frame also records the same header section, and other items are omitted. The network device 195 — ΐχ receives the external IP packet 193 — 1χ, and confirms that it is given the logical communication circuit 194 of the input Iρ packet 19 3 lx — the internal terminal of the defined terminal (logical terminal) = the link address is IA1 , 1 p packet 1 9 3 -1 X's trusted external IP address is A2 ", retrieves the internal address management table 196 —ΐχ shown in Figure 353, and retrieves the internal optical link address containing the initial transmission element " ΙΑ1 ", the next record of the trusted external 1P address " ΕΑ2 ", and then check the delivery in the IP packet 193-lx

1245997

Check whether the external IP address "EA1" of the cell is included in the previous check record. TP4 + 4109 1 ^ Checked out. Check whether the outer neighbor TP of the sent cell in the P packet 193-1x is included in the previous check. The action in the record can save ^ p address recorded in the second line of the "Hha" record using the "optical link address" inside the record to form the optical link address with the sending cell "丨 A丨 "吕 ® K Lu optical link address " IA21 Λ s 2χ (capsule of IP packet). Here, " ΐΑΐ ,, ㈣: Λ " 191χ internal address. Internal optical code frame ΐ93_2χ system丄 Router 197-1χ, ΐ97-2χ,

Η7: 3χ and arrived at the outlet device 195-2χ. The network device ΐ95_2χ removes the header that connects you to the internal optical code frame 193-2χ (inverse encapsulation of the optical code frame), and sends the received external IP packet 193 — 通信 to the communication circuit 194 —2χ, so that ιρ ends Broken 19 2-2χ received an external IP packet 193-3χ. . In the present invention, an IP telephone set, a media router described later, and various servers (these are collectively referred to as "IP sending and receiving possible points") are individually assigned lp addresses to receive and send IP packets, and exchange data with each other. In the present invention, It is called IP communication tool. Figure 353 shows that 1? Send-receive possible point 34〇-1 and 1? Send-receive possible point 34 0-2 have IP addresses " AD1 " and " AD2 ", respectively. " An example of a Φ IP packet 34 of the trusted address "AD2" to the terminal 340-2, and an IP packet 341-2 received in the opposite direction, and an example of transmitting and receiving various data to each other. The part of the data excluding the header of the IP packet is also referred to as payload. Next, using the multicast technology of the IP technology as the IP transfer network is to transfer 1? Materials such as electronic books and electronic news from 1 distribution unit to

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 16 1245997 V. Description of the invention (13) Multiple IP addresses of multiple trusted locations are sent to the Internet in multiple locations. The shadows are as rough as the government. The audio materials are sent to the multiple trustees from two or two like sounds; [-baSe TV broadcast network, and IP-base movie distribution network 354 explain the transfer from one delivery element to a plurality of '... Open IP transfer network 27-1. . It ’s a router-type, "2", 27 books, 11 to 27-20 routers, and each router maintains a route f. It indicates that according to the bits contained in the received 1p packet, 'IP packets should be forwarded to plural The communication circuit = " two-address transmission address is designated as " MA1 ". A packet with multicast bits L two 1 29] is transmitted from 1p terminal 28], and then via router 27-11 to router 27_18, router "^ Copy ιρ packet = "= 27-27 refers to the router-type multicast table maintained and forwards IP packets 29-3 and 29-4 to the communication circuit. Router 27_17 packet 29-3, referring to the router-type multicast table, sends ιρ / Packet 29-5 is forwarded to the communication circuit 29_17, and ιρ packet 29_6 is forwarded to the communication circuit 29-18. Since there is no router type multicast table on the router 27_19, the IP packet 29-4 directly passes the router 27_19 and becomes Ip The packet 29 7 ′ is forwarded to the router 27-14. The router 27-17 inputs the IP packet 29-3 from the communication circuit 2 9-16 shown in FIG. 355, and confirms that the IP address of the sending element of the IP packet 29-3 is “” "SRC1", the receiver W address is a multicast address "MA1 ,,, With respect to the multi-point transmission bits. Address " MA1 ", the output interface is designated as πιριπ and IF2'1 in the multicast table 29-15, and the router 27-17 copies the ip packet 29-3 as the ip packet 29-5 to output to the output interface Communication circuit 29-17 for "IF1", in addition, page 17 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 5. Description of the invention (14) Router 27-17 duplicates IP packet 29-3 as IP packet 29 -6 to output to communication circuit 2 with output interface '| 1? 2', 2-9-18.

Router 2 7 -1 2 copies the received IP packet 2 9 — 5 and refers to the router-type multicast table to forward IP packet 29-8 to IP terminal 28-2 and forward IP packet 29-9 to IP Terminal 28-3. Router 27_13 copies the received IP packet 29-6, refers to the router-type multicast table, forwards lp packet 29iq to IP terminal 28-4, and forwards IP packet 29 — u to IP terminal 285. Router 27-14 received IP packets 29-7. Refer to the router-type multicast table to forward IP packets 29-12 to IP terminal 28-6, and forward IP packets 29-13 to IP terminal 28-. 7. IP terminal 28 at the sending cell— 丨 f-bit electronic books and electronic news are transferred to the lp transfer network 27q This IP transfer network 27-1 is used to distribute electronic books and electronic materials to the multicast network, IP terminal 28 — 2 to 28 to 8 become the IP terminals for users who purchase news on the news of electricity Z. The terminal ιρ of terminal 28: Xincheng TV is used to send the audio and video signals to the TV, and the playback interface is replaced = send; it becomes 1P base In the Tv broadcast network, IP terminals 28-2 to 28-7 have become the IP end of the TV receiver function used by TV viewers. In the embodiment of the multicast transmission method shown in FIG. 354, the IP terminal ^ Become a master to convey multicast data, ιρ terminal 28 becomes a trustee, and using this method Zanxi ^ -7 ^ τ. _'S xidian transmission is experimental on the Internet and in the domain LM. Use. However, because of this multi-point Guangya:-medical terminals can become a multi-point transmission method evil-the sender will send the multi-point transmission data without limit continuous two =

1245997 V. Description of the invention (15) ----Danger of being unable to stop. In addition, the router's internal multicast table is restricted to send a large amount of data through ^, which will also make the router load forward :: machine. The use of limiting the sending of data to send data to eliminate uninformation ^ prevents routers from overloading and causing dangers such as crashes, and can realize that a multi-point sender with high female integrity can only invent a problem to be solved. Method: 2 T In the terminal-to-terminal communication connection control network between 1p terminals receiving data, for example, * is used as a transmission method for transmitting and receiving electrical networks and the like. The present invention is to control the communication connection method between the Internet terminals. Therefore, the main purpose of 1ρ technology between terminals is to establish and apply 4 communication, audio and video communications, methods, etc. that are different from the above-mentioned TTC standard and IP multicast communication, etc., and the terminal communication connection control for physical terminals is provided for terminals. Inter-communication communication: G: J: Carry out. The purpose of the present invention is to send messages and communicate with audio and video. Ip is stationed in Chrome 1. It is applicable to the general communication between 1p telephones to solve problems such as multimedia communication. In the present invention, the continuation control method is changed to: the two common line signal parties ...

Terminals, audio and video are used as surnames to achieve IP communication between terminals such as telephone terminals and real-world terminals via telephone and IP transfer networks. In Figure 1, line 1; ΪΓρ =: method. , Thin, 耷 audio and video sending and receiving terminal

1245997 V. Description of the invention (16) and facsimile terminals, etc., 1-3 and 1-4 are media routers used to connect more than one terminal to the IP transfer network, and 1-5 and 6 are connected servers , Bu 7 is a relay connection server. Each of the above connection servers 5 and 6 is granted with functions similar to the circuit connection control of the subscriber switch (LS) of the public telephone exchange network (PSTN), and is granted on the relay connection server 丨 -7. It has a similar function to the circuit control of the trunk switch (TS). The user enters the phone number of the recipient from the terminal 1 -1 and sends the call settings (step Z1), and the media routers 1-3 send back the call settings to accept (step Z2). The IP packet of the call setting of the terminal telephone number is transmitted to the connection server 5 (step Y1). The connection server 1-5 uses the received telephone number of the trusted terminal to determine the communication circuit for inter-terminal communication within the IP transfer network. , And form a circuit number (CIC) for identifying the communication circuit, and an IP packet containing the telephone number of the receiving end and the telephone number of the transmitting end. Here, the circuit number (c I c) uniquely determines that a set of telephone numbers of the receiving end and telephone numbers of the transmitting end can be identified. This packet is called an IP packet containing initial address information (I AM), or simply referred to as initial address information (I AM). The foregoing communication circuit for communication between terminals is, for example, an IP communication circuit for transmitting digitalized voice packets. This IP communication circuit may specify a set of sender IP addresses and receiver IP addresses of the voice IP packets, or may be added to MPLS technology marking on IP packets. When using an IP terminal and other terminals such as audiovisual materials and facsimile data terminals, the communication circuit is a communication circuit for data transfer of the IP terminal and a communication circuit for audiovisual image transmission and reception terminals and facsimile data transmission. Second, the connection server 5 sends the initial address information (I AM) to the connection.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 20 V. Description of the invention (17) Feeder 1-7 (step Y2), at the same time, it changes to the waiting state of address end message (acm) described below and starts AC Μ waiting Timer. The relay connection server 1-7 receives the IAM, and sends the IAM to the connection server 6 (step γ3). The connection server 1-6 checks the contents of the received IAM, and checks whether the communication circuit is set to connect to the terminal with the phone number of the trusted end 丨 -2. The media router 14 also checks whether the media router 1-4 is allowed to receive The connection request calls. When receiving is allowed, a call setting request is made to the media router 丨 -4 (step Υ4). The media router 44 requests a call setting to the terminal 1-2 (step 44), and the connection server 66 is formed Notification of receiving the ιαμ ιρ package. This packet (called the end of address message (AC M)) is returned to the relay connection server (step Y5), and the ACM reaches the relay connection server via the relay connection server (7). 1-5 (step Y6). After receiving the ACM, the connection server stops the ACM waiting timer that has been set. At the point before receiving the ACM, when the ACM wait timer expires, the communication circuit is released. In addition, α (: μ receives the circuit number (CIC) from the IAM and can keep it inside the KM, or the ACM can form the circuit code from the sender's phone number and the receiver's phone number in step Y5 and keep it Inside the ACM. Terminal 1-2 issues the reception request call for connection request and reports it to the media router BU 4 (step Z7), and the media router w transmits the connection request call reception paging from terminal 2 to the connection server BU 6 (step γ7) 'The connection server 1-6 forms an IP packet, which informs the terminal BU 2 that the call is being received for paging. This ip packet is called a packet containing a call progress message (epG)' or simply a call progress message ( CPG). The connection server BU6 sends the call incoming message (CPG) to the relay connection server BU7 (step γ8), and the relay connection

1245997 V. Description of the invention (18) The server sends the received CPG to the connection server. 32) 'The connection server 丨 -5 receives the CPG and connects to the server 丨 5 media routers The contents of the CPG of 1-3 are notified to the media router 13 that the terminal BU 2 is paging (step Y10), and the media router BU 3 notifies the paging voice of the paging terminal (step Z10). ㈣ In step Y5, the circuit number is formed based on the phone number of the sender and the phone number of the sender and is kept in cpG. Terminal 2—answer the call setting request of step Z4 (step Z1 丨), the body router 丨 _4 will explain that terminal 2 has responded to notify the feeder server 6 (step Y11), and connect the server 1-6 to form an IP packet , Which indicates that the terminal BU 2 answers the call setting request. This IP packet is called an 11 > packet containing an answer message (△), or an answer message (ANM) for short. The connection server 6 transmits the generated ANM to the relay connection server 7 (step γΐ2), and the relay server 7 transmits the received ANM to the connection server 5 (step γΐ3). The connection server BU 5 notifies the receiving end terminal BU 2 that the media router has responded (step 14), and the media router 丨 _3 notifies the paging tone transmitted to the terminal i to stop (step Z14), between the terminal BU 1 and the terminal BU 2. , Using the communication circuit specified for communication between terminals according to the circuit number (CIC), can transmit and receive IP packets carrying digital media, and transition to the call phase (step γΐ5): ANM can also be based on the phone number of the sender in step Υ5 And the telephone number of the receiving end forms a circuit number and is kept inside the ANM. Notify the terminal of the disconnection request (step Z16), the media router BU3 notifies the disconnection server of the connection server 1-5 (step Y16), and notifies the terminal of the disconnection confirmation (step zi8) ° Connect the server 1- 5 —Receiving cut-off request

1245997 5. Description of the invention (19) The number and the telephone number identification circuit number (CIC) of the receiving end form 115 packets representing the release requirements (^ 乩) of the communication circuit. This 1 {) packet is called a Release (REL) WP packet 'or simply a release message (). The release message (REL) contains the circuit number (CIC), and sends this release message (REL) to the relay connection server 7 (step Y1 7), and then returns the end of the reply indicating the end of the disconnection request to the media router. 3 (steps γΐ8). The relay connection server 1-7 sends a release request (REL) to the connection server BU 6 (step γΐ9), thereby forming a 1? Packet indicating the end of the release request. This Ip packet is called an IP packet containing Release End (RLC), or simply Release End Message (rlc). This release completion (RLC) is returned to the connection server BU 5 (step γ20). Connection server BU 6—After receiving the release request (REL), it sends the disconnection request to the media router BU 4 (step Y21), and returns the release completion (RLC), which represents the end of the release request (rel), to the relay connection server. Device 7 (Y22) ^ Media router 4 As soon as the disconnection request is received, the terminal 2 is notified of the disconnection instruction of the connection request call (step Z22), and then the completion of the disconnection instruction indicating completion of the disconnection instruction is returned to the terminal. Connect server 6 (step. Terminal 2 will notify the media router of the end of the response (step Z23). In the formalities of the communication between the terminals, 'it is also possible to cut off the communication request from the terminal 2 to the < It is sent to the media routers 1-4 'and becomes the same order as above. When the relay connection server bu 7 does not exist', it is also possible to implement a communication connection control method between the terminals 1-5 and bu 6. The connection server 5 and 1-6 are the communication between the terminals between terminals 1-1 and 2: that is, in step Υ18 and step Υ22, 'collect the communication time including the code (cic)', and the communication between the terminals. Record 1 whose record is continued

1245997 V. Description of the invention (20) The internal part of the server can be used for billing and operation management. Shape, = = When the terminal is a telephone, the terminal is an IP terminal (with a packet receiving terminal: two is a terminal letter, and in the case of media is text or even digital quiet,), the digital letter is voice-activated at the terminal. Video terminal: The data terminal is a facsimile terminal. The terminal identification m that is determined individually by the counterparty terminal can be a valid terminal unique number within a specific communication or network.玷 Therefore, there can be various changes between the U! Router and the connection server, and between the connection server; the method of connection control between the connection server and the connection server can also be variously changed. In addition, the ACM wait timer can be omitted in step Y2. This is explained in the examples.

The present invention relates to a method for controlling communication connection between terminals using a p-transmission network. The above-mentioned object of the present invention is to perform multimedia IP communication between a first 1? Terminal and a second 1? Terminal.丨 The p terminal sends the IP packet containing the host name of the second IP terminal described above to the unification through the domain name server and branch device inside the media router, and the unification 丨 p domain name server inside the forwarding network. The domain name server inside the p-forwarding network sends the 1: 1 IP address corresponding to the host name of the second IP terminal in the above through the domain name server inside the media router or directly returns it to When the first IP terminal sends the transmission,

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 24 1245997 V. Description of the invention (21) I p-sentence to the aforementioned second IP terminal, the bidding certificate, which is connected by the first IP terminal described above The media routing bm network node is installed with more than one router in the f, IP transfer network, and reaches the 115th terminal that is connected to the aforementioned second: "transparent" by other media routers in the communication circuit, and the packet is sent to the IP terminal To achieve the use of the aforementioned domain name server. Also, the above-mentioned object of the present invention is for the i-th non-independent IP phone and non-^^: two "for telephone communication between telephones,-pick up the aforementioned The receiver of the non-exclusive IIP zero telephone notifies that the IP packet of the paging from the i-th non-exclusive f-type 1 ^ telephone is transmitted, and the first H323 terminal unit 4 in the first media router detects the aforementioned 1 packet and will respond The ιρ packet is sent back to the aforementioned first non-independent type 1? Telephone, and the aforementioned first non-independent type, the telephone, transmits an IP packet containing the telephone number of the aforementioned second independent phone through the 1113 terminal unit, And reach inside the i-th media router The 1st domain name feeder and the ith network point device connected by the i-th media router via a communication circuit, the ith network point device transmits the IP packet to the second network name server inside the integrated IP forwarding network The aforementioned second domain name server will correspond 1: 1 to the second IP address of the telephone number of the first non-standalone 1? Telephone, via the aforementioned j domain name feeder, or It is directly returned to the above-mentioned 1113 terminal section without passing through the above-mentioned feeder! The 1113 terminal section of the first section corresponds to the first section of the i-dependent type 1? Telephone set. The 1? address of i is used as the sending end address, and the aforementioned 2? address is used as the receiving end address to generate an Ip packet and sent out, via the aforementioned first network device, and one within the aforementioned IP forwarding network. The above routers reach the 2nd first non-independent type IP power, 2049-3793-PF on page 25; RAY.ptd 1245997

The other second network device connected to the mobile phone is transmitted through the communication circuit to the second JJ323 terminal unit connected to the second i-independent IP phone in the second media router. When the first user initiates a call, the first non-standalone 1? Telephone uses the above [i] address as the sender's address, and the aforementioned 2 = IP address as the party's letter. IP address containing digital voice over the IP address, this IP packet passes through the first 1323 terminal device, the first network device, the i or more routers inside the P forwarding network, the first 2 branch devices, the aforementioned u @ H32 ^ terminal device, and reached the aforementioned second independent IP phone, when the second user makes a sound, the aforementioned second independent IP phone uses the aforementioned second IP address As the sender's p address, the aforementioned 1st IP address is used as the receiver's 1? Address, and an IP packet containing the digital voice of the phone is sent. This IP packet is transmitted through the aforementioned 2nd Η 3 2 3 ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ρ telephone. When the first user returns the handset because the telephone communication is over, The IP address of the first IP address is used as the sender's IP address, and the IP address of the second IP address is used as the IP address of the receiver, and an ιρ packet indicating the end of the telephone communication is generated and sent. One Η 3 2 3 terminal unit, the first branch point device, one or more routers inside the aforementioned I ρ transfer network, the aforementioned second branch point device, and the second Η323 terminal device, and reached the second ith non-independent type 1? Telephone, when the second user knows that the telephone communication is over and puts it back into the receiver, the second IP address is used as the sending end 丨 ρ address, and the first 丨 ρ address is used as

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p. 26 1245997

Generate and send to pass through the second Η323 terminal device and the second network point; bundle 3 ip relays to more than i routers in the network, and the foregoing, and then reach the first H323 terminal device to end the non- Device 'and the telephone communication V " between the aforementioned second non-independent type 1p telephone is sent out to the aforementioned second non-independent type "ιρ ^:

The packet arrives at the other outlets connected by the second non-independent type 1? Telephone through the outlet device and one or more ^ seals inside the IP forwarding network: the communication circuit enters other media routers, and passes through them. Stage end 4. The IP packet arrives at the aforementioned second independent zP telephone. The invention sets the address management table to the network device in the IP transfer network, and registers the address of the terminal on this address management table (Japanese Patent Application No. 11-128956) to the multicast technology. The contents are described below. The transfer network is used as the official network of the company. The branch device is set in the IP transfer network. The IP address of the IP terminal is registered on this branch device. I p packet transmission

give away. When receiving an IP packet containing an unregistered multicast IP address, the IP packet is discarded (IP address filtering). Referring to FIG. 2 for explanation, the IP transfer network 1 -1 〇 is provided with network devices 1-11 to 1_14 and routers 1 -15 to 1-20. The branch point device and the router are grounded directly or through the branch point device and the router according to the IP communication circuit. The IP terminals Bu 21 to Bu 27 having the function of sending and receiving IP packets are connected to the outlet device through the IP communication circuit. IP terminals are not allowed to connect directly to the router. Outlet device bu 11 to bu 1 4

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 27 1245997 V. Description of the invention (24) IP terminal information is registered to the inside of the outlet device with at least one 丨 p address. As the acceptance check of the first 1 P packet, it is to check whether the IP address of the trusted end in the label of the external IP packet entering the IP forwarding network is registered in the address management table of the network device. If the address is not registered, the IP packet is discarded. As the acceptance check of the second IP packet, it is to check whether the sending end in the header of the external IP packet entering the IP forwarding network has the p address registered in the address management table of the network stick device. If the sender's p address is not used, the IP packet is discarded. As the first address registration check, when the multicast address of the trusted end is registered in the address management table of the branch device, the multicast address of the trusted end in the header of the external IP packet entering the branch device is not registered. In the case of the address management table, the network I: packet is used to prevent unintended IP packets from being mixed into the IP forwarding network. Transparent = The address of the sender is registered in the network of the recipient. The envelope is sent from the multicast point. 1 The packet is sent to the IP address of the recipient. The ACK packet for the 1p packet confirmation of the packet cannot be transmitted through the network. Enter to IP transfer reading Min! ΜＭ 4 个 伙 伙 1 得 1 得 delivery of the outside network

Internal C device, or registration of 1p address that is not suitable for ιρ transfer network transfer network and management server, access from IP, in order to provide clever information on the application management server inside 1p transfer network safety. As the second address registration check, the limit is 1245997 V. Description of the invention (25) The sender of the 1 P packet containing the multicast data to avoid the wrongful behavior of the wrongdoer. In addition, when wrongdoing is carried out, it is easy to go to the sending end of a specific IP packet, and the intelligence security of the IP transfer network can be improved. The IP encapsulation and inverse IP encapsulation described in the embodiment of the present invention are replaced with the encapsulation and inverse encapsulation of the communication layer below 3 layers, for example, it can be replaced with the light HDLC code frame according to the communication layer 2 layer Capsules and inverse capsules. In addition, the headers given in the encapsulation and inverse encapsulation do not include the address and location of the transmission end. In other words, the simple encapsulation and the simple inverse encapsulation of the simple header may be applied. Even in simple encapsulation, an address management table having the same function as the user in encapsulation and decapsulation is used. This is illustrated in Figure 357. Block 2300 is an IP communication network, 230 1, 2,302, 2303, and 2304 are point devices, 230 1-1, 2302-1, 2303_1, and 2304-1 are various address management tables, 230, 2, 230 1 -3, and 2302. -2, 2302-3, 2303-2, 2303-3, 2304-2, and 2304-3 series communication circuits are connected to the terminals (logical terminals) of the node j, which are respectively assigned internal addresses " IA1 ", &Quot; I a 2 ,,, " IA3 "," A4 ", " IA5 ", " IA6 ", " U7 "," U8 ". 2307-7 2306-8 is an IP terminal with the function of sending and receiving IP packets, and its sub-medicine address " EA1 " to "EA8". 23〇7] to 23〇7 一 4:

The branch device and the router are connected through the circuit, and are connected directly or through the ground of the router. Then the terminal is connected through the communication device. In the record of Figure 357, the header part of the IP is the lp bit; the items of the body and other items are omitted. & + 5 Ping terminal 2306-1 has the address of the sender " eai, the address of the recipient

1245997 V. Description of the invention (26) " EAA3Π's IP packet 2310, the network device 230 1 receives the IP packet 2310, and confirms that the internal address of the logical terminal of the communication circuit terminal that entered the IP packet 2310 is "" IA1 ", the external address of the trusted end of the IP packet 2310 is again " EA3", and retrieves the interior of the address management table 230 1 -1, and retrieves the internal IP address of the sending end including the beginning of the " ΙΑΓ, the next The external address of the trusted end is $ A record of ΕΑ3, and then it is investigated whether the aforementioned detected record contains an IP packet 2 3 10 and the external I ρ address of the sending end is " ΕΑ 丨 ". t In this example, the record in the first line of the address management table 23 0 1 -1 is " EA1, EA3, I Al, IA3 ", use the internal address of this record " jA3 ,,,, IA Γ is the same as before. Therefore, the IP packet 2310 is given a simple header to the IP packet 2310 to form an internal packet 2313 (simple encapsulation). However, the simple bidding does not include the internal address of the sender "IA1". The previously formed internal packet 2313 is routed to the network device 2302 via the routers 23074 and 2307-2. The network device 2302 Except for the simple header (simple reverse encapsulation) of the received internal packet 2313, the external IP packet "丨 ^ and ^ packet 231〇" according to the aforementioned = is sent to the communication circuit, and the IP terminal 2306-3 receives IP packet 2317. In addition, the record in the first line of the address management table 2302-1 " EA3, EA1, IA3, and the opposite direction, in the same way, forward IP packets, and forward IP packets from the terminal 2306-3 to the terminal 2306 -1. When the meat is contaminated in the device 2301 for simple encapsulation, it is called to send k within-outside 丨 P 丨 丨 P A 1 丨 丨 σ I person

Mm i m ^ EA1 Whether to include the check in the record detected in the address management table 230 1 -1, = 2, the external IP address of the address management table. In addition, for each 1245997 of the address management table 230 1 -1 V. Description of the invention (27) Two external I p addresses in the record (transmitting end 丨 p address and receiving end 丨 p address) The encapsulation technology is based on the same principle as the address mask technology described later. Next, another example of forwarding IP packets will be described. When the terminal 2306-5 transmits the IP packet 2 3 1 2 with the sending end address "EA 5" and the receiving end address "EA 4", and the network device 2303 receives the IP packet 2312, it confirms that it is granted to the input Ip. The internal address of the logical terminal of the packet 2312 and the logical terminal of the circuit terminal is, the external IP address of the trusted end of the ip packet 2312 is "EA4", and the internal address management table 23 0 3-1 is retrieved, and the starting sending end is retrieved Records with internal IP addresses of " IA5 ,, In this example, the first line of the address management table 2303 — the records of Mask7, ΕΑ7χ, ΙΑ5, ΙΑ7Π and the records of the second line " jjask4, EA4x, IA5, and IA4 are equivalent. For the record of the first line, check whether the mask "Mask7" and the external end 1 of the trusted end in the external IP packet 2312 "address" and "EA4" are calculated. The external address of the trusted end in the record in the i-line record "(ΑΑχχπ) (formula (4) below) is inconsistent in this example. Then, regarding the record in the second line, check that the trusted end is covered by the external Ip, MasU " Outside trusted IP ^ 2312 in external IP packet " EA4 In other words, whether the result of the andn calculus is consistent with the external address of the trusted end in the record in the second line ("EAA4χ") (formula (5) below) is consistent in this example.

If (" Mask7 ”and” ΕΑ4 ”= " ΕΑ7χ”) · · · ⑷ Ιί ('丨 Mask4 ”and " EA4” = " EA4x ”) ·· (5) The upper position in this example The record of the second line of the address management table 23034 is "Mask4, EA4x, IA5, IA4", use the address inside this record "U4" "Give a simple header to the IP packet 2312" to form the internal packet 2314 ( simple

1245997 V. Description of the invention (28), easy to glue, encapsulated). However, the aforementioned simple header does not include the internal address IA5 of the sender. The internal packet 2314 formed as described above reaches the network device 23 02 via the routers 2307-3, 23G7-4, and 2307-2. The network point device 2302 removes the simple header (simple reverse encapsulation) of the internal packet 2314 received, and sends the external IP packet 2318 (the same content as the IP packet 2312) obtained in the foregoing to the communication circuit 'IP terminal 23〇6 — 4 receives the IP packet 2318. Then “the IP packet 2311 sent from the terminal 2306-2 to the terminal 2306-7” is at the branch device 2301 one! In the second line of the address management table, eRecords EA2, EA7, IA2, IA7 " are simply encapsulated by the same method as above, and become the internal capsule 2316, which passes through the router, 2307-2, 2307. -4, arrived at the branch office device 2304, the branch office device 2304 removed the simple header (simple inverse capsuleization) of the received internal packet 2316, and sent the external Iρ packet 2319 (the same inner valley as the Iρ packet 2311) obtained as described above to the communication Circuit, Ip terminal 2306-7 receives Ip packet 2319. Furthermore, the aforementioned address mask technology has the same principle as the address mask technology described with reference to FIG. As another example of encapsulation and inverse encapsulation using a simple header, a conventional MpLS label based on MpLS technology can be used. Although the 'MPLS label contains the internal address of the receiving end, it does not include the internal address of the transmitting end. Next, 'the IP packet f 2321 sent from the terminal 2306-9 to the terminal 2306-8' is used in the branch device 2305, using the record of the second line of the address management table 23051 " Msk8, EA8y, IA8 " The same method is simply encapsulated and becomes the internal capsule 2322, which reaches the branch point device 2304 via the router 2307-4 ', and the branch point device 23 〇 removes the received internal seal

1245997 V. Description of the invention (29) The simple header of the packet 2322 (Simple Reverse IP IP packet 2323 (which is equivalent to the IP packet 232 1)) will receive the IP packet 2319 according to the external terminal 2306-8 obtained as described below. A content ) Sent to the communication circuit, 1p Figure 3 5 8 is shown in the form of the preceding symbol (also called internal code frame). The inner packet formed in the front inner capsule / dagger The outer-packet morphology grants a simple header Ά ^ ^ ^ J Menyi bun contains the internal address of the trusted end and the information field. But it does not include Tan Yi Gu Yi & ^, -y ^ ^, up to the address of the Qiongyi. The field of intelligence includes information (agreements, etc.) concerning the internal envelope of the payer. Next, referring to Fig. 359 and Fig. 360, regarding the front anatomy and the feet are true, Xiang Da will explain other embodiments of the simple and inverse encapsulation on the side of the moon. Fig. 7 is a 1? Forwarding network, 2352-1 to 2352-7 are terminals having an external IP address " EA1 ", and 2353-i to 2353-7 are terminals having an external IP address " EA2 ". To 2354 —7 Internal packet (internal code frame). 2355-1 to 2355-7, 2356-1 to 2356-7 series point installation β. 2 35 9-1 to 2359-7 are the contact points (logic terminals) of communication circuits and network point devices, which are given internal addresses, ΙΑ1 ". 2360-1 to 2360-7 are the contacts (logic terminals) of communication circuits and network point devices, which are given internal addresses " ΙΑ2 ". 235 7-1 to 2357-7, 235 8-1 to 2358-7 Address management < 1 management table. If the aforementioned terminal is connected to the branch device, the branch device is connected to other branch devices by a communication circuit, and the terminal is transmitted and received between the terminal device and the branch device, the packet is forwarded between the branch devices. Internal packet (internal code frame). The terminal 2352-1 transmits an IP packet with a sender address " ΕΑ1 "and a recipient address " ΕΑ2", and the network device 2355-1—when receiving the aforementioned IP packet, it is confirmed to be The internal address of the logical terminal of the communication circuit terminal granting the input of the aforementioned IP packet is " ΙΑ1Π, and the external IP address of the trusted end of the aforementioned IP packet is

1245997 V. Description of the invention (30) f A2 ", search the internal address management table 2357_i, search including the initial send, the terminal " internal IP address is" IA1 ", then the external address of the trusted terminal is, jA2's record. In this example, from the upper part of the address management table 2357 — 丨, the record is “EA2, IA1, IA2”, and the internal address IA2 in this record is used. = The simple header grants the aforementioned IP packet to An inner packet 54-1 is formed (easy encapsulation). The internal packet 2354 — ι formed as described above reaches the branch point device 2356-1 via the communication circuit. The network point device 2356-1 removes the simple header (simple inverse encapsulation) of the internal packet 2354-1, and sends the external IP packet transmitted according to the previous V to the communication circuit, and the IP terminal 2353 receives the aforementioned restored IP packet. Captured, final = 352—2 sends a packet with a sender address, EA1 ", a trusted address ^ j ▲, and the network device 2355-2 Upon receiving the aforementioned 1? Packet, 涊 is granted the input of the aforementioned IP packet The address of the logical terminal H of the communication circuit terminal is not ㈣. The external IP address of the sending end of the aforementioned IP packet is, and the external IP address of the receiving end is, EA2 ”. The address management table—internal is retrieved. In this example, from From the top of the address management table 2357-2, i. · Tα2, the recorded record is EA1, EA2, U2 ", use this record's internal address two: the simple header grants the aforementioned 1P packet to form an internal packet Act as Lei You (simple, encapsulated). The previously formed ㈣ packets 2354-2 reach the outlet device 2356-2 through communication. The outlet device 2356-2 simplifies the removal of the received internal packet 2354-1; ^ _ &# 腹 香 几, ^ Sincerely w λα μ Do n’t scratch your head (simple inverse capsuleization), and send the IP packet according to the previous & part to the communication circuit, and the 1P terminal 2353-2 receives the restored aforementioned IP packet. The terminal 2352-3 transmits the address with the sending end " EA1 " End address

1245997 V. Description of the invention (31) " EA2 " ㈣ 包 '网 裳 置 2355_3 As soon as the aforementioned ιρ packet is received, it is confirmed that the communication circuit that has been input into the aforementioned 终 packet has no relation to the internal address. "EA2" outside the trusted end retrieves the inside of the address management table 2357M, and then records the external IP address of the end as "EA2". In this example, the record of the first line from the top of the address management 2357-1 is " EA2, U2 ", using this internal address "IA2" 'The simple header is given to the aforementioned! = Internal packet 2354_3 ( Easy capsuleization). The previously formed internal packet 2354-3 reaches the branch point device 2356_3 via the communication circuit. The network point 2356-1 removes the encapsulation of the received internal packet 2354 3), and sends the external IP packet obtained as described above to the ^ header inverse IP terminal 2 353-3 receives the aforementioned IP packet. . kb circuit ’terminal 2352-4 transmission has a transmitting end bit, 丨 ea〗”

Up packet, network device 235 "receives the aforementioned" :: bit two acknowledges that the communication telegram that was input to the aforementioned IP packet is confirmed " internal address is " IA1 " EA2 " retrieves the internal address management table 2355_4, checks the record where the internal IP address 4 is "IA1", in this example, the bit end

The record of the first line from the top of 57-4 is equivalent to "MsU EA2X, IA1, IA2", and at the beginning, there are Alx, Msk2, "Msk2", and the external input IP with the aforementioned input is enclosed within the customs inspection "EA2" The result of " and " calculus is bu. PIP address: Ministry, the address is the same (the following (6);), 4 adopted external IP mask " MSkl "

1245997 V. Description of the invention (32) Whether the IP address " EA1 " of the result of the calculation and the 7 address are the same (the following formula), / =

If (" Msk2 " and " EA2 "= " EA2x ") · · ·",

If (" Mskl ”and " EA1” = " ΕΑΙχ ") ···· (? In this example, the address management table 2357-4 from the top— ^ Record 'Use the internal address of this record " IA2 ", the two 2 f outer "packets" to form an inner packet 2354_4 (simple glue = and then:: Cheng = arrive at the outlet from the communication circuit to install two 6 characters easy = received internal packet 235 " (Inverse encapsulation) 'will send the external IP packet obtained in the foregoing to the communication circuit, and the IP terminal 2353-4 receives the aforementioned IP packet. Terminal 235 2-5 transmits the address with the sending end " EA1 ,,,, and just The terminal 235 2-4 transmits an IP packet with the sending end address "EA1 ,,, and the terminal address 12". The difference is that it does not enter the external IP mask of the trusted end and the aforementioned external 1 packet. The calculation between the "and" of the trusted address is the same as the others. The terminal 2352-6 transmits the IP packet with the sending address "EA1" and the trusted address "EA2", and the network device 2355_6 receives the aforementioned IP packet. Example, with the aforementioned terminal 2352-4 transmitting the address with the sending end " Eu & quot The example of the IP packet with the trusted end address 12 " is similar, except that the internal address of the logical terminal of the communication circuit terminal which is granted to the input of the aforementioned IP packet is not confirmed, the others are the same.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd

1245997 on page 36 5. Description of the invention (33) The terminal 2352 * " 7 transmits a "P" packet with a sender address, EA1 " and a trusted end address EA2 ", while the outlet receives 235 " Example =, and, the description of terminal 2352-5 transmitting with a sending end address "", 1? Packet on trusted G is similar to the example, the difference is that it is not addressed; = input: the aforementioned 1p packet of the communication circuit terminal The internal address of the logic terminal is confirmed, and the others are the same. In the first embodiment of the invention, the combination or change is disclosed in the applicant's wishing-to-know "ITU ^ and ^ · -7 common line signal circuit connection method, ιτυ -τ recommends some functions in the JT-H323 Gateway of the H323 ANNEXD standard "," sip ίϊΪ ", and the license No. 3086681. $ + Media router, gateway, 1P network service operation management Servo sequence, and two-body ground plan. Composition and action of media routers and gateways. # = / IP packet specification for communication between terminals using media routers and gateways. U network service operation management server should have Function, etc., ^ Transfer Network Inter-terminal communication connection control method premise. Each IP ^ tf special wish flat 11-1 28956, the integrated IP forwarding network includes a plural network, τ P 敫:, that is, at least 2 more 1 p data network, 1 p phone, IP secondary technology: video network, best effort For the best effort network, the 22-point transmission network, the 1P baSe TV broadcast network, and the network device, are connected to any one of the circuits in the 1 P transmission network via a communication circuit with 2 connections. The network terminal of the other network device is connected to the external terminal of the integrated IP transfer network via the communication cable. In the present invention, the integrated IP forwarding network includes more than i

1245997 V. Description of Invention (34)

The gateway is either directly connected to more than one media router or indirectly connected to the media router inside the LAN via the communication circuit connected to the network device. The gateway and the media router are a type of router having a function of directly connecting to accommodate an IP terminal, an IP telephone, an IP audio-visual device, and the like. Through gateways or media routers, and using a domain name server within the integrated IP forwarding network, connection control between terminals using the IP forwarding network between terminals can be performed. In order to record the terminal registration to the IP forwarding network, the address of at least one terminal is recorded and maintained in the address management table inside the branch device or on a domain name server set in the IP forwarding network. In order to enable the communication operator to manage the operation and management of the IP forwarding network and the services provided by the IP forwarding network, routers and communication circuits, etc., each network resource is installed in each IP forwarding network. Management Server 0

The type of IP network service operation management server is determined by each IP forwarding network. For example, the IP data service operation management server (DNS) can be set up in the data network separately. The IP telephone service operation management server (TES) that manages telephone communications is set up inside the telephone network, and the IP audio and video service operation management server (AVS) that manages audio and video communications is set up inside the IP audio and video network. Internally set up management for best effort and best effort for communication. Use a management server (BES) to set up overall management for the IP data multicast network! p IP data multicast service operation management server (DMS) for data multicast communication ’An IP base TV broadcast service operation management server (Tvs) is provided inside the IP base TV broadcast network to manage Ip base TV broadcasts. 1?

1245997

V. Description of the invention (35) Each service of the transfer network Muruo Tian # The network servers provided by the transfer network can be divided into specialized management services, transfer service transfer services, and service management servers, and specialized network management Network operation management server. Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. 1 · The first embodiment of using a media router ^ In FIG. 3, 2 is an integrated 1P transfer network, 3 is an IP data network, 4 is an IP mine =,, temple: 5-, 1 is an ip audio and video network, 5 — 2 is a best effort network, 6 is a pass. The scope of the IP forwarding network managed by Division 2 X, 6-2 is the scope of the IP forwarding network used by communication company Y logically. 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4, 8 ~ 1, 8 2, 8-3, 8-4 are various outlet devices, and 9-2 are gateways, and ~ 10-8 are communication circuits , U — Bu 丨 Bu ^ is a ^ terminal, 12 — 丨 and ^ ^ are independent IP telephones, 13 — i ~ 13 — 4 are non-independent IP telephones, and H 16-4 is a non-independent IP audio and video device. . The branch device is connected to any one of the lp transfer network via the communication circuit, that is, the IP data network 3, the IP telephone network 4, the IP audio and video network BU1, and the best-effort network 5-2. On the other hand, the branch network device is connected to the IP terminals 11-1 and 11-2 independent IP telephones outside the integrated IP transfer network via communication circuits 10-1 to 丨 -8 — 2 and 2 — 2. Media routers 14-1 and 14-2, LAN 15-1 and 15-2, and so on. The media routers 14-3 and 14-4 are installed inside LAN15-1 and LAN15-2, and are indirectly connected to the branch device. Media routers 14-1 to 14-4 are directly connected to accommodate non-standalone IP phones 13-1, 13-2, 13-4, and standalone 1? Audiovisual devices 16-1, 16-2, 16- 3. Analog telephones 18-1 to 8-4. Also, other analog telephones 18-5 and 18-6 are exchanged by the public.

1245997

Voice networks 26-1 and 26-2 are connected to the gateways ^ 丨 and ^ ?. The gateway 91 is connected to the branch node 8_4 through the communication circuit, and the gateway 9_2 is connected to the branch device 7-4 through the communication circuit. V. Description of the invention (36) 19 1 19-19 is a router that forwards all IP packets, and 26-1 and 26-2 are public switched telephone networks (hereinafter referred to as "PSTN"). The media router 14_ 丨 is connected to the network device 8_2 via the communication circuit 10-1, the media router 14_ 2 is connected to the network device via the communication circuit 10-5, and the lan15-1 is connected via the communication circuit 丨 0- 3 is connected to the network device 8 4 and LMl5 2 is connected to the network device γ-4 via the communication circuit 10-7.

The analog telephone 18-5 is connected to the network device 8 4 via the telephone circuit 丨 7-3, the public switched telephone network 26-1, the telephone circuit 17 丨, and the gateway 9-i. Similarly, the analog telephone is connected via Telephone circuit I? — 4. The public switched telephone network 26-2, telephone circuit 17_2, and gateway 9-2 are connected to the network device 7-4. The media router 14-1 includes router 20_3, connection control unit 22-1, H323 terminal unit 23-1, and SCN interface 24-1. Router 20-3 is connected to connection control unit 22-1, and connection control The part 22-1 is connected to the H323 terminal part 23-1, and the H323 terminal part 23-1 is connected to the SCN interface 24-1. Similarly, the media router 14-2 includes the router 20-4.

The control unit 22-2, the H323 terminal unit 23-2, and the SCN interface 24-2. The router 20- inside the LAN 15-1 is connected to the branch point device 8-4 via the communication circuit 10_3. The LAN 15-1 is connected to the IP terminal 11-4 and the media router 14-3 via a LAN communication circuit 'such as Ethernet. In addition, the media router 14-3 is connected to the ιρ terminal 丨 __5, the non-independent IP audio and video device 16-2, and the analog telephone 18_2 via communication circuits. same

1245997

The router 20-2 inside the LAN 15-2 is connected to the branch point device 7-4 via the communication circuit 10-7. LAN 15-2 is connected to the IP terminal 11-8 and the media router 14-4 via a LAN communication circuit such as Ethernet. In addition, \ some body router 14-4 is connected to the IP terminal u_9, the independent IP phone 13-4, and the analog phone 18-4 via communication circuits. ,

21 -1 to 21 -5 are routers that forward IP packets between the management range 6-1 of communication company X and the official range 6-2 of communication company Y. "— 丨 and" —? ATM network, 27-3 optical communication network, and 27-4 frame relay (FR) switching network are examples of high-speed trunk networks used to forward various IP packets. Furthermore, the ATM network, optical communication network, and code frame relay switching network can also be used as any component of the secondary IP network that integrates the IP transfer network. IP data service operation management server 35-1, IP telephony service operation management server 36-1, IP audio and video service operation management server 37-1, best effort service operation management server 38 — 丨 respectively by communication Company X manages' and is within the network range 6-1 of communication company X's management. In addition, Ip data service operation management server 35-2, IP telephone service operation management server 36-2, IP audiovisual service operation management server 37-2, and best effort service operation management server 38-2 are respectively Managed by communication company γ, and within the network range 6-2 managed by communication company Y.

Various multimedia terminals connected to the outside of the IP forwarding network 2 via communication circuits, that is, IP telephones and audio and video devices are the same as other lp terminals. The location inside the integrated IP forwarding network 2 can be identified as a multimedia terminal. Specify the host name of the address.丨 The host name of the terminal and the multimedia terminal and the host name of the computer used on the Internet

1245997 V. Description of the invention (38) It is the same, and it corresponds to the IP address of the multimedia terminal T pyou * 山 β 夕 "々—々 兴 丄 1 P terminal 'and the IP address of the multimedia terminal 1 ° In the invention, the grant IP The phone numbers of the telephone and the IP audio and video device are suffixed with & like names. And the host computer domain name of the telephone and the 1p audio and video device is provided with the 1: 1 correspondence information of the reserved address (hereinafter referred to as "DNS"). The eight main machines of the complex master β a recover the IP address as soon as the host name is prompted, and have the same functions as those used on the Internet. Used domain name server 30 of the IP data network Continue to the network data managed by the communication company X. The network is managed by the IP data network of the TP system A. The t11: 3 Mbu 1, u-4] Bu 6, etc., which holds additional information of 1: 1 correspondence between the host name and IP address of each terminal, and a dedicated domain name server 30-4 of the IP data network. The 1? Terminals η-7, ι2, m, etc. used in the IP data network of the network device managed by the communication company γ have additional information corresponding to the host name and ip address of the IP address granted to each terminal. A dedicated domain name server 3 i — 丨 for the IP telephone network, for non-standalone IP telephones 13-1, 13-3, and analog telephones used in the IP telephone network connected to the branch office equipment managed by the communication company X 18 — 丨, 18 — 2, 丨 8-5 < 1, etc., with additional information corresponding to the host name (phone number) and “address 1: 1” of the IP phones, and dedicated to the IP phone network The feeder 31-2 holds the non-standalone IP telephones 13_2, 3, 18-4, 18-6, etc. used in the IP telephone network connected to the network device managed by the communication company ¥. The host name (telephone number) of the telephone corresponds to 1: 1 of the IP address for additional information.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd

1245997

V. Description of the invention (39) 2 Dedicated domain name feeder 32-1 of the video network, for use in the 1p audiovisual network of the managed network device ... ^ [Right: II: "Like device"-Bu The host name of the independent type audio and video device and the IP audio and video device (ιρ 22 shirt image device number) corresponds to the 1: 1 115-address additional information, and ιρ is the dedicated domain name server of the video network The device 32_2 holds the host name of the non-single sound and video density 16-3, 16-4, etc. used in the sound and video network of the point device managed by the connected company ( IP audio and video device number) and 1 {1 of 5 addresses correspond to additional information. The dedicated domain name server 334 of the best-effort network, for the best-effort IP terminals 11-5, non-independent IP audio and video devices 16_2, etc., which are connected to the network device managed by the communication company X, The host name and IP address of these terminals that are granted are: 1: 1 corresponding additional information, and a best-effort network-specific domain name server 33_2, which is connected to the network device managed by the communication company Y. Best-efforts used in the network] p-terminals 11-9, 11-10, non-standalone 1? Telephones 13_4, etc., have 1: 1 additional information corresponding to the host names and IP addresses granted to these terminals. Next, referring to Figs. 4 and 5, the basic functions of the main components of the present invention-the media router and the gateway-will be described. The SCN terminal function 802-0, the conversion function 803-0, and the terminal function 804-0 include various functions of the aforementioned SCN terminal function 802, the conversion function 803, and the terminal function 804. The audio and video signals that can be input from the analog phone 41-3 via the SCN circuit 40-1 are converted into SCN terminal functions 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 43 1245997 802-0 digital data signals The data format and signal transmission and reception rules in the conversion function "[ο are changed, and then converted into the IP packet form in the terminal function 804--0, and sent to the IP communication circuit 4-2. In addition, the reverse The process 'that is, the IP packet containing the audio and video data input from the IP communication circuit 40-2 is restored to the form of digital data in the terminal function 804-0' The data form and signal in the conversion function 803-0 The sending and receiving rules and the like are changed, converted into signals flowing in the SCN circuit in the SCN terminal function 80-2-0, and then transmitted to the analog telephone 41-3 via the SCN circuit 40-1.

The SCN interface 24-0 includes SCN terminal function 802-0 and conversion function 0. The H323 terminal 4 23-〇 includes the terminal function 804-0. Since the terminal function 804-0 includes the aforementioned H323 terminal function, the H323 terminal section 23-〇 can perform opposite communication through the terminal 41-2 and the k-circuit 40-5. The multimedia terminal 41-2 used in the present invention is an IP telephone set based on the H323 standard and a 1-audio and video device. / The connection control unit 2 2-0 is connected to the η 3 2 3 terminal unit 23-0 ′ via the communication circuit 4 0-2 and is connected to the router 20-0 via the circuit 40-3. The router 2 0-0 is connected to the branch point device 41-4 via the communication circuit 40-4, and is connected to the IP terminal 41-1 via the communication circuit 40_6. On the communication circuit 40-2, an ip packet 810, which is used as call control data, is circulated as

The IP packet 811 of the actual data constituting the sound and the IP packet 812 of the data constituting the supervisor! ^. Kanji call control data includes host names such as phone numbers and personal computers. On the one hand, the IP packet 43 (FIG. 5) circulating on the communication circuit 40-3 is used to obtain the data format in which the host name is notified to the DNS to answer the query.

1245997 V. Invention description (41) is the MS inquiry response form, for example, rfc1 996 (a Mechanism for Prompt Notification of Zone Changes) can be used. The DNS query response function 42 converts H323 format call control data 810 into a DNS query response format data 43 and has a function of querying DNS to obtain an IP address corresponding to a host name. Furthermore, the p-packet 8 and 1 constituting the sound and the IP packet 812 constituting the image pass through the connection control unit 42 penetratingly. When summarizing the above description, the phone number entered from the analog phone 41-3 was changed to the phone number on the SCN interface 24-0 to be entered into the H323 terminal unit 23-0, or from an H323-type lp phone. 41-2 Enter the phone number and host name of the multimedia terminal according to the "Specifications" as H323 call control information 810 to enter H323 terminal section 23-0. The phone numbers of the two are on the communication circuit 40-2. H323 format call control data 810 is converted to DNS query response format 43 by the connection control unit 22-〇. Furthermore, the call control data sent from the IP terminal 41-1 uses the original DNS query response format. It is necessary to use the function of the connection control unit 22-0, so it is directly connected to the router 20_0. Here, the router 20-0 collects the communication circuits 40-3 and 40-6 and transmits the IP packet at the same time. Furthermore, it constitutes an IP packet The actual data of audio and video in 811 and 812 are not changed and pass through the connection control unit 22-〇. The ip packet is transmitted between the branch device 41-4 and the router 2-0 through the circuit 40-4. Receive. As a specific example of DNS query response, when an IP phone is given a phone number "81 -47-325-3897," and the IP address " 192 · 1,2 · 3 ", if the inquiry " Ask the DNS phone number "81-47-325-3897", then 1) will answer 1 {) address 192 · 1 · 2 · 3Π, or be given a host name on the personal computer of the IP terminal

1245997

Call "hostl · dnamel · dname2 · co · jp", and IP address "128 · 3 · 4 · 5", when 'if you ask at 5 o'clock host name " | 1〇81 ： 1. (111311161 . (111311162.00 · "," The DNS will answer the Ip address of this personal computer "128 · 3.4 · 5". The IP terminal 41-1, the multimedia terminal 41-2, and the analog terminal 41-3 pass between them. It is possible to communicate by transmitting and receiving IP packets. In other words, 丨 p terminal 4 丨 ~ i transmits and receives ip packets through the router 20-〇, the connection control section 22-〇, the H323 terminal section 23-〇, and the multimedia terminal 41-2. It is possible to communicate with each other. ≪ < Action of media router > >

The operation of the media router 14-1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The router 20-3 of the component 1 of the media router 14-1 has the function of the router 2 0-0 of FIG. 4, and the connection control section 22-1 of FIG. 6 has the function of the connection control section 22-0 of FIG. 4, and FIG. 6 The H323 terminal section 23-1 has the function of the H323 terminal section 23-0 of FIG. 4, and the SCN interface 24-1 of FIG. 6 has the function of the SCN interface 24-0 of FIG. 48-1 of FIG. 6 has the same function as the aforementioned DNS. The RAS organization 4 9 -1 is connected to the media router 1 4 -1 for login and authentication of the terminal (which means that the login refers to connecting the terminal to the media router, and authentication refers to confirming whether the terminal is normally working according to the terminal's connection permission conditions Used) and a mechanism for managing the internal state of the media router (such as the unified management of internal components and their use status), the 51 -1 is the operation input / output section of the media router 1 4 -1. Therefore, the functions of the connection control unit 22-1, the H323 terminal unit 23-1, and the SCN interface 24-1 of the media router 14-1 of FIG. 6 are in accordance with the connection control unit 22-0 and the H323 terminal unit of FIG. The description of 23-0 and SCN interface 24-0 will be explained. < < Communication connection control between IP terminals >>>

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 46 1245997

Next, referring to Fig. 6, Fig. 7 and Fig. 8 to Fig. 14, the data stored in the IP packet is transmitted from the IP terminal n-3 to the IP terminal n-7, and the% sequence of the received signal is explained. The IP terminal 11-3 passes the communication circuit 5 2 —; [, sets its own address, that is, the IP address of the sender " A113π, the address of the internal domain name server 48-1 of the media router 14-, That is, the receiving end 1 {> address " Α481 ", the host name of the IP terminal 11-7 storing the communication object " ΐρΤ— 丨 7 name " of the IP packet 45-1 shown in FIG. 9 is transmitted to The domain name server "— 丨. Here, the content of the inquiry indicated by the IP packet 45-1 households, that is," IpT-n —7 name: "is stored in the" DNS inquiry response shown in Figure 5 " Format, internal, and inquiry. The domain name server 48-1 checks the contents of the received packet 45- 丨, and inquires the dedicated IP data network via the communication circuit 1 0-1 and the network device 8-2. Domain name server 30 — (step ST1〇). When the domain name server 30-1 will contain an IP address corresponding to the aforementioned host name " IpT-n_7 name " When the IP packet is returned to the domain name server 48- 丨 (step STii), the domain name server 48 — " fIP packet 45-2 is sent To 1? Terminal 11-3. In the procedure described above, the network device 8-2 refers to the address management table 44-1 of FIG. 8 and checks the received IP packet "the address of the sender included in the packet". All 3 " Whether registered in the address management table. In this example, since the address in the second line from the address management table 44-1, the external 1? Address is "Aln ", the communication circuit identification code " Li — " means / 通 二 = 入IP packet, confirms that the IP terminal 11-3 can be registered for communication via the branch device. Furthermore, when it is not registered in the address management table 44- 丨, the branch device 8-2 can discard the received IP. Packet 454. Its-Person 'when IP terminal 11-3 generates an IP packet transmitted to IP terminal

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 47 1245997 45-3, and transmitted to the network device 8-2 via router 20-3, if the network device 8-2 forwards this IP packet 45-3 to the unified IP Inside the transfer network 1, the IP packet 45-3 passes through the internal communication circuit and the multiple routers of the data network 3 in FIG. -2. Then, the network device 7-2 sends the received lp packet 45-3 to the communication circuit 10-5 shown in FIG. 7 (step ST12), and the router 20-4 receives the IP packet 45-3, and via the communication circuit 52- 2 is forwarded to the IP terminal 11-7. When the IP terminal 11-7 receiving the IP. Packet 45-3 generates a 1? Packet 45-4 with a credit back, and sends it to the router 2-0 through the communication circuit, it passes the communication

Circuit 1 0-5 (step ST 1 3), and through the branch point device 7_ 2, the integrated IP data transfer network 3 in the IP transfer network 2 reaches the branch point device 8-2 and then passes through the communication circuit 10-1 ' The IP packet 45-4 shown in 12 is sent to the IP terminal 11-3. According to the above procedure, IP terminals 丨 丨 -3 and 1 {> terminals 丨 丨 -7 can communicate by transmitting and receiving IP packets. 'In the communication procedure from the IP terminal described above, the domain name server in the media router "-1" can be removed from the media router 14-1. At this time, the IP terminal 11-3 will store the sender's ip bit Address " A1 丨 3 ", the IP address of the domain name dedicated server of the IP data network 3 〇-1 IP address " a 3 0 1 ", and the host name of the IP terminal 11-7 with the communication target" ιρτ-11-7 name " IP packet 45-5 transmission

To the domain name server 3 0 -1. The domain name server 3 〇— 丨 sends back the IP packet 45_6 containing the 1: 1 corresponding IP address corresponding to "IPT 11-7 name", A117 ". Furthermore, the technology of removing the domain name server My in the media router, so as to directly access the domain name server 3 0-1, can be implemented in accordance with the conventional technology of the domain name server.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 48 1245997

When the foregoing step ST11 ends, the IP terminal n-3 &amp; u-7 is ready to start communication. When the network device 8-2 detects the ιρ packet 45-2 and 45-6, the IP terminal communication record is 1? Terminals n-3 and 11) The communication record between terminal n_7 and its time, if necessary, m also keeps an internal record at the same time &lt; <control of communication connection between non-independent IP telephones >>

Next, a procedure for dialing a telephone number and performing telephone communication from a non-standalone lp phone to the stand-alone IP phone 13-2 will be described. Here, "non-independent IP phone" refers to an IP phone connected to a media router, etc. for communication. On the other hand, "independent IP phone is not connected to a media router" The jp telephones 12-1 and 12-2 of FIG. 3 which are directly connected to the branch device are described below. The non-independent IP phone 13-1 of FIG. 6 is connected to the H323 terminal section 23-1 via the communication circuit M —, and the non-independent IP phone 13-1 of FIG. 7 is connected via the communication circuit 53-2. To the H323 terminal section 23-2. When the receiver of the non-stand-alone IP phone 13-1 is picked up (off-hook), the IP packet 46-1 shown in FIG. 15 to notify the outgoing call is transmitted to the communication circuit 53-1 shown in FIG. 6 (Figure Step ST20 of step 6), H323 terminal unit 23-1

The letter circuit 53-1 detects the incoming call, and sends back the IP packet 46-2 of the outgoing call confirmation (step ST21). Here, the "CTL-Inf 〇_1" described in the payload (data part) of the ip packet 46-1 is the outgoing call control information and is described in the payload of the ip packet 46-2. "CTL-Inf0-2" is the call confirmation information. When the user of the non-independent IP phone 13-1 dials and enters the phone number of the non-independent IP phone at the communication destination 3-2, the non-independent IP phone

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 49 1245997 V. Description of the invention (46) The phone 13 ^ 1 internally generates a phone number (,, Teh 13-2namen) containing the communication target and a non-independent IP phone H —丨 phone number and IP address' for example, IP packet 46-3 in the form of call control data specified by H.225,

Then, it is transmitted to the H323 terminal unit 23 — through the communication circuit 53-1. However, does the IP packet 4 6-3 contain the non-independent 1? The phone number of the telephone 13-1 and the 1P address are optional. The H323 terminal unit 23-1 receives the IP packet 46-3 from the communication circuit 53-1, and searches the media router status table of FIG. 30 for the 6 records' inside the 0-1-1 to detect and detect the circuit representing the communication circuit 5 3 —. The identifier, in this example, is to detect the record of the i-th row from the media router status table 001-i, that is, &quot; 53-Γ. Secondly, read the phone number of the dependent IP phone 13-1 recorded in this record "81-3 —1234-5679" and the IP address "32 · 3.53.1" again in the ip position When IP address and phone number are not included in IP packet 463, 'Set the value recorded in the media router status table to 1? Packet 46-3, even if the information about the IP address and phone number is written, if the values are not consistent 'The IP packet 46_3 is discarded for error processing. Here, the specific value of A131 of the IP address of the non-standalone IP phone 13-1 is &quot; 32 · 3 · 53 · Γ (step ST22).

Secondly, the H323 terminal unit 23-1 will store the address of the non-standalone 1? Telephone 134, which is the IP address of the sender "Al31", and the address of the domain name server 48-1, which is the receiver 1? The address &quot; Α481 &quot;, and the telephone number of the correspondent ^ "tebu 13-2 name" IP packet 46-4 is transmitted to the domain name server 48 inside the media router 14-1 of FIG. 6 — ( Step ST23). The domain name server 48-1 checks the content of the received IP packet 46-4, and then transmits it to the IP packet 46-5 via the communication circuit 10-1 and the network point device 8-2.

1245997 V. Description of the invention (47) A domain name server 31-1 dedicated to the IP telephone network (step ST24). When the IP phone network dedicated domain name server 31_1 will contain an IP address corresponding to the aforementioned host name &quot; Tel-13-2 name &quot;, the IP packet of 'A1 32 &quot; will be returned to the domain When the name server 48-1 (step ST25), the domain name server 48-1 returns the IP packet 46-6 to the H323 terminal unit 23-1. Second, when the H323 terminal unit 23-1 generates and transmits it to the H323 terminal When the IP packet 46-7 of the unit 23-2 is transmitted to the network point device 8-2 via the router 20-3 (step ST26), the network point device 8-2 forwards this IP packet 46-7 to the unified IP forwarding network of FIG. 3 Inside 2, the IP packet 46-7 passes through the internal routers 19-8, 19 -9, 21-2, 19-11, 19-13 of the IP telephone network 4 and reaches the branch device 7-2. Therefore, the branch The device 7-2 sends the received IP packet 46-7 to the communication circuit 10-5, and receives the IP packet 46-7 via the router 20-4 and the H323 terminal unit 23-2. The H323 terminal unit 23-2 sends the IP packet 46 -7 is interpreted as a phone call, and the following two procedures are performed. The i procedure is the product credit back 1? Packet 46-8 and returned to the router 20-4, the second procedure is to pass the IP packet 46-7 through The communication power shown in Figure 7 Route 53-2 is transferred to the non-standalone 1? Phone 13-2. As described with reference to FIG. 7, the lp packet 46-8 generated according to the first procedure passes through the communication circuit 10-5 (step ST27), and via The branch point device 7-2 and the IP telephone network 4 reach the branch point device 8-2, and then reach the router 20-3 via the communication circuit 10-1, and then reach the non-independent IP phone 13 1 via the H323 terminal section 23-. The stand-alone IP phone 13 — is called as a communication target by receiving the “packet 46 — 8”. According to the second procedure described above, the non-standalone IP phone 13-2 sends an outgoing ring tone (啐 屮 by receiving 1245997 V. Description of the invention (48) IP packet 46-7 (啐 屮

Receiver (off-hook). On the non-stand-alone / type IP phone 13- 2 ^. .R 〇 ^ s ^ The stand-alone type IP phone 13-2 generates an IP packet 46-9 and sends it to the circuit 53_2 (step ST28), and the h323 terminal unit 23- 2 receives the IP packet 46-9, which reaches the branch device 8-2 via the branch device, and then passes through the communication circuit to the non-independent IP phone i3 through the terminal section 2], as a notification telephone communication material to pick up The non-independent type 1 {& the voice (response) of the call f by the electric machine 13_2 ', and notify the user of the non-independent type 1 {5 telephone 13_ 丨. The foregoing step ST28 is a procedure for transferring the response information, that is, the notification of the start of the IP packet 46-9 of the telephone communication between the non-standalone 1 {&gt; j phone 13-1 and the standalone IP phone 13_2. When the branch device 7_2 and When the ιρ packet 46 is detected at 82, the telephone communication can be recorded, that is, the fact that the telephone communication between the non-independent π telephone 13-1 and the non-independent IP telephone 13_2 has started as the content of the IP packet 46-9. A part of 'e.g. sender ^ address receive = IP bit, sender port number, receiver port number' and its detection time are stored on the charge record table set in the outlet device. _When a user of a non-standalone IP phone 1 3 -1 starts a communication session, the stand-alone IP phone 13_i generates a packet 46-10 containing a digitized voice ^ ιρ and sends it to the communication circuit 53-1 (step ST29 ). The sound packet 46-10 passes through the H323 control unit 23-1, the router 20-3, the outlet installation ^ bu ^, the router 19-8, 19-9, 2bu 2, 19-11, 19-13, the outlet, and the device 7_2, Router 20-4, H323 terminal unit 23-2, and reach the non-independent 1? Phone page 52 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997

^ 13-2. The user y packet 46-n of the non-stand-alone type 1 telephone 13_2, in the opposite process, also stands for the H323 control unit 23-2, the router 20-4, and the network device 7-2, and the call is 3, 19- &quot;, 2 &quot;, the outlet device router 20-3, the H323 control unit 23-1, and reach the non-independent 1-phone 13-1 (step ST30). When the user of the non-stand-alone IP phone 13- 丨 ends the telephone communication and returns the receiver, the non-stand-alone IP phone 13 — 丨 generates an IP packet 46-12 indicating the end of the phone communication and sends it to the communication circuit 53 —丨 (Step ST31). IP packet 46-12 is transmitted through H323 control unit 23-1, router 20-3, branch device 8-2, router 19-8, 19-9, 21-2, 19-11, 19-13, and branch device 7 -2, router 20-4, H323 terminal unit 23-2, and reach non-independent IP phone 13-2. When the user of the independent IP phone 13-2 knows that the telephone communication is over and returns the receiver, an IP packet 46-13 is generated and sent out, which is the reverse flow from the above, that is, via the H323 control unit 23-2 and the router 20-4, branch point device 7-2, router 19-13, 19-11, 21-2, 19-9, 19-8, branch point device 8-2, router 20-3, and reach H323 control section 23-1 (Step ST32). The foregoing step ST32 is to forward the confirmation information of call disconnection, that is, the procedure for notifying the completion of the IP packet 46-13 of the telephone communication between the non-independent IP phone and the non-independent IP phone 13_2. When the branch device 8-2 and 7-2 When IP packet 46-13 is detected, the telephone communication end record, that is, the fact that the telephone communication between the independent IP telephone 13-1 and the independent IP telephone 13-2 ends, is taken as I p Part of the contents of packet 4 6 _ 1 3, such as sending

1245997 V. Description of the invention (50) The IP address of the receiver, the IP address of the receiver, the port number of the sender, the port number of the receiver, and the detection time are stored on the charging record table set in the outlet device. According to the above procedure, a non-stand-alone IP phone 3-1-丨 and a non-stand-alone IP phone 1 3-2 can receive and transmit IP packets by transmitting and receiving telephone packets. In the above-mentioned communication procedure, the domain name server 48-1 in the media router is removed by the media router 4-1, and the foregoing steps ST23 to ST25 can also be replaced with the steps 3723 described below. ST25x. In other words, the H323 terminal unit 23-1 will store the address of the independent IP phone 13-1, that is, the IP address of the sender n A1 3 Γ, and the address of the domain name server 31 -1 dedicated to the IP telephone network. That is, the IP packet 46-14 of the IP address "A3 1 Γ" of the receiving end and the telephone number "Tel-13-2 name" of the communication destination passes through the communication circuit 1 0 -1 and the network point device 8-2. Transfer to the domain name server 31-1 dedicated to the IP telephone network (step ST23x). The domain name server 31-1 returns an IP packet 46-15 containing the IP address &quot; Tel-13-2 name &quot; corresponding to the telephone number of the communication destination &quot; A132 &quot; to the H323 terminal. Unit 23-1 (step ST25x) 〇 In the above steps ST23 to ST25, or steps ST23x and ST 2 5x, the branch device 8-2 checks to include the IP packet 46 received through the communication circuit 10_1. -5 The combination of the sender's address &quot; Α48Γ and the communication circuit identification mark "Line-10-factory is registered in the address management table 44-1 (Figure 8), or the branch device 8-2 Check whether the combination of the sender address "Α1 31" and the communication circuit identification code "Line-10-1" contained in the IP packet 46-14 received through the communication circuit 1 0-1 is present.

Η 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 54 1245997 V. Description of the invention (51) Registered in the address management table 44-1 (Figure 8), the non-stand-alone IP phone 13 -1 by the communication circuit 1 0- 1Communication via the branch device 8_2 is permitted, that is, "communication permission registration" is confirmed. &lt; &lt; Control of communication connection between independent IP phones &gt; &gt; Since the non-stand-alone IP phone 13-1 of FIG. 6 includes the terminal function of the H3 23 terminal section 23-1, the non-stand-alone IP phone 丨 3 —丨 Can be integrated with the connection control unit 22-1. Therefore, the non-standalone IP phone 1 3- 11 inside the stand-alone 1? Telephone 12- 丨 of FIG. 31 is directly connected to the connection control section 22-11 via the communication circuit. The communication circuit 10-4 is connected from the connection control unit 22-11, and is connected to the branch point device 8-4 of FIG. The standalone IP phone 12M and the standalone "1 phone 12-2 can transmit and receive 1 packet 2 non-standalone phone 13] and the standalone lp phone = packet ST2Q steps for telephone communication 3 In addition, The first difference is that the "domain name server 48-1 does not exist, so the rape network is within the network 48-1, and step ST23 and step ST24 are colored = :: name server ^ 323 ^ ^ ^ # 3 # # ^ ^ H323 terminal part “― 丨” and “^” are set to 2 as non-existent, and these circuits are used.矣 Communication via 1p packets &lt; <non-independent IP audio and video equipment »and non-independent 1P audio and video equipment Secondly, the communication program

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p. 55

IP audio and video device 16-3 transmits or connects device 16 — to the non-independent type of packet. The host name packet of the identification device may be implemented, and IP 1245997 is transmitted and received. V. Description of the invention (52) Vertical IP electric machine 1 3 -1 Steps ST20 to ST32 are the same as those of the non-standalone 丨 p telephone 丨 3 _ 2 using the domain name server 31-1 dedicated to the p telephone network. The difference is that instead of using the domain name server 3 i-i dedicated to the IP telephone network, the domain name server 3 2 — i dedicated to the IP audiovisual network of FIG. 7 is used, and step ST44 is used instead of step ST24, and Replace step "25 with step ^ 45. Non-independent audio and video device 16 — It refers to the ip image and video domain name server 324 inside the IP transfer network, and asks the host 1 of the non-independent audio and video device 16-2, To obtain 1 bit of the independent audio and video device =: Next, since the audio and video data is transmitted from the independent audio and video device 16_ 丨 to the independent audio and video device 16-2, : The video device 1 6-1 and the independent audio-visual device 16_2 perform audio-visual communication for transmitting and receiving audio-video data. &Lt; <between independent IP audio-visual device and non-independent audio-visual device >> Non-independent IP audio and video device of 6 丨 6 — 丨 Contains the terminal function of H323 terminal ^ # — 1. The non-independent 1P audio and video device 16-1 can be integrated with the wearer. Therefore, the independent 1P of FIG. 32 Audiovisual The connection type 1P audio and video device 16-12 is connected to the connection control section 22-12 via communication. The connection control section 22-12 is connected and connected to the network device 8-4 in FIG. 3. = Vertical IP audio and video Device 12-3 can communicate with the non-legislative, packetized audio and video communication sound; Hi: P audio: video device 16-1 and non-independent 1p audio and video 32-1, @ # f audio and video network dedicated Steps for sending and receiving IP packets for audio-visual communication

1245997 V. Description of the invention (53) ST20 to step ST32 are the same. The difference is that since the domain name server 48-1 does not exist in the media router 14-1, step ST23 and step ST24 are regarded as an integrated step without going through the domain name server 48-1. By connecting the independent IP audio and video device 16-4 to the network device 7-4 'between the independent audio and video device 丨 2-3 and the independent audio and video device 16-4, via the network device 8-4 and IP audio and video Network 5-1, network point device 7-4, transmitting and receiving ip packets can perform audio and video communication.

The independent IP audio and video device 12-3 is regarded as a sales device of an audio and video product sales company that sells audio and video products. It is a purchase device for purchasers of audiovisual products, which can realize an imaginary market where audiovisual products are distributed using an IP transfer network. The purchaser purchases audiovisual products from the sales company e based on the audiovisual subpoena, and the sales company can deliver digital audiovisual products. &Lt; &lt; Communication between analog telephones >> With reference to Fig. 3, Fig. 6, Fig. 7, and Figs. 33 to 47, a description will be given of dialing a telephone number. • Telephone 'is a program for telephone communication with analog telephones 18-3.

The analog telephone 18-1 of FIG. 6 is connected to the SCN interface 24-1 via a communication circuit, and the analog telephone 18-3 of FIG. 7 is connected to 8 (^ Interface 24- 2. When picking up the handset of the analog telephone 18-1 (off-hook), the analog signal sent out via the communication circuit 55 — 丨 缰 is sent to the SCN interface 24-1. The SCN interface 24-1 converts the received outgoing signal Into digital data form. Then 'transform the transmission and reception rules of this digital data

The analog signal is sent to the communication circuit 55- 丨, and the Scn interface 23-1 uses the "call setting" analog signal to generate the data box 47-3 'of FIG. 35 to notify the telephone number and sends it to the 11323 terminal unit 23-1. . Here, the 11323 terminal unit 23-1 1245997 invention description (54) and other products ^ notify the outgoing call of the digital data 47_1 shown in FIG. 33 and input it to the H323 terminal unit 23-1 (step ST60 in FIG. 6), the H323 terminal unit 23-1 returns the digital data 47_2 of FIG. 34 to the SCN interface with a call confirmation (step ST61). Here, "cTL-hfoq" inside "digital data ^^ is used to call out control information" and "CTL-Inf 0-2π inside digital data 47-2" is called out to determine information. Secondly, when the user of the analog telephone 丨 8— 丨 dials and enters the telephone number of the analog telephone 18-3 at the communication destination, the telephone 18-1 will call the device to retrieve the media router status table 100-i in FIG. 30. Record to detect the circuit identifier representing the communication circuit 53-1. In this example, the record in the third line from the media router status table 100-1 is detected, which is &quot; 55-1 &quot;. Secondly, 'read the analog phone 丨 8 — 丨 phone number 1 81 -47-32 5-3887' recorded in this record and the IP address &quot; 20 · 〇 55 · Γ. Here, the analog phone 18 The specific value of "A18Γ" of the IP address of -1 is "20 · 55 · Γ" (step ST62). Secondly, the Η323 terminal unit 23-1 generates a bit storing a pseudo-granted analog phone 1 8-1. Address, which is the sender's IP address "A181", the address of the domain name server 48-1 in the media router, which is also the receiver 1? Address A481, and the telephone number of the communication destination &quot; Tel -18 -3 name &quot; IP packet 47-4 of FIG. 36 and transmits it to the domain name server 48-1 (step ST63). The domain name server 48-1 checks the contents of the received IP packet 47-4 ,

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 58 1245997 Description of the invention (55) Then through the communication circuit 1 0-1 and the network device 8-2 to IP packet 47-5 to the IP phone network dedicated domain name Server 31 — 丨 (step ST64). When the IP phone network dedicated domain name server 31 _ 丨 will contain the IP address corresponding to the aforementioned host name "Tel-1 8-3 name" "A183", 2Ip packet 47-6 will be returned to When the domain name server 48-1 (step ST65), the domain name server 48-1 returns the IP packet to the H3 23 terminal unit 23-1.

Secondly, when the H323 terminal unit 23-1 generates an IP packet 47-7 that is transmitted to the H323 terminal unit 23-2, and transmits it to the network device 8-2 via the router 20-3 (step ST66), the network device 8-2 sends This IP packet 47-7 is forwarded to the inside of the integrated IP forwarding network 2 in FIG. 3, and the IP packet 47-7 passes through the inside of the IP telephone network 4 &quot; routers 19-8, 19-9, 21-2, 19- 11, 19-13, and arrived at the outlet device 7-2. Then, the network point device 7-2 sends the received IP packet 47-7 to the communication circuit 10-5, and receives the packet 47-7 via the router 20-4 and the H323 terminal unit 23-2. The H323 terminal unit 23-2 interprets the IP packet 47-7 as a phone call, and performs the following two procedures. The i procedure is to generate a return credit IP packet 47-8 and send it back to the router 20-4. The analog phone 18_3 sends an outgoing ring tone (outgoing tone) via receiving the IP packet 47-7. The second procedure is to transfer the 卯 packet 47-7 to the analog phone 18_3 via the SCN interface 24-2. Description will be made with reference to FIG. The lp packet 0-8 generated by the procedure passes through the communication circuit 10-5 (step ST67), reaches the branch device 8-2 via the branch office device 7-2 and the telephone network 4, and then reaches the router 20 via the communication circuit ι〇- 丨-3 'and then to the analog phone 18-1 via the H323 terminal 23-1 and the SCN interface 24-1. The analog phone 18-1 interprets that the communication partner is calling out by receiving 1? Packet 47 —R.

1245997 5. Description of the invention (56) ---- According to the second procedure above, the user of the analog phone 1 8-3 hears this call-out tone 'and picks up the microphone (off hook) of the analog phone 18-3. Then, the H323 terminal unit 23-2 generates an ip packet 47-9 (step ST68), and sends the ip packet 47-9 to the router 20-4, and reaches the branch point device 8 through the branch point device 7-2 and the IP telephone network 4- 2. Then reach the router 20-3 via the communication circuit 101, via the H323 terminal 23-1, the SCN interface 24-1, and reach the analog phone, 18-1, as a notification to the telephone communication object to pick up the analog phone 18 — 3 The sound of the handset (the sound of the call setting confirmation), and notify the user of the analog phone 18-1.

The aforementioned step ST68 is the information for confirming the call setting, that is, the procedure of transferring the ιρ packet 47-9 to notify the start of the telephone communication between the analog phone 1 8-1 and the analog phone 18_3. When the network device 7-2 and 8_2 detect the IP When the packet is 47-9, the recording of the telephone communication can be recorded, that is, the fact that the telephone communication between the analog telephone and the analog telephone 1 8-3 starts as part of the content of the IP packet 4 7-9, such as the IP address of the sender. The receiving end I, the sending material number, the receiving end port number, and its detection time are stored on the charging record table set in the outlet device. When the user of the analog telephone 18-1 starts a telephone communication session, the tone and number pass through the communication circuit 55-1 and the sound signal transmitted to the SCN interface is in digital form, followed by H3 23terminal 23-丨 Generate a 1p packet 47_10 containing the voice and send it to the communication circuit 10-U (step ST69). Voice packet 47-10 via H323 control unit 234, routing-g, branch device 8-2, router 19-8, 19_9, 2 &quot;, heart: 3 13, branch device 7-2, router 20-4, H323 terminal section 23_2 while

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 60 1245997 Description of the invention (57) Analog phone 18-3. The voice of the user of the analog telephone 18-3 follows the reverse flow, that is, via the H323 control unit 23-2, the router 20-4, the branch device 71-2, the router 19-13, 19-11, 2 and 2 , 19-9, 19-8, branch point device 8-12, router 20-3, H323 control unit "Η", and arrive at analog telephone 18-1 (step ST70). When the user of analog telephone 1 8-1 ends When returning the receiver by telephone communication, the analog telephone 1 8-1 sends the call disconnection signal indicating the end of the call to the communication circuit 55-1, and the SCN interface 24-1 converts the call disconnection signal to a digital data form, and then The H323 terminal unit 23-1 generates an IP packet 47-12 indicating the end of the telephone communication, and sends it to the communication circuit ι〇-ΐ (step ST71) ° The IP packet 47-12 passes through the H323 control unit 23-1 and the router 20-3 , Branch point device 8-2, router 19-8, 19-9, 21-12, 19-11, 19-13, branch point device 7-2, router 2-0-4, H323 terminal section 23-2, and reach the analogy Telephone 18-3. When the user of analog telephone 18-3 knows that the telephone communication is over and returns the handset, H323 terminal unit 23-2 generates and sends ρ packet 47-13 'In the flow opposite to the above, that is, via the control unit 23-2, router 2〇-4, network device 7-2, router 19-13, 19 ~ 11, 21-2, 19-9 , 19-8, branch point device 8-2, router 20-3, and reach H323 control unit 23-1 (step ST72). The aforementioned step ST72 forwards confirmation information of call disconnection, that is, the analog telephone 18—1 and The procedure of the IP packet 47-13 of the end of the telephone communication between the analog telephones 18-3. When the network device 8_2 and 7-2 detect the IP packet 4 7 -1 3, the end of the telephone communication can be recorded, that is, the analog telephone 18 The fact that the telephone communication between the -1 and the analog telephone 18-3 has ended

1245997 V. Description of the invention (58) Part of the contents of packet 4 7 -1 3, such as the sending end IP address, the receiving end IP address, sending the "end address, the end address number" and its detection time It is stored on the charge record sheet inside the outlet device. According to the above procedure, the analog telephone 18-1 and the analog telephone 18-3 can receive and transmit IP packets through transmission. In the above-mentioned communication procedure, The media router 14-1 removes the domain name server 48-1 in the media router, and the above steps ST63 to ST65 can also be replaced with the steps ST63x and ST65x described below. In other words, the H323 terminal unit 23-1 will store The address of the analog phone 18-1 is the IP address of the sender π Α18Γ, the address of the domain name server w — i dedicated to the IP telephone network, which is the IP address of the receiver &quot; A31 Γ, and the communication The IP packet 47-14 of the telephone number &quot; Tel-18-3 name &quot; of the target office is transmitted to the domain name server 3 dedicated to the IP phone via the communication circuit 101-1 and the branch device 8-2 (Step 1 ST63x). Domain Name Server 31-1 will contain 1: 1 pairs The IP address 47-15 of the telephone number “Tel-18-3 name”, the IP address “A183” of the communication destination is returned to the H323 terminal unit 23-1 (step ST65x). 〇 In step ST63 described above, To ST65, or steps ST63x and ST65x, the branch device 8-2 checks the sender address contained in the IP packet 47-5 received through the communication circuit 10-1, 'A48Γ and the communication circuit identification mark The combination of "Line-10-l" is registered in the address management table 44-1 (Fig. 8), or the branch device 8-2 checks the IP packet received by the communication circuit 10-1 by checking Is the combination of the sender address &quot; Α18Γ and the communication circuit identification mark &quot; Line-10-1 &quot; in 47-14

Hi 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 62 1245997 V. Description of the invention (59) --- Registered in the address manager 4 4 Thunder table 44-1 (Figure 8) 'Analog phone 18-1 The communication by the communication ^ -T ^ network device 8-2 is permitted, that is, it is confirmed that the login is made through 1 Shihan 1y. &lt; &lt; IP: Management and Feeding Device for Operation Management >〉 1P Data Service Management and Feeding Device for 35P Management under Yamada t2 &quot; ^, or inquiries at the outlet devices 8-2 and 8-4 at any time Wait, send and receive ip packets to defeat the iS. For example, the IP between the IP terminals generated by the network device in step ST 11 just described is recorded. Also ’The IP data service uses the management server 35-1 to check the inside of the ιρ data network managed by the communication company X through the transmission of ICMP packets and other methods.

External resources, such as routers 19-1, 19-2, 19-3, the domain name server 30- 丨 and other-2 dedicated to the IP data network, whether the communication circuits between routers are normal (fault management), and By monitoring whether the IP packets in the IP data network are too crowded (communication quality management), the unified management of the IP data network of communication company X is performed.

Similarly, the data service operation management server 35-2 under the management of the communication company γ sends and receives IP packets through periodic or anytime inquiries to the network device 7_2 and 7-4, etc., to obtain the above 1? The communication records are used in a unified way to manage the fault management and communication quality of the communication company's P data network. Furthermore, the IP data service operation management server 35 — 丨 and 35 — 2 can be divided into an IP data service server dedicated to managing IP data services and a P data network management server dedicated to managing IP data network resources. Device. &lt; &lt; IP telephony service operation management server >〉 The IP telephony service operation management server 36-1 under the management of the communication company X transmits and receives by periodically or at any time inquiring the network device 8-2, 8_4, etc.

1245997 V. Description of the invention (60) IP packet to start recording of the aforementioned telephone communication. In addition, by sending and receiving Satoshi packets and other methods:

Internal resources of the active IP electrical network, such as router 19_8,] &quot;: S 19, 10 &gt;, the domain name server 3 for the IP telephone network 3-1-Is the communication circuit of the router normal (fault) Management) ° Too much broadcast (communication quality management),-the use of the IP phone network of the communication company X. _Same? Ϊ́: The telephone service operation management server 36-2 under the management of the Internet letter company γ sends the IP packet of the telephone network by periodically or at any time inquiring the network device 7_2 and 7_4, etc. to obtain the aforementioned call The communication start record and the telephone communication are recorded in a bundle, and the failure management and communication quality of the management communication company γ are integrated. In addition, the records of the start of the telephone communication in steps ST28 and ST68 and the records of the end of the telephone communication in steps ST32 and step ^ 72 in the above procedures may be omitted. At this time, the calls to the communication company X and the communication company γ may be omitted. Acquisition of communication start record and telephone communication end record. Furthermore, the management server "IP phone service use" "丨" and "?" It can be divided into two types which are dedicated to the official IP phone service! p telephone service feeder and dedicated management, resources of IP telephone network! P telephone network uses management server. &lt; IP audio and video service operation management server>〉 IP audio and video service operation management server 37-1 under the management of company X transmits and receives by periodically or at any time inquiring the network device 8-2 and 8_4, etc. If packet 'to start recording with the aforementioned audio-video communication and audio-video communication # to end recording. In addition, through transmission and reception 1 (: packet evaluation, etc., check page 64 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (61) _ Internal resources of the IP audio and video network managed by the communication company X, such as router 19 -14, 19-15, whether the domain name server My dedicated to the IP telephone network, the communication circuit between routers, etc. are normal (fault management). In addition, by monitoring 1? Packets in the IP audio and video network are too crowded (communication Quality management) 'Unified operation management of the audio and video network of communication company X. Similarly, 1? Audio and video service operation management server 37-2 under the management of communication company γ via periodic or any time inquiries to the network device 7 — 2 and 7 send and receive IP. Packets to obtain the above-mentioned audio and video communication and # audio and video communication end records, and use the management and communication company's audio and video network fault management and communication quality in a unified way. Furthermore, the IP audio service operation management server Device 37_i and 37_2 can distinguish the audio and video services of audio and video services ": = IP audio and video network operation management of audio and video network resources ^ service ^ door and head audio &lt; &lt; Do your best to serve the management server >>> p The best effort 38-1 under the management of the communication company X-Use the management communications company in a unified way ::: Reason for server management and communication quality. Similarly, g, And for the fault management of the network, the management server 38_2 is the best effort for the fault management and communication quality of the network. Operation: Management: The best use of the company Y: Management: Server 38] and 38-2 Divide into the best effort and service for the service and service = Η manage the resources of the best effort network and use the management server and manage the best effort for service. In the above description, "鹌 323terminal department" And "Η3's component names, such as 3 gateways", etc., does not mean that it is based on 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 65 1245997

ITU-H323 recommendations only represent relevant communication functions. As shown in FIG. 48, the operator of the media router 102 ° exchanges information with the RAS management program 101 inside the RAS organization 49-1 via the criminal operation unit 51-1, or through RAS management The table in the program performs the registration and authentication of the terminal, and manages the internal of the media router 如图 As shown in Figure 49, the terminal operator 丨 03 is through the operation of the non-independent telephone 1 3-1. 〇5 —2, and then through the imaginary three-layer communication channel 106 in the communication phone 53-1, and the RAS structure 49-1 internal rAS management program interface 105_ι and the RAS management program AP layer 101- 2 for information exchange, in addition, by rewriting the RAS table in the ras management program, to perform terminal registration and authentication, and manage the internal status of media routing ^ 14-1. &quot; As shown in FIG. 50, the telephone operator 1 04 operates the telephone 18-1 'This operation information is provided by the telephone operation program 10 6-2 in the SCN interface 24-1, and then communicates with the RAS agency 49 — 丨Internal RAS management program's Tcp / Ip interface 106-1 and AP layer 10 and 3 of the RAS management program exchange information, and 'rewrite the RAS table in the RAS management program' for terminal registration and authentication, and management of media Internal status of routers 丨 4- 丨. In the embodiment of FIG. 3, all internal components of the range 6-2 of the IP forwarding network managed by the communication company Y are removed, and the routers 21 -1 to 21-5 can be removed. At this time, the inside of the integrated IP forwarding network 2 becomes the range of the IP forwarding network managed and managed by the communication company X 6-1, and with the branch device 7-1 to 7-4, 8-1 to

example

8-4 and the gate g-ι and 9_2 itself. In the case of ιρ data communications,

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 66 1245997 V. Description of Invention (63) ---

For example, from the branch office device 8-2 through the router 19-1 and the router 19-3, the production report is forwarded to the branch office device 7-2. In the case of IP telephone communication, for example, $ 2.70, 8-2 is set via routers 19-8 and 19_9, and information is transmitted to the outlets. I 2 · The second embodiment using a gateway &lt; &lt; Communication between analog telephones >> q 1 Fintu ^, 7 media routers 丨 4-1 and 14-2 have the same internal structure as the gateway 9-2 in Figure 52 , 1 :: Relative to media routers 14] and 14_2 are located in the unified 1? Forwarding; The gates 9-1 and 9-2 are located inside the integrated 1P transfer network 2. In addition, the interiors of the 9-1 and 9-2 except the toll collection section 721 and 72_2 Η323 terminal section, and 9_2 are respectively composed of interfaces. In addition, 79 =: department / $ youji and other common internal component blocks. Information processing organization, 81 ^ RAS organization, 80-1 series gateway 9-1 except for and receiving / receiving / working input / output department. Media Road Function. In addition to the relevant processing by the Ministry of Toll Collection, there are roughly similar ones (IP_1-6 and non-independent and non-independent) sounds 2 are installed, and the communication circuit is connected to Pl terminals]!]. Inter-terminal communication is possible like 2 and closed channels 9 ~ 2 via the media router, for example, closed channel M through Figure 3, inter-terminal communication of the integrated 1P transfer network, non-independent 1P terminal U-6 and IP terminal Bu "Terminal between 13-4 ^ iIP telephone 13-3 and non-independent type IP 1 _One pass L non-independent ㈣ audio and video equipment 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 67 1245997

V. Description of the Invention (64) Non-independent IP audio and video devices 16_4, L7 ΠΓ, ^ πr, and Ajima communication are possible. Net 9 1 Figure 68 illustrates the analog telephone 18_ port through the gateway 9-ι, Tongren ip talk, week 2, gateway 9-2 ^ communication procedures. n € "When picking up the handset 17-3 of the analog phone 18_5, the public telephone exchange %%], the thunder% life & the town's telephone circuit and the electric home network M-1, Telephone circuit 17-1, call out 栌 hide Zhao 1 = internal part Δ ·· 1 ... Lei 2 1 V: The public switched telephone network 2 sends back to the analog (step S61). Second, the user of the analog phone M right dials the input The telephone number 6 name of the telephone set 18-6 at the communication destination. When the analog telephone set 18-5 sends the call setting number to the communication telephone 17-3, the call setting signal is exchanged through the public: fphone 26-1, telephone circuit 17- 丨, arrive at the SCN interface 77 — (step s62), this call = the setting signal can be digitized, as shown in the data block "-丨" shown in Figure 53 is transmitted to the H323 terminal 76-1 (step S62x), The H323 terminal unit 76-1 searches the internal record of the gateway state table 1 in FIG. 70 and detects a circuit identifier representing the communication circuit 1 7-1. In this example, the gateway state table 丨 〇〇_ Record π 17-Γ on line 1 from 2. Next, read the telephone number "81-3-9876-5432" of the analog telephone 18_5 recorded in this record, and the IP address "100. 102. 103". In addition, the H323 terminal unit 76 -1 generates the storage analog phone address 18-5, which is the IP address of the sender "A1 8 5π, the address of the domain name server 78-1 in the gateway, which is also the IP address of the receiver" Α781 &quot;, And the IP address 48-2 of the telephone number "Te 1-18-6 name" at the communication destination, and send it to the network domain

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 68 1245997 V. Description of the invention (65) Name feeder 78-1 (step S63). The domain name server 78-1 checks the content of the received IP packet 48-2, and transmits the IP packet 48_3 to the domain name server 31 — 丨 dedicated to the IP telephone network via the node device 8-4 (step S64). When the domain name server 31 dedicated to the IP telephone network — 丨 will return 1? Address n A 1 of 186π which contains 丨 · 1 corresponding to the aforementioned telephone number of the communication partner? Packet 48-4 When giving the domain name server 78-1 (step S65), the domain name server 78_UfIp packet is sent back to Η323 ^ 76-1. Second, when Η323 terminal section 76- 丨 generates IP packet 48_5 and sends it to When the branch office device 8-4 (step S66), if the branch office device 8-4 forwards this IP packet 47-5 to the inside of the integrated IP forwarding network 2 in FIG. 3, the IP packet 48-5 passes through the inside of the IP telephone network 4. Router 19-8, 19-9, 21-2, ΐ9 ιγ, 19-13, and reach the branch device 7-4. Therefore, the branch device ―4 will receive the received IP packet 48-5 through the router 74-2 , Η323 terminal section 76 ~ 2, to the SCN interface 77-2. The SCN interface 77-2 interprets the IP packet 48-5 as an outgoing call to the analog telephone 18-6, and sends an outgoing call to the telephone circuit 17-2; When receiving an outgoing call confirmation signal from the public switched telephone network 2 (step S66y), the following two procedures are performed. The first procedure is to generate an IP packet for γ L 48-6 'and send it back to router 74_2, the second call setting signal is sent out through the circuit 丨 7-2 and sent to the 仏 eight 卞 踬 疋 will be shipped out to the public parent telephone network 26-2 IP generated according to the first procedure Packet 48-6 via the outlet device boat S67) 'and via the IP telephone network 4, reach (step Qiaoyun outlet device 8-4, bran start and 丨, go to H323 terminal 76 inside Riri Road 9-1 — 丨Factory, after arriving at the gate end of the gate 76-1 will receive

1245997 5. The IP packet 4 8-6 of the description of the invention (66) is understood as the outgoing call to the telephone set (analog phone 18-6) of the communication object, and the data box 48-7 representing the outgoing tone is sent to the SCN interface 77-1 cSCN The interface 77-1 sends the outgoing tone to the communication circuit 17-1. When the outgoing tone reaches the analog telephone 18-5 via the public switched telephone network 26-1 and the communication circuit 17-3, the analog telephone 18_ 5 is interpreted as the outgoing communication object Analog phone 18-6. According to the second procedure described above, the analog telephone 1-8-6 receives the call setting signal (step S67x), and makes an outgoing tone. When the user of the analog phone hears this callout and picks up the receiver of the analog phone 18-6, the call setting confirmation signal is sent from the analog phone 18-6, via circuit 17-4, and the public parent telephone network 2 6- 2. Circuit 1 7-2, this call setting confirmation signal reaches the SCN interface 77-2. When the SCN interface 77-2 relays the response to the H323

When the terminal unit 76-2 (step S67y), the H323 terminal unit 76_2 generates an IP packet 48-8 and sends it to the H323 terminal unit 76-1 (step S68). Therefore, this IP packet 48-8 reaches the branch point device 8-4 through the branch point device 7_4 and the IP telephone network 4, and then reaches the H323 terminal section 113 2 3 ,,, and the terminal through the router 74_ 丨 inside the gateway 9-1. 76-1 will pick up the received 1? Packet 48-8 (that is, the user of the analog phone 18-6 pick up the receiver; send the data box 48 of the call setting confirmation to the SCN surface 77M and send the call confirmation signal to the exchange Telephone network 26-1, communication telephone 17 0, Dokuda a, road 17-3 and reach analog phone 18-5. The aforementioned steps are telephone communications between the answering machine 18-5 and the analog phone 18_6. Started J package than package =

1245997 'Invention (67) Transfer procedure. When the network device 7-4 or 8-4 detects the IP packet 48-9, the telephone communication can be recorded, that is, the analog telephone 1 8-5 and the analog telephone 18 The fact that the telephone communication between the six stations started is stored together with the time on the charge record table set in the outlet device.

When the user of the analog telephone 1 8-1 starts a telephone communication session, the sound signal is transferred to the SCN interface 77 via the communication circuit 17-3, the public switched telephone network 2 6 -1, and the communication circuit 17-1 '. -1, the sound signal is represented digitally, and then H3 23 terminal 76-1 generates a 1? Packet 48-10 containing digitized sound. The voice packet 48-10 passes through the router 74-1, the branch device 8 4, the router 19-8, 19-9, 21-2, 19-11, 19-13, the branch device 7-4, the H323 terminal section 76-2, The SCN interface 77-2, the communication circuit 17-2 ', the public switched telephone network 26-2, and the communication circuit 17-4 arrive at the analog telephone 18-6 (step S69). The voice of the user of the analog phone 18-6 is the IP packet 48-11. Following the above reverse process, that is, via the 8 (: ^ interface 77-2, the H323 control unit 76-2, the outlet device 7-4, the router 19-13, 19-11, 21-2, 19-9, 19-8, outlet device 8-4, H323 terminal section 76-1 inside gateway 9-1, SCN interface 77-1, communication circuit 1 7 -1, etc., arrive at the analog telephone 18-5 (step S70).

,, &lt; When the user of the telephone set 18-5 puts down because of the end of the telephone communication, when the receiver, the analog telephone set 18-5 sends the call disconnection L number representing the end of the telephone to the communication circuit 17-3, g⑶ The interface 77-1 converts the call disconnection signal into a format of ^ bit data, and then when the "terminal section 76-" generates a 1P packet 48-12 indicating the end of the telephone communication, and sends it to the router 74- 丨 (step S71) '' IP packets 48-12 pass through network devices 8-4, routers 19-8,

1245997

7β? Σρ ^^ 911, 19-13, outlet device 7-4, H323 terminal section == 部: 知 2 道 = crx 丨 people. When the phone 3 is switched off and the microphone is replaced,

SCN "face 77-2 is understood as the call cut off market (.X, is) ά 八 y # & ^ Sure confirmation (that is, the end of the telephone communication) Α person, the telephone network 2 6-2 notice and get an analogy Telephones 18 to 5 and analog telephones 18 to 6 are described in the following sections: "Ί 的 通通 #" Necessary "Public Switched Telephone Network Time / Thunder $", for example, in communication circuits 1 When the 7-2 is an ISDN circuit, the charging information will be notified at the end of the telephone communication. Pride 77 77 2 The fee for the use of the public switched telephone network obtained in accordance with the rules Γί ^ Notify the H323 terminal section 76-2, 23 terminal section 76-2 gets H323 ^ ^ 76-2 A t ^ ^ ^ t 1 〇 as the i-th procedure., 2: 8;? Ϊ send to router 74_2 to 罾, to strengthen $. ^ Yu 疋 to the opposite of the above The process, that is, via the network point device 7-4, the router 19_13, 19_u, 2 &quot;, 19 9, 19, and the network point device 8-4, reaches the H323 terminal section 76_ 丨 (step s? 2). Furthermore, = S The unit 76_2 will inform the charging unit 72_2 of the function of the data files that are operating in the gateway 9-2, which contains the charging fees obtained in accordance with the above procedures, and the stupid blocks 48 ~ 14. The charging unit 72_2 is in the foregoing The analogy obtained = In the telephone communication between the telephone 18-5 and the analog telephone 18_6, the charge information of using the public switched telephone network 26-2 can be saved. ^ Shan, the above procedure analogizes the telephone 18-5 and the analog telephone 18-6. By transmitting and receiving the IP packet, telephone communication can be performed. The aforementioned step S72 is to cut off the confirmation information, that is, to notify the completion of the telephone communication between the analog telephone 8 8-5 and the analog telephone 18-6.

1245997 V. Description of the invention (69) 4: ~ 13 Transferred hand 'continued' When the outlet is installed, you can record the end of the telephone communication II = JP packet 48-13 The telephone communication between the two telephones μ is finished 18 -5 With the time record stored in the charge record set in the outlet device to ensure the management of the feeder through the two-call service ... m period or or & transmission and reception inquiry network packet: get the aforementioned telephone communication to start recording and telephone communication Furthermore, the management of IP telephony service applications.朿 ° has been recorded. Ask the toll neighbor 72 1 mile ^ server 36-i through transmission and reception of IP packets of J gate to receive 472-1, to obtain the IP phone service management server 36 under management of the aforementioned toll communication company Y. Periodical Or at any time to transmit and receive the lp of the inquiry network device 7_4, and obtain the aforementioned telephone communication start record and telephone communication end record. The IP server uses the management server 3 6 _ 2 to receive and receive the 72-2 IP packet by sending and receiving inquiries to obtain the aforementioned charging information. In the above-mentioned communication procedure, the domain name server 78-1 is removed from the gateway 9-i, and the foregoing steps S63 to S65 can be replaced by the following steps 36 仏 to S65x. That is, the H323 terminal unit 76-1 will store the address of the analog telephone 18-5, that is, the IP address of the sender &quot; A1 85 &quot;, the domain name dedicated to the IP telephone network, and 1§ 31-1. The IP address 48, which is the IP address of the untrusted terminal, "a 311", and the telephone number of the correspondent office "Tel-18-6 name", is transmitted to the network domain name through the network device 8-4. The server 31-1 (step S63x). The domain name server 3 1 -1 dedicated to the IP telephone network will return the IP packet 48_16 containing the IP address &quot; Α186π which contains 丨: i corresponding to the telephone number n Tel-18-6 name 'at the communication destination. H323 terminal section 76-1 (step S65x)

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 73 1245997 V. Description of the invention (70) In the above-mentioned steps s63 to S65, or S63x to S65x, the 'point device 8-4 via the communication circuit 17-1 And H323 terminal section 76-1,

By checking whether the combination of the sender address &quot; A781 &quot; in the IP packet 48-3 included in the domain name server 78-1 in the gateway and the communication circuit identification mark `` Line-17-1 '' is It is registered on the address management table 44-2 (Fig. 69), or the branch device 8-4 checks the sender address contained in the ip packet 48-15 generated on the H323 terminal section 76-1 &quot; Is the combination of "A185" and the communication circuit identification code "Line-17-1" registered on the address management table 44-2 (Fig. 69), and the analog telephone is-5 is communicated by the communication circuit 17-1 via the branch device 8- The ultimatum of 4 is permitted. That is, the communication permission registration is confirmed. &lt; <telephone service operation management server >> Managed by the communication company X! &gt; The telephone service operation management server 36 -i will periodically or at any time send and receive inquiries to the network device 8-2 and 8-4. IP packet to obtain the aforementioned telephone communication start record and telephone communication end record. In addition, the internal resources of the IP telephone network managed by the communication company such as routers 19-8, 19-10, domain name servers, and routers are normal (fault management) by sending and receiving ICMP packets and other methods. Through the age loss and other injustices, Putianhe and μ recognized the IP address of the IP phone network in the 1P phone network ^

疋 Is it too crowded (communication quality management), unary t H use the official management ^ &gt; Similarly, 1? Telephone service server 36-2 under the management of the communication company γ through periodic or at any time to receive inquiries e;

1245997 V. Description of the invention (71) End of communication records, unified management of fault management or communication quality of the IP telephone network of communication company Y. Moreover, in the above procedure, the telephone communication start record in step s 68 and the telephone communication end record in step S72 may be omitted. At this time, the telephone communication start record and the telephone through the communication company X or the communication company γ may be omitted. Acquisition of communication end record. In addition, the IP phone service operation management servers 36-1 and 36-2 can be divided into an IP phone service server specifically used to manage the IP phone service and an IP phone network operation management server dedicated to manage the resources of the IP phone network. . 3 · Third embodiment using a gateway Referring to Fig. 71 ', a third embodiment of communication connection between terminals suitable for an IP transfer network will be described by using the media router of the present invention in a CATV communication network. The media router 115 is located inside the CATV gateway 113-2 inside the CATV network 1 13-1, and is connected to the network point device 111 inside the integrated IP transfer network 110 through the communication circuit 丨 12. Furthermore, the media router 115 is connected via Any of catV circuit interface 114 and CATV circuit 119-1 to 119-4, continued

To IP terminals 116-1 to 116-3, analog phones Π7, dependent IP phones 118-1, dependent IP audio and video devices 118_2 qCATV circuits 119-1 to 119-4 contain lower communication layers unique to CATV circuits (Communication physical layer and data link layer), and also has the function of forwarding IP packets in the communication network. The IP packet transmitted from the IP terminal 11 6-1 is input to the CATV circuit interface 114 via the CATV circuit 11 9_1, where the IP packet is taken out and sent to the media router 115. Media router ι15 and the media router in Figure 6

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 75 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (72) I 4- 1 has the same structure and the same functions as 丨 4- 丨, for example, it contains a domain name feeder. Therefore, the media router 115 converts the IP packet containing the call control data into DNS query response format data, which can be sent to the communication circuit 112, and further, from the analog phone Π7, the non-independent IP phone 118-1, or the non-independent type The IP audio and video device 118_2 receives the IP packets input through the CATV circuits 119-2 to 119-4 and the CATV circuit interface 114, and transmits them to the communication circuit 112 through the media router 115. In addition, on the contrary, the IP packet transmitted from the branch point device 111 via the communication circuit UI 2 can be passed through the media router 115, the CATV circuit interface 11 4, and then any of the CATV circuits 119-1 to 119-4. It is transmitted to one of the ip terminal 116-1, the analog phone 117, the non-stand-alone IP phone 11 8-1, and the non-stand-alone IP audio-visual device 118-2. According to the above-mentioned principle, the IP terminal 116-1, the analog telephone 117, the non-stand-alone IP phone η 8-1, and the non-stand-alone IP audio and video device 11 8-2 in the CATV network 113-1 pass through the integrated IP. The forwarding network 11 〇, as explained in the other embodiments, uses the domain name server inside the integrated IP forwarding network, which is connected to other various terminals of the integrated IP forwarding network 1 丨 aka IP terminals or analogy. Terminals such as telephones, IP telephones, and IP audio and video devices can perform inter-terminal communication. The IP terminal 116-1 is obtained through the CATV circuit 119-1 and the CATV channel 113-2 'prompts the host name of the IP terminal at the communication target to the domain name server inside the integrated IP forwarding network II 0' to obtain the target The IP address of the IP terminal at the location is then transmitted to and from the IP terminal at the target via the IP terminal 116-1 to perform the inter-terminal communication. Similarly,

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 76 1245997 I. Description of the invention (73) 'The analog telephone 117 passes the CATV circuit 119-2 and the CATV gateway 113-2 to the host name of the analog telephone at the communication target, also It is the telephone number of the telephone at the object, and it is prompted to unify the domain name server 'inside the p-forwarding network' to obtain the p-address of the telephone at the object. Then, voice data is transmitted and received between the analog telephone set 107 and the analog telephone set of the subject, and telephone communication can be performed. Similarly, the non-stand-alone phone 118-1, via the CATV circuit 119-3 and the CATV gateway 113-2, presents the analog phone at the communication target to the host name, that is, the telephone number of the telephone at the target. A domain name server inside the IP forwarding network 110 to obtain the IP address of the telephone at the target. Then, by transmitting and receiving audio data from the non-standalone &gt; IP phone 11 8-1 and the analog phone at the target, telephone communication can be performed. 4 · A fourth embodiment using a gateway with a wireless interface Referring to Fig. 72, a terminal-receiving wireless device is combined with the gateway of the present invention, and a fourth embodiment of communication connection between terminals using an IP transfer network will be described. 1 2 0 system and IP transfer network, 1 21 series network point device, 1 2 2 series gateway, 12 3 series wireless transmitting and receiving section, 1 2 4 -1 series wireless interface conversion section, 1 2 4 _ 2 series communication circuit, 1 25 series wireless communication path, 1 26 series terminal housing wireless device, 1 2 7 series wireless transmitting and receiving department, 1 2 8 -1 series IP terminal, 1 2 8-2 series non-standalone IP phone, 128-3 series non standalone IP audio and video equipment, i29_1 to 1 2-9-3 wireless interface conversion unit. Gateway 1 2 2 contains the same function as gateway 9 -1 in Figure 51. When terminals such as IP terminals, Η 3 2 3 terminals, or analog telephones are connected via communication circuit 1 2 4-2, they can be used for terminals. Intercommunication. Therefore, through the communication circuit 124-2, an IP terminal, an IP phone, or

1245997 V. Description of the invention (74) The IP audio and video device can perform inter-terminal communication. The DNS query response data or text data sent from the IP terminal 128-1 is converted into wireless transmission and reception by the wireless interface conversion unit 129-1. The input data format of the communication unit is input to the wireless transmission and reception unit 丨 27, and is transmitted to the wireless transmission and reception unit 123 via the wireless communication path 125, and is converted into a ιρ packet that can be input to the gateway in the wireless interface conversion unit 124-1. The data format is transmitted to the gate 22 via the communication circuit 124-2. In the wireless interface conversion unit 129-2, the data for call control of the telephone sent from the non-stand-alone IP telephone 128-2 or the voice data transmitted and received in digital form is converted into the input data format of the wireless transmission and reception unit. And is input to the wireless transmitting and receiving unit 127, and then passes through the wireless communication path 125, wireless% ^ 123, wireless interface conversion unit 124-i, and communication circuit 124-2, and becomes the data format of the ip packet that can be input to the gateway. , And was sent to the gate 122. The data for call control of 1? Audiovisual equipment sent from = audiovisual equipment 128-3, or the digitally expressed voice toiletry is transmitted and received in the wireless interface conversion unit 129-3. ^ 1 Enter a material form and input it to the wireless transmitting and receiving department 1 27, = the data of the packet is transmitted% \ circuit 124-2, and it becomes a Beco form which can be input to the IP packet of the intervening channel, and is sent to Gateway 122. In addition, the anti-characteristic process, such as from outlets wear: 詈]? 、 Beyond the gate 122, the telephone package is via the route 124-2, the wireless interface conversion paste-!, I ”; 123, the wireless communication path 125, the wireless transmission and reception unit 127 ,: the line interface conversion unit 129 -2, and reach the non-independent type and J machine without p. 78 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (75) Furthermore, 'the IP terminal 128-1 which is connected to the terminal receiving wireless device 126, Non-independent IP phone 128-2 and non-independent IP audio and video device 128-3 can be connected to other various terminals connected to the integrated IP forwarding network 120 through the integrated IP forwarding network 120, that is, IP terminals, analog telephones, ιρ A terminal such as a telephone or an IP audio and video device performs communication between the terminals. ° 5 · Fifth embodiment having a different structure of the gateway This embodiment has a structure of the gateway 9 —! Shown in FIG. 51 of the second embodiment. Different other embodiments will be described with reference to Fig. 73. 9-5 is a gateway, 74-5 is a router, 78_5 is a domain name server, 79-5 is a management terminal for login and authentication to the gateway 9_5, and The ras mechanism of the internal state of the gateway 9-5 (such as a communication state and a rest state). Here The so-called "terminal login" to continue to the end to clear the way, the so-called "certification" system table does not confirm whether the terminal can be used normally in accordance with the license conditions continue terminals. The 80-5 department is in charge of the intelligence processing inside the gateway 9_5. The operation output of the 81-5 department between the 9-5 is input to the 82-3 department H323 communication. 23, 82-4 series SIP communication program door H f end, 77_3 series SCN interface '&76; 4 #, SIP ^^^ / 7'GW) * IP communication circuit of IP terminal 2 3 37: = CN interface. 52_3 series can be connected to the communication circuit of the telephone, 1p communication circuit of the 3 communication program, 113, 17 ^^ 1P telephone communication circuit of the SIP communication program. The gateway 9-5 of FIG. 73 connected to the public switched telephone network may be the gateway 9-1 of FIG. 51 of the second embodiment 2049-3793-PF: RAY.ptd page 79 1245997 V. Description of the invention (76) Exchange, router 74-5 may be replaced with router 74-1, domain name server 78-5 may be replaced with domain name server 78-1, 1 ^ 3 agency 79-5 May be replaced with RAS agency 79-1, information processing agency 80-5 may be replaced with information processing agency 80-1, operation input / output section 81-5 may be replaced with operation input / output section 81-1, and charge section 72-5 may be replaced with charge section 72-1 replacement, H323 connection control unit 7 5-3 may be replaced with Η 3 2 3 connection control unit 7 5 -1, Η 3 2 3 terminal unit 76-3 may be replaced with Η323 terminal unit 76-1, SCN interface 77 -3 can be introduced with SCN

The function of surface 77-1 is replaced. Therefore, after the gateway 9-5 in FIG. 73 is replaced with the gateway 9-1 in FIG. 51, the IP terminal is connected to the IP communication circuit 52-3, and the IP telephone of the H323 communication program is connected! The receiver is connected to the communication circuit 53-3, the analog telephone is connected to the communication circuit 17-3, and the gateway 11-1 of FIG. 52 is connected to the second embodiment of the integrated IP transfer network 2 through the gateway 9-5. 〇, 18-6, etc., and can communicate. H323-GW 82-3 is "Gateway communication interface function department" for H323 communication program. H323-GW 82-3 and SIP-GW 82-4 correspond to the communication circuit interfaces provided by two communication programs. When a new communication method is developed in the future, a gateway for a new communication method can be added to the closed positions 82-3 and 8 2-4. Through a plurality of gateway communication interface function units including communication programs, telephone connection control corresponding to various communication programs can be performed. 6. The sixth embodiment using the telephone management server In FIG. 74, the 201 system is combined with the IP communication network, the 202 is an IP data network, the 203 is an IP telephone network, the 204 is an audio and video network, and the 206-1 is used by the communication company The range of the integrated IP communication network to be managed, 20 6-2 is the range of the integrated IP communication network that the communication company 2 uses to manage. Referring to Fig. 74 and Fig. 75, the telephone communication will be described.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 80 1245997 V. Preparation of the description of the invention (77) From the analog telephone 2 1 3-5, via the media router Qiu ^ communication circuit 21〇-1, the branch device 208- 丨, IP telephone network 203. To the branch office device 209_2, the communication circuit 21〇_5, and the media router, the method of controlling the inter-terminal communication for telephone communication of the type Λ telephone driver 214-4 'is carried out. Here, 221_ 丨 are various routers. In addition, various servers are set inside the integrated IP communication network 201, and t servers are given "addresses." As shown in Fig. 74, various servers and routers Are connected through various IP communication circuits. IP packets are transmitted and received through various communication methods, and data exchange can be performed. 2094 and 2092 are telephone gateways, for example, from the analog telephone 2009_4 to exchange telephones through the public. The network 209-3 can perform telephone communication, and related parties will be described in other embodiments. Furthermore, the telephone management servers 3135 and 314_5 are roughly equivalent to the connection servers 1-5 and 6 of FIG. 1. Gateway 2009_1 and 2009_2 are roughly equivalent to the relay connection server 7 in Fig. 1. The functions of these gateways will be described in other embodiments. 213-1 and 214-1 are the analog telephones? , 213 — 2 to 213-6 and 214-2 to 214-6 are analog telephones. Telephones 213-2 and 213-3 are connected to PBX 213-1, and telephones 214-2 and 214-3 are connected to PBX 214. -1 'Phones 213-4 to 213-6 are connected to the media router 212, and phones 214-4 to 214 -6 is connected to the media router 212-2. The media router 212-1 is assigned the ip address &quot; EA01 &quot;, and the media router 212-2 is assigned the IP address πΕΑ02η. The telephones 213-4 to 213-6 are assigned The delegate's telephone number `` Tel-No-Γ, telephones 214-4 to 214-6 are delegated to the telephone number ffTel-No-2 &quot;, and the telephones 213-2, 213-3, 214-2

1245997 V. Invention Description (78) and 214-3 were granted extension telephone numbers &quot; 2132 &quot;, π2133π, &quot; 2142 &quot;, and &quot; 2143π. 21 2-1 communicates with the telephone set on the IP telephone network 203 side. Similarly, the telephones 21 4-2 and 214-3 for the extension line do not communicate with the telephone set on the IP telephone network 203 side through the media router 212-2. &Lt; &lt; Preparation for telephone communication >〉 The user 227-1 who wishes to use the IP telephone requests the IP telephone acceptor 228-1 belonging to the communication company 1 to use the IP telephone service (step P100 in FIG. 75), and the IP telephone acceptor 2 2 8-1 The name and address of the user who obtained the IP phone request information from the user 227-1, the method of payment of the communication fee, the user's phone number &quot; Tel-No-Γ, and will be awarded to the media router 212 -1 External IP address &quot; ΕΑ0Γ &quot;, an identification mark &quot; L21 0-1 &quot; used by the user to connect to the communication circuit 210-1 of the media router 212-1, and this communication circuit 210-1 to connect to the network device 208-1 Network device identification mark "NN —208-1", notifying the user service server 3 13-6 (Step P1 〇1). Here, the user 227-1 presents the IP address &quot; ΕΑ0Γ to the IP phone receiver 228 — 1. The user will correspond to the user's phone number &quot; Tel_N〇-- 丨，， ιρAddress 1A01 &quot; is set to the media router 212-i. Then, the user service server 31 3-6 grants the user identification code &quot; UID-1 &quot; for identifying the telephone user accepted The person 227-1, &quot; uuy &quot; is corresponded to the external 1? Address EA 0 Γ1, and determines the internal used by the user 2 2 7 -1! The p address &quot; 丨 a 〇J &quot; User name or address, payment method of communication fee, user phone number π Tel-Νο-Γ, external IP address "EA〇1", and other information are stored together in the database of the user service server ( Step pl02). by

I side

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 82 1245997

Use the external address π EA 〇 1π corresponding to the telephone number for the telephone 213-5, so ^ EA 〇 1π 'Therefore, in the telephone communication using the telephone network 2 03, the external IP of the telephone 213-5 The address is expressed as "EA〇1". Device 31 3-6 will at least include the requester's external IP address' fEA01 &quot; and internal IP address method of the phone management server 31 3-Second, the user service server user The telephone number `` Tel-No -1'1 address '' ΙΑ0Γ informs the use of IP communication 5 (step P103).

The telephone I management server 313-5 corresponds to the three types of information, namely the user, the telephone number &quot; Tel-Nο-Γ, the external IP address &quot; EA〇1 &quot;, and the internal ιρ address IA0 Γ. The i group of information notifies the telephone domain name server 313-2 (step P05). The telephone domain name server 313_2 saves the user's phone number &quot; Tel-No- 丨 &quot; and &quot; external address &quot; according to the resource record of the operating rules of the domain name server defined by RFn 996, etc., and 11 internal IP address &quot; (step p 丨 〇6). In addition, the telephone management server 313-5 notifies the table management servers 313-3 of the four addresses, EA01, EA81, IA01, and IA8Γ (step p7). In addition, the telephone management server 31 3-5 often stores the external IP address &quot; EA81 &quot; and the internal 1 &quot; ia8i &quot; of the agent telephone management server 313-1.

When the watch server 313-3 informs the outlet device 2008-i of the aforementioned four addresses &quot; EA01, EA81, IA01, IA81 &quot; (step ρι〇8), the outlet is stored in 208-1 The point device 2 08 shown in FIG. 76 — Internal address management ^ 360-1 shows four addresses ΠΑΑΙ, ea8i &quot; (step P109). Here, the address "IA〇1" is the address of the connection point (logic terminal) of the communication circuit 2i0y and the cycle device 208-1, hereinafter referred to as 1245997.

It is the internal IP address of the logic terminal of the communication circuit 210-1. Furthermore, at this point, the record in the second line of the address management table 360-1 becomes blank. The record of the first line of the address management table 3 6 0 -1 of the month is called the IP communication record of the address management table of the network device, which is based on the external address of the sending end, the p address &quot; EA01 &quot;, and the receiving end. The external IP address &quot; EA81 &quot;, the internal 1? Address of the sender &quot; I A0 Γ, the internal of the receiver 丨 p address "丨 A8 丨" are defined. This communication record is particularly referred to as the communication record for determining the address management table of the network device of the IP communication path between the agent telephone management server 3 1 3 -1 and the media router 2 1 2-1.

Similarly, the user 227-2 wishing to use the IP phone requests the IP phone receiver 228-2 belonging to the communication company 2 to use the IP phone service (step P110 in FIG. 75), and the IP phone receiver 228-2 requests the user from the user 227 -2 users who have obtained IP phone request information, address, payment method of communication fee, user's phone number "Tel-No-2", and will be given an external IP address of Media Router 212-2 & quot "EA02", the identification code of the communication circuit 210-5 used by the user to connect the media router 212-2 "L210-5, ', and the identification code of the network device connected to the network device 209-2 by this communication circuit 210-5 &quot; NN-209-2Π, notify the user service server 314-6 (step P111).

Here, the user 227-2 presents the IP address, 1 EA 02 &quot; to the IP telephone manager 228-2. The user will correspond to the user's phone number "Tel-No-2," and the IP address EA02 α will again be on the media router 212-2. Then, the user service server 31 4-6 will be used to identify the acceptance The user identification code UID-2 of the telephone user is granted to the user 227-2, corresponding to the external IP address "ΕΑ02, ', the decision

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 84 1245997

V. Description of the invention (81) Specify the internal IP address &quot; IA02 &quot; for the user 227-2, the user name or address, the payment method of the communication fee, and the user's phone number &quot; Tel-No -2 &quot;, external IP address &quot; EA02 &quot; and other information are stored together in the database of the user service server (step P112). Since the telephone 214-4 uses the corresponding telephone number &quot; Tel-No —2 " The external address &quot; e \ 〇2, 'Therefore, in the telephone communication using the IP telephone network 203, the external IP addresses of the telephones 214 to 4 are represented as ΠΕΑ02Π.

Secondly, 'use the service servers 314-6 to notify at least the user's phone number &quot; Tel-No-2 &quot; of the aforementioned requester, external IP address &quot; ΕΑ〇2 &quot;, internal ^ address &quot; ΙΑ02 " The telephone management server 314-5 using the IP communication method (step P113). The telephone management server 314-5 informs the telephone network of these three kinds of information, that is, the user's telephone number "Tel-No-2", an external 1? Address, εα〇2π, = internal IP address &quot; ΙΑ02 &quot; Domain name feeder 3ΐ4-2 (step, P115). The telephone domain name server 314-2 saves the user's phone number &quot; Tel-N0-2 &quot; and the internal IP address &quot; IA02 "phase is a group of information that corresponds to each other (step P116). In addition, the telephone management server 314_5 sends the four addresses U02, IA82 &quot; to the notification table management server 314_3 (step ριι ^ Α82

Feed service / service service 11314-5 often save agent phone management Γ = Λ: IP address and internal IP address &quot; IA82 &quot;. The phone shoulder domain name servers 313_2 and 314_2 have the same machine as the domain name feeder used in the Internet, and if necessary, they can call each other out of this place, and it is necessary to "^"). The information that the phone domain name server has (step

1245997

When the official server 31 4-3 informs the outlet device 209-2 of the aforementioned four addresses &quot; EA02, EA82, IA02, IA821, (step P118), the outlet device 209-2 saves Figure 77 The address management table ^ 60-2 shown in the outlet device 209-2 shown in the first record of the four addresses &quot; EA〇2, EA82, IA〇2, U82 (step PI 19). Here, the address "IA〇2" is the address of the connection point (logical terminal) of the communication circuit 21-0 and the network device 209-2. Furthermore, at this point, the address management table The record of the second line of 360-2 becomes blank. This is the address management table of the network device that determines the IP communication path between the agent telephone management server 314 and the media router 21 2-2. 1? Pass

&lt; &lt; Communication channel establishment stage> &gt; With reference to Fig. 74, Fig. 76 to Fig. 78, a method for controlling communication connection between terminals of telephone calls from the telephone set 21-15 to the telephone set 14-4 will be described. The media router 212-1 holds the phone number "1 ^ 11〇-1" and external 1 {} to EA01, and the media router 212-2 holds the phone number, Tei-No-2, and j: IP address &quot; EA02, talk to other telephones on telephone 213_5 &quot; find, use the phone number &quot; TeiN〇i 'which is granted to the media router ^ 2 &quot; and use the authorized media when phone 214-4 is talking to other telephones -The telephone number of the router 212-2 "Tel_N0_2 &quot;. Eight

&lt; &lt; Continuation stage >〉 Enter the telephone receiver 21 3-5 (off-hook), dial the telephone number of the telephone 214-4 at the destination of the communication, "Tel-N0_2,", When the media router 2 丨 2 —i (step ρ2〇), the media road field answers (step P201).

1245997 V. Description of the invention (83)-The media router 21 2-1 forms at least the telephone number of the sending end &quot; T e 1-N 〇-1π, the telephone number of the burning end &quot; T e 1-N 〇- 2 ' 'The IP packet of the user's personal information (User_Info ·) (3 79 in Fig. 79) is transmitted to the network device 208-1 to start the procedure for setting the call (step p204). Furthermore, 'User-Info ·' refers to a person who can reach the media router 212-2 in step P219 of a program described later, for example, a telephone call identifier ("C-id "), The identification of the voice compression method of the IP phone. The symbol and the identification symbol for the conversion and encoding of the sound symbol are composed of ^. The payload part of the IP packet 379 in FIG. 79 is called a UDp section. For example, the sending port number and the receiving port number are called "5060", which can be used to distinguish the internal telephone communication connections of the media routers 212-1 and 212-2. Control programs and others. When the network device 208-1 receives the IP packet, it searches the address management table 360-1 shown in FIG. 76, and searches for the sender's address &quot; EA01 &quot; and the trusted end's IP address &quot; as the external IP address. EA81's record. In this example \, when you find the record in the first row from the address management table 360-1, that is, the record of "EA〇1, EA81, IA01, IA81 &quot;, use the third and third records recorded in this record. The four IP addresses &quot; IA01 &quot; and &quot; IA81 &quot; apply the 1? Packet encapsulation technology to form the IP packet 38o of the internal IP packet as shown in Figure 80, and send it to the agent with the IP address π ΙΑ8Γ The telephone management server 313 — (step p205). Here, the payload portion of the IP packet 380 is the IP packet 379. When the agent telephone management server 313-1 receives the IP packet 38, the payload portion is IP. The IP packet 381 of the packet 379 is transmitted to the telephone management server 313_5 whose IP address is "ΙΑ9Γ" (step p206).

1245997 V. Description of the invention (84), the device 313-5 determines the communication circuit identifier (CIC- 丨) based on the combination of the telephone number "1 ^ 14〇_1" of the sending end and the telephone number "Tel-No-2" of the receiving end. ―2): 'For example, CIC-l-2 = &quot; Te No-l "+" Tel-No-2 ", and save the communication circuit identifier (CIC_1-2) in the telephone management server 313-5 . Here "" + π means to enumerate phone numbers (links to information). ^ The telephone management server 313-5 will notify the telephone domain name server of "Tel-Nο-Γ" and the telephone number of the receiving end "Tel-νο-2" received in the foregoing step P206. 313-2 (step ρ2〇7), receiving a one-to-one correspondence with the telephone number &quot; 1 ^ 丨 4〇-1 &quot; from the telephone domain name server 313-2, and the internal IP address IP address &quot; ΙΑ〇1 &quot;, and 1-to-1 corresponding to the phone number &quot; 1 ^ 11〇-2 ", 1 卩 address &quot; ^ 02 &quot; and internal 11 &gt; address &quot; 1person〇2 &quot; (Step P208). Here, the telephone domain name server 313_2 uses the function of re-calling, and inquires the telephone domain name server 311-2 and obtains the IP address information of the telephone number "Tel-No-2". The telephone management server 313-5 Check whether the lp address &quot; ΕΑ〇ι &quot; received from the telephone domain name server 313-2 is the same as the IP address (EA01) of the sender obtained from the IP packet 381 in step P2 06. In case of inconsistency, the procedure for terminating the telephone connection will be terminated. In the case of agreement, the IP address of the sender's telephone "EA01", the internal 1 'address: ΙΑ〇1], and the 1' address of the receiver's telephone " ; EA〇2 ,, and internal ιρ address 2 are additionally stored in the previously saved communication circuit identifier (CIC-1-2). Corrected, on. Furthermore, the IP used to integrate communication between servers in the 1 P communication network is integrated. The internal IP address is transmitted and received in the form shown in Figure 82. The network device is not a server. The IP packets transmitted and received between the network device and the agent telephone Lüli servo are shown in Figure 84 and shown in Figure 84. Of

1245997 V. Description of the invention (85) The IP packet in the form of encapsulation, the IP packet sent and received at the branch device and the media router is the IP packet at the previous stage, as shown in Figure 79. JR 1k then 'Phone Management Temple Server 313-5 will contain the sender's IP address &quot; ΕΑ01 &quot;, the internal IP address &quot; ΙΑ01 &quot;, the sender's phone number ^ Tel-No-l, the trusted End phone number "Tel-N0-2", user u personal information (User Info ·), and communication circuit identifier ((: 1 (&gt; 1-^^^ packet (IAM packet), via communication company 1 The representative server (step P214) is transmitted to the telephone management server 314-5 of the communication company 2 via the representative server 314-7 (step p2i5) of the communication company 2 (step p216). The telephone management server 314-5 receives 4 IP addresses &quot; EA01, ΙΑ〇1, EA〇2, IA02 &quot;, 2 phone numbers &quot; Tel-No- 丨 &quot; and &quot; Tel-N〇-2, &quot;, communication circuit identifier (CIC-1 -2), and user personal information (User-Inf.) 'Are stored inside other than user personal information (User-Info ·). In addition, the internal address &quot; IA92 "phone management server 314- 5. The IP packet 383 of FIG. 83 is notified to the internal IP address "IA82" of the agent telephone management server 314-1 (step P21 7). Here, the IP packet Series 383 contains the IP address of the sender's phone `` ΕΑ0Γ, the IP address of the receiver's phone "EA〇2", the sender's phone number nTel-No-1 ", and the receiver's phone number" Tel-No- 2, and, and user-info. Therefore, the agent telephone management server 314-1 forms the IP packet 384 of FIG. 84 and transmits it to the network device 209-2 (step P218), and the network device 209 -2 Remove the header 'of the IP packet 384 and perform inverse encapsulation of the IP packet to form the IP packet 385' shown in FIG. 85 and transmit it to the media router 212-2 (step P21 9). The media router

1IHI Page 89 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (86) 212_2 Obtaining the IP address of the sender's phone "ΕΑΟΓ, the IP address of the receiver's phone ΠΕΑ02", the phone number of the sender &quot; Tel -No-Γ, the recipient's phone number &quot; Tel-No-2, ", and User-Info. Next, the 'media router 212-2 adds the two phone numbers "Tel-No-1" and "Tel-No-2π" to the telephone management server 314-5 (step 卩) 221,? 222,? 223), the telephone management server 314-5 returns the communication circuit identifier (cjcu) from the two received telephone numbers "Tel-No-Γ and" Tel-Nο-2π ", and then The received Iρ packet (ACM packet) containing the aforementioned information of the communication circuit identifier (dC- 丨 _2) is transmitted to the media router 212-1 via the telephone management server 313-5 (steps P224 to P229). Second, the media router 212-2 will call out (letter) and notify the phone 214-4 / step P230), and the phone 214_4 will make an electrical call as soon as it knows there is a call. The media router 212-2 will make the aforementioned call The telephone number of the phone number 2 and 2 is "Outgoing," and the phone number of the receiving party "Tel-N0 ~ 2" is added, through the network device, '231), and through the agent phone management server (step p232). Telephone conversation management feeder 3i4_5 (step p233). Communication Division 2 = The server 314-5 uses the phone number delivered from the media router 212-2, and returns the phone number to TelitNo. TehNo — 2 ^ Λ A identifier (CIC-1_2), and then confirms the receipt packet [Guang Bingji: (CIC + 2) the aforementioned information packet (CPG packet P236) the telephone management server 313 ~ 5 (step 4, P235, telephone supervision server 313-5 receives the aforementioned CpG packet and seals it from cpG

1245997

The packet reads the communication circuit identifier (Cic-1, 1-2). Next, the telephone management server 313-5 uses the communication circuit identifier (CIC-1-2) to read out the address and telephone number stored in step P214, and at least the media router 212-1 that will connect the sender's telephone 1? Address `` EA01 ", 1? Address &quot; EA02 &quot; of the media router 212-2 connected to the phone of the receiving end, phone number" Tel-N〇- 丨 "of the sending end, and phone number` `Tel -No-2 "is transmitted to the agent telephone management server 31 3-1 (step P237), and the network device 210-1-(step p238) is notified to the media router 212-1 (step? 239). Media Router 212-1 Will Receive Phone

214-4 The outgoing call is notified to the sender telephone 213-15 (step p24), and the sender telephone 213-5 emits an outgoing tone.

On the one hand, when the user of the telephone set 214-4 hears the outgoing call tone and picks up the handset of the telephone set (off hook), the IP phone 2 丨 4-4 notifies the media router 212-2 of the off hook (step P241) The router 21 2-2 notifies the off-hook notification via the network device 209-2 (step P242), and then via the agent telephone management server (step P243), and notifies the telephone management server 314-5 (step P244). The telephone management server 31 4-5 of the communication company 2 responds to the communication circuit identifier (CIC-1-2) from the sending telephone number `` Tel-Nο-Γ ”and the receiving telephone number &quot; Tel-No-2 &quot;, An ip packet (ANM packet) confirming receipt of the aforementioned information including the communication circuit identifier (CIC-1-2) is formed and transmitted to the telephone management server 313-5 (steps P245, P246, and P247). The telephone management server 313-5 receives the ANM packet and reads the communication circuit identifier (CIC-1-2) from the AN M packet. The telephone management server 314-5 uses the communication saved at step P2 45

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 91 1245997

The circuit identifier (CIC-1-2) reads the IP address and telephone number stored in step P217. Next, the telephone management server 314-5 will send the IP address `` ΕΑΟΓ and the internal IP address "of the sender's telephone, and the IP address of the media router 21 2-2 connected to the receiver's telephone, &quot; ΕΑ02Π and The internal IP address "IA02" informs the table management server 314-3 (step P250). The table management server 314-3 will identify the communication circuit identifier (dc- 丨 -2), the 1? Address of the sender's telephone &quot; EA01 ”and internal IP address“ IA01 ”, the“ address EA 0 2 ”and internal IP address I a 0 2π of the receiving end telephone are stored internally, and are also stored in the address management table 360- 2 (step P251). This sample is shown in the second row of the address management table 360-2 in Figure 77. The electric activity management server 3 1 3-5 uses the communication circuit identifier (CIC-1-2) read out above, and reads out the ip address and phone number stored in memory at step P214. Next, the telephone management server 31 3-5 sets the communication circuit identifier (CIC-1-2), the IP address of the transmitting-side media router 212-1 π ΑΑ0Γ and the internal IP address `` ΙΑ0Γ, and the receiving-end media router 212- 2 ’s IP address ”ΕΑ02 &quot; and internal IP address &quot; ΙΑ02Π notify the table management server 313-3 (step P252), and the table management server 31 3-3 sends the communication circuit identifier (Cl01-2) and the sender The IP address of the phone &quot; ΕΑ0Γ and the internal IP address &quot; I Α01 &quot;, the IP address of the trusted telephone set π EA02 &quot; and the internal IP address &quot; IA02 &quot; 1 internal address management table 360-1 (step P2 53). In this way, as shown in the second row of the address management table 360-1 in Figure 76. Figure 76 address management table 360-1 The second line of the record is set in the "IP communication record of the address management table" in the branch device.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 92 1245997

The external IP address of the receiving terminal The IP address of the receiving terminal π I A 0 2π is defined based on the external IP address of the transmitting terminal π ΕΑΟ Γ ΕΑ〇2 ", the internal IP address of the transmitting terminal &quot; ΙΑΟΓ.

The 1P communication record in the second row of the bit management table 360-1 contains the external IP address μ and the external IP address &quot; EA〇2 &quot; to determine the media router 212-1 that is granted the external 1 bit 1) 1. The IP communication route between the router and the external IP address &quot; EA〇2 &quot; = router 212_2. The second of the address management table 36〇2 also determines the media router 21 &quot; and the media route

Furthermore, the external IP address of the sender, EA01 &quot; system i to 1 corresponds to the telephone number K, ei-No-1 &quot;, and it is determined that the external IP address of the sender &quot; EIA2 &quot; The telecontrol number Tel-No-2 "is determined. When there is no difference between the sender and the receiver, the IP communication record of the address management table of the network device is only to determine the telephone number" Tel-No-1 "and Record of the address management table of the IP communication channel of the telephone number "Tel-N0-2".

The foregoing step P245 is a response information for confirming the call setting, that is, a procedure for notifying that the telephone communication can be started between the telephone 2 13-5 and the telephone 214-4. The telephone official feeding device 31 4-5 will, for example, be a communication circuit identifier (CIC- 1-2), IP address of sending media router 212-1 &quot; EA01 &quot;, IP address of receiving media router 212-1 &quot; EA02 &quot;, sending phone number &quot; Tebu No-I &quot;, receiving Terminal telephone number &quot; Tel-No-2 &quot;, based on the time when telephone communication can be started, notify the charge management server 314-4 (step P254). The charge management server 314-4 can record and save the communication circuit identifier (CIC -1-2), the phone number of the sending end "Tel-No-1", the phone number of the receiving end

1245997 V. Description of the invention (90) Code &lt; Tel-No-2 · ', 1? Address of sending media router 212-1, eaoi,, IP address of receiving media router 21 2-2 Address "EA02f, etc. (Step P254) 1 Similarly, the charge management server 31 3-4 can record and save the sender's phone number" Te Bu No-1 ", the recipient's phone number &quot; Te ^ N0-2 &quot;, The IP address “EA〇1” of the sending telephone, the receiver of the receiving telephone, and the user answering the phone call when the user starts the call, that is, the pH is controlled by the proxy phone server 313—κ step =: 2 = = point Device 2, (step P257), and via the media) 'Notify telephone 213-5 (step_). From step 2 to step 11 of sending and receiving call 11 which will call 2 2, # $ 213_5, a series of steps to notify telephone 213-5 (Step P259) A series of steps, called telephone communication connection and indirect continuity control, will pass through the network terminal f 2 ^ and the above-mentioned terminal route β ι 1 via the communication circuit M 0 — 1, 219 1 represents the server 313_7, 314-7, routing circuit 370-5 connected to the outlet device 209_2 w

The "connection." Circuit of the telephone network 203㈣, called the "IP circuit system, is used to transmit inverse technology to you" connection control packet. It is used to transmit and receive the communication connection control between terminals. &Lt; &lt; Communication stage >> Refer to Fig. 8 6 to Fig. 8 q $ ^ is transmitted to the media router (step 5 to the voice of the telephone 213-5) Digitized IP packets: and 22) 'Media router will form the sound ^ and transmit it to the network device 208-U Step P3 01) Page 94 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (91 ) ° IP packet 3 8 7 is encapsulated and transformed into internal 丨 p packet 3 8 8 via communication circuit 370-3, router 21 9-5, 21 9-7, 221-1, 21 9-10, 219- 9. Communication circuit 370-6 arrives at the outlet device 2009-2 (step P 302) 'By removing the header's inverse encapsulation, transforming the p packet 3 8 9 via the media router 212-2 (step P303) , And arrive at the telephone 214-4 (step P304). The voice of the user of the telephone 214-4 flows in the reverse direction, that is, via the media router 212-2 (step P305), the branch office device 209-2 (step P 3 0 6), and the router 2 1 9-9, 21 9 -1 0, 2 2 1 -1, 2 1 9-7, 21 9-5,

Arrive at the branch office device 208-1 (step P307), and then via the media router 212-1 (step P308), and reach the telephone 213-5 (step P309). In the above communication phase, the payload part of IP packets 387 and 389 is called the UDP section. By changing the UDP port numbers of the sender and the receiver to, for example, &quot; 50 04 &quot;, &quot; 50 0 6 &quot;, &quot; 5010 &quot;, &Quot; 5012 ", &quot; 5016 · ', etc., it is possible to perform telephone communication for transmitting other sounds. Since the packet 388 containing the digitized sound is transmitted from the branch device 208-1 through the communication circuit 370-3, the router 219-5, 219-7, 221-1, 219-10, 219-9, and communication circuit 370-6 are transferred to the communication circuit of the connection point device 209-2. This ip communication circuit is called the "voice" in the IP telephone network 203 The "communication circuit" is distinguished from the "connection control circuit" of the IP telephone network 203 in the aforementioned connection stage.

In the communication phase, the record in the second line of the address management table 360-1 in FIG. 76 is the external IP address of the sender &quot; EA 0 1 &quot;, the external IP address of the sender &quot; ΕΑ02Π, the sender Internal IP address &quot; IA01 &quot;, the IP communication record of the internal IP address π IA 0 2π of the trusted end, which is used to determine the IP between the telephone number n Tel-No-Γ and the telephone number "Tel-No-2" Address tube of communication circuit

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 95 1245997 V. Description of the invention (92) Record of the management table. <& Release Phase> As explained with reference to FIG. 9G, the user of the telephone set 2 13-5 sends back because of the telephone communication connection ^: when the telephone is turned on 212-1 (step P400), the media = basket router ^ ^ @ ^, The dead router 212-1 generates an IP packet containing at least the indication of the release of the phone, the phone number of the sending end, Tei_N〇— 丨 &quot;, the receiving end's code ^ 'Τ'ν〇-2 ” When transmitting to the network device 208-1 (step P401), the network device is redundant. The network device 208 -1 uses the address of FIG. 76 to manage tp 4+: the first two records, and generate 1P to be received. The packet is encapsulated and transmitted to the agent telephone management server 313 — (step p402). Second, the agent telephone management server 313-1 forms a representation of the release request of the phone including the router: Send a 1? Packet of the state Tel No-1 and the recipient's phone number &quot; Tel-No-2 &quot;, and send it to the telephone management server (step p4〇3). The steps described above include 0, P40 2 The method of setting the IP packet or IP address used in P403 and P403 and the steps in the connection phase of the telephone communication 2004, p205, and p206 are the same. The telephone management server 31 3-5 responds to the communication circuit identifier 2) with two telephone numbers "Tel-No-Γ and" Tel-No-2 ", and includes The release request of the telephone communication indicates the IP packet (REL packet) of the communication circuit identifier (CICu) and transmits it to the representative server 3j3-7 of the communication company! (Step P404). The aforementioned IP packet is transmitted by the representative server of the communication company 2. Device 314-7 (step P405), and arrive at the telephone management server 314-5 managed by the communication company 2 (step P406). Second, the telephone management server 313-5 will go through the steps from 1 to 1245997 V. Description of the invention (93) The release-end IP packet that reports the release request is sent back to the media router 212-1 via the agent telephone management server 313-1 and the network device 208-1 (steps 407, 卩 408, and 409). The telephone management server 313-5 transmits the IP packet containing the communication circuit identifier (CIC-1-2) to the table management server 313-3 (step P433). Since the table management server 313-3 performs the foregoing step P252 , Save the address corresponding to the identifier of the communication circuit (CIC — 丨 _2) Confirm that the clear instructions of 4 IP addresses &quot; EA01, EA02, IA01, IA02 &quot; have been received to clear the second line of the address management table 360-1 inside the network device 208-1 shown in Figure 76 Records, that is, the external IP address of the sender &quot; ΕΑ0Γ, the external IP address of the sender &quot; EA〇2 &quot;, the internal IP address of the sender IA 0 1, and the internal IP address of the sender &quot; IA 0 2, ' , IP communication record (step P ^ 4). In other words, the record of the address management table of the IP communication path between the telephone number &quot; Tel-No- 丨 &quot; and the telephone number Tel-No-2 &quot; is cleared. ^ The telephone management server 314-5 receives an IP packet containing the indication of the release request of the telephone communication and the communication circuit identifier via step P406, forms an IP packet of the release request, and transmits it to the agent telephone management server 314-1, indicating the release The requested lp packet is set to 209-2 via the network and reaches the media router 212-2 (steps p4n, p4l2, p4j p ° 4). ^ The telephone management server 31 4-5. The 1? Packet H of the communication circuit identifier transmits the aforementioned RLC packet to the representative server 314-7 of the communication company 2 (step P414). The aforementioned RLC packet passes through the router 3U-7 (step P415) and arrives at the communication company] under management The ^ Sici server 313-5 (step P416) β received the end of the release 1? Of the packet \ &amp; reason

1245997 V. Description of the invention (94) '一 &quot; &quot; &amp; management server 3 1 3-5 When the end of the telephone communication is notified to the charging server = 313-4 (step P442), the charging management server 313_4 knows Through the communication, the telephone communication identified by the 1-channel number (CIC-1-2) is ended, and the result is recorded internally. Next, the telephone management server 314_5 transmits the IP packet containing the communication circuit identifier (CIC ^ l-2) to the table management server 314-3 (step p43i), and the table management server 314-3 clears the network point shown in FIG. 77 The contents of the record in the second line of the address official form 3 6 0-2 inside the device 209 — 2 "e A 〇2 &quot;, &quot; EA 0 1 ,, &quot; IA02 &quot;, &quot; 4 addresses of IA01 "(P432). When the media router 212_2 knows the release request of the telephone communication through step P413, it does not send the call disconnection finger to the phone 214-5 (step P420), and then sends the IP packet that reports the release completion of the release request through step P413 and sends Back to the network device 209-2, the agent telephone management server, the telephone management server, and 314-5 (steps P421, P423, and P424). The telephone management server 314-5 notifies the end of the telephone communication of the calling number to the charge management server (step _), and the charge management server 14-4 learns that the telephone communication identified by the pass 1 = code (CIC-1-2) is ended And record the result &lt; &lt; incidental matters of telephone communication connection control &gt; &gt; ^ In the case where the telephone user performs telephone communication for a long time without ending the telephone communication, that is, FIG. 9 is not performed. The call ends at step P400. At this time, there is a problem that the telephone communication fee is very high. In order to avoid this, for example, the telephone management server 313-5 asks to check out the charge management server 313 — * for a long time, for example, every 24 hours.

Φ

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 98 1245997

5. Description of the invention (95) For long-term telephone communication, steps P400 to P403 of Fig. 90 can be removed, and only steps P404, P407, P433, and P442 can be performed separately. &lt; Method of collecting other communication fees &gt; &gt;

As for the communication fee, for example, the charging information collecting feeder for the communication company 1 is installed in the integrated IP communication network 2 001, the charging information collected by the charging management temple server 3 1 3-4 is collected, and the user is notified of the service The server 3 1 3-6 can request the telephone fee from the charging server and the telephone user. The communication company 2 may similarly install a charge information collection server. The communication information collected above can be exchanged between the communication company 1 and the communication company 2 using the IP communication devices via the communication company representative servers 131-7 and 314-7. &lt; &lt; When the communication company is a company &gt; &gt; When the operation management range 206-2 of the communication company 2 in FIG. 74 does not exist, and the IP telephone network 203 becomes the operation management range of the Tonghua company 1, the above telephone connection stage &amp; motion is possible. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 91, the operation management range 206-2 of the communication company 2 is changed to the operation management range of the communication company 1, the representative server 314-7 of the communication company 2 is abolished, and routers 219-1 and 219-2 At the same time, it is connected by IP communication circuit. As such, in the continuation phase of the aforementioned telephone communication, steps P214 to p216 shown in FIG. 78 become as shown in FIG. 92.

P214X 'Steps P224 to P226 shown in FIG. 78 become P224X shown in FIG. 92' Steps P234 to P236 shown in FIG. 78 become P234X shown in FIG. 92 'Steps P245 to P247 shown in FIG. 78 become shown in FIG. 92 P245X, the other steps are the same. ^ All preparations for a series of telephone communications by the communication company 2 have been changed to preparations for the telephone communications of the communication company 1. With the telephone during the telephony connection phase

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 99 1245997

^ § The foregoing in the Ps paragraph—in a series of steps, the remaining server 313-5 and the telephone management server 314_5, the lower server management server 313_7 and the communication company 5 of the server management server 1, and the communication supervisor is omitted. -A series of steps. Further, the telephone server representative server Kawa-7 and the telephone management server 314-5 can also be used as an integrated telephone server 3 丨 3-5 In this way, in the aforementioned telephone communication connection stage, ρ214 × ^ 224 ×× P234 × ^ P245 ×, ^ ,, ^^ 72Γ P233, P244, P250, and P251 are respectively changed to ρ2, P223 ×, P233 ×, P244 ×, P250 ×, and P251 × as shown in FIG. 93. The other steps are the same.

&lt; &lt; Description of connection control of telephone management server &gt; &gt;. In the previous step P214 for communication from the telephone management server 313-5 to the server 31 3-7 representing the communication company, you can know the telephone number of the trusted party before asking the telephone domain name server 31 3-2. Tel -N〇-2 &quot; Whether it belongs to (whether to join) the IP phone network managed by its own communications company 'or whether it joins the IP phone network managed by other communications companies' use, the following procedures are performed. 31 3-5 Use of "telephone number carrier list" to solve this problem. A description will be given using an example of a carrier classification table with a telephone number shown in FIG. As a record of the consecutive number 1 of the division table of the communication company, π 81-3-5414-xxxx is displayed in the phone number &quot; column, and π Νοπ is displayed in the &quot; own company? "Communication company identification information" column shows "C 0m -1 3 Οπ. &Quot; XXX X &quot; Agent 1 〇 Carry '〇〇〇〇〇' to '9 9 9 9', in this example, the phone Number 81 -3-5414-0000 to 81-3-5414-

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 100 1245997 V. Description of the invention (97) 9999 belongs to the record of serial number 2 of the IP telephone network 'Communication company classification table managed by the communication company identified through Com-1 30 The phone number "1-2245-5 678" belongs to the IP phone network managed and managed by the communication company identified through Com-025. The telephone number on the record of connection number 3 of the communication company classification table "81 -47 -325-3887 &quot; is an IP telephone network managed and operated by a communication company to which the telephone management server 31 3-5 belongs. &Lt; <Explanation 2 concerning connection control of the telephone management server &gt; &gt;

In the foregoing step P214 where communication is performed from the electronic management server 3 1 3- 5 to the server 313-7 representing the communication company, even the IP phone of the recipient's telephone number &quot; Tel-No-2 &quot; is identified as Under the operation and management of your own communication company, you may also know whether the telephone number of the telephone number "Tel-No-2" connected to other telephone management servers is added to the outlet device, as described below. The telephone management server 31 3-5 solves this problem through the "phone management server classification table for telephone numbers". An example of the telephone management server classification table for the telephone number shown in Fig. 95 will be explained. The phone number on the record of serial number "81-47 -325-3887" is added to the phone management server 313-5.

Managed outlet devices (ie, connected communication circuits). The telephone number on the record of serial number 2 of the carrier's division table is 8 2224-56 χχπ is added to the telephone number "81 -2245-5600" to "81-2245-5699, and the IP position of the telephone management server The address company with the address "1 0 0 · 1 0 · 11 · 4 0π uses the managed network device (that is, the connection communication circuit). Secondly, the telephone number on § 2 of the serial number 3 of the telecommunications company division table "81-6-1234-χχχχ" is added to the telephone numbers of 81 -6- 1234-0000 to 81 -6 — 1234 -9999. Communication company operation management

1245997

5. The outlet device of the invention description (98) (that is, the connection communication circuit). &lt; <Through the use of the network of the management server, the management of the slant im1 is used to manage the feeders 3i3-9. Are the feeders 3i3-9 periodically or brought along ?: The resources within the management range 206-1, that is, the network H 2 、, routers 219-1, 219-3, 2.5, 219-6 Electric Home Network, name server 313-2, phone management server ## 电话 电话 官 理 SERVER31 3-1, table management server 31 3-3 .θ ^ 3 6. Telephone gateway 201-1, etc., by using the Ip communication device, ^ 疋, through transmission and reception of suspected packets, check whether these resources are hanging, or check the communication circuit between resources. Whether it is normal (fault management), and = by monitoring whether the IP packets in the aforementioned network are too crowded (communication quality giant), use the management of the communication company 1's operation management range 206-1 internally, including the results of operation management The fault status of the obtained communication circuit and Zhoulu resources is classified as σ. The quality status can be reported to the telephone user 227-1 through the user service server 1§313-6. Or r = two ^ letter, the management of the operation of the Division 2 314-9 series: Periodically and the operation of the Scope 2 operation management range 2 06_2 various internal communication ^ 'to check these resources Whether it is normal, or check whether the communication between the two circuits is normal (fault management), and by monitoring the aforementioned network = packets are not too crowded (communication quality management), use the management and management scope 2 of the management company 2 in a unified way 〇6 — 2 inside. Application management result = telephone user 227-2 is reported via user service server 314-6. Operate via the aforementioned network using the management servers 31 3-9 and 314-9

1245997

9 (11 ^ telephones 213_5 and 11 &gt; 11 &gt; transfer network between telephones 214_4, the reliability of connection control between the terminals of the telephone network 203 connected to the 4 ° telephone network 203 can be improved. Similarly, the management through the charge The communication fee collection devices of the servers 313_4 and 314 support the economic basis of the network operation of the communication company, and can improve the reliability of the continuous control of the communication between the terminals of the telephone network 203 in the IP transfer network 201. Make a summary and add a description as follows. That is, the IP forwarding network includes at least network points and devices, a telephone management server, a media router, a telephone domain name server, and a table management server. The user i (i =

1,2, ·) The individual external ^ address &quot; EA-i &quot; is set on the user's media router outside the IP transfer network α, and the user i's media router is connected to more than one telephone The aforementioned media router is connected to any of the aforementioned branch devices via a communication circuit, and an internal IP address π for the user i is provided to a terminal (logical terminal) on the branch device side of the aforementioned communication circuit. IA-i &quot; is assigned to the user's individual phone number on the aforementioned media router. In addition, the aforementioned telephone domain name server stores the individual telephone number of the user, the external 丨 p address of the media router &quot; ΕΑ_Γ, and the internal IP address &quot; I a-i &quot;, the aforementioned telephone domain name Servo

When the user's individual phone number is inquired, the device will answer the external IP address and internal IP address, and set the IP communication record on the branch device to determine the IP communication path between the media router and the agent telephone management server. . The request for the originating telephone set ’uses the aforementioned IP communication record and is transmitted to the telephone management server via the proxy telephone server. The aforementioned telephone management server is assigned to the telephone domain name server and obtained from the sending telephone number.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 103 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (100) — External IP address and internal IP address (&quot; Ef i IA-i ") of the sending media router The phone number of the receiving end obtains the external IP address and internal IP address (&quot; EA-j, IA-j &quot;) of the media router of the receiving end, and the server management server sets these IP addresses on the sending side respectively. The branch device and the receiving device _ _ are used as IP communication records for the telephone communication between the sender's telephone and the receiver's telephone. When the sender requests a call to set the date ^, the media router on the sender's side Send the IP packet containing the phone number of the sender and the I phone number of the sender to the phone management server on the sender's side. The phone management server on the sender's side is uniquely determined by the phone number of the sender and the phone number of the sender. Identifies the circuit number of the communication circuit used for telephone voice. Second, the telephone management server on the sender side will include the "I AM packet for requesting phone call settings" including the phone number of the sender, the phone number of the receiver, and the circuit number. The letter sent by the end of the call management server, the trusted end side of the telephone management server will aforementioned "I AM packet is received reports acm packet" via messenger management server side of the phone, sent to messenger media side by the road-side device. Furthermore, the media router on the receiving end side requires a telephone call setting on the telephone on the receiving end side. When the phone is sending a tone, the media router will notify the call management server on the receiving side during the outgoing call, and the phone management server on the receiving side will transmit the "notify CpG packet in the outgoing call" to the phone on the sending end. The management server. The telephone management server on the sender side notifies the telephone on the sender side of the outgoing call via the media router. When the telephone set on the receiving end answers the call setting request, the response is notified to the telephone management server on the receiving end by the media router on the receiving end.

1245997 V. Description of the invention (101) The phone management server on the receiving side forms an "ANM packet indicating a response to the call setting request" and sends it to the phone management server on the sending side, and the phone management server on the sending side The transmitter notifies the media router on the sender's side of the response to the call setting request, and the telephone on the sender's side stops calling, and proceeds to the call phase. When the call on the sender's or receiver's telephone ends, and a call disconnection request is notified, the disconnection request is notified to the telephone management server via the media router. The πΐΓΜ phone calls λ and calls "the telephone management server on the Chess request side uses the circuit number) to form a REL packet that requests the end of the telephone communication" and transmits it to the telephone management server on the disconnected side. Cut-off side: The official server returns "Report rl of receiving the REL packet = the phone management server to request the end of the phone communication to the media router on the side. W Yaodian = tube ^ server after the phone communication is over , Collect telephone communication records containing circuit fools !, communication time, telephone number, and can be communicated through: official feeding device and fee-based feeding device. In the telephone management device, the communication connection control between terminals or 2 A telephone management relay ΓΡ? Broad-end communication connection control 'transmit and receive the aforementioned 1AM, and write the door to reverse V: EL, RLC. Transmission and reception between the telephone management feeder and the media road field device for terminal indirect continuous control IP packet. IP: The payload part of the packet is called a segment, which is used as a phone call connection. It is a unique port number that can be used at different stages. It is also used in different telephony systems. Also, during the telephony stage Through Each phone

1245997 V. Description of the invention (102) Different UDP port numbers, even if only _ can transmit different voices to each phone \ &amp; media routers are also servers, in order to complete the transmission side of the electricity: two :: one The function of the management server of the telephone management server, the aforementioned server ^ ^ / server and the server of the trusted side of the management server, each management server, can perform the delivery of media management cry ^ Α by the agent phone Awards Xi Lei, S Guang Zun Tan P Biao; 5 bands, routers and routers and media services of the phone through the phone connection # connection &amp; and phone release phase. The aforementioned telephone management server, in order to know that the trusted terminal = 2 is under the 1? Telephone network managed and managed by its own communication company, enters into the communication company division table of the management of other telecommunications companies, such as mines, telephones, or not. 4 I know the network device where the phone number can be used if the phone number is A; The operation of the communication company is equal to the number of the telephone tube π s case server. Through the communication company ’s network equipment or various feeders, it exchanges information with the telephone. On the road, the reliability of communication connection control between terminals within the network is improved, or the reliability of communication connection control between terminals of the IP forwarding network is increased by cooperating with the charging server. 7 · Seventh Embodiment with Different Structure of Media Router: Fig. 96 is a schematic diagram for explaining the method of granting IP addresses and telephone numbers of routers, and Fig. 9 is a diagram illustrating the encapsulation of IP packets of a network device Relevant matters are described with reference to these drawings. The media router 530 accommodates IP telephones 515-1 to 515_4 and analog telephones 516-1 to 516-3, and from the circuit interface 533 to the logical communication circuit 539-; 1 to 539-3 for transmitting and receiving IP packets. Network point device 540. Here, the physical communication circuit 5 38 includes a logical communication circuit 539 — i

2049-3793.PF; RAY.ptd Page 106 1245997 V. Description of Invention (103) to 539-3. The media router 530 performs telephone call control and other main processing of the media router 530 'includes a media router main section 531, an analog interface 53 having an interface connected to an analog phone, a circuit interface 533, an address telephone number correspondence table 534, and In the telephone management table 535, the main part of the media router 531 has an IP address "EA01n ,,, EA12 ,,, fEA13 &quot; and n ADR". The IP address π ΕΑ0Γ is associated with the phone number "Tel-No-Γ 1 to 1 is added, and the IP address π ΕΑ12Π is associated with the phone number &quot; Tel-No-1 2, and 1 to 1 is added, and the IP address 1 is 'EA1 3 &quot; is associated with the telephone number &quot; Tel-No-13 &quot; 1 to 1 correspondence is added, which is shown in the address telephone number correspondence table 534. The telephone numbers granted to the ιρ telephone f and the analog telephone are based on the address management table Therefore, when the telephone number is changed, the address management table is rewritten. Ports 538-1 to 538-7 are located inside the main part 531 of the media router, and these ports are respectively granted with &quot; 1 &quot; to &quot; 7. ", And these ports are directly connected to the IP telephone via the communication circuit, or indirectly connected to the analog telephones 516-1 to 516-3 via the analog interface 532. The IP phones 515-1 to 51 5-4 are given with the identification names and IP addresses of "id-5" to "id-8", "AD01" to "AD04", which are indicated in The telephone management table 535 records the internal port numbers 1 to 4. The "d" in the telephone management table indicates an IP telephone, &quot; A &quot; indicates an analog telephone. The IP address is granted on port 5 32-1, and the IP address is granted on port 532-2. IP address ΕΑ12Π, IP address ΕΕ13 &quot; was assigned on port 532-3. Port 5 38-1 and 532-1 are connected by a communication circuit, and ports 538-7 and 532-3 are connected by a communication circuit. Because the IP telephone 515-1 is connected to the port 537-1 by the communication circuit 517-1, when the IP telephone 515-1 is

1245997 V. Description of the invention (104) When the media router 530 is connected to the outlet device, the IP address &quot; ΕΑ0Γ can be used. Similarly, the analog telephone 51 6-3 is fixedly assigned an IP address? EA131 '. When the analog telephone 5 16-3 is connected to the outlet device via the media router 530, the IP address "EA1 3" is usually used. This method is shown in the record of port 1 and the record of port 7 in the address management table 5 3 5. 538-4 and 538-5 are connected by the communication circuit. The IP telephone 5 15_4 is connected to the analog telephone through the communication circuit 517-4, port 538-4 and 538-5, the analog interface 532, and the communication circuit 5 18-1. 516 — i, IP phone 5 1 5-4 and analog phone 5 1 6 -1 can perform telephone communication. Similarly, IP phone 515-2 is via communication circuit 517 — 2, port 538 — 2 and 538-3. The communication circuit 5 17-3 is connected to the IP telephone 51 5-3. Telephone communication can be performed between two 1? Telephones. Telephone communication between two analog telephones is also possible through the analog phone on the face. IP telephones 515-1 to 515-Digitize the voice and send it with IP. The opposite function is to restore the digitized voice to an analog, voice. The analog interface will be from the analog phone 卩 丨 卜 ^^ 到5 丨 6 —3 The received sound is digitized 'and transmitted to the media router main section 5 31, The opposite function is to restore the digitized sound received from the main part 531 of the media router into an analog sound and send it to the analog phone. &Lt; &lt; A series of procedures for the media router and the outlet device for telephone connection is picked up at once When the IP phone 51 5-1 is a receiver, the outgoing 1 {) packet 520 is transmitted to the media router main unit 531 via the communication circuit 51 7-1. Here, it is written to the header of the IP packet 520 and sent The terminal address is

1245997 V. Description of the invention (105) AD01 &quot; The IP address of the receiving end is "ADR". The main part of the media router 531 returns the IP packet `` receiving the outgoing call "to the IP phone 515-1. Then, at ip When the user of the telephone 515-1 dials and enters the telephone number Tel-No-4 at the communication destination ", the IP phone 515-1 generates the telephone number of the sender included in the payload of the ip packet &quot; Tel-No The "call setting" of the telephone of "-1Π" and the call number π T e 1-Ν〇-4 "of the communication destination is transmitted to the media router 530. The media router 530 receives the aforementioned UDP packet in the main part 531 of the media router, and forms a 1 packet including at least the telephone number of the sending end "Tel-Nο-Γ and the trusted and telephone number || 161-1 ^ 〇-4 | ' By transmitting to the network device 5 4 0, the call setting procedure is started. When the network device 540 receives the IP packet 521, it searches the address management table 541 shown in FIG. 97, and searches for the external IP address including the sender. Address &quot; ΕΑ0 1 &quot;, the address of the receiving end I p address "EA8 Γ, if the record of the first line from the address management table 541 is found at this time, that is, the record of" EA01, EA81, IA01, ϊ A81 " Using the third and fourth IP addresses πΙΑ0Γ and Ι81, which are recorded in this record, an internal IP packet 5 4 2 using the encapsulation technology of the IP packet is generated and transmitted to the IP address as, , I a 8 1π agent telephone management server 545. Here, the payload part of the IP packet 542 is the IP packet 521. Furthermore, since the physical communication circuit 5 38 includes the logical communication circuits 533-1 to 539- All of 3, logic terminals 543-1 to 543-3 all have the same Internal IP address value "I A0 Γ. 8 · Eighth embodiment of closed-domain telephone communication In FIG. 98, the 1001 system is combined with the IP communication network, the 1002 series IP data network,

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 109 1245997 V. Description of the invention (106) 1 003 IP telephone network, 1 04 audio and video network, 1 0 5 communication company 1 Integration of operation management The range of the IP communication network, 2006 is the range of the integrated IP communication network that the communication company 2 operates and manages. 1 002 to 1 004 are all IP forwarding networks with the function of forwarding IP packets. Inside the IP transfer network, information can be exchanged through an IP communication device that transmits and receives IP packets. The IP address used externally in the unified IP communication network 1 0 01 is called the external IP address, and the j p address used internally is called the internal IP address. 1 080 to 1081 are telephone gateways, 1082 and 1 083 are public switched telephone networks (PSTN), and 1084 and 1085 are telephones.

The following description is from the telephone set 1011 via the media router 1021, the communication circuit 1 040, the branch point device 1031, the IP telephone network 1003, to the branch point device 1032, the communication circuit 1041, the media router 1022, and the telephone set 10. 1 2. "Method for controlling communication connection between terminals" for communication connection. The users of the telephones 1011 to 1013 determine in advance their respective telephone numbers' and the values of the external addresses of the media routers to which these telephones are connected. Illustrated with reference to FIG. 100 and FIG. 10, the telephone set 丨 〇 丨 丨 uses an electric number, and the media router grants external = phone &quot; ΕΑ1 ", and the telephone set U12 uses a telephone number &quot; Tel_N〇_2 &quot; Media router 1 022 grants an external IP address &quot; EA2 &quot;

The phone number &quot; Tel-No-3 &quot; and the external IP address &quot; EA3 &quot; was granted on the media router 1 023. Phone number server 1 026 to 1028 Answer external IP address when prompted &quot; EA1 &quot; Answer external Iρ address when prompted &quot; ΕΑ2 &quot;, answer external Iρ when prompted Address &quot; ΕΑ3 &quot;. This group of phone numbers such as extension phone numbers &quot; 100 &quot; to 199 "

1245997 V. The rule of invention description (107), for example, the number 100 through the rule corresponding to 1 corresponds to the additional domain name &quot; 1 · &quot;, which can be applied to the knowledge of domain name server (DNS) technology. &lt; &lt; Preparation for telephone communication 〉〉

Referring to FIG. 98 and FIG. 99, the user 1060 applies to the telephone receiver 1061 for use of the telephone (step A100 in FIG. 99), and the telephone receiver 1061 obtains the aforementioned external IP address of the application information for the telephone from the user 1 060. &quot; ΕΑΓ, and 1′ΕΑ2Π, user name, payment method, identification code "L-1 040" of communication circuit 1040, and identification code π ΝΝ-1 031 π of network device 1031, communication circuit 1041 The identification number &quot; L-1041 &quot; and the identification number &quot; NN-1 0 32 &quot; of the outlet device 1 032, etc. are notified to the user service server ι04A (step A101). The user service server 1041 decides a user identification code &quot; UID-Γ to identify the user 1 060, and stores the user application information such as the external IP addresses ΠΕΑΓ and ΠΕΑ2Π, the user name, etc. obtained through the foregoing acceptance. All the databases of the customer service server 1041 (step A102).

Secondly, the user service server 1 041 will obtain the external IP addresses π ΕΑ1 ″ and π ΕΑ2Π obtained through the aforementioned procedures, the identification mark of the communication circuit, L-1 040, and &quot; L-1041 &quot; Identification number &quot; NN-1031 &quot; and 1, NN-1 032 ,, when notified to the telephone management server 1 042 (step A103), the telephone management server 1 042 decides the internal IP address, ΙΑ1, and ,,, "IAA2", the four addresses &quot; EA1, EA2, IA1, IA2 &quot; are notified to the table management server 1043 (step A107). Here, the internal IP address &quot; IA1 &quot; is the internal IP address assigned to the connection point of the communication circuit 1 040 and the network point device 1 〇31 1, and the &quot; I A2 π is assigned to the communication circuit 1 〇41 and the network point The internal I ρ address of the connection point of the device 1 0 3 2 uses the identification marks of the network point device "ΝΝ-1031 &quot; and &quot; ΝΝ1 032 &quot; and the identification marks of the communication circuit

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 111 1245997 V. Description of the invention (108) L-1 040 and "L-1041", values determined uniformly in the integrated IP transfer network 1001, telephone management The servers 1042 and 1065 exchange information through the aforementioned "communication device" and confirm the same value in advance by other methods. When the server 1 0 4 3 notifies the network device 1 0 3 j of the foregoing four addresses (step A108), the network device saves the aforementioned 4 addresses &quot; EA1, EA2, IA1, IA2 '' as the The first record of the address management table 1034 inside the branch device shown in FIG. 100 (step A109). The record in row i of the address management table 1034 is defined as between the media router 1021 having an external IP address "EA1", and the media router 1022 having an external IP address "EA2". lp communication record. The IP communication record provides address information in the ιρ header in the IP capsules that generate internal IP packets. Similarly, as the second line of the address management table 1034 = record, four The address &quot; EA1, EA3, IA1, IA3 &quot; is set to 1? Communication record 0 Similarly, the user 1 062 applies for telephone service to the telephone receiver 1063, and goes through the same procedure as above (step AU in FIG. 99). 〇 to step Aii9) 'Inside the branch device 1 032, a media router 1 022 having an external IP address &quot; EA2 &quot; shown in FIG. 101 and an external IP address &quot; &quot; The IP communication record between the routers 1021 is again set by the same logic as above on the records from line 1 to line 4 of the address management table 1 035. There are: • IP addresses of the department &quot; EA2 &quot; Record of IP communication between the media router i 〇22 and the media router 1023 with an external address EA3 It is another ιρ communication record. In addition, the user 1 062 accepts the IP address of the media router 1022 and the media router 1021 from the telephone. Therefore, the telephone management server 1042 executes the foregoing steps &quot; A1 〇7 &quot;, 1245997 V. Description of the invention (109) The steps &quot; A117_2 &quot; (Fig. 99) are also performed at the same time, and the setting of the communication record depends on the table management server 1066. &lt; &lt; Continuation stage 〉〉 Use The person picks up the receiver of the telephone 1011, dials and enters the telephone number "Tel-No-2" of the telephone 1012 at the communication destination, and makes a call to the media router management unit 1056 inside the media router 1021 (steps in FIG. 10) A200), the media router management unit 1056 confirms the telephone call (step A2〇ι).

A ^ The media router management unit 1056 presents the telephone number "Tel-No-2" to the telephone number server 1026 (step A202), and obtains the IP address "ΕΑ2" of the corresponding media router "22" (step A203). , Forming a telephone number of the sending end "Tel-No-Γ", a telephone number of the receiving end "Tel-No-2,", a telephone call identifier "C-ID", and connection control related information " The external IP packet 1 070 (FIG. 103) for setting the phone call is transmitted to the network device 1031 (step A204). Here, the IP address field of the 1? Header of the external IP packet 1007 is based on the sending IP address &quot; EA 丨 &quot; and the receiving IP address as &quot; EA2. The payload part of 1 070 is the UDP section, the sending port number is "5060 &", and the receiving port number is "5600" as an example. Phone call identifier "C-ID" is used to distinguish between phone calls and other phone calls from the connection phase to the voice communication phase and the release phase after the call is placed in the telephone communication. Connection control related information "Inf 0 -丨 & At least include the UDP port number used in the voice communication phase, such as &quot; 5004 π, as for other contents, it may include the identification mark of the sound compression method, the identification mark of the sound symbol conversion codec, and the IP of the media router 1021. Address &quot; ΕΑΓ. Here, Media Road

Page 113 1245997 V. Description of the invention (110) The device management unit 1 0 5 6 and 1 0 5 7 set and refer to the phone call identifier ID-IDn and connection control related information through rules determined in advance "info-] [" . When the branch device 1 0 3 1 receives the IP packet 1 0 7 0, it confirms that the internal part of the terminal (logical terminal) of the communication circuit 1040 of the input I p packet 1070 is addressed to "I A1", the IP packet 1 〇 0 0 of the recipient's external IP address &quot; e A 2 &quot;, and retrieve the address management table 1034 shown in Figure 100. At the beginning, retrieve the IP communication of the sender's internal IP address as &quot; I A1 &quot; Record, and then retrieve whether the IP communication record containing the external IP address of the trusted end π EA2 ”is in the aforementioned IP communication record detected. Next, check whether the external IP address “EA1” ψ of the sender in the IP packet 1 070 is included in the IP communication record detected above. At this time, if the first line from the address management table 1 034 is found, that is, the IP communication records of EA1, EA2, IA1, and IA2 ,, the third and fourth records recorded in the IP communication record are used. "&Quot; IA1 &quot; and &quot; IA2 &quot; use the encapsulation technology of an IP packet that grants a new IP header to an external IP packet 1070 to form an internal IP packet 1071 as shown in FIG. 104. In the foregoing search of the IP communication record in the address management table, at the beginning, the record with the internal IP address of the sender at &quot; IΑΓ is retrieved (there is a plurality of candidates), and then the external record is retrieved from the retrieved record p address is, EA2's IP communication record. The step of retrieving the sender's external IP address "EA1," can be omitted. In the aforementioned IP packet encapsulation, the sender with the aforementioned internal IP address is set on the address area 1? In the header of the internal IP packet. "I p address" IA1 "and the IP address of the trusted end π IA 2π. The formed internal IP packet 1 〇 71 is transmitted to the branch office device 1 032 (step A205), and via the routers 1035-1 to 1035-6

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd

1245997 V. Description of the invention (111), and when it reaches the branch device 1 032, the branch device 1 032 removes the header of the IP packet 1071 and performs the decapsulation of the IP packet to reply the IP packet 1072 (Figure 105). IP packet 1072 is transmitted to media router 1022 (step A206) In the aforementioned decapsulation of the IP packet, the branch device 1 032 can use the IP communication with the value "EA2, EA1, IA2, ΙΑΓ" as before That is, there is an IP communication β record containing the aforementioned 4 IP addresses on the address management table 1035 inside the branch point device 1032. “Because of the IP inside the header of the received internal IP packet 1 〇71 The address area is π ΙΑ2, ΙΑΓ, and the internal IP address area of the external IP packet 1072 is ΠΕΑ2, ΕΑΓ, confirming that decapsulation can be performed. At 4 addresses (&quot; ΕΑ2, ΕΑ1, ΙΑ2, ΙΑ1 ") When a consistent IP communication record does not exist, the external IP address of the trusted end "EA2" in the IP packet 1071 is not checked, and no reverse encapsulation is performed, and the received IP packet can be discarded. The media router management unit 1 057 obtains the sender's phone number nTel-No-11 ', the recipient's phone number "Tei-N0-2", the telephone call identifier "C-ID", and the connection control from the external IP packet. Relevant information &quot; 丨 Ib. &Quot; The Media Router Management Department 1 057 obtained from &quot; Info-1 &quot; internally, for example, &quot; 5〇〇4 &quot; as the sender's telephone in the voice communication stage using the port number, In addition, the use of a telephone call identifier "C-ID" can be used to distinguish the aforementioned telephone call from other telephone calls. The series of steps A204, A205, and A206 described above are called call settings, and "&quot; I AM &quot; is omitted to indicate the aforementioned series of steps. The media router management unit 1 057 includes a telephone call identifier "C-ID" in order to notify the caller of the caller settings as described above.

1245997 V. Description of the invention (112) The IP packet with the number `` Tel-Nο-Γ, the telephone number of the receiving end &quot; Tel-No-2, '' is returned to the media router management unit 1 056 (steps A207, A208, AA209). This series of steps A207, A208, and A209 are referred to as a call setting manager 'and are indicated by omitting the symbol "ACM". The media router management unit 105 uses the phone call identifier "CM D" itself in the call setting acceptance described above, and does not need to return the sender's phone number "Tel-No-Γ" and the recipient's phone number "Tel-No-2" . Next, when the media router management section 1057 transmits the outgoing call to the telephone 1012 (step A210), the telephone 1012 replies to confirm the letter (step A211), and issues an outgoing call tone. The Media Router Management Department 1057 generates a caller ID "C-ID", the sender's phone number &quot; Teuo-i &quot;, and the recipient's phone number &quot; Tel-Nο-2π in order to notify that the call to the telephone 1012 is in progress. The IP packet is sent back to the media router management unit 1056 (steps A212, A213, and A214). This series of steps A212, A213, and A214 is called as call passing or outgoing, and is indicated by omitting the "&quot; CPG". In the step through the call, the sender's phone number &quot; Tel-Nο-Γ and the recipient's phone number &quot; Tel-No-2 &quot; may not be returned. The media router management unit 1056 will make a call to the recipient's phone 1012 The sender's telephone 1011 is notified (step A215). On the one hand, when the user of the telephone 1012 hears the call out of the telephone 'takes up the handset of the telephone and notifies the media router management unit (step A220), the media router management unit 1057 Generate an IP including the aforementioned telephone call identifier nC-IDn, the sender's phone number &quot; Tel-No-Γ, the recipient's phone number &quot; Tel-No-2 ", and connection control related information" inf0-2 "

2049-3793-IIΨ; RAY.ptd page 116 1245997 V. Description of the invention (113) Packet 'and notify the media router 1 0 2 1 of the internal media router management unit 1056 (steps A222, A223, A224). This series of steps A222, A223, and A224 is called a response, and is indicated by omitting the symbol "ANMΠ." The aforementioned connection control related information "I nf 0-2π contains at least the UDP port number used in the voice communication phase, such as &quot; 5 〇〇6π. The format of the aforementioned IP packet is the same as that of the internal IP packet 1 0 71 in FIG. 104, and it is possible to omit the telephone number “Tel-No-Γ and the telephone number of the recipient” Tel-No- 2 ”is written into the ip packet. The media router management unit 1 056 will confirm the response from the telephone 1012 (step A220) (step A221).

The media router management unit 1 056 knows the number of the trusted port used in the communication phase from 'Inf 0-2', for example, '50 0〇6π, and notifies the phone 1011 of the response (off hook) of the phone 1011 ( Step A225), and the phone 1011 confirms (Step A226). In addition, the foregoing steps A221 and A226 may be omitted. End the continuation phase of the phone call as described above. Furthermore, in the foregoing steps, steps A2 00 and A210 are called, call setting π, steps A201 and A211 are called, call setting acceptance &quot;, step eight 215 is called &quot; outgoing calls' steps A220 and A225 are called &quot; Response &quot;, steps A221 and A226 are "response confirmation". &Lt; &lt; communication stage >〉 When the user of the telephone set 1011 starts a conversation by voice, the voice signal is sent to the media router management unit 1056 ( Step A250 in FIG. 10), the media router management unit 1056 digitizes the voice, and further divides it into appropriate degrees to form the external IP packet 1 073 in FIG. 107. Then, the external UDP packet 1 0 73 inside UDP The payload section of the segment stores the aforementioned digitized sound, and

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 117 1245997 V. Description of the invention (114) '~ &quot; &quot; ~ &quot;' &quot; — ~ IP packet 1 073 is transmitted to the outlet device 1031 (step A251). The sending port number in the UDp section is the sending port number &quot; 5 〇〇4 &quot; and the receiving port, which are obtained by using the media router management department 1056 and 1057 in the connection phase. The number π 5 0 0 6 &quot;. When the branch office device 1031 receives the IP packet 1073, it finds the 1? Communication record of "EA1, EA2, IAl, IA2 &quot; in the address management table. Using this communication record, the external IP packet 1 073 is encapsulated and becomes The internal IP packet reaches the network point device 1032 via the routers 1 035-1 to 1 035-6 (step A252).

Then, the 'External IP packet 107' is replied, and the external IP packet 107 & passes through the media router management unit 1057 (step A253) and reaches the telephone ι〇2 (step A254). The IP packet containing the voice of the user of the telephone 1012 follows the flow in the opposite direction to that described above, that is, via the media router management unit 1057 (step A260), the network point device 1032 (step A261), and the router 1 035-6 to 1 035-1, arrive at the outlet device 1031 (step A262), and then pass through the media router administrative department 1056 (step A263), and reach the telephone ιιιι (step A264). β &lt; &lt; Release stage >〉 When the user of the telephone set 1011 puts the receiver back due to the end of the telephone communication, and notifies the media router management section of the end of the telephone communication (step A280 in FIG. 1056 forms an I ρ packet containing at least the information indicating the end of the telephone communication and the phone call identifier "C-ID". This IP packet is transmitted to the branch office device 1031 (step A281), and is encapsulated in the branch office device 1031. To the branch point device via the IP transfer network 1 03 (step A282), is decapsulated in the branch point device 1032, and passes through the media path.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 118 1245997 Description of the invention (115) The router management unit 1 057 (step A283) arrives at the telephone 1012 (step A284). This series of steps A281, A282, A283, and A284 is called release, and is indicated by the omission "REL". It acknowledges that the IP packet reporting the end of release is notified in the opposite direction (steps A2 86, A2 87, A2 88). This series of steps A286, A2 87, A2 88 is called the end of release, and is indicated by the omission of the symbol "RLCn". The IP packet format or IP address setting method used in steps A281, A282, A283, etc. is the same as that of telephone communication. Steps A2 04, A205, A206, etc. in the subsequent stage are the same. &lt; 〈Communication between other telephones 〉〉 Telephone communication from telephone 1011 to telephone 1 01 3 with telephone number `` Tel-No-3'1 is also possible. When inquiring telephone number server 1 0 2 6 '' The external IP address &quot; e A 3π &quot; corresponding to the telephone number "τ e 1-N 〇-3" was answered. The IP communication record inside the address management table 1 034 "EA1, EA3, IA1, I A3" and The IP communication records in the address management table 1 035 are used for encapsulation and inverse encapsulation of IP packets. Also, the telephone communication from the telephone 1012 to the telephone 1013 is the same as that described above. The connection control method of terminal-to-terminal communication is also possible. When the telephone communication ends, 'port numbers 11 5004' and '50 06π are vacant numbers, which can be used for the next telephone communication 0 &lt; <the case where the communication company is one company> 〉 When the operation management range 1006 of the communication company 2 in FIG. 98 does not exist, and the IP telephone network 1003 becomes the operation management range of the communication company 1, the connection phase, call phase, and release phase of the telephone call are possible. In this case

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997

Change the operation management range 1006 of the total ^ = 5 to the operation of the communication company 1: ^ The representative server 1 of the communication company 1 and the server 1036-1 to ι〇36-2 of the communication company 2 are abolished, Router 1035 —7 and router 103 5 -1 are connected by an IP communication circuit. &lt; &lt; Other embodiment of media router &gt; &gt; Another embodiment of the media router will be described with reference to FIG. 111 '. The media router 1021-1 includes the function of the media router 1021 as shown in FIG. 98, the media router management section 1056 — 丨 includes the function of the media router management section 1056, and the telephone number server 1026 — 丨Machine containing telephone number server 1026. 1 040-1 is the communication circuit to the outlet device. 1 080-1 series connection control 4 '1 0 81 -1 series telephone control section, 〇〇8 2 series media router operation management section' 1 083 series telephone number • pin number • udp port number correspondence table . The media router operation management unit 1 082 includes a reliability management function through a function of recording a telephone call and a fault detection in the media router. The telephone control unit 1081-1 uses a telephone connected via a communication circuit 丨 〇1 丨-to 1011-4 'to have protocol conversion, voice symbol conversion, flue tuat ion control in telephone communication, analog sound and digital sound Transform or inverse transform and transmit the received function. The 1 084 series circuit interface includes communication circuit 1040-1 and the function of transmitting and receiving IP packets. The media router operation management unit 105 6-1 can perform the same telephone connection control and release control as the media router management unit 1056, that is, the telephone connection control described with reference to FIG. 102 and the telephone release control described with reference to FIG. 110. Phone number, pin number, and UDP port number correspondence table 1 083 shows the phone number &quot; T e 1-N 〇 -1 ′ ’1: 1 corresponds to the pin in the telephone control unit 1 〇 8 1 -1

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 120 1245997 V. Description of the invention (117) Digit number, 'T1', and UDP port number &quot; 50 04 '', 1: 1 corresponds to the pin number ΤΓ. In the same way, the telephone number &quot; Tei-N0-12 &quot; is 1: 1, which corresponds to the pin number &quot; T2 &quot; and the UDP port number &quot; 5006π, the telephone number, and Tel-Nο-13π, which corresponds to 1: 1. For the pin number "T3, f & UDP port number" 5008 ", the phone number" Tel-No-14 "is 1: 1 corresponding to the pin number" T4 "and UDP port number" 5010 ". Due to the above, for example, in the case of using the telephone number “Tel— 仏 — 丨”, the UDP port number refers to the correspondence between the phone number, the pin number, and the UDp port number. Table 1 083 is “’ 50 04π 4 ”. The UDP port number is used as a conventional RTP port number (an RTP port number for voice communication) for identifying voice communication. 1083-1 of FIG. 112 is another example of the correspondence table of telephone numbers, pin numbers, and udp port numbers, and can be exchanged with 1.083. In this example, the telephone number &quot; Tel-No-Γ is a representative telephone number, and the telephones 1011-1 to 1011-4 have the same telephone number 161-No-Γ ', because the UDP port number is different &quot; 5004 &quot; to &quot; 5010 &quot;, telephones 1011-11 to 1011-14 can use different phone numbers for voice communication, and will not interfere with each other at the same time. 1083-2 of FIG. 113 shows another example of the telephone number, pin number, and udp port number correspondence table, which can be exchanged with 1083. In this example, the telephone iou-2 with the telephone number &quot; Te 卜 No-12 &quot; dials the call first, and the UDP Tan number π 5004π is granted. Other telephones (loll), 1 0 11 -3, 1 0 11 -4, at the beginning of the connection phase of the telephone communication, were assigned other unassigned UDP port numbers &quot; 5006 &quot; and &quot; 5008 ", etc. In the release phase of the call, the grant of the aforementioned UDp port number is suspended (returned). The connection control section 1 080-1 can appropriately achieve the representative as described above by appropriately changing the correspondence between the pin number and the UDp port number. telephone number.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 121

1245997 V. Description of the invention (118) &lt; &lt; Other embodiment of media router &gt; &gt; With reference to Figs. The media router 1021-2 includes the functions of the media router 1021 shown in FIG. 98, the connection control unit 1 080-2 includes the functions of the connection control unit 1 080-1 shown in FIG. 111, and the telephone control unit 108 1-2 includes Function of the telephone control unit 108 1-1. 1 040-2 is a communication circuit used to connect to outlet devices. The media router management section 1056-2 includes the function of the media router management section 1056, and the telephone number server 1026-2 includes the function of the telephone number server 1026. 1 085-1 series PBX control section, 1 085-2 series PBX, 1 086 and 1 087 series routers, 1 088 series media router operation management section, 1 089 series for internet communication circuit, 1090 and 1091 series The IP terminal with the function of transmitting and receiving IP packets, 1 092 is a dynamic video transmitter and receiver with the function of transmitting and receiving audio and video. The IP terminals 1 090 and 1091 are connected to the router 1087 via an IP communication circuit. The router 1 087 is connected to the LAN 093 via an IP communication circuit. The connection control unit 1 080-2, the telephone number server 1026-2, and the routers 1 086 and 1 087 are connected to each other through the communication circuit 1089. PBX 1085-2 is a private branch exchange that houses a number of telephones. PBX control section 1 085-1 is located between the connection control section logo-2 and PBX 1 085-2 for interface exchange between the two (voice code exchange and voice Compression, etc.). Because of this, the media router 1021-2 can directly accommodate most telephones via the telephone control unit 1081-2, or can be accommodated via PBχ 1085--2. These telephones can communicate with other telephones via the IP transfer network. To make the media router 1021-2 as described above, the communication circuit

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 122 1245997 V. Description of the invention (119) The ip packet input by 1040-2 can reach the connection control unit 1 080-2 via router 1086 and communication circuit 1089, and, The ip packet can be transferred from the opposite direction, that is, from the connection control unit 1080-2 to the communication circuit 1089, the router 1 086, and the communication circuit 104-4. Similarly, the IP packet input from the communication circuit 1 040-2 can reach the IP terminal 1090, the IP terminal 1091, or the moving image transmitting / receiving machine inside the LAN 1093 through the router 1086, the communication circuit 1089, the router 1 087, and the communication circuit. 1092. In addition, the ip packet can be forwarded in the reverse direction, that is, it can be forwarded from the IP terminal 1090, the IP terminal 1091, or the moving image transmitting and receiving device 1092 to the communication circuit, the router 1087, the communication circuit 1089, the router 1086, and the communication circuit 1. 〇〇〇〇〇 2-0. &lt; &lt; Transmission Priority Control> &gt; Next, the function of the transmission priority control of the media router 1021-2 will be described. Fig. 11 is a model diagram showing a part of the internal part of the 5 series media router 1 〇 21 _ 2 connected to the IP terminal connected to the media router 1021-2 and the LAN. However, the description of the communication circuit in the middle is omitted. 1085-21 is an IP packet sent from the telephone number server 1026-2, 1085-22 is an IP packet sent from the connection control unit 1 080-2, 1085- 23 is an IP packet sent from LAN 1093, 1085-24 is an IP packet sent from IP terminal 1091, and 1 085-25 is an IP packet sent from moving image sender 1 092. In addition, the IP packets 1085-21 to 1085-25 are transmitted to the communication circuit 1040-1 via the Ethernet 1089 and the router 1086. When the payloads of IP packets 1085-21 to 1085-25 are TCP or UDP sections, these sections contain the sender port number and the trusted end port number.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 123 1245997 V. Description of Invention (120) Φ Figure 1085-3 shows that the aforementioned ip packet was sent from Ethernet communication circuit 1 089 to communication circuit 104. -2 order of sending priority control management table 1 085-3. When an IP packet is input from the Ethernet communication circuit 1089 side, and is output to the communication circuit 1040-2 through a router 1086, it is checked whether the internal payload of the passed IP packet is a TCP segment or a UDP segment. When it is a TCP segment or a UDP segment, check its internal sender port number. When the ιρ packet arrives at the router 106 in a similar time, the IP packet containing the TCP segment or UDP segment with the sending port number "108" will be transmitted with the highest priority, followed by the sending port number. IP packets in the TCP segment or UDP segment that are "5 0 0 0", "5 0 0 4" or "5 0 2 0" are transmitted. The value of the port number described in the transmission priority control management table 1 085-3 may be changed to another value. The transmission priority control management table 1085-3 can be changed to the transmission priority control management table 1085-4 of FIG. 117. In the example using the sending priority control management table 1085-4, the 1 {) packet with the sender IP address &quot; 150 · 1 · 2 · 3Π and the sender port number "ι〇8" has the highest priority , Followed by the priority of the sender's IP address &quot; 丨 92 · 丨 .2 · 3 &quot; In the above-mentioned embodiment, the media router 1 0 2 1-2 is based on the port number specified by the transmission priority control management table 1 085-3, or is based on the transmission priority control management table. The IP address and port number designated by 1085-4 are used as a reference. It has a function of determining the sending order of the IP packets sent from the IP packet to the communication circuit 1040-2. Next, it will be described with reference to FIG. 118. The media routers 1021-2 and 1021-4 are connected via the IP forwarding network 1001—the IP terminal 1091—j, dynamic

1 ^ 1 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 124 1245997 V. Description of the invention (121) Video transmitter and receiver 1 0 92-1, LAN 1 093-1 is connected to the media router 1021-3, and on LAN 1 The inside of 093-1 contains the IP terminal 1090-1. Similarly, the IP terminal 109 1-2, the moving image transmitting and receiving device 1092-2, and the LAN 1093-2 series are connected to the media router i〇21-4. The IP terminal 1090-2 is included in the LAN 1093-2 . The media routers 1021-3 and 1021-4 include the functions of the media router 1021-2 of FIG. 114. As described above, for example, between the IP terminal 1 009-1 and the IP terminal 1 009 1-2, between the IP terminal 1091-1 and the IP terminal 1 090-2, the moving image transmitting and receiving device-i And move

Status image transmission and receiving device 1092-2 can transmit and receive IP packets via the media router 1021-4. This embodiment is summarized as follows. The IP transfer network includes two or more branch devices. The media router is connected to any one of the branch devices via an IP communication circuit, and the internal IP address is granted to the terminal section on the branch device side of the communication circuit. Each external IP bit is granted on the media router

There is a telephone number server inside, and the media router is connected to more than one telephone via a communication circuit. In addition, as a record of the address management table inside the network device, the above-mentioned external address and the internal ^ p address are included, and at least 1? Communication records that determine the IP encapsulation method are set in advance. In the packet, at least the sender's phone number and the recipient's phone number are used. In addition, multiple telephones use a common port number in the connection control. In addition, each individual voice communication of the telephone is performed by assigning each different port number of the telephone to the media router. Including two or two parties of the PBX control unit or the telephone control unit, the media router can be connected to the IP terminal with the function of transmitting and receiving IP packets through the IP communication circuit, or the LAN, or the

1245997 V. Description of the Invention (122) Audio and video are stored in IP packets and transmitted and received. The media router includes a transmission priority control management table, and uses TCP, UDP, or UDP segments in the IP packets sent from the media router to the media router, such as a telephone, IP terminal, or moving image send receiver. § Port number 'further uses the sender's IP address and can be sent to the communication circuit on the branch device side in order of high priority according to the designation of the sender priority control management table. 9 · Ninth embodiment of closed-domain telephone communication: In FIG. 11, 1 100 is an IP forwarding network, and the IP forwarding network 1 100 is used as an external IP address and is used internally The IP address is called the internal IP address. The media routers 111 5 to 11 1 7 are respectively assigned external IP addresses &quot; ΕΑΓ to &quot; EA3 &quot;. Phones 1121 to 1124 were given phone numbers &quot; 10Γ, &quot; 102 &quot;, &quot; 103 &quot;, &quot; 104 &quot; and phones 1125 to 1128 were given phone numbers &quot; 211 &quot;, &quot; 212 &quot;, &quot;; 213 "," 214 ", and telephones 1129 to 11 3 2 were given telephone numbers &quot; 3 Ο Γ, ... 3 0 2 &quot;, &quot; 3 0 3 &quot; ,, 3 0 4". The telephone number server 11 3 5 to 11 3 7 has the same function as a domain name server (DNS) widely used in the Internet and the like. In this embodiment, 'when a telephone number is prompted, answer the containment. The external IP address of the media router of the telephone with that telephone number. For example, when the telephone number server 1135 is inquired about the telephone number "21 2Π," the external IP address π ΕΑ2Π of the media router 1116 housing the telephone 11 26 with the telephone number "212" is answered. &Lt; &lt; Preparation >〉 Branch devices 11 01 to 11 03 Set IP communication records as internal

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 126 1245997 V. Description of the invention (123) ^ Address s The record of the table 11 1 0 to 1 1 1 2 For example, setting, EA 丨, EA3, and r: Take Tian as the record in the second row of the address management table 1110. The aforementioned IP is for the media router 1115 with external address &quot; EA1 &quot; and = 有External IP address &quot; EA3 &quot; Telephone between media routers 1117 = Comment address &quot; ⑷ "is granted to the network point of logical IP communication circuit 1144 :, 1 terminal (logical terminal), internal IP address &quot; IA3 &quot; It is awarded to the terminal section of the network device 11103 of the logical IP communication circuit 1146. It is explained that the telephone communication is transferred from the telephone 1121 through the media routers 1115, ιρ, the media router 1117 to the telephone 1131. &quot; Control method for communication between terminals &quot; &lt; &lt; Connection phase >〉 The user sets up the receiver of the telephone 1121, dials and enters the telephone number of the communication target, the telephone 1131 &quot; 3 03 &quot; The media router management unit 1138 inside the router 1115 makes a call (step A300 in FIG. 120), and the media router management unit 1138 confirms the phone H (step A301). The media router management unit 1138 refers to the telephone number 3303 and the telephone number server 1135 (step A302) to obtain the IP address of the media router 1117 "EA3" (step A3〇3), and then, An external IP packet 1134 containing the sender's phone number "101", the recipient's phone number, 303 ", the phone call identification sub ID, and the UDp port number &quot; 5004 &quot; as the information related to the connection control is formed And transmits it to the network device no1 (step A304). / 、、, In this example, the IP address area in the 1? Header of the external IP packet 1134 is the IP address of the sender's IP address is "quote and the IP address of the trusted end is" EA3 ", and the external IP packet is The payload part of 11 34 is the UDp section. The sending port number is 2049-3793-PF on page 127; RAY.ptd 1245997 5. Description of the invention (124) 5 0 6 0ff, the receiving port number is &quot; 5 〇 6 〇w When the network device 11 01 receives the IP packet n 34, it uses the second line from the address management ^ m〇, which is the "L1" of "EA1, EA3, IA1, IA3". The IP packet encapsulation technology is applied to form an internal IP packet 1140 and send it to the branch device 1103 (step A305). The internal IP packet 114〇 is routed to the branch device 1103, the branch device 11 via the route 1105, 1106, and 1107. 03The header of the IP packet is removed, the IP packet is decapsulated to reply the IP packet 1134, and the IP packet 1134 is transmitted to the media router management unit 1117 (step A306). This series of steps A304, A305 "A3〇6" is called as "call setting". It is indicated by omitting the mark "quotam." The media router management unit 1139 was once Receive the phone number of the sending k from the received ιρ packet, "101", the phone number of the receiving party, "3〇3", the media router ljl5iIP address, "EA1", the phone call identifier, "CID", and as the next two The control-related information makes the UDP cockroach number &quot; 5004 &quot; in the voice communication phase of the sender's telephone set and returns the confirmation of the telephone call (steps A307, A308, A309). This series of steps 308, A3. 8. A3〇9 is called as “call = setting acceptance” with the omission of “ACM”. Then, the media router g, = 139 will send the notification call (letter) to the phone via a packet (step 310), phone 1131 Then reply (step A311). The phone 1131-I will make a phone call when I know the phone is out ... Media Road Π: The processing unit 1139 sends the phone 1131 back to the media router management unit when it is out (step A312, A313, A314), The Media Router Management Department 1138 will notify the sender of Ai Dian Live Machine 11 31 as an outgoing call). This-a series of steps A312, A313, and Guan are called calls.

1245997 V. Description of the invention (125) It is indicated by omitting the mark "&quot; CpG" during the call or call. The user of the Μ telephone 1131 picked up the phone and notified the media router management department 1139 == when the device (from the device management department _ reply (step m321 ^ body routing 5 | Yingli Li P 彳 彳 qq # 土 、 — 人 ^ ^ Furthermore, the media router objective 41139 forms a message containing the sender's phone number &quot; ι〇ι &quot; phone number &quot; 303 &quot;, a phone call identifier &quot; C_ID &quot;, == 8 port number used in the voice communication stage of the phone; A322, A323 A ^ f are returned to the media router management unit 1138 (steps A323, A324). The media router management unit 1138 knows the UDp port number used by the trusted telephone set from the received message. The router management unit 1138 notifies the call 1121 (step A325) of the disconnection notification from the telephone 1131, and the telephone 1121 replies (step A326: response confirmation). The aforementioned series of steps A322, A323, and A324 are called responses, and are omitted by asterisks. Steps A321 and 8326 of the aforementioned response confirmation can choose whether to carry out or not. Through the above, the connection phase of the telephone ends. &Lt; &lt; Communication phase >〉

When the user of the telephone set 1121 starts a conversation through voice, the voice signal is sent to the media router management section 1138 (step A35 in FIG. 12). The media router management section 11 3 8 digitizes the telephone control section 11 3 3 The voice is stored in the payload portion of the UDP section inside the IP packet, and then transmitted to the network point device 1101 (step A351). The transmitting terminal port number in the aforementioned UDP section is obtained from the transmitting terminal number &quot; 50〇4 &quot; and the receiving terminal port number &quot; 5008 丨 丨 obtained in the aforementioned continuation stage. ~ The branch point device 1101 receives the aforementioned IP containing digitized voice Packet 1Q73

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 129 1245997 V. Description of the invention (126) ---- When it is encapsulated as an internal lp packet 1141, internal lp packet!绞 The router 110.5, 110.6, and 1107 reach the branch device 丨 i 3 (step A352). The dot device 1103 removes the internal π header of the internal ^ packet 丨 14 丨. After the IP is inversely encapsulated, the obtained external packet is sent to the media router management unit 1139 (step A353) and reaches the telephone set 1131 (step A354). The Ip packet containing the digitized voice of the user of the telephone set 1131 reaches the telephone set 1121 in a flow in the opposite direction to that described above (steps A36 to 8364). &lt; <Release Phase >> When the user of the telephone set 1121 notifies the end of the telephone communication (step A380 of FIG. 12), the same sequence of steps (steps A381 to A383) as those described in the other embodiments are reached Telephone 1131 (step A384). This telephone communication end report is returned to the media router management section 1138 through steps A386 to 4388. The aforementioned series of steps A38 0, A381, A382, A38 3, and A384 are called releases, and are indicated by omitting the symbol "REL". In addition, the other series of steps A386, A38 7, and A388 are called the end of release, and are indicated by the omission symbol nRLCn. For communication between other telephones, for example, the telephone 11 2 1 can perform telephone communication with the telephone 1126 having the telephone number “212”. Through the same method of controlling communication between terminals, the telephone 11 32 pairs with the telephone number &quot; 213 &quot; The telephone 1127 can also perform telephone communication. • '&lt; <Detailed description of telephone number server >> The telephone number server will be described in detail. When looking at a phone with a 100-digit phone number connected to the media router ni5, a phone with a 200-digit phone number connected to the media router 1116

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 130 1245997 V. Description of the invention (127)

When a telephone set with a 300-digit telephone number is connected to the media router 111 7, the tree structure of the telephone number can be determined as shown in FIG. 1 21. The domains (domai n) 1151 to 1153 are in the form of the same level tree structure below the router 1150. Domain 11 5 1 provides information related to 100-digit telephone numbers, Domain 11 52 provides information related to 200-digit telephone numbers, and Domain 11 5 3 provides information related to 300-digit telephone numbers. Information about your phone number. A 100-digit phone number indicates its domain name with "1 ·", a 200-digit phone number indicates its domain name, and a 300-digit phone number indicates its network name with "3 ·" Domain name, as shown in Figure 122. In FIG. 122, "1XX" indicates a 100-digit telephone number, &quot; 2χχ, indicates a 200-digit telephone number, and "3 × X &quot; indicates a 300-digit telephone number.

In addition, the telephone number server 11 3 5 is applicable to the public technology related to the domain name server DNS, and can delegate the function of the telephone number server of the router 1150 to the proxy management function. The function of the phone number server of the management router 1 丨 5 〇 When asked "1", answer the IP address of the phone 1135 of the direct management network ^ Code server 1135 "ΕΑ1", and "2 ·" and &quot; 3 · &quot; Inquiry is divided into U and π ΕΑ2Π and &quot; EA3 ". When the phone number server is asked for each directly managed domain name, it answers the IP of other phone numbers in the middle process Address, and for the final one, answer the IP address corresponding to the domain name being asked (Figure 123). Because of this, when the telephone number server 11 36 is asked for &quot; 3 · &quot;, the corresponding " 3 · "IP address &quot; EA3". In this way, the specific implementation method of the "redial function of the telephone number server" that is repeatedly asked between the telephone number servers may adopt the redial function of the public domain name server.

1245997 V. Description of the invention (128) &lt; &lt; Other embodiments of the telephone number server &gt;> As shown in Figure 124, the media router 1191 1197 is connected to the network point device 1180 to 1184 of the IP transfer network 119〇 via a communication circuit. One of them connected to the telephone of the media router 1191 to which the company A belongs is to notify the other company B or the public telephone number of the company c. Here, "As the phone number is the same as the blank but can be omitted," X "is the" 00 "to" 99 "of the i 0 digit. The telephone number of the telephone connected to the media x router 1193 at company A is also the company's telephone number Ux X ''. 2. The number of the telephone connected to the media router 1195 of company A is the phone number publicly known to other companies &quot; j-3 χ χ fl and the internal telephone number of company A ^ outside the company &quot; 8 χ χ &quot; . Connected to company B's body, the phone number of router 1192 is the public phone number &quot; χ xn. The telephone number of the telephone connected to the media router 1194 to which the company β belongs is the public telephone number &quot; 2-2 χ χ ,. Connected to the company c, the phone number of the media router 11 96 is the public phone number π 3-χ χ χ "." Χ χ χ "means a 10-rounded" quota. 〇〇〇 "to" 99g &quot;. The telephone number of the telephone connected to the media router 1197 of the company A belongs to the unlisted extension phone number outside the company A &quot; 7 χ χ ,. Figure 1 25 shows the above phone number system as a tree structure of phone numbers, 1185 is a routing domain, and 1186 is a network domain that targets the undisclosed extension phone number of company A. 11 8 7 is a domain targeted by the public phone number of company A, 11 8 8 is a domain composed of the public phone number of company B, [丨 89 is targeted by the public phone number of company C Domain. Here again, the domain name of 11 86 &quot;## &quot; is

surface

1245997

V. Description of the Invention (129) The secret domain name used inside the media routers 1195 and 1197 to which Company A belongs does not contain numbers, and the length of the domain name is specified as a value of 20 characters. In this way, from the media routers UI 92, 1194, and 1196 of company B and company C, it is difficult to know the value of the secret domain name "# Γ" dedicated to company A, or to obtain the domain name &quot;## π. For example, " ## &quot; Query 'does not answer the IP address. As a result of this, it is difficult to access the telephone set with the internal telephone number of company A from company B or company C, and the difficulty of using the internal telephone number to change the mobile phone also means that the security is improved. When dialing the telephone number of the receiving end from the telephone 1198, Tei-No-2 &quot; 2-1 4 5π, the media router management unit 1195-1 inside the media router 11 9 5 changes the telephone number &quot; 2-145 &quot;; As shown in the conversion table Η85-1 of FIG. 126, the domain name of the telephone number is converted into the form "1 · 2.". Secondly, when prompting and asking 1 · 2 · π for the telephone number server 1195-2 inside the media router 1195, the telephone number server is shown in Table 1185-2 of Figure 127, and the answer corresponds to "1 · 2 · &quot; The IP address of the media router 1192 "MR2". Also, "Does the phone of company a with the internal number" 700 "call out to the phone of company B with the phone number" 2-100 "? Any of the domain name server settings can be implemented. The above is summarized as follows. That is, the IP transfer network includes two or more network devices. The media router is connected to any one of the foregoing network devices via a logical IP communication circuit. An internal IP address is granted to a terminal unit on the network device side of the aforementioned logical IP communication circuit, and an external address is granted to each media router. A telephone number server is internally connected, and the media router is connected to more than one via the communication circuit. Phone. Used as an address control inside the outlet device

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997

V. Description of the invention (130) The records of the management table, including Yu Lu, 丨 pre-set MP capsules and the aforementioned internal 1P address, 1p communication records to company B, company (: S! Law between, in company A Internally, using company A, public-Ίβ 疋 's 1P communication "has been set on the network device (&quot; 卜 χΧΧ &quot; Λ_χνΊΒ &quot;, a valid telephone number between the company c telephone communication network. Χ Χ" ", &quot; 3 _... &quot;), you can set the closed area power to call from the phone of company A with the phone number &quot; 1 ~ 00 "to the phone of company a with 200 &quot; Outgoing call to company c with the phone number &quot; 3-1〇〇 &quot;: Outgoing call to the intercom phone number &quot; 7.〇 &quot; and &quot; _, :: = "700" of Yasushi In addition, from the telephone of the extension telephone number, to the extension telephone number &quot; 800, the company A's telephone number is &quot; &quot; 〇〇, and the telephone of the company A calls the telephone communication. &quot; 2- 1 〇〇 "company's telephone, the internal telephone number is & quot The call from the company A of the company 800 is not feasible according to the description of "##" above. When the number of YATA a company is N, it can be described as follows. One company A-2 · · ·, company AN (N &gt; 2) for telephone communication, set IP communication records, can perform closed-domain telephone communication. In addition, it continues to company A-1, company a-2, ... , Company A_N (N &gt; 2) a valid closed area telephone communication network company A-1's phone can communicate with the company Ay's internal telephone into the light and live communication, but company phones other than company A-1 can not communicate with company A An internal telephone set of -1 performs telephone communication. 1 0 · Embodiment 1 in which closed-domain telephone communication and open-domain telephone communication are used together

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 134 1245997 V. Description of the invention (131) In Figure 128, the 1200 series IP forwarding network, and the media routers 1201 to 1 206 are respectively assigned external IP addresses &quot; "EA6". Phone 1208 was given a phone number "100Γ", phone 1 2 09 was given a phone number "1 002", phone 1210 was given a phone number "1〇1", and phone 1211 was given a phone number "102" Telephones 1212 to 1215 were assigned telephone numbers 1 '30 0 Γ to "30 04," respectively. The telephones 1216 to 1219 connected to the media router 1 202 each have a telephone number, 234-200 1 &quot; to &quot; 234-2004 ,. Another 2 0 0 4 丨 丨 3 04 丨 ,, 204 ,, 〇

Telephones 1220 to 1223 were assigned telephone numbers | '2001 ”to telephones 1 224 to 11 27 were assigned telephone numbers π 30 Γ to telephones 1 228 to 1231 were assigned telephone numbers, 201” to here, telephone The number, f 1 XX ,,,,, 2 XX ',, &quot; 3 XX ,, is an internal telephone number for company A exclusive use, &quot; X &quot; is a decimal number representing 0 to 9. Phone number &quot; 1 XXX &quot; is the phone number of company A, the phone number, and 2 xx X π is the phone number of company B, and the phone number "3 XXX 'is the phone number of company C. These 3 phone numbers, , 1 XXX "," 2 χ χ X &quot;, &quot; 3

x x '' is a telephone number used to constitute a logical closed-domain telephone network for telephone communication between company A, company β, and company c, and is called a closed-domain telephone number. The telephone numbers "234-200 Γ to" 234-2004 "are telephone numbers used to communicate with unspecified objects, and are called open domain telephone numbers. Telephone number servers 1134, 1 272, and 11 37 to 11 42 series has the same function as the domain name server (DNS) used in ^ ^ ^ Λ etc. If you don't have a phone number, answer the external IP address of the router that holds the phone number = router For example, when the server 113 7 questioned Lei Honggu ^ u and the end-of-word bluff code π 300 1 &quot;, the answer contained the phone number

2049-3793 ^; ^. ^

1245997

External IP Address of Media Router_6 of Telephone 1212 &lt; <Preparation for Terminal Indirect Continuous Control for Telephone Communication >>

»As shown in FIG. 128, the branch point devices 1 244 to 1 248 are internal address tables 1 250 to 1 255, respectively, and set the same IP communication records as described in the other embodiments. For example, setting "Ε Α 丨, Ε Α3, 丨 Ai, 丨 A3," as the IP communication record of the first line of the address management table 1 250, the aforementioned IP communication record is used to have an external IP The media router 1201 with the address &quot; EA1 &quot; has a telephone communication between the media routers 1 and 203 with the external IP address &quot; EA3 &quot;. The internal IP address &quot; The internal IP address &quot; I a 3, on the terminal part (logical terminal) on the side of 2 4 4 is granted to the terminal part on the side of the network device 1 248 of the logical IP communication circuit 1 258. 1 2 and FIG. 1 2 9 to describe a “terminal for performing telephone communication from a telephone number“ 1 001 ”telephone 1 208 via an IP transfer network 1 200 to a telephone number“ 301 ”telephone 224 Inter-communication performance control method ". &lt; &lt; Continuation stage 〉〉

Pick up the receiver of telephone 1208, dial and enter the phone number "301" of telephone 1 224 at the communication destination, the outgoing signal is transmitted to media router 1 260 (step H30 0), and media router 1 260 confirms the telephone call (step H3 01). The media router management unit 1260 checks Table 1 255-1 of FIG. 175 stored in it, and learns that the network domain name corresponding to the telephone number &quot; 30Γ is called "3 · # · a &quot; 1137 asks for the telephone number domain name "3. #. A" (step H302), and the telephone number server 1137 answers the IP bit of the media router 1204 according to the rules shown in Table 1255-2 of Fig. 176

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p. 136 1245997

Address "EA4" (step H3〇3). Secondly, "formally include at least the sender's phone number" 1001 ", the receiver 19AAC ^ 1®U section 1P packet 131 (Figure 130), and send Branch device routing. Furthermore, the 1P packet 1310 may include the identification number of the phone call in which the media = I ^ 26G, the voice compression method,

Related information composed of identification names, such as code conversion, etc. ". When the network device 1244 receives the IP packet 1310, it uses the second line from the address management table \ 250, that is," EA1, EA4, IA1, IA4 ”IP communication records are suitable for 1p packet encapsulation technology to form and transmit internal ιρ packets 1311 (Figure 131). Internal IP packets 1311 reach the network via routers 1 263, 1 264 as shown in Figure 128 Device 1 246 (step H305), and the branch device 1246 performs inverse encapsulation of the 1 P packet, returns the IP packet, and transmits the returned IP packet to the media router 1204 (step H306). Media router management unit 1265 Obtain at least the "end phone number" 1 〇01 ", the recipient phone number" 3 〇〗 ", and the UDP port number for calls" 5000 "from the received ip packet, and then return the phone to call out Confirmation (steps H307, H308, H309). Secondly, the media router management unit 1265 sends the call (letter) to the phone 1224 (step H310). The phone 1224 writes back to the media router management unit 1265 (step H311). ) To make a call Voice out. The media router management unit 1265 will notify the receiving end phone 12 08 via the media router management unit 1 260 during the outgoing call of the telephone set 1224 (steps H312, H313, H314, H315). In step H314, the sender's phone number will be sent " looi ", trusted

1245997 V. Description of the invention (134) The telephone code 3 0 1 and the U D P port number used for the call sending of the electric machine 1 2 2 4 code π 5 0 0 8π inform the telephone 1 2 0 8. When the user of the telephone set 1224 picks up the handset of the telephone set, the telephone set 1224 notifies the media router management section 1265 (step Η320). The media router management unit 1265 responds to the sender telephone 1 208 via the media router 1 260 through step H320 (steps H32 2, H323, H324, H325). The telephone 1 208 confirms the response to the media router 1 2 60 (step H321), and the media router 1265 confirms the response to the telephone 1224 (step H326). Here, steps Η 321 and Η 326 can choose whether or not to implement them. As mentioned above, the connection phase of the telephone ends. In the aforementioned continuation phase, the internal IP packet is a UDP segment internally, and the sending and receiving UDP port numbers are, for example, "5060π." <Communication Phase> The telephone communication system between the user of telephone 1208 and telephone 1224 and other implementations The example is the same, using the IP communication record in the second line of the internal address management table 1250, that is, the record of "ΕΑ1, ΕΑ4, ΙΑ1, ΙΑ4", and the first line in the internal address management table 1 253 IP communication record, that is, a record of EA4, EA1, IA4, IA1 &quot;. Voice is transmitted from the telephone set 1208 to the media router management section 1 260 (step H350), and in the media router management section 1260, the aforementioned sound is digitized And it is transferred to the payload part of the external packet 1312 (Figure 132), and reaches the branch device 1 2 4 4. Then, it is encapsulated into an internal IP packet 1313 (Figure 133), and then transferred to the IP transfer network.丨 The inside of the 200, and reached the branch device i 246, is decapsulated and reaches the media router management section 1 265 (steps H351 to H353). Here, the foregoing is digitized

mi ram 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p. 138 1245997

The voice is converted into an analog voice and reaches the phone 224 (step. The phone sound from the phone 12 24 to the opposite direction of the phone 1208 is also transmitted in the same place (steps H360 to H364). During the call phase, the external IP packet 1312 The internal is a UDP section. The UDP port number transmitted from the telephone set 1 20 8 is "50 0 4π ', and the UDP port number received by the telephone set 1 2 0 8 is &quot; 5 0008. &lt; &lt; Release stage> 〉 When the user of the telephone set 1 208 notifies the end of the telephone communication (step Η380 in FIG. 29), through the same series of steps (steps Η381 to Η383) as in the other embodiments, the phone 1224 is reached (step Η384). The media router management unit 1265 notifies the media router management unit 1260 that the release is completed (steps H38 to H388). In the above-mentioned release phase, the form of the external IP packet is the same as the IP packet used in the aforementioned connection phase. The load part is a UDP section, and the sending and receiving UDP port numbers are, for example, "5060π". &Lt; &lt; Other examples of using the phone number server inside the media router &gt; &gt; When picking up the phone 1208 When the receiver dials and enters the phone number of the telephone 1220 of the other company to which the communication partner belongs "2001", the media router management unit 1 2 60 checks the internal table 1 2 5 5 -1 and learns that it corresponds to the telephone. The domain name of the telephone number of the number π 2 0 0 Γ is called &quot; b · ". Then, the telephone number server 11 3 7 is asked about the telephone number domain name &quot; b ·, and the telephone number server 1137 answers through The IP address &quot; EA5 &quot; of the media router 1 205 connected to the telephone 1220 can be used for the same terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method between the telephone 1208 and the telephone 120 which belong to different enterprises. In the above-mentioned inter-terminal communication connection control method, I p transfer is not used

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 139 1245997 ~~~ --------- V. Description of the invention (136) Telephone number servers 1134 and 1 272 inside the network 1 200, using the media instead Router 1 2 0 1 phone number inside server 11 3 7. It is also characterized by using the IP communication records already set in the address management tables 1250, 1253, and 1252. &lt; &lt; A telephone communication method using a telephone number server in the IP forwarding network to generate a communication record of P >>> With reference to FIG. 134, a description will be given from a telephone number of 100Γ to a telephone number of 1208 to a telephone number of "234_200 1 &quot; Control method for communication connection between terminals of telephone communication of telephone set 1216. &lt; &lt; connection stage >〉 When the receiver of telephone set 1208 is picked up, the outgoing signal is transmitted to the media router management section 1260 (step V0), media router management The unit 1260 confirms the outgoing call (step VI), the media router management unit 1 260 checks and saves its internal (Figure 175) Table 1 255-1, and learns that the phone number corresponding to the phone number &quot; 234-2〇〇1 " The domain name is called &quot; 〇 · π. Next, the telephone number server U37 is inquired about the telephone number domain name "〇 ·" (step V2), and the telephone number server 11 37 answers the media router management unit 1 260 to access and manage the aforementioned telephone 5 The external IP address of the agent telephone management server 1270 of the tiger code feeder 1272 "ΕΑ8Γ (step V3). Its _person 'Media Router Management Department 1 2 60 uses the IP address of the sender as the IP address of the media router 1201 &quot; EA1 &quot; and the IP address of the receiver 1 as the aforementioned, obtained IP address &quot; "EA81" "formed to include the sender's phone number &quot; 10〇1 &quot;, the recipient's phone number &quot; 234-2001 &quot;, the UDp port number for telephone voice communications &quot; 5006 &quot;, and additional information &quot; Info- 2 &quot; ip packet 132〇 (Figure 135)

1245997

And transmits it to the network device 1 244 (step V4). The payload part of IP packet 1 320 is divided into UDP packets, and the port numbers of the sender and the receiver are both “506”. The additional information described above is information used internally in the media router 1260, for example, a number used to identify a telephone call in order to use a voice compression method (G.711 or G729A) or voice code conversion of a telephone. The telephone management server 1271 or the proxy telephone management server 1 270 described later has nothing to do with the aforementioned additional information. The branch point device 1 244 uses a logical communication circuit 1 2 5 7 that is given to an input external IP packet 32 0. The internal IP address &quot; I a Γ &quot; of the terminal section, and the trusted address in the IP packet 1 320 End IP address &quot; EA81 &quot;, retrieve the IP communication # record in the address management table 1250 of FIG. 128. In addition, confirm that the IP address of the sender in the IP packet 1320 is included in the IP communication record. In this example, the fourth line from the address management table 1250 is used. Records, that is, the third and fourth 1? Addresses inside the records of ΠΕΑ1, Ε81, ΙΑ1, ΙΑ8Γ, that is, "ΙΑ1" and &quot; I Α81π, apply the IP packet encapsulation technology to form an IP packet 1321 (Fig. 136), and sends it to the agent telephone management server 1 270 with the internal IP address &quot; IA81, (step V5).

When the agent telephone management server 1 270 receives the IP packet 1321, it forms the payload portion of the IP packet 1321 and includes the aforementioned address, EA1, IA1, EA81, and IA8Γ in the payload portion 1322 (Figure 137) And send it to the telephone management server 1271 (step V6). Here, the agent telephone management server 1 2 7 0 uses the IP address of the telephone management server 丨 2 7 1 which is stored in advance π ΙΑ9Γ 〇 <Control of the number of outgoing telephones> The telephone management server 1271 receives from IP packet 1 322 to get out

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 141 1245997 V. Description of the invention (138) The address of the media router 1201 on the end side &quot; EA1 "is compared with the transmission circuit management table 1 3 2 6-5 of Fig. 160 For the record with IP address “EA 丨”, the number of circuits in use is increased by π 1π, and then compared with the upper limit of the number of circuits. In this embodiment, since the number of circuits in use is &quot; 2 &quot;, the number of circuits The upper limit is "5", so the next procedure is performed. In addition, when the number of circuits in use of the telephone management temple server 1271 is larger than the upper limit of the number of circuits, the subsequent connection phase is not interrupted. Or, a description is formed The j ρ packet of the reason for interruption is notified to the sender's media router management unit 1 260 via the agent telephone server 1 270. The telephone management server 1271 can choose whether or not to perform transmission control. ° &lt; &lt; Management of circuit number> 〉 The phone management server 1271 reads out the IP packet 1 322 (Figure 137) to obtain the sender's telegram number "1 0 01" and the recipient's phone number "2 3 4-2 0 01", from these two Phone number Routing number of the electrical circuit used to manage voice communication 'CIC-2 (CIC .Circuit Identification Code). Next, write the circuit number &quot; CIC-2 &quot;, the sender's phone number &quot; 1001 &quot;, the recipient's phone number ~ &quot; 234-2001 &quot;, and the telephone 1208 to the CIC management table 1 323 (Figure 138). The external IP address of the media router 1201 &quot; ΕΑΓ and the internal IP address "IA1", the external IP address of the telephone proxy server 1270 &quot; EAA8Γ and the internal IP address "IA81, and the telephone proxy server IP address of the server 1271 &quot; ΙΑ9Γ, program section "I AM", and writing time (year, month, day, hour, minute, second) &quot; St-2 &quot;. Then, the telephone management server 1 271 will ask about the telephone of the recipient IP packet 1324 (Figure 139) with the IP address of `` 234-200Γ '' is displayed on the phone

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 142 1245997 V. Description of the invention (139) On the number server 1 272 (step V7), the telephone number server 1 272 will contain the telephone 1 2 1 6 connected media router 1 2 〇2 external IP address, E a 2 &quot; and internal IP address `` IA2 &quot;, external IP address `` EA82 '' and internal IP address IA82 of the telephone proxy server 1 275, and, The 1? Address of the telephone management server 1 274 is addressed to the telephone management server 1271 with a packet 1 325 of the address ΙΑ92Π (step V8). The phone management server 1271 will fetch from the phone number server 1 272

The obtained five IP addresses ΠΕΑ2Π ,, ΙΑ2Π, &quot; EA82 &quot;, &quot; IA82H were added to the CIC official table 1323 (Figure 138), and the result is shown in the first section of the cic management table 1 326-1 (Figure 141) 1 line of the 2 line record. The telephone management server 1271 refers to the IP address and address report of the CIC management table 1 326-1 (Figure 141), and forms an IP packet 1327 (Figure 142) (referred to as an IAM packet) from the packet 1322 (Figure 137). The packet 1 327 is transmitted to the telephone management server 1 274 (step V9). Here, the address of the sender 1 of the IP packet 1 327 is "IA91" of the phone management server, and the IP address of the receiver is "I / A92" of the phone management server 1 274. The telephone management server 1271 proceeds to the waiting state of step V16 to be described later, and simultaneously starts the waiting timer corresponding to the circuit number, [I [2 &quot; of step V16. When this timer expires, the release procedure of the call circuit is started in the same manner as step V60 described later. &lt; &lt; Control of the Number of Lettering Circuits &gt; &gt; The electric activity management server 1274 takes out the address of the media router 1202 on the trusted side from the received IP packet 1327 (Figure 142), "EA2", Compared with (Fig. 161,), letter circuit management table 1 326-6, the number of circuits in use is increased by π 1 &quot; and compared with the upper limit of the number of circuits. In this embodiment, the address EA2 " Record, because the number of circuits in use is "2", circuits 第 143 页

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (140) The upper limit of the number is 'Stomach 7', so proceed to the next procedure. Telephone management of word service. 1 2 74 You can choose whether to use the letter circuit management table 1 326 —6 performs 11 control. S circuit &lt; &lt; Management of circuit number &gt;> When the telephone management server 1 274 receives the IP packet 1 327, it takes out the circuit number of the person in the payload part &quot; CIC-2 Program section "丨 AM", ^ ^ end phone number π 100Γ ', trusted end phone number "234-200 1", Ip ^ 4 (,, ΕΑΓ, &quot; IA1 &quot;, ΠΕΑ8Γ, π IA81 &quot; , &Quot; ΙΑ9Γ, &quot; EA2 "stands for" IA2 "," "EA82", "IA82", "IA92"), write and record the CIC management table 1 326 managed by the talk management server 1 274 (Figure 143). At the time of writing, 'St-3' is also written to the CIC management table 1 326-2 ^ The telephone management server 1 274 uses the information obtained from the subsequent IP packet 1 327 ' An IP packet 1 3 2 8 (Figure 1 4 4) is formed and transmitted to the agent's phone management 'feeder 1 275 (step VI 0). I The payload of P packet 1 328 includes a UDP section and an address field, and adds the p address &quot; EA 丨 &quot; of the sending-end media router 丨 2 丨 to the aforementioned UDP section. Contains IP addresses "EA2, IA2, EA82, IA82 丨.

The agent telephone management server 1 275 uses the information obtained from the IP packet 1 328 to form an IP packet 1329 (Fig. 145) and transmits it to the branch office device 1247. The sender's address is "IA82", and the recipient's address is "quot; 丨 A2". The IP packet 1 3 2 9 arrives at the branch device 1 2 4 7 (step V11), and the branch device 1 2 4 7 will receive the The IP packet 1329 is inversely encapsulated and formed into an IP packet 133 (Figure 146). 'The IP packet 1330 is transmitted to the media router management unit 1267 (step V12).

1245997 V. Description of the Invention (141)

The media router management unit 1267 receives the IP packet 1330, and confirms whether or not the telephone number of the trusted terminal included in the "234-200 Γ" is likely to be a letter. If it is possible, the phone 1216 is called out (by a letter) (step V20). Furthermore, the content of the IP packet 1300 is read out and saved, that is, the phone number of the sending end π100〇Γ, the phone number of the receiving end &quot; 234-200 Γ, the IP address of the sending end, and the UDP port number of the sending end & quot 5006 &quot;, and additional information lnf0-2. The media router management unit 1 267, in order to notify the telephone 1216 of the possibility of writing (to distinguish between possible and impossible letters), generates a phone number including the sender &quot; 1001π, a phone number on the recipient &quot; 2 34-200 Γ and Letter the possible IP packet and notify the phone management server 1 274 (steps V13, V14, V15). The format of the IP packet used in steps V13, V14, and V15 is the same as the format of the IP packet used in steps V22, V23, and V24 described later. 0 The telephone management server 1 274 receives the media router management unit 1 267. The aforementioned IP packet is transmitted from the aforementioned received IP packet and the information of the sender's phone number &quot; 1001 &quot;, the recipient's phone number &quot; 234-200Γ and information on the possibility of writing are taken out. Then, from the aforementioned two phone numbers, Calculate the circuit number 'CIC-2' to form an IP packet 1331 (Figure 147) (referred to as an ACM packet) containing the circuit number "CIC_2" and information on the possibility of writing by telephone 1216, and send it to the telephone management server 1271 (step V16). The telephone management server 1271 takes out the circuit number "CIC-2" and the program section "ACM" from the received IP packet 1331, and stops corresponding to the circuit set at the time point set in the previous step v9. Number, 'C 1C-2' ACM wait timer, check phone management servo

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 145 1245997 V. Description of the invention (142) Device 1271, cic management table (Figure 141), find the record with circuit number 1 CIC-2 &quot; The program section column is rewritten to the aforementioned program section n ACM ". Next, the 'telephone management server 1271 generates an IP packet indicating the reception of the aforementioned ACM packet (information including the possibility of a letter from the telephone 1 21 6), and notifies the media router management Part 1 260 (steps VI 7, V18, VI 9). The format of the IP packets used in steps V17, V18, and V19 is the same as the format of the IP packets used in steps V26, V2, and V28 described later. Steps V17, V18, and V19 are optional. When the phone 1216 reports the outgoing call to the media router management unit 1267 (step V21), in order to notify the phone 1216 that the outgoing call is in progress, the phone number of the sender is formed. 〇1 &quot;, the telephone number of the receiving end &quot; 234-2001 &quot;, the UDP port number &quot; 5〇008 &quot; for telephone voice communication, and the IP packet 1 332 of additional information Info-3 (Figure 148), and Send to outlet device 1 247 (Step V22). The network device 1 247 uses the record of the address management table 1 254 with the address value ΠEA2, EA82, IA2, IA82 &quot; to encapsulate the IP packet 1332 to form an IP packet 1332-1 (Fig. 149). The IP packet 1332-1 is transmitted to the agent telephone management server 1 275 (step V23), and the agent telephone management server 1 275 forms an IP packet 1 332-2 (FIG. 150), and transmits it to the telephone management server 1 274 (step V24). The telephone management server 1 274 extracts the sender's phone number π1001 &quot; and the recipient's phone number "234-200 Γ" from the received IP packet 1 332-2, and calculates the circuit number "Cl C from the two phone numbers mentioned above. -2 "to form an IP packet 1333 (Fig. 51) (referred to as a CPG packet) and send it to the phone management server 1271 (

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 146 1245997

Step V25). The IP packet 1 333 includes the ⑽p bee number '' 50 08,1 obtained from the IP packet 1 332 2 and the additional information Inf0-3. The telephone management server 1271 extracts the circuit number "CIC-2", the program section "CPG", and the UDp port number "5008" from the received IP packet 1 333, and attached with the information Info-3, Rewrite the program section of the record of the CIC management table U26— 丨 (Figure U1 &gt; Circuit Number &quot; CIC-2 &quot;, and read out the Ιρaddress &quot; εαι, IA1, EA81, ΙΑ8Γ, the sender's telephone The number "1001" and the phone number of the receiving end "234-200 1", using these obtained information, form an IP packet 1 333-1 (Figure 152), and send it to the agent phone management server (step V26). Agent phone management The server 1 270 uses the information contained in the received IP packet 1 333-1 to form an IP packet 1 333-2 (Figure 153), and transmits it to the network device 1 2 4 4 (step V 2 7), the network device 1 2 4 4 Decapsulates the received IP packet 1 333-2 to form an IP packet 1 333 -3 (Figure 154), and transmits it to the media router management unit 1 260 (step V28). The media router management unit 1260 starts from The received IP packet 1333-3 reads out and saves the phone number of the sender &quot; 100Γ, the phone of the receiver Code "234-200 Γ", the IP address of the receiving end "EA2", the UDP port number of the receiving end "5008", and additional information inf0-3. The media router management unit 1260 notifies the telephone set of the receiving end to the telephone set 1 208 ( Step V29). Second, when the user of the telephone 1216 answers the outgoing call (step V 31), in order to notify the telephone 1216 of the response, the telephone 1216 will include the telephone number of the sender &quot; 1 〇〇1 &quot; and the telephone of the recipient. The number, 1 2 3 4 _ 2 0 0 1 &quot; I p packet is transmitted to the telephone management server 1274 (steps V32, V33, V34).

2049-3793-PF: RAY.ptd Page 147 1245997

The electric activity management server 1 2 7 4 takes out the sender's phone number π 1 0 0 1π and the recipient's phone number from the received ip packet "2 3 4-2 0 0 1 &quot; Calculate the circuit number &quot; c 1C-2, and form an IP packet 1 3 34 (Fig. 155) (referred to as an ANM packet) containing at least the electric S number &quot; CIC-2 "and send it to the telephone management server 1271 ( Step V35). The telephone management server 1271 takes out the circuit number &quot; ciC-2, and the program section n ANM'f from the received IP packet 1 334, and checks the CIC management table 1 326-1 held by the telephone management server 1271 (Fig. 141), find the record with the circuit number &quot; CIC-2 &quot;, and rewrite the program section column of the aforementioned record to the aforementioned program section &quot; A nM &quot;. Second, the telephone management server 1271 notifies the aforementioned MM packet, that is, the telephone 1 2 1 6 answers the outgoing call to the media router management unit 1260 (steps V36, V37, V38), and the media router management unit 1260 sends the outgoing signal to Telephone 1 208 (step V39). &lt; &lt; Setting of IP communication record >〉 The telephone management server 1 274 obtains the circuit number “c 丨 c-2” from the IP packet of the telephone management server 1 2 7 4 in the previous step V34, and manages it from the telephone. Find the record with the circuit number "CIC-2" in all the CIC management tables 1 326-2 of server 1 274, and take out the IP address "EA2" from this record,

'' ΕΑΓ, &quot; ΙΑ2Π, &quot; ΙΑΓ, and sent to the table management server 1276 (step V42), the table management server 1 276 is set as the second address management table 1 254 inside the network device 1247 Record of line &quot; EAA2, EAA1, IAA2, IAA1 "(step V43) 〇 'Similarly, the" telephone management server 1271 obtains the circuit number from the IP packet of the telephone management server 1 2 71 in the aforementioned step V35 "c IC ~ 2 ,,

1245997 V. Description of the invention (145), find out the record with the circuit number 1 'CIC _ 2π from the CIC management table 1323 owned by the telephone management server 1271, and take out the IP address &quot; ea 1π, "ΕΑ2 from this record. ", ΠΙΑ1Π, ΠΙΑ2Π, and transmitted to the table management server 1 273 (step V44), the table management server 1 273 is set as the record of the fifth line of the address management table 1250 inside the network point device 1 244 &quot; EA1 , EA2, IA1, IA2II (step V45). &lt; &lt; Changes in the continuation stage >〉 Furthermore, the media player management unit 1 267 can transmit a response confirmation to step V31 to the telephone 1216 (step V41). Similarly, the telephone 1 208 can transmit the response to step V39. The response confirmation is transmitted to the media router management unit 1 260 (step V40). Steps V41 and V40 are optional. In the continuation phase described above, although the UDP port number and additional information of the telephone 1 21 6 are transmitted in steps V22 to V29, they can be performed in steps V32 to V39 instead. &lt; &lt; Communication stage >〉 The telephone communication between the user of the telephone set 1208 and the telephone set 1216 is the same as that described in the other embodiments, and the address management table 1 2 5 0 is used to set the fifth line in the connection phase. IP communication record (ΠΕΑ1, EA2, IA1, ΙΑ2Π) and the IP communication record (&quot; ΕΑ2, EA1, IA2, ΙΓ) of the second row inside the address management table 1254. The voice of the telephone 1 208 is digitized and recorded in the payload of the IP packet 1355 (Fig. 156). Here, the trusted end address and the UDP port number obtained in the aforementioned continuation phase are used. That is, the sender's address is the IP address of the media router 1 2 0 1 π E A1π, and the recipient's address is the IP address of the media router 1 202 connected to the receiver's telephone 1216 &quot; ΕΑ2 &quot;,

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p. 149 1245997

And "50 06" as the sender's UDP port number, and "5 0008 UDP port number. Send analog sound from the phone 1208 (for the use of the media router management department, the sound is digitized and turned into a stand 1 335, and then it is transmitted to the network device 1 244 (step V51). Ten capsules, encapsulated into IP packets 1 336 (Figure 157), via the IP communication circuit $ ', router 1 263, router 1 264 in Figure 128, Arrive at the outlet and go through 1 247 (step V52), where it is decapsulated, and then arrive at the media management department 1 267 (step V53), reply to the analog sound and reach the phone. 1216 (step V54). It is transmitted from the phone 1216 The analog sound is transmitted in the opposite direction (steps V55 to V59). "Then &lt; &lt; Release Phase >>> When the user of the telephone set 1208 notifies the release of the telephone communication (step V60 in the figure) 'via the media router Management unit 1260, branch office equipment 1 244, agent telephone management server 1 270, notifies the telephone management server 1271 (steps V60 to V63), and the telephone management server 1271 writes the end time &quot; Ed-Γ to the CIC management table 1 326-1 The middle circuit number is “CIC-2Π” at the end of the recording. Secondly, an IP packet is released 337 (Figure 158) (referred to as the REL packet), and the telephone management server 1 274 is notified (step V64). The telephone The management server 1 274 notifies the telephone 1216 of the release of the telephone communication via the agent telephone management server 1 275 (steps V71 to V74). Further, the telephone management server 1 274 writes the end time &quot; Ed-2n to the C 1C management Table 1 32 The stop time at the end of the record with the circuit number &quot; CIC-2 &quot; in 6-2. In order to report the release of the released IP packet 1 3 3 7, the formation of the released end IP packet 1 338 (Figure 159) (called RLC packet) and send it back to the phone management server

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 150 1245997 V. Description of the invention (147) 1271 (step V70). After step V64, the telephone management server 1271 notifies the media router management section 1260 via the agent telephone management server 1 270 and the branch device 1 244 (steps V65, V66, and V67). The media router management section 1 267 notifies the telephone set 1216 of the release instruction (step V74), and notifies the telephone management server 2 74 of the release report via the agent telephone server (steps V75, V76, V77). &lt; &lt; Clearing of IP communication records >〉 After step V64, the telephone management server 丨 271 transmits the circuit number “CIC — 2” written in the release IP packet 1 337 to the table management server 1 273 (step V78), clear the record of the address management table 1 2 5 〇 corresponding to the circuit number &quot; CI C-2 2 inside the branch point device 1244 (in this example, the contents are &quot; ΕΑ1, ΕΑ2, ΙΑ1, I Α2 &quot; IP communication record) (step V79). After step V70, the 'telephone management server 1 274 transmits the circuit number "c IC-2π written to the release end IP packet 1 3 3 8 to the table management server 1 2 7 6 (step V80), and clears the correspondence Record of the circuit number &quot; CIC — 2 address management table 1 254 inside the branch device 1 247 (in this example, it is the IP communication record of "EA1, IA2, IA1 &quot;) (step V81). &lt; Collecting call information >〉 When the application management server 1277 inside the IP transfer network 1200 inquires the telephone management server at an appropriate predetermined time or every time interval (step V200 in FIG. 162), In the CIC management table, whether the end time or the like is written as a clue is used to detect the end of the telephone communication. Then, the sender's phone number, the recipient's phone number, the start time, and the end time are recorded.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 151 1245997 V. Description of the invention (148) The phone management server 1271 is notified to the phone management server 1271 (step V201), and the record of the CIC management table 1326-1 at the end of the phone communication is cleared. Similarly, when the management server 1 277 is used to inquire the telephone management server 1 274 (step V202), whether or not the end time is written in the CIC management table 1 326-2 is used as a clue to detect the record of the end of the telephone communication. . Then, the phone management server 1 274 is notified of the telephone communication records of the sender's phone number, the recipient's phone number, the start time, and the end time (step V203), and the record of the CIC management table 13 26_2 at the end of the phone communication is cleared. Collect the phone number of the sending end, the phone number of the receiving end, the start time, the end time, etc., and the charges for the telephone communication. Moreover, the collection of the aforementioned call information can be _ implemented. · <Transmission circuit management and transmission circuit management> In the aforementioned connection phase, when the telephone management server 1271 (FIG. 142) IAM packet 1 327 is formed (step V9), it will correspond to FIG. 160 Sending circuit management table 1 3 2 6 _ 5 The address of the media router on the sender side, ea 1, and the number of circuits in use increases by Π1Π. Similarly, the telephone management server 1274 will increase the number of circuits in use &quot; 1 &quot; by the address of the media router &quot; ΕΑ2 &quot; corresponding to the letter circuit management table 1 3 2 6-6 of FIG. . In the foregoing release phase, when the REL packet 1 337 of FIG. 158 is formed (step V64), the telephone management server 1271 will correspond to the bit of the media router on the transmission side of the transmission and routing management table_-5 of FIG. 160. The number of circuits in the circuit is reduced "Γ. Similarly, when the telephone management server i 274 forms the RLC packet 1 338 in Fig. 159 (step V70), it will correspond to the letter circuit management table 1 in Fig. 161. Address of Media Router &quot; EA2

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 152 1245997 V. Description of the invention (149) The number of circuits in use of π is reduced by π 1 ". Furthermore, the aforementioned transmission circuit management and the management of the transmission circuit can be selected whether to implement. 〈〈 Other examples of continuation stage 〉〉

In the aforementioned continuation stage (steps V0 to V45), a step (steps V90 to V96) of response confirmation may be added, and described with reference to FIG. 163. When the media router management unit 1260 receives the notification of the response (step V38), it can form and return an IP packet representing the notification of the response confirmation. The aforementioned I ρ packet for the response confirmation is transmitted through the network device 1 244 and the agent telephone management server. 1 270, the telephone management server 1271, the telephone management server 1274, the telephone agent server 1 275, and the branch office device 1 247 are sent to the media router management section 1 267 (steps V90 to V96). This improves communication reliability. &lt; &lt; Other examples of release phase &gt;> The aforementioned release phase (steps V60 to V77) may be replaced by the following steps, and described with reference to FIG. 16. When the user of the telephone set 1208 notifies the release of the telephone communication (step vi〇〇 of FIG. 168), via the media router management section 126〇, the branch device 1 244, the agent telephone management server 1 270, the telephone management server ^ 2727, the telephone The management server 1274, the agent telephone management server 1 275, the branch office device 1 247, and the media router management section 1 267, and the notification telephone 1216 (steps 7100 to ¥ 108). When the media router management unit 1 267 receives the notification of the release (step V107), to notify the release, it receives 'in the opposite direction to the above', that is, via the branch device 1247, the agent's telephone, the "Tunnel management server 1275, and the telephone management Server 1274, phone management server 1271, agent phone management server 1 270, network point device 1244, communication ^

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 153 (150) 1245997 5 Media Router Management Department 1 260 (steps vll11 to V118). Then, the notification of the end of the release follows the same path as described above, that is, via the branch device 1 247: the phone management server 1 275, the phone management server 1274, the electric house management feeder 1 2 71, and the agent phone The management server 1270 and the branch device 1244 'notify the media router management section 1260 (steps ¥ 121 to V127). Also, 'Clear the voice communication records used in the address management table 125 inside the branch point device 1 244 and the address management table inside the branch point device 1 247 254 and the foregoing steps "〇 and 78] 1 or the foregoing steps V78 &amp; V79 phase

with. Reliability can be improved by releasing the receiving and ending procedures twice. &lt; &lt; Adoption of TCP technology &gt; In the foregoing connection phase and release phase, the communication between the telephone management server 1 2 71 and the telephone management server 1 274 is to implement steps V9, V16, V25, V35, V64, and V70 can be implemented through TCP communication instead. Referring to FIGS. 164 to 169, the description is as follows.

Figure 164 is an example of implementing step V9 through TCP communication. The telephone management server 1271 transmits a TCP packet 1 390-1 containing the SYN designation for establishing a TCP connection to the telephone management server 1 274. The telephone management server 1274 responds with The TCP packet 1391-1 indicated by the ACK indicated by the communication is transmitted from the telephone management server 1271 to the TCP management packet 1 392-1 containing the same content as the IP packet 1327 (notice of the call setting I AM) to the telephone management server 1 2 74 (step V9t). Next, from the phone management server 1271, a TCP packet 1 393-1 containing the FIN designation for the end of the TCP connection is transmitted to the phone management server 1 274. From the phone management server 1 274, the TCP packet 1 for confirming the end is transmitted. 394-1 is returned to the phone management server 1271.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 154 1245997 V. Description of the invention (151)-Figure 165 is an example of implementing step V16 through TCP communication. The phone management server 1 274 transmits the SYN designation including the establishment of a TCP connection. Tcp packet 1 390-2 to the telephone management server 1271, and the telephone management server 1271 responded with a Tcp packet 1391-2 containing the ACK indication that the communication started to understand. From the telephone management server 1 274, it will contain the same content as the IP packet 1331. The TCP packet 1 392-2 (notification of call setting acceptance ACM) is transmitted to the telephone management server 1271 (step VI 6t). Next, the TCP management packet 1 393-2 containing fin specified for the end of the TCP connection is transmitted from the telephone management server to the telephone management server 1271, and the TCP packet 1394-2 for confirming the end is transmitted from the telephone management server 1271 Call back to manage the feeder 1274. FIG. 166 is an example of implementing step V25 through TCP communication. The phone management server 1271 transmits a τ / ρ packet 1390-3 containing the SYN designation for establishing a TCP connection to the phone management server 1274, and the phone management server 1274 returns. Contains TCP packets 1391-3 indicated by ack, which began to be understood by Tongkou. From the telephone management server 1271, TCP packets 1 3 92 —3 containing the same content as ^ packet 丨 333 (call notification via CPG) are transmitted to the telephone management server. Device 1274 (step V25t). Then, from the phone management server, the TCP packet 1393-3 containing the FIN specified for the end of the TCP connection is transmitted to the phone management server 1 274, and from the phone management server 1 274, the TCP for the end of the acknowledgement is transmitted. The packet 1394_3 is returned to the telephone management server 1 271. 'Figure 167 is an example of implementing step V35 through TCP communication. The feature is that the phone management server 1271 sends a TCP packet 1392-4 containing the same content as the IP packet 1 334 called ANM notification to the phone management feeder 1 274 (step V35t) can be implemented in the same manner as the other methods described above. Pick up

1245997

Fig. 168 shows an example of implementing step "v" through TCP communication. From the telephone management server 127i, a TCP packet 1 392_5 containing the same content as 1? Packet 1 337 (= notification of REL) is transmitted to the telephone management server. Note 1274 (step V64t) can be implemented in the same way as the other methods described above. Figure 169 is an example of implementing step V70 through TCP communication, and its features from the phone management server 1 274 will contain the same content as the IP packet 1 338 (end of release RLC notification) TCP packet 1392_6 is transmitted to the telephone management server 1271 (step V70t), and can be implemented in the same manner as the other methods described above. "<Separation of Control Circuit and Telephone">

Next, it is explained that in the open domain communication communication, the IP communication circuit for indirect continuous control of the terminal and the communication circuit for voice communication can be separated. IP packets 1322, 1327, 1328, 1331, 1 332-2, 1 333, 1 333-1, 1 334, 1 337, 1 338 for indirect continuous control of terminal forwarding connection agent telephone management server 1270, telephone management servo The range 1 289 of any of the IP communication circuits of the server 1271, the telephone management server 1274, and the agent telephone management server 1275 (FIG. 170). On the other hand, the IP packets 1 335 and 1 336 used for voice communication forward the range of the IP communication circuits 1 244, router 1291, router 1292, and node device 1247 connected to the network device 1 2 9 3 (FIG. 170). For terminal indirect continuous control! The p communication circuit is equivalent to a circuit of a common line signal network of a switched communication network, and a communication circuit used in voice communication may correspond to a voice communication circuit of a switched communication network. According to the above, the branch point device 1 244 has a function of transmitting the IP packet for communication between terminals transmitted by the media router 1201 to the router 1 263 and separately transmitting the IP packet for voice communication to the router 1291.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 5. Description of the Invention (153) Focusing on the IP packet flow in the reverse direction, the IP packet used for communication between terminals and the IP packet used for voice communication are merged and transmitted. For the media router 120, <&lt; tree structure of telephone numbers and telephone DNS server &gt;> The tree structure shown in FIG. 71 is the tree structure of the telephone numbers managed by the telephone number server 11 4 0 of company B, In the lower position of the router 丨 2 50, the network domains 1251 to 1 254 have the same hierarchical tree structure relationship, and the network domain 1251 manages the IP related to the phone number "lx XX π (1000-digit phone number) Address, domain 1 252 manages the IP address associated with the phone number &quot; 2 xxx &quot;, domain 1 253 manages the IP address associated with the phone number "3 χ χ χ, the relevant IP address 4 address, domain 1 254 manages ιρ addresses related to other phone numbers. The tree structure shown in FIG. 72 is the tree structure of the phone numbers managed by the phone number server 11 42 of the company a. It is lower than the router 2 51, and the network domains 1251-2, 1251-3, and 1 254 have the same structure. Hierarchical tree structure relationship, network domain 125 1-2 is the phone number of management company a "j χ χ χ", domain i 251 -3 is the domain of management company A "# &quot;, domain 1251-4 It manages the IP address related to the internal phone number “1 xx” of company a, and the domain 1251-5 manages the internal phone number related to the internal phone number of company A &quot; 2χ χ &quot;, the network domain is 1251-1-6 It manages the IP address associated with the internal telephone number of company A, 3 χ χ ”. Here, the 'domain' is a secret value dedicated to company A and will not be disclosed to other companies. In other words, the phone number server 丨 丨 42 does not answer questions about the phone number servers affiliated with company B or company C other than company A, which are related to the domains 1151-4 to 151-6 below the domain π Intelligence. The domain 1 2 5 4 manages the addresses associated with other phone numbers.

1245997 V. Description of the invention (154) The tree structure shown in Figure 173 is the tree structure of the phone numbers managed by the phone number server 1137 of the company a, which is lower than the router 1 2 5 0-1, and the network domains 1251 to 1 254 has a tree structure relationship of the same rank. The domain 丨 251 manages the 1? Address related to the phone number to which company A belongs, and the domain 丨 252 manages the phone number of company B &quot; 2 XX x. Domain 1 253 manages IP addresses related to the phone number "3 X xx" of company C, and Domain 1 254 manages IP addresses related to other phone numbers. The domain 1251-2 is the management company, A's phone number "丨 χ χ χ", the domain 丨 25 1-3 is the domain "#" of the management company A, the domain! 251-4 series manages the IP address associated with the internal telephone number π 1 XX π of the company A, the domain 丨 2 51-5 series manages the internal telephone number of the company A &quot; 2 XX, and the related ρ Address, the domain 1 2 5 1-6 is the p address that manages the internal telephone number of company A, 3 χ χ &quot;. Here, the domain π # &quot; is a secret value dedicated to the aforementioned company A. In addition, the tree structure shown in FIG. 74 is the tree structure of the phone numbers managed by the company's phone number server 丨 丨 39. It is lower than the router 丨 2 5 〇-2, and the network domains 1 254-2 and 1 254 has a tree structure relationship of the same rank. Domain 1 254-2 is the phone number of management company X, and domain 1 254 is the management of IP addresses related to other phone numbers. Table 1255-1 in FIG. 175 shows the method by which the media router management unit 126 transforms the telephone numbers connected to the media router 1201 from 2008 to 1211 into the domain names. The phone number π 1 XX x ”in the first row of the phone number, for example, the phone number”; I 〇〇 丨 ”is represented by the phone number domain name &quot; 1 · a · π, and the phone number in the second row of the table &quot; 2 XXX "Expressed as a telephone number domain name" b · ", will be 1 ^ 1 2049-3793-PF of Table 1 2 5 5 -1; RAY.ptd page 158 1245997 V. Description of the invention (155) Line 7 Other phone numbers are represented by the phone number domain name &quot; 〇 &quot;, and the other lines are the same. Phone number server 11 3 7 According to Table 1 2 of Figure 1 7 6 2 5 5-2, such as phone number domain name 1 · a • When asked 'return IP address π E A1, when the phone number The domain name "quotes the IP address" when asked, "EA 5π, and the phone number domain name", when asked, answers the IP address ΠΕΑΓ.

Table 1256-1 in FIG. 177 shows the method by which the media router management unit 1264 converts the telephone numbers 1228 to 1231 connected to the media router 1203 as the communication target to the domain name, which is the first of Table 1256-1 Line phone number, '1 XXX π is represented by phone number domain name &quot; 1 · a · &quot;, the phone number in line 2 of Table 1 255-1 &quot; 1 XX &quot; is represented by phone number domain name π 1. # · a · π expression, the other phone numbers in line 5 of Table 1 256-1 are expressed by phone number domain name &quot; 〇 · &quot; The telephone number server 1142 is based on Table 1 25 6-2 of FIG. 178. For example, when the telephone number domain name π 1 · a · ”is asked, it answers the IP address &quot; ΕΑ1 &quot;. When the telephone number domain name π 1 · # · A · "When asked, answer the IP address" EA1 ", and phone number domain name" 0 · "When asked, answer the IP address" EA8Γ ".

Table 1257-1 of FIG. 179 shows the method for the media router management section 266 to convert the telephone numbers 1 220 to 1 223 connected to the media router 1 205 as the communication target to the domain name, which is to change the table 1257- The phone number π 1 XXX in the first line of 1 is expressed by the phone number domain name &quot; a • &quot;, and the phone number in the second line of Table 1 257-1 "2χ χ χ" is used in the phone number domain The name 1 b · "is expressed, and the other phone numbers in line 4 of Table 1 256-1 are represented by the phone number domain name" 0 · ", and the same is applied to other lines. Phone number

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 159 1245997 V. Description of the invention (156) The server 1140 according to Table 1 257-2 of Figure 180, such as the telephone number domain name na · &quot; When asked, answer I "p address" EA1, when the telephone number domain name &quot; b · &quot; is asked, answer the ip address &quot; EA5 ", the telephone number domain name &quot; 〇 · &quot; when asked, Answer the IP address &quot; ΕΑ8Γ. The telephone number servers 11 37 to 11 42 use the known redial function of a domain name server (DNS) to call other telephone number servers to obtain IP addresses directly managed by other telephone number servers.

The summary is as follows. That is, the media router 1 and the media router 2 are connected via the IP transfer network, the telephone set 1 is connected to the media router 1 ′, the telephone set 2 is connected to the media router 2, and the telephone set 1 and the telephone set 2 use the internal telephone number servo of the media router Device, can not use the phone number server inside the IP transfer network, and carry out telephone communications. Furthermore, a plurality of telephones can be connected to the media router 1 or the media router 2. The 1-to-1 transmission network includes a unique telephone number server, and the telephones 1 and 2 can use the telephone number server inside the media router 1 to access the telephone number server in the IP forwarding network to perform telephone communication with the telephone 2. The IP transfer network includes two or more branch devices, and the media router is connected to any of the branch devices via logic and IP communication circuits, and is internally granted to the terminal section on the branch device side of the logical IP communication circuit ( p

2 addresses, external IP addresses are assigned to each media router, a telephone number server is provided internally, and the media router is on the telephone via which the communication is performed. The aforementioned external IP address and communication records are preliminarily used as the connection and connection phases of the internal address management table in the network device. The call is set by the call setting n AM% (1 n and UAM), the call setting acceptance (ACM )

1245997 V. Description of the invention (157), call pass (CPG), response (ANM) formed by a series of steps. In addition, the release phase of telephone communication is a series of steps composed of release (REL) and release end (RLC) Formed. Furthermore, an acknowledgement (ACK) can be performed after the response to the non-questioned ANM), and release acceptance can be performed between release (REL) and release complete (RLC). ° To further summarize, between the phone management server on the sending side and the phone management server on the writing side, I AM packets, acm ^ packets are transmitted and received: CPG packets, ANM packets, REL packets, RLC packets. In the limited communication target f closed-domain telephone communication, the telephone number server inside the media router is used, and in the open domain telephone communication of the unrestricted communication target, by using the telephone number server inside the media router, it can be forwarded using 丨 P Phone number server inside the network. In the open-domain telephone communication, the IP communication circuit used in the indirect renewal of the terminal can be separated from the communication cable used in the voice communication. The telephone management server has a CIC management table, which can record the telephone number of the sending end, the telephone number of the receiving end, and the start time and end time of the telephone communication. . Use the management server to inquire the telephone management server to obtain the sender's activation number, the recipient's phone number, and the start time and end of the telephone communication, which can be used for charging. Eleventh Embodiment 11-Performs phone transfer from the public telephone network &lt; &lt; Preparation &gt; &gt; ''

nq-2 Figure 181 &quot; illustrates. The telephone set 5 20 has a telephone number 8510 'connected to a switch 513 via a telephone circuit 517. ΪCircuit 524 1 is connected to switch 5 14-1 and gateway 52H. The interface is ^ s common line signal line and nni of the call circuit. The common line signal is 1245997. 5. Description of the invention (158) The line is transmitted according to the common line signal Mode specified signal unit. Gateway 5 21-1 is granted to the general public Gw logical name (Gateway logical name), JiW52ir and the signal office code "# 1 234" recognizable from the public telephone switching network 515 side. Joiner switch 513 , 51 1 saves the aforementioned GW logical name “GW5211” and signal office code ”# 1 234 ,. The communication circuit 52 is connected to the switches 514-2 and 52b 2 and the interface is Li 1. The telephone number is assigned to the terminal on the communication circuit's 5 2 1-2 side, 〇 3 — 1111 — 2 2 2 2. &lt; &lt; Preparation for NNI Circuitry Forwarding by Letter >〉

The owner of the telephone set 520 cuts off the telephone set 52 from the telephone circuit 517 and connects it to the communication circuit 528 connected to the media router 527 as the telephone set 530. The telephone number of the telephone 53 is "〇3_5414 -85ι〇". The user of the telephone 520 informs the telephone 52 about the location of the telephone 530 on the public switched telephone network 533, that is, the gateway &quot; Then, change to the IP transfer network 52 2 as the entrance (step h〇i of FIG. 182), and the theory 533 will change the content, that is, the aforementioned phone number "a logical name" GW52U "via the communication circuit 534 To notify the camera 513 (step Η02). Switch 513 uses the aforementioned logical name &quot; GW5211 &quot; to convert it to 俨 铼 Α 饭 &quot; ^ r, R, and replace it with 仏 旒 局 Code # 1 234 at the transfer place

The telephone number of the user at 5 ° 21 1 is 03-541 4 — 8510, and the tiger code π # 1 234 ”at the transfer gate 52 52 (step Η03). &Lt; &lt; NΝΙ circuit Forwarding by letter 〉〉 When the phone number is 047-325 —389 7 &quot; and the phone number of the phone, 〇3-5 1 / I 0 C 1 η 丨 丨 A Wei U is king again? Christine When a call is made from step 14 to 85 10 (step H05), the outgoing call is exchanged (step _). Then, from switch 511 via

1245997

From the communication circuit 512 to the switch 513, the process is performed on the telephone set 52; Liaobu Lions 8). The switch 513 finds out the telephone number "03-5414-8510" and the transfer gate signal code "# 1 234" (step Η09) which is memorized in the 5th call part 516 in advance, and changes the ax / 1 obtained above. &quot;# 1234 &quot; Notification exchange details (step Η10). Switch Chuan: The above-mentioned signal office code "# 1 234" at the address of 52W to K is used as the receiving end, forming a signal including the telephone number of the receiving end of the forwarding point "03-54 ^. 851j" When the unit is transmitted to the message department, the aforementioned signal unit is replaced by the parent 514-1 (step H11), and passes through the communication circuit 524-i and the gate 52b1 (step H12). After that, it passes through the router 525- 丨And through the telephone management server 525 (H15), and then through the connection control circuit 524-5, router 525-2, connection control circuit 524-4, and network device 523-2 (step H16), and then through the communication circuit 526 Arrive at Media Router 527 (Step H17). When Media Router 527 reverses the notification of a phone call that is not required for the above-mentioned telephone connection, it forwards the notification of the phone call acceptance via the outlet device 523-2 (step H21), and then Phone management device = 5 (step H22), arrive at the gate 5 ^ 4 (step H23). The gate 52m ^ accepts the aforementioned call, and via the switch 514 — (step H25), notifies the switch 511 (step H26) &Quot; Second, Media Router 527 via The letter circuit 528 dials out the phone number "03-5414-851 0" at 5300 hours (step 1128). The notification during the outgoing call is in the opposite direction to that described above, that is, via the media router 527 and the outlet device. 523-2, connection control circuit 524-4, telephone management server 525, gateway 52b, switch 514-j, switch 511, and 1245997

The calling telephone set 51 is notified (steps H30 to H37). When the user of the telephone 53〇 picks up the handset (off-hook), the telephone 53 will notify the notification media of the response, the router 527 (step H40), and then the same as above, via the media router 527, the outlet device 523-2, and connection. The control circuit 524-4, the telephone management server 525, the gateway 521-1, the switch 514-1, and the switch 511 'are notified to the calling telephone set 51 (steps Η ~ Η47). As the foregoing steps H11, H12, and H15, the connection control data used for the telephone call connection being transmitted and received are referred to as AM messages, and the connection control data between steps H2 3, H25, and H26 are referred to as ACM messages. The data for connection control between steps H33, H35, and H36 are called CPg messages, and the data for connection control between steps H43, H45, and H46 are called ANM messages. During the aforementioned telephone call connection phase, it is characterized in that the aforementioned messages (IAM, ACM, cpG ANM) do not pass through the outlet device 523 — !. In other words, the aforementioned message is directly transmitted and received between the gateway 522 and the telephone management server 525. As described above, the communication connection procedure between the electric machine 5 10 and the telephone 5 300 is terminated, and a call can be made through the sound between the telephone 510 and the telephone 53. Furthermore, the sound transmitted from the telephone set 510 reaches the gateway 521-1 through the switch 5Π, the switch 514-1, and the communication circuit 524-1, and becomes a digitized sound in the gateway 521-1, and then reaches the outlet device. 5 2 3 — i, communication circuit

524-3, router 525-2, communication circuit for voice communication 524-6, network device 523-2, and media router 527. In the media router 527, the digitized voice is analogized and reaches the telephone 53. The voice transmitted from the telephone 5 30 is transmitted via the communication path opposite to the above, and reaches the telephone 5 10.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (161) At the end of the call of the phone, the call release from the phone is sent from the phone 5 1 0 to the switch 511 (step H50) and passes through the switch 514-1 (step H51), is notified to the gateway 521-1 (step H53), and the notification of the end of the call release is sent from the gateway 521-1 to the switch 511 (steps H54, H55). Next, the gateway 52b1 sends the release of the telephone call obtained in the foregoing procedure to the telephone 530 via the IP transfer network 522 (steps H61 to H64). The notification of the end of the call release is returned from the media router 5 2 7 Gate 52 and 1 (steps H65 to H67). It can be reversed, that is, the reason for calling release from the telephone set 530 to the public telephone exchange network 515 is explained in other embodiments. The connection control data of the call release in steps H51, H53, and H61 described above are called REL messages, and the connection control data of steps H67, H54, and H55 are called RLC messages. Furthermore, when the above steps H01 to H03 are not performed, and the owner 532 of the telephone 520 sets the position of the telephone 530, that is, the gateway "(JW52 1 Γ, from the telephone number &quot; 0 3-5 41 4-8 5 1 0 ”telephone 5 2 0 connection to the IP forwarding network 522 as the entrance notice, after the communication circuit 517 notified the switch 513, the telephone 520 connection can be changed to the location of the telephone 53 0 (step in Figure 182 H01X). Then, the switch 513 uses the previously saved information to transform the GW logical name "GW5211" into a signal office code "# 1 234". The telephone number "03-541 4-851 0" and the gateway at the transfer point can be used. 521 — 丨 The method of storing the second station code "# 1234" on the transfer processing unit 516 (Step # As described above, the description of the telephone letter transfer via the NNI circuit is described below. Next, the telephone letter transfer by UNI is explained.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (162) &lt; &lt; Preparation of UNI circuit letter transfer &gt;> With reference to FIG. 18 and FIG. The owner of the telephone set 520 cuts off the telephone set 520 from the telephone circuit 517 and connects it to the communication circuit 528 as the telephone set 530. The telephone number of the telephone 530 is 03-541 4 -8510 &quot;. Next, the user 532 of the telephone 52 notifies the reception 5 33 of the subsequent change of the telephone 520 (step H01), and the reception 533 notifies the exchange 513 of the change via the communication circuit 534 (step H02). The switch 513 stores the telephone number "03_54 1 4-85 1 0" on the transfer processing section 5116, and the transfer terminal 5 to the transfer terminal 2 on the side of the transfer section which is granted to the communication circuit 524-2. Phone number "03-1 1 1 -2222, (step H03-2). &lt; &lt; UNI circuit forward by letter &gt; &gt; In this example, the switch 51 4-1 is used instead of the switch 51 4-2 'In addition, the gateway 52b 2 is used instead of the gateway 52b 1. . For this reason, the procedure for controlling communication between terminals between switches 514-2 and gateways 52 and 2 has been changed to new steps Η12-2 and Η13-2, which are explained below. When a call is made from the phone 510 with the phone number “047-325-389 7” to the phone number of the recipient 03-541 4-851 0π (step Η05-2), the switch 511 accepts the call (step Η06-2) Next, from the switch 511, through the communication circuit 512 to the switch 513 (step Η08-2), the telephone 520 is powered

Call out. The switch 513 finds out the telephone number “03-54 1 4-85 1 0” previously stored in the transfer processing section 5 丨 6 and the terminal section of the input circuit 524-2 that is given to the transfer gate 52 and 2 Phone number "03-^^ 22221 step H09-2), and notify the switch 511 (step H10-2) of the phone number" 03-lm-2222 "obtained previously. The switch 511 will report the previously received gateway 521- 2

Page 166 1245997 V. Telephone number "0 3-mi-2 222" of the input circuit of the invention description (163) as the receiving end, forming and transmitting the telephone number of the receiving end including the aforementioned forwarding point 〇 3_5414 one 8 5 1 When the signal unit of 0 ”is reached, the aforementioned signal unit reaches the switch 5 1 &amp; — 2 (steps 1 and 2). When the telephone connection request (SETUP) included in the aforementioned signal unit is sent to the gate via the communication circuit 524-2 At the time of road 52 and 2 (step H12-2), the gateway 521-2 will accept the telephone call connection request of step 2 described above and notify the switch 5 14-2 (step H1 3-2). In addition, the outlet is installed 1 523- 1 (step Η14-2), then through router 525-2, through the telephone management server 525 (Η1 5-2), and then through router 525-2, and then control the power consumption

Route 524-4 and the branch point device 523-2 (step Η16-2) pass through the communication circuit 526 and reach the media router 527 (step H17-2). When the media router 527 reversely transmits the notification of the telephony call literature and the phone connection request, the notification of the phone call acceptance is via the network device 523-2 (step H21-2) and the phone management server 525 (step H22-2), and then pass through the network point device 523 — (steps 2-3), and reach the gate 5212 (step H24-2). The gateway 521-2 passes the telephone call acceptance via the switch \ 14-2 (step H25-2) and notifies the switch 511 (step H26 "2). "Secondly, the media router 527 calls the telephone number 0 3-541 4-85 1 0 via the communication circuit 528 at 5300 hours (step H28_2), and the letter calls

The out-of-office notification is the reverse of that described above, that is, via the media router 527 (step 30-2), the branch device 523-2 (step H31-2), the telephone management server step H32-2), and the branch device 523-1 ( Step H33-2), Gateway 521 Step 2 β Step 2), Switch 514-2 (Step H35-2), Switch 511 (Step H36-2), and notify the calling telephone 51 (Step H37-2) .

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p.167 1245997

When the user of the telephone 530 picks up the handset (off-hook), the telephone 530 notifies the media router 5 27 of the response notification (step H4—0-2). 2. The management server 525, the outlet is installed with 523M, the gateway is 52b, the switchboard 514, the parent switch 511, and the calling telephone 51 is notified (step 2 to H47 2). In the connection phase of the telephone call described above, for the connection phase between the gateway I-? And the telephone management server 525, transmission and reception of messages via the branch point device 523-1 is performed.

As described above, the communication connection procedure between the 'telephone 510 and the telephone 530 is completed, and a call can be made through the sound between the telephone 510 and the telephone 530. &lt; <Talk Phase and Release Phase> A call phase and release phase are the same as the example of the aforementioned NN 丨 circuit letter transfer. The difference is that the switch 514-2 is used instead of the switch 514-1, and the gateway 521- 2 replaces the gateway 521 — 1 (steps {150-2 to 1153-2, H54-2 to H55-2, H60-2 to H63-2, H65-2 to H68-2). &lt; &lt; Other Embodiments Forwarded by UNI Letter &gt; &gt; &gt;

▲ Description will be made with reference to FIGS. 181 and 184. The owner of the telephone set 52 cuts off the telephone set 520 from the telephone circuit 517 and connects it to the communication circuit 528 of the media router 527 as the telephone set 530, which is the same as the preparation for the UNI circuit in the foregoing embodiment. &lt; &lt; UNI circuit letter transfer >>> In the implementation of the / tUNI circuit letter transfer, the switch 511 and the switch 514-2 transmit and receive messages for connection control via the switch 513, as follows.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd ------ Page 168 1245997

When a call is made from the telephone 510 of the telephone number 047-325-389 7Π to the telephone number of the recipient "03-54 1 4-85 1 0π (step Η05-3), the exchange 511 accepts the call (step Η 〇6-3). Next, from the switch 511, through the communication circuit 512 to the switch 513, make a call to the telephone 52 (step Η08-3). The switch 513 finds the telephone number stored in the transfer processing unit 516 in advance. f '03-54 1 4-85 1 0 &quot; and the telephone number on the terminal of input circuit 524-2, which is assigned to the transfer gate 52 52 2, 1 03- 1 1 1 1 -2222, ( Step Ji〇9-3) 'Next, use the telephone number 03 1111 2222 of the input circuit of the gate 52 and 2 as the receiving end' to form and transmit the telephone number of the receiving end including the above-mentioned transfer, "03 -54 1 4- 85 1 〇 ”signal unit, the aforementioned signal unit reaches the switch 514-2 (step H11-3). When the telephone connection request (SETUP) included in the aforementioned signal unit is transmitted to the gateway 521 via the communication circuit 524-1 At -2 (step H12-3), the gateway 521-12 will accept the telephone call connection request of the previous step H12-3. Switch 514-2 (step H1 3-3). In addition, through the network device 523 — (step H14_3), then through the router 525-2, through the telephone management server 525 (H15 — 3), and then through the router w 525- 2. Connection control circuit 524-4, network point device 523-2 (step ° Η 16 3), and then reached the media router 52 via the communication circuit 526 (step when the media router 5 2 7 reversely transmits the above-mentioned telephone connection requirements • Device 2 (steps 2 and 3), and pass through the telephone management server 525 (Niu Su H22-3), and then pass through the outlet device "^ (steps H23-to ^ 52b 2 (steps H24-3). 521-2 Send and receive the aforementioned telephone 1245997

Switch 514-2 (step H25-3), and via switch 513 (step H26-3), notify switch 511 (step H27-3). When its-person 'media router 527 passes the communication circuit 528 to produce a telephone 530 with the phone number "03-5414-8510" (step H28-3), its biography, the outgoing notification is the reverse of the aforementioned, that is, Pass the media router 527 (step H30-3), the branch office device 523-2 (step H31-3), the telephone management servo 525 (step H32-3), the branch office device 523-1 (step H33-3), the gateway °

52 2 (step H34-3), switch 514-2 (step H35-3), switch 513 (step H36-3), switch 511 (step H37-3), and notify the calling telephone 510 (step H38-3 ). When the user of the telephone 53 0 picks up the receiver (off-hook), the telephone 530 notifies the media router of the response notification (step H40-3). The following is the same as above, via the media router μ ?, channel 52b2, The switch 514-2, the switch 513, and the switch 511 notify the phone 510 of the I call (steps H41-3 to H48-3). As described above, the communication connection procedure between the telephone 510 and the telephone 5 30 ends <&lt; the call phase and the release phase >> The call phase and the release phase are the same as those of the aforementioned UN I circuit, but the difference is that the switch 511 and The switches 514 to 2 transmit and receive messages for connection control via the machine 5 1 3. Father, according to the above principle, 'the telephone 510 connected to the public telephone switching network 5 丨 5 can be connected to the telephone number used in the public switching network via the IP forwarding network 522 and "03-541 4-8 51 0" Media Router ^ 7 Parent 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (167) The analog live machine 5 3 0 performs inter-terminal communication. In addition, the media router can be installed inside the LAN according to the description in other embodiments. For this reason 'The telephone with the telephone number used in the public telephone switching network &quot; 〇3-5 41 4 -8510 is connected to the media router inside the lan, and the analog telephone 5 1 5 connected to the public telephone switching network 5 1 5 Through the IP transfer network, the analog telephone set in the LAN with a telephone number of "03-54 1 4-85 1 0" can be used for inter-terminal communication.

Abstract As mentioned above, in order to transfer the call requirements of telephones connected to the public telephone switching network, the technology is transferred to the telephones connected to the IP forwarding network. 'Public telephone switching network 5 1 5 relay switch 5 1 4 -1 and IP The gateway 521-1 of the transfer network 522 is connected by the NNI interface communication circuit 524-1, and the telephone number connected to the subscriber exchange 513 is "TEL 520 of TN-Γ" as the electrical number π TN-1 '' Connected to the media router 527 connected to the IP forwarding network 522 'The telephone number from the connection to the subscriber exchange 511 is &quot; TN-2, and the active machine 51 0, when the telephone number "TN-Γ' is required to connect to the telephone As mentioned above, the continuation request arrives at the subscriber exchange 513 and passes the letter transfer function of the subscriber exchange 513. The aforementioned continuation request is via the relay exchange, the NNI interface communication circuit 52H, the gateway 52b, the IP transfer network 522, and the media. Router 5 2 7 and phone 5 3 0.

The switch 51 4-2 of the subscriber of the public telephone exchange network 515 and the gateway 52 of the IP transfer network 522 are connected by the UNI interface communication circuit 524-2 and will be connected to the subscribers of the public telephone exchange network 515. The telephone number 520 of the exchange 513 is the telephone 520 of the "TN-1", and the telephone number "TN — 丨" is connected to the media router 527 connected to the IP forwarding network, and connected to the subscriber switch 511.

1245997 V. Description of the invention (168) The phone number is Π TN-2, 'the phone 5 1 0, when the phone number &quot; τ N-1 &quot; is required for the phone call connection, the aforementioned connection request reaches the subscriber exchange 5 j 3 Through the letter transfer function of the joiner switch 513, the aforementioned connection request reached the telephone via the joiner switch 51 4-2, the UNI interface communication circuit 524-2, the gateway 52b, the IP transfer network 522, and the media router 527. 530 ° 1 2 · The second embodiment of telephone transfer from the public telephone network: &lt; &lt; Preparation >〉.

In Figure 185, 540 series IP forwarding network, 541 to 545 series branch devices, 546-1 to 546-5 series relay devices (routers), and 550 and 554 series "Gateway containing circuit information ff '5 5 1 , 5 5 2, 5 5 3 series of gateways. These branch devices, relay devices and gateways are connected directly or indirectly through the aforementioned relay device through communication circuits with various IP packet transfer functions. 555 To 556 are Public Telephone Switching Networks (PSTN), 557 to 5 are 66 switches, 570 to 573 are telephones' 59 7 and 598 are telephones, 57 6 to 578 are network-network

NNI communication circuit, 580 to 581 are communication circuits with user-network interface (UNI), 583 are communication circuits with IP packet transfer function '584 and 585 are IP transfer network input circuit tables, 586 To 5900 series 1? Transfer network output circuit table. 591 is a media router. 593 to 594 are telephone numbers. The server 'is connected to the router 5 4 6-1 or the router 546-3 via a communication circuit. The gateways 55 and 554 connected to the NNI communication circuit are respectively given a signal office code for identification from the public telephone exchange network side and an IP address for identification from the p transfer network 540. The telecommunication operator identification code is given to the gate 5 5 0 containing circuit information

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 172 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (169) Ouv, which is authorized to communicate on the closed road 554 containing circuit information. The signal office code "# 2222" is granted on the gateway 551, and the telephone number is granted on the entrance on the side of the circuit 552 ^ circuit 580. "3_4444_4 00" backup phone number server 593 to 594 reminds the telephone number At the time, it has the function of returning: It is the IP address of the gateway of this phone number or 1p "with this phone number. All the channels or media owned by the householder are 06-3333-4444 丨 丨 092-555-6666 丨 丨 07-3333-4444π 093-555-6666 丨 &quot; ㈣⑴-⑽ 电 = 7 二 电: The number is electric The phone number of the home phone 5 71 is Φ, the phone number of the phone 572 is the phone number of 597, the phone number of phone 598 is the phone number of the mobile phone which is connected to the public telephone exchange network 555 or 556 via various communication circuits. Phone number "045-m-8888", phone 573 has router 591. It is connected to the media by the k circuit. Figure 186 illustrates the case where the IP forwarding network turns into the circuit table 584. Brother 0000 ^ 6-9999-9999 ^^ :. ^ ^ 06-0000- The section of the gateway is NNI, of the gateway; Second, the communication circuit continues in this example, the closed channel is 55 !. 5 = ^ = ^ &quot;# 2222 &quot;. The same is true for δ in 1 Ding. Also, line A 筮 9 'Receiving end phone The range of numbers is A ,, n 〇 ″. First, the phone] uses the 09 °° 0: ^ section as the UNI, and the telephone connected to the gateway is in the / β circuit. The code is not 03-4444-4000 &quot;

1245997

To &quot; 03-4444-4099 丨, 笳 hj. + / 丨 The record of the mountain line and the record of the fourth line are also on the / two '. The opening is 552. The 3rd & inner_should be the same. The internal combination of the P transfer network input circuit table 585 contains the same content as the ip transfer network input circuit table 584. Figure 187 illustrates the case where the 58 lines of the output circuit table of the IP forwarding network are recorded. The M of the receiving party's electronic code is from the 4th to the 10th 06:00 00-0000: to "06_9999_9999" for the connection. #The gateway (GW) or media router (MR) of the circuit is connected to the ^ transfer network, and the IP address of the GW or MR is displayed as "10.2.24〇24〇 丨" to "quot.ι〇. 24〇 .24〇

255 ", the same is the record in the second line. The IP transfer network output circuit tables 587 to 590 contain the same information as the ^ transfer network output circuit table 586. &lt; <Control of communication connection between telephones-1> &gt; From FIG. 185, it is exemplified that the telephone from the telephone 570 of the sender with the telephone number "〇3-nil-2222" is connected to the telephone 571 of the receiver with the telephone number "〇6_3333_4444". The 590-i shown in FIG. 188 indicates the telephone connection in the public telephone switching network 555, the 5 90-2 indicates the electrical connection in the IP forwarding network 540, and the 590--3 indicates the public telephone switching network. 5 5 6 Internal telephone connection. Description will be made with reference to FIGS. 188 and 189. When dialing π〇〇χγ 〇 -3333-4444 from telephone 570 &quot; to make an outgoing call (step J01 in Fig. 188), switch 557 confirms the outgoing call (step j〇2), and switch 5 5 7 uses the information contained in the dialing information just described. Communication business identification code "0 0χΥ", find the switch 558 connected to the gateway 550 containing the circuit information of "00〇γ", and send the telephone number of the sender obtained at the time of dialing "03-11 U -2222 "and" 〇〇χγ-〇6-3333-4444 "are transmitted to the switch 558 (step J03). Then, the switch 558 sends the telephone number of the sender.

1245997 V. Description of the invention (丨 7〗) __ ''03 -i m-2222 &quot; and Shoulu—the circuit containing circuit information 55〇 (^ Step 06-3333-4444 ”is transmitted to 550 with reference to the gate containing circuit information Road 55〇) Unload the gateway table 584 containing circuit information, and use the IP transfer network of the telephone at the receiving end to input the circuit, that is, use it to connect the communication circuit ① as a parameter ”06 -3333-4444 "phone ^ ^ end phone number Gu interface, learned that as a signal station n to access information, the channel has and sent back to the switch 558 (step ^ ^ Office code system &quot;# 2222 &quot;, continued To H, f &gt; the signal station code is &quot;# 2222 &quot;, the changer 558 looks for the switch 559 and will include the switch 'in this example, the signal station for accessing information'. The program obtained the opposite mm &quot; and the sender's phone number &quot; omn-2222 and the phone number "〇6-3333 to exchange 559 (step j06). The lip report is transferred to the parent switch 559 via NNI communication Circuit 577 will send the phone number of the sender,-1 1 1 2222 ", the phone number of the recipient, 06-3333-4444 "Transfer to the gateway # 551 with the office code" # 2222, "(step J07). The gateway 551 forms the sender terminal" 03-im-2222 ", which contains the telephone number of the receiver 06-3333-4444π IP packet. The IP address of the sending end of the IP packet is the IP address granted to the gateway 551 (the gateway 551 knows itself), and the IP address of the receiving end is used to communicate with the communication circuit. The target location, in this example, is the IP address of gateway 554 "ι〇 · 24 0 · 240 · Γ, from the IP transfer network output circuit table 586 inside the gateway 551 (Fig. 187) to the receiving end telephone As the parameter, that is, "ι〇 · 240 · 240 · 1" which is one of the IP addresses corresponding to the phone number of the trusted end "06-3333-4444".

Η 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 175 1245997 5. Description of the invention (172) Channel 551, instead of finding out the IP address of gateway 554, sent from gateway 551 to telephone number server 593 for inquiry You can obtain and use the answer (selection) of the telephone number server 593 by connecting π to the IP packet with the IP address of the gateway of the telephone with the telephone number of the receiving end "0 6-333 3-4444". Among the functions of the aforementioned exchange, π steps J04n and "step J05n" can use the common line signal method of the telephone exchange network and the information of the transaction function department. According to the foregoing, the IP packet formed is sent out through the gateway 5 5 1 and passes through Router 541-1, telephone management server 541-1 (step J08), and then pass through router 541-1, router 546-5, telephone management server 549-5 (step J09), pass through router 546-5, gateway 554 (Step J10), via the NNI communication circuit 578, to the switch 562 (Step J11). The aforementioned IP packet contains the sender's phone number "03-1 1 1 1 -222 2 ', and the recipient's phone number' 丨 06-3333 -44441 '〇 followed by' including the sender's phone number '0 3-1 1 1 1 -2222,1, the recipient's store number &quot; 〇6-3 3 3 3-4 4 4 4π call forwarding request is forwarded To the switch 561 (step J12), the switch 56i receiving the call setting request sends a confirmation notification of the call setting request to the switch 557 (step J14 to step J20). Next, the switch 561 dials out the phone 571 (step J13), When the telephone is sent back to the switch 561 (step J22), the switch 561 notifies the sender's phone 57o (step J23 to step J3〇) of the outgoing call from the sender's phone 571 (step J23 to step J3〇). When the phone 57 goes off the hook, the IP packet indicating the start of telephone communication is notified to the sender's phone 570 (step J32 Go to step J40), the telephone communication starts. As described above, the communication between the terminals between the telephone 5 7 0 and the telephone 5 7 1 is continued.

5. Description of the invention (173) The procedure of the second system is completed, and the telephone 57 can be performed. Call release with phone 57m = second call: phone 57 ° sends out a call call release step J42), from the switch 557, the, ,, and beam notifications are returned to the phone 570 (step J43). Connected to the parent switch 557, the switch blue, replace the «ρ» 549-1, and replace the field manager phone management server with Ifi 丨 ί server 549_5, gateway 554, switch 562, traffic = two, east The Λ machine 571 sequentially transmits the notification of receiving the call release, the notification of the beer release, and the ° bundle, and implements the subsequent release (steps J44 to J59). The above steps of the switch or the telephone management feeder are used to control the feed line equivalent to the connection control signal of the common line signal, for example, 9 control

: Since 17, since J36, J5 °, and 151 are equivalent to IAM message, ACM roar, CPG message, ANM message, REL message, RLC message. The above control of the communication connection between telephones is summarized as follows. That is, the IP transfer network is used as a relay network, and the public telephone exchange network = 2 communication connection control method between telephones. The k-terminal electric number, carrier identification code, and telephone number of the receiving end call "in the JP forwarding network gateway specified by the telecommunication operator code, by referring to π to the input circuit table inside the IP forwarding network". The signal office code of the input gateway following the IP transfer network. In the input gateway, take the telephone number of the receiving end as a parameter, and by referring to the output circuit table outside the "to p transfer network outside the gateway", get the communication circuit from the IP transfer network to the public telephone exchange. The IP address of the output gateway of the network, to the IP address obtained above, is forwarded to J p including the phone number of the sender and the phone number of the receiver.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 177 1245997 V. Description of the invention (174) The packet is sent to the output gateway. In the output gateway, a call is made to the public telephone exchange network based on the sender's phone number and the receiver's phone number contained in the aforementioned received p packet, and the call is forwarded to the receiver's phone via the switch. As the other method mentioned above, "quoting the output telephone information outside the transfer network" is to inquire the telephone number server, and the telephone number server answers the input circuit information inside the 1P transfer network "to the outside of the transfer network. The signal office code of the gateway with the ΝΙ communication circuit, "丨 the output circuit information outside the transfer network lf is the address of the gateway with the communication circuit on the outside of the IP transfer network. 〈〈 communication connection between telephones Control--2 &gt; &gt; ^ Refer to FIG. 190 and FIG. 911 for explanation. From the telephone number '' 〇3-1 1 1 1-2 2 2 2, the originating telephone 5 7 0 'To the phone number is,' 〇9 2-5 5 5-6 6 6 6 ,, the telephone connection of the phone 5 7 2 of the receiving end. When dialed from the phone 570, 〇〇χυ-〇92-555-6666 When the telephone connection is required (step κ〇1 in FIG. 19), the switch 557 answers (step K02). The switch 557 finds the switch 558 connected to the gateway 550 containing the circuit information granted 〇 γ γ by using the communication operator identification code '' 〇0 X Υ π included in the information that was dialed in. The sender's telephone number "03- 1 1 1 1 -222 2" and "00ΧΥ-092-555-6666" obtained during the aforementioned dial entry are transmitted to the switch 558 (step κ〇3). The switch 558 will send Letter phone number "〇3-1 1 1 1 -2222π and phone number of the receiver" 〇9 2-5 5 5-6 6 6 6π is sent to the gateway 550 containing the circuit information (step K04), including the circuit information The gate 55 is the input circuit table 584 of the IP forwarding network inside the gate 550 containing circuit information, and finds i

1245997 V. Description of the invention (175) The telephone number 11 0 3-4 4 4 4-4 Ο Ο Οπ is used to connect the communication circuit to the telephone set of the receiver's telephone number "092-555-6666" The gateway ’s access information and informs the switch 558 (step K05). Second, the switch 558 looks for the switch connected to the gateway phone number π 03-4444-400 0 ”, in this case, find the switch 5 6 0, Will include the phone number `` 03-4444-4000Π, the sender's phone number '' 03-1 1 1 1 -2222, and the recipient's phone number as access information to the gateway obtained through the aforementioned procedure, 〇92-555-6666, the information is transferred to the switch 560 (step K06). The switch 560 is, 03-1111-2222π, and the telephone number of the receiving end "〇92-555-6666, through the UNI communication circuit 580 To the gateway 552 to which the telephone number "03-4444-4000" was granted (step K07). The gateway 552 will receive these two phone numbers and report to the switch 560 (step K08).

• When the gateway 552 receives the aforementioned information, it retrieves (Fig. 187) the IP transfer network output circuit table 587, and uses the telephone number of the receiving end "〇92-555-6666" as a parameter to obtain the communication object for connecting the communication circuit. Gateway in this example is the IP address of gateway 553 "ι〇 · 240. 2 41 · Γ, forming the sender's phone number containing the previously learned" 〇3-1 1 1 1 -2 222π And the recipient's phone number 092-555-6666 "IP packet. The sending end ιρ address of the aforementioned Iρ packet is the IP address of the gateway 552 (the gateway 552 itself knows), and the IP address of the receiving end is the address 1 of the gateway 553 obtained earlier, 1 〇 · 24〇 · 24i.i, I, again, find out the 1? Address of the gateway 553 in the aforementioned gateway 552, the gateway 552 to the telecom server 594 to remind the recipient phone 〇92- 555-6666 "and send a query asking for the value of the 1? Address of gateway 553

1245997 Invention description (176) Ask for IP packet "(step KK1 in Fig. 190), and can be answered by the telephone number server 594 (step KK2 in Fig. 190), or the content of the telephone number server 594 is forwarded to the gateway in advance Inside the 552, it can be used as a "transmission network output circuit table (however, steps KK1 and KK2 are optional). Secondly, the 丨 ρ packet sent from the gateway 5 5 2 formed above passes through the network device 543 and the router 546_2, and then passes through the telephone management server 5 ^ 9-2 (step K09), and then passes through the router 546-3, the router 546 1-4. The telephone management server 549-4 (step K10) passes through the network point device 545 and reaches the gateway 553 (step K11). Next, the gateway 553 will send the information including the sender's phone number 03 -1111-2222 "and the recipient's phone number" 〇92-555-6666 "to the switch 563 via the UNI communication circuit 581 (step K12). The switch 5 63 will reply to the gateway 553 by receiving the two telephone numbers (step K13). The switch 5 6 3 forwards the call setting request including the sender's phone number "〇3 _ 丨 丨 丨 丨 __ 2 2 2 2 &quot; and the recipient phone number 092-555-6666 &quot; to the switch 564 (step K14 ), The switch 564 will accept the aforementioned call setting request and inform the switch 557 (step K16 to step K22). The switch 564 dials out the phone 572 (step K1 5), and the phone 5 72 notifies the switch 564 of the outgoing call (step K24). The switch 564 notifies the calling telephone 570 of the calling terminal 5 to the calling telephone 570 (steps K25 to K32). When the telephone is notified of departure (step K 3 3), the call of the telecom ## may be notified to the sending terminal σ telephone 570 (Step K35 to Step K42), start telephone communication. &Quot; As mentioned above, the procedure for the connection control between the terminal 570 and the terminal 5 72 is completed, and the communication between the terminal 57 and the terminal 572 can be performed.

1245997 Fifth invention description (177) Release call sender 557, switch 560, closed road, telephone = send call management server 549-4, gateway 553, switch 5/3 The notification of call release between telephone 572 is called, telephone 564 'Release of telephone call (step K46 ~ κ6 ^ Notification of the end of release from receiving call 2? Communication connection control-2 &quot;' is used for == 交== The second point of communication is as follows. The main difference is that "ρ is connected to the continuous power control on the transfer network within the day. I: The communication network is equipped with a Gamma communication circuit.

The output circuit information of the ministry is the IP address of the gateway with the #circuit outside the 1? Transmission network. / 、 With UN I &lt; <Control of communication connection between telephones--3 &gt; &gt; Λ 接 当 电 电 / ，, Qing 550 will be lost 父 父, the father changed 558 to the circuit containing the circuit information 夺 夺 rob '' 550 internally uses a 1P transfer network input circuit table 584 to connect to the signal hunting code "# 2222" as the communication circuit, the code is "〇93_555 _6666" to clear the phone gate, Here, the switch 559 and the gate 551 pass through

1245997 V. Description of the invention (178) The signal circuit 5 77 is connected. Next, the gateway 551 inquires the IP forwarding network turn-out circuit table 586 or the telephone number server 593 inside the gateway 551 to obtain the communication circuit for connecting to the telephone number with the trusted end '' 〇9 3-5 5 5 -The IP address of the gateway 553 of the 6 6 6 ”telephone set forms an IP packet containing the sender's phone number“ 〇3 —lln ～ 2222, · and the recipient's phone number ”0 93-555-6666π. The aforementioned P packet is sent out from the gateway 551, and passes through the router 541-1, the telephone management server 541-1, the router 547-1, the router 546-5, the telephone management server 549-5, the router 546-5, and the branch. Device 545 arrives at gate 553.

After that, the terminal containing the sender's phone number obtained from the IP packet &quot; 03-ΐιπ-2222 "f the recipient's phone number" 〇93-555-6666 "indirectly continued from the switch 563 and switch 566 to the phone 598 The control of the communication connection between the terminals between the telephone and the telephone 598 is ended. Communication ㈤Y connection control-3 &quot; is similar to the failure of the telephone *. The contrast point is that the signal of the internal transmission of the π ρρ transmission network is at Gateway network with nni communication circuit on the outside of the 1p relay network ^: Right ^ The output circuit information π outside the relay network is at the 1p address of the gateway of the 1p relay «electricity" communication circuit. Connection Control 1—4 »

4-foot phone number Shima Tu η nq Phone number 57-2 from the sender to the receiver. ~ 4444 &quot; Phone 597 from the receiver on the receiver. In this example, you call 4444. Green telephone 5 70 dial-up input, οοχγ —07-3333-', the parent switch 5 5 8 requires a gate containing circuit information

1245997 V. Description of the invention (179) Channel 550, using the IP transfer network to enter the circuit table 584 inside the gateway 550, the switch 558 obtains the telephone number "03-4444-40 00" as the connection circuit for the communication end The telephone number is "07-3333-4444," and the access information of the gateway to the gateway. Secondly, the gateway 5 5 2 asks the gateway 5 5 2 for the internal IP forwarding network output circuit table 587 or the telephone number server. 594, to obtain the IP address of the gateway 5 5 4 used to connect the communication circuit to the telephone terminal „〇7 — μ Μ _ 4 4 4 4π ′ to form a transmission message including End phone number &quot; 03-11Π-2222 "and the receiving end phone number" 07-3333-4444 "1 {) packet. The IP packet formed above is sent out from the gateway 552 and passes through the branch device ❿ 543, the router 546- 2. Phone Management Server 549- 2. Router 546-2, Router 541-1, Router 546-5, Phone Management Server 549-5, Router 546-5, and reach gateway 554. " The phone number of the sender 03-1 m-2222 obtained by the packet and the phone number of the receiver "〇7 3333-4444 ,, INFORMATION CONTINUED indirectly via the terminal 562 and switches the switch 565, reached to the telephone 597, the inter-terminal between telephone 570 and the telephone communication connection control 597 ends.

The above "communication connection control between telephones—4" is similar to the communication connection control between telephones--1 ", the comparison point is" 丨 卩 The internal input circuit information of the transfer network π is provided on the outside of the IP transfer network. The telephone number of the gateway of the UNI communication circuit, "The output circuit information outside the IP transfer network" is the lp address of the gateway with the NNI communication circuit outside the ιρ network.疋 &lt; &lt; Control of communication connection between telephones—5 &gt; &gt; From sender telephone 57 with telephone number “03-liU-2222” to telephone 573 connected to media router 591 (however, telephone number 1245997

045-777-8888 "telephone) phone connection. Dial" 570XY-045-777-8888 "from phone 570 and enter" requires electrical connection "(step L01 in Figure 192), switch 557 answers (step 102) ), The switch 557 uses the communication business identification code “〇〇χγ” included in the aforementioned dialing information to find the switch 558 connected to the gateway 55 which contains the circuit information to which “00χΥ” has been granted. The phone number of the sender "0 3-1 1 1 1 -22 22" and "0 0ΧΥ-045-777-8888" are transmitted to the switch 558 (step L03). &Lt; 'The switch 5 5 8 will send the phone number of the sender &quot; 〇3-1 1 1 1-2 2 2 2π and the recipient's telephone number "045-777-8888" are transmitted to the gate 550 (step L04) containing the circuit information. The gate 550 refers to the IP forwarding Enter the circuit table 584, 'Find the telephone number "03-4444-4000" as the pair of closed circuits for connecting the communication circuit to the telephone number of the receiving end, "045-777-8888" ^ Access Information and notify the switch 558 (step L05). Next, the switch 558 finds the switch 5 6 0 connected to the gateway phone number “03 — 4444 — 4 00”, and will include the phone number “03-4444-4000”, send the letter The phone number of the remote terminal “〇3-lln-2222, and the phone number of the trusted terminal π 045-777-8888” are transferred to the switch 56 (step L06). The switch 560 will send “〇3- 1 1 1 1 -22 22 "and the telephone number of the receiving end" 045-777-8888 "are forwarded via the communication circuit 580 to the closed channel 552 of the authorized telephone number," 03-4444-4000 "(step L07). The gateway 552 will reply to at least these two telephone numbers and inform the exchange 56 (step L08). Next, the “gateway 552” includes the sender's phone number “03 —Η H — 2222” and the recipient's phone number obtained through the aforementioned communication connection control.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 184 1245997 V. Description of the invention (181)-&quot; 045-777-8888 &quot; IP packet. The IP address of the sending end of the IP packet is the IP address granted to the gateway 552 (known by the gateway 552 itself). The address of the receiving end 1? Is the communication target for connecting the communication circuit. In this example, it is the media. The IP address of the router 591 &quot; &quot;, from the output circuit of the IP forwarding network, lists the telephone number of the receiving end &quot; 045-777-8888 as a parameter. The IP packets for the call connection request sent from the gateway 5 5 2 formed from the foregoing pass through the network device 543, the router 546-2, the telephone admin server 549-2, the router 546-2, and the router 546-3. , Phone management &amp; server 549-3, router 546-3, and branch office device 545 to reach the media router 591 (steps L10 to L16). The media router 591 will receive the aforementioned telephone call ^ and notify the exchange 557 of the connection request response (step L20 to step L25), and further, the media router 591 calls the telephone 573 (step L18), and when the telephone returns a message (step L27), the media router 591 notifies the sender telephone 570 of the outgoing call (step L29 to step L35). When the telephone 573 is disconnected (step L36), the sender 570 (step L38 to step L44) is notified of the response indicating that the telephone communication is possible (step L38 to step L44), and the telephone communication is started. As described above, the communication between the terminals of the telephone 570 and the telephone 5 73 is continued, and the system is terminated. The communication between the telephone 57 and the telephone 573 can be performed. When the communication of the telephone is completed, the call release notification from the telephone 570 is released. To the switch 557 (step L45), the call release completion notification is returned from the switch 557 to the telephone 57 (step U6). Through this call release and notification of the end of the call release, the connection between the telephone 57 and the exchange 557 is released. Then ’using sequential transmission and reception at the switch 557

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 185 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (182), Switch 5 60, Gateway 5 5 2. Telephone Management Server 5 4 9-2, Telephone Management Server 5 4 9- 3. Media router 5 9 1. Notification of call release and notification of call release between telephones 5 7 3, implement continuous release (steps J47 ~ J60) 〇 The summary of `` communication connection control between telephones-5 ，，， Similar to ”电话机 之 之 通 # 接 控制 --1π”, the main point of comparison is that the phone is connected to the media router. &lt; Communication between telephones zf connection control-_ 6 &gt; &gt; A description will be given with reference to FIG. 193. 540-1 series IP transfer network, 550-1 and 554-1 series gateway '10000 series "input circuit information server", other devices, telephones or public exchange networks, etc. with the device shown in Figure 185 or Telephones and the like are identified by the same reference numerals. This embodiment replaces (Figure 1 85) the gateway 55, which contains circuit information, and uses an input circuit information server 100, which includes the input circuit table of the ip transfer network, instead of steps J04 and 188 in Figure 188. Step J05 uses step j04x and step J05x of FIG. 194. The input circuit information server 1 0 0 is a carrier identification code "〇χγ" that is literate from the public telephone exchange network 555, and a signal office code for identifying from the public telephone exchange network 5 5 5. From the telephone number 570 of the sender of the phone number "3-1-1-2 &lt; 222" to the telephone number of the receiver 571 of the phone number "06-3333-4444", the connection is continued. This will be described with reference to FIG. 194. Dial-in from the telephone 570 "οοχγ —0 6 —3333 —4444" When making a phone call (step j01 in FIG. 194), the switch 557 confirms the call (step J02). Code "00χΥ" to find the input σ circuit information server that continues to be granted &quot; 〇〇χγ,

1245997

V. Description of the invention (183), the switch 5 58 of the device 1 0 0, the sender's electric bluff code obtained during the aforementioned dialing, 1 0 3- 1 1 1 1 -2222 &quot; and "00ΧΥ-〇6- 3 333-4444, and send it to the tractor 558 (step J03). The switch 558 sends the sender's phone number “03 —Uu 2222” and the recipient's phone number “〇6_3333_4444” to the input electronic information server 1 0 0 0 ( Step J〇4x), the input circuit information server 100 refers to the internal circuit of the IP relay network input circuit of the input circuit information server 1 0 0 0 ', taking the telephone number of the trusted telephone as a parameter, that is, doing For use, connect the communication circuit to the telephone number of the receiving end &quot; 〇6 —3333 —4444,

f machine access information to the gateway, the brake props related! Interface, it is known that the signal office code of the gateway of the "signal office, # 2222", and returns it to the switch ..., 558 (step j〇5x). Next, by implementing the foregoing step j〇6 ~, Enter the connection control program for communication between terminals on the right telephone 570 and telephone 571, and ^ make a call between telephone 570 and telephone 571. Similarly, it can communicate between terminals 570 and telephones 572, 597, 598, and 573 ^ ^ Procedure for connection control. "<Example of network point device> &gt; The network points used in the aforementioned method for controlling communication between terminals are described below with reference to FIG. 195.

^ ς 540 — 1 series 1P transfer network, 543_ 丨 and 545 — 1 network point device, 552-1 ^ 5544 / gateway, 547-1 and 548-1 series relay devices, respectively through communication. Along the way. The gateway 5 5 2-1 is given an I ρ address "a,", and the gateway 1 is given a 1P address "b", and furthermore, on the gateway side of the branch point device 543-1, the communication circuit The IP address is given to the contact, and the IP address is given to the contact of the 5-5 gate 554-1 and the communication circuit.

1245997

Address &quot; y ’’. 5 4 3-1 T stores the address management table of the aforementioned four groups of IP addresses &quot; a &quot;, "bπ," χ. The 545-IT system stores the aforementioned four sets of 1? Address "b", n y Xπ address management tables. The 11) packet {^ 1 (— 1 arrives from gateway 552-1 to gateway 554-1, and the IP address of the receiving end is "a &quot; and the IP address of the receiving end is" b " The network point device 5 4 ^ Send time 'refers to the address management table 5 4 3-1 T. In this example, the internal information "a", nbn, lfx ", y &quot;, because of the first three 1? Addresses, a „,,, b, f ,,, ^ The IP addresses of the three IP addresses in PCK-1 are the same. Take out the address management X table and other IP addresses“ y ”in 543-1 and grant them. The IP of the header is encapsulated to form a new IP packet PCK-2. The PCK-2 is sent from the branch point device 543-1 to the communication circuit, and passes through the router 547-i to reach the branch point "I Set 545-1. This removes the IP header granted through the aforementioned IP encapsulation, performs inverse encapsulation, returns the IP packet PCK-3, and then is sent to the gateway 554-1 via the communication circuit. The address management table 545-1 is It is used for the IP packet transmission in the anti-method described above. The branch point devices 543-1 and 545-1 have the function of IP encapsulation and reverse encapsulation, so they maintain the address management table. The p address of the gateway is registered and saved in Outlets 5 4 3-1 and 5 4 5-1 are located in the address management table. &Lt; &lt; Other Embodiments of Branch Device &gt; &gt; Referring to FIG. 196, another implementation of the branch device 543-2 and 545-2 will be described. Example 0 540-2 series IP transfer network, 543-2 and 545-2 series branch devices, 552-2 and 554-2 series gateways, 547-2 and 548-2 series relay devices, respectively through the 4 Lu circuit Connected. Ip address na was granted on gateway 5 5 2-2, gateway

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 188 1245997 V. Description of the invention (185) 554-2 was granted an IP address &quot; b ". The 543-2T is the address that holds the aforementioned IP address" a " Management table, 545-2T is the address management table that stores the aforementioned IP address "b". The IP packet pcK-11 sent from gateway 552-2 to gateway 554-2 arrives at 4th end of the IP address. When π a ”and the network device 5 4 3-2 of the receiver I p address is“ b ”, refer to the address management table 5 4 3-2. In this example, due to internal information, a ”is the same as the IP address of the sender inside the IP packet PCK-11. It is understandable if PCK-11 is allowed to be transferred to the IP transfer network 540. Secondly, ? (: 1 (-11 can be directly changed to? 〇 (-12.? (: 1 (-12 is sent from the network device 54 3-2 to the communication circuit, passes through the routers 547-2, 548-2, and reaches the network Device 545-2. Here, since the IP address of the trusted end of PCK-12 &quot; b, is recorded in the address management table 545-2T, PCK-12 is directly used as PCK-13, and is transmitted through the communication circuit. Send to the gateway 554-2. The branch devices 543-2 and 545-2 confirm permission to house the IP packets inside the IP forwarding network 540-2, or they can confirm that an IP address exists outside the IP forwarding network 540-2 "bn. The gateway's ip address is registered and stored in the address management table of the branch point device 543-2 and 545-2. The above summarizes the functions of the branch point device. In this embodiment, the branch point device sends an IP packet from the outside of the IP transfer network. When contained within the IP forwarding network, there are two types of IP headers that are granted new IP headers and types that are not IP encapsulated. The IP address of the gateway is The network apparatus stored in the log bit address management table 13 and the sound control lines line-separated connection of the public switched telephone network implementation Shu 3 illustrates the control circuit and the communication circuit separating voice communication, via transfer Shu p

2049-3793-PF »RAY.ptd Page 189 1245997 V. Description of the invention (186) Network and public telephone exchange network (PSTN) telephone communication connection control method. In Figure 197, '1500 is an IP forwarding network, 1501 is a public telephone parent switching network, 1502 is a gateway with an encapsulation function, 1503 is a relay gateway, 1508 and 1 5 2 0 series telephones, 15 1 8 series relay switches, 15 1 9 series subscriber exchanges, 150 5 series control communication circuits through common line signal method, and 150 6 series voice communication circuits. 15 0 7 series control IP communication circuit, 150 9 series audio IP communication circuit. 1 544 and 1 547 series outlets, 1 570 series agent telephone server, 1 57 1 series telephone management server, 1 572 series telephone number server, 1 573 series meter management server, 1521, 1 522, 1 523, 1524 are routers. 1513 series relay control unit (STP), 1516 series sound control unit. A part of the internal resources (device or server) of the IP transfer network shown in FIG. 197 may correspond to the IP transfer network shown in FIG. 128 or 170. Of internal resources, telephone 1 508, media router 1 560, branch office device 1 544, agent telephone server 1 570, telephone management server 1571, telephone number server 1 572, meter management server 1 573, branch office device The 1 547 series correspond to the telephone 1 208, the media router 1201, the branch point device 1 244, the agent telephone server 1 270, the telephone management server 1271, the telephone number server 1272, the meter management server 1 273, and the branch point device 1 247, respectively. &lt; &lt; Function of the relay control section &gt; In the present invention, the common line signal method is to indicate a signal office by a point (Point), and to indicate a signal office code by a point code. The relay control unit 1 5 1 3 inside the relay gateway 1503 appears to the public telephone exchange network 1 50 1 as a total of 1

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 190 1245997

The trunk signal station (STP) of the line signal mode is given the signal station address PC 3. The middle and% control department 丨 5 丨 3 manages the signal office address management table 1 5 2 7 (Figure 208). Searching this signal office address management table can obtain the signal office address of the switch in the public telephone exchange network 1501. The relay gate 1503 will write the circuit number, fcic-n, or signal link selection "SLS-η" in the signal unit transmitted on the NNI communication circuit 1 505, to specify the exchange with the public telephone Net 1 50 0 1 same rules.

The relay control unit 1513 is given an IP address, 'GW03', and will store various messages (jAM, ACM, CPG, ANM, REL) in the call control of the IP packet sent from the control IP communication circuit 1 507. ·, RLC, etc.) are converted into various messages (IAM, ACM, cp (j, ANM, REL, RLC, etc.) stored in the signal unit of the common line signal method, and transmitted to the control communication circuit worker 505. Directly, the relay control section 5 5 has various messages for telephone call control stored in the signal unit sent from the control communication circuit 1 505, and converts them into messages stored in the IP packet, and transmits them to the control. "In the communication circuit, function 1 is assigned to the relay control unit 1513's address" GW03, or the signal station PC * -3 is assigned to the relay gateway 1503 Address or signal station code. &Lt; &lt; Function of the sound control section 〉〉

The voice control unit 1516 converts the statement stored in the ip packet sent from the voice IP communication circuit 1509 into a form that can be forwarded to the public telephone exchange network 1501, such as a primary group interface suitable for ISDN (pRI, 23B) + D) The sound code frame of the data communication path, and transmits it to the sound communication circuit 1506. In addition, in the direction of f *, the voice control unit 15 16 has a voice code frame sent from the voice communication circuit 1506 of the public telephone switching network 15 0 1 into an IP packet shape.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 191 1245997 V. Description of the invention (188) &quot;-and transfer it to the function of the voice IP communication circuit 509. The voice control unit also has a p address for transmitting and receiving voice IP packets internally, and provides settings for the media connection table. &lt; &lt; Phone number server &gt; &gt; When the telephone number server 1 572 inquires the telephone number, it answers the pp address for communication with the telephone having the telephone number in question. In the case where the telephone communication station is a relay gateway, answer the value of the IP address assigned to the relay gateway, and in the case where the telephone communication office is a gateway with a capsule function, the answer is continued to the gateway. The IP address of the media router at. &lt; &lt; Continuation stage >〉 Telephone communication is performed from the telephone set 1 508 to the telephone set 1 520. In this embodiment, the IP address “EA81” of the proxy telephone server 1 570 is disclosed to the users of the IP forwarding network I 500, and the media router 1560 stores the aforementioned 1 {) address “EA81”. When the receiver of the telephone set 1 508 is picked up, the outgoing signal is transmitted to the media router 1 560 (step N01 in FIG. 198), and the media router 156 confirms the outgoing call (step N 0 2). Secondly, the media router 5 6 〇 uses the sending end jp address as the media router "" ^ address &quot; EA1 ", and the receiving end 1 {&gt; address as the external IP address of the proxy telephone server 1 570 The address &quot; EA81 "forms the telephone number" TN-Γ "which contains the telephone set 1508 as the sending end, the telephone number" TN-2 "which is the telephone set 1520 of the receiving end, and the telephone as the sending end ^, | 508 is used to transmit the IP packet 153 (Figure 199) of the UDp port number "5006," and the additional information II Info-2 declared by the telephone, and transmits it to the branch device 1 544 (step N03). The IP packet The payload of 153 is a UD packet, and the port numbers of the sender and the receiver are both ', 5 0 6 0 π.

1245997 V. Description of the invention (189) The outlet device 1544 inputs the external IP packet 1530, which is applicable to the IP encapsulation technology described in other embodiments to form an internal IP packet 5 3 丨 (Figure 2 00).

The IP packet 1531 is transmitted to the proxy telephone server 1 570 whose internal IP address is IA8Γ (step N04). When the agent telephone server 1 570 receives the IP packet 1 5 3 1, it forms an IP address that contains the IP packet 1 5 3 1 ”E A1, IA1, Ε81, Ι8181, and the ip packet included in the payload part. 1532-1 (FIG. 201), and transmits it to the telephone management server 1571 (step N05). Here, the agent telephone server 1570 uses the IP address π IA91π of the telephone management server 1 71 which is saved in advance. &lt; &lt; Formation of CIC management table 〉〉 The telephone management server 1 5 7 1 receives the IP packet 1 5 3 2 -1 and writes the telephone number on the record of the CIC management table managed by the telephone management server 1 5 7 1 IP address of the management server 1571, IA9Γ, program section "I ΑΜΠ, sender's phone number ΠΝ-Γ", receiver's phone number "TN-2", external IP address of the media router 1 560 ΕΑΓ and Internal IP address &quot; IA Γ, IP packet 1 532-1 internal voice communication port number &quot; 5006 &quot;, external IP address of agent telephone server 1 570 `` EA 8 Γ 'and internal IP address' · IA 8 Γ ′ and the writing time (year, month, day, hour, minute, second) f, St-2ff (CIC management table 1571-1 in Figure 202). Second, the telephone management server 1 5 71 will ask the telephone number of the trusted terminal ΠΤΝ -2Π's IP packet 1 53 2-2 (Figure 203) is displayed on the telephone number server 1 572 (step N06), and the telephone number server 1 572 stores the IP address of the device connected to the telephone 1520 &quot; GW03n in IP packet 1532-3 (Figure 204) and answer (step N07). Furthermore, the device connected to the phone ^ ?!) Internal relay gateway 1503 the relay control unit 1513.

HI I 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 193 1245997 V. Description of the invention (190) &lt; &lt; Management of circuit numbers >〉 Telephone management server 1 571 Relay obtained from telephone number server 1 572 The IP address “GW03n of the control unit 1513” is added to the CIC management table 1571-1 (FIG. 202), and the IP address “IA91 &quot; of the telephone management server 1571 and the IP address of the relay control unit 1513” GW03 are added. 'According to the rules specified by the telephone management server 1571, the CIC number nCIC-2, is determined and written to the CIC management table. It is displayed in the record of the C 1C management table 1571-2 (Figure 205). Then the telephone management server The router 1571 refers to the CIC management table 1571-2 (Figure 205), forms an IP packet 1534 (Figure 206) (I AM packet) from the IP packet 1532-1 (Figure 201), and transmits the IP packet 1 5 3 4 to the relay. The control unit 1 5 1 3 (step N09). Here, the IP address of the receiving end of the IP packet 1 534 is the IP address of the relay control unit 1513 &quot; GW03ff. &Lt; &lt; Action of the relay control unit &gt;> When the relay control unit 1 5 1 3 receives the IP packet 1 5 3 4 (Figure 2 06) (step N09), it takes out the IP address of the transmission segment from the IP packet 1 534 "IA91 & "Receiver IP address GW03", circuit number, 'CIC-2 ", program section, 1 IAMΠ, sender's phone number, 1 TN-Γ, receiver's phone number" TN-2 ", media router 1 560's external IP address &quot; EA1 &quot; and internal 1? Address "IA1", common voice number 5 0 0 6 and external IP address of agent telephone server 15 7 0 "£ a 81π and The internal IP address &quot; IAA8 Γ, as a record of the c 丨 c management table 1513-1 (Fig. 207) managed by the relay control unit 1 5 丨 3, is written into the record together with the time "St-3", and, The relay control unit 1 5 1 3 retrieves the signal station address management table 1 $ 2 7 (Figure 2 08), and prompts the telephone number of the receiving end telephone 1520, TN — 2 ”to obtain

1245997 V. Description of the invention (191) Manage the signal office address "PC-i 9" of the switch 151 9 of the telephone set 1 520. In addition, the relay control unit 1 5 1 3 determines the circuit number "CIC-3π, signal keying selection" and "sl S _ 3" according to the predetermined rules of the public telephone switching network [50]. The relay control unit 1513 sets the signal office address "pc-3" of the relay control unit 15-13, the "PC-19" obtained above, the aforementioned signal link selection "SLS-3", and the aforementioned circuit number "C1C-3", Starting with the media path identifier "mp — 7π", write a new record as the address continuation table 1 525, and the resulting address continuity table is shown in 1525-1 (Figure 209). 1 5 1 3 forms a message including the aforementioned signal station address fPC-3 ”, the aforementioned“ pC-19 ”, the aforementioned circuit number, CIC_3”, and the signal link selection “SLS-3”, and the message obtained from the IP packet 1 534 "IAM", "Number of Para-2" signal units 1 535 (Figure 21〇), and transmitted to the control communication circuit 1 50 5 (step N10). &Quot; &lt; <Relay control section and sound control section Joint operation &gt; &gt; The relay control unit 1 5 1 3 uses the aforementioned media path identifier &quot; Mp-7, Internal IP address &quot; IA-1 &quot;, the external address of the aforementioned media router 1560 &quot; EA1 &quot;, and the voice communication port number &quot; 5006 &quot;, via the telephony 1515, notify the voice control unit 1516 ( In step 15ΐ3_υ of FIG. 211, the control unit 1516 writes the notified information as a record of the media path 1 528 and reports the end of writing (step 1516_η. The aforementioned: j path identification sub-system is used to identify the telephone between the two telephones. Voice communication path used for calling (itching, release). Media path continuation table 1 528_ 丨 ^ H The recording is not shown before writing, and media path continuation table 1 528- shows the results of the writer. Again Or sound control section 151 "

1245997 V. Description of the invention (192) = A logic communication circuit that controls 1516 to transmit sound to the sound communication circuit 1506, and identifies the logical communication circuit as a sub-sending channel ... Channe (No. S), write it as a media path to connect to Table 1528. Old ‘&lt; &lt; exchange network action and ACM message >〉

The parent switch 1518 receives the signal unit 1535 via the control communication circuit 1550 (step N10), and then transmits the signal unit 1 535 to the switch 1519 (step Nil). "The switch 1519 receives the signal unit 1 535 to confirm the internal trusted Is it possible that the end phone number "TN-2" is a letter, and if it is possible, then notify the phone 1520 (step N12) of the letter, and then form the signal unit 1 538 of the signal unit 1 535 — 丨 (Figure 218), and wrote back that the aforementioned signal unit reached the relay control unit 1 5 1 3 (step N1 4) via the switch 1518 (step N13). The relay control unit 丨 5 丨 3 according to the received signal unit 1 5 3 8 -1 tag information, refer to the address continuation table 丨 5 2 5 — 丨 (Figure 2 0 9) 'Get the address information used to form I p packets, forming I p packets ° 1551 (ACM message) (Figure 219) And transmits the IP packet 1551 to the telephone management server 1571 (step N15).

The telephone management server 1 5 7 1 took out the received IP packet 1 5 5 1 and took out the circuit number n nCIC-2n and the program section "ACMn", and checked the C 1C management table 1571-2 (Figure 1) held by the telephone management server 1571. 20 5), find out the record of own IP address &quot; IA91 &quot;, target IP address &quot; GW03 &quot;, and circuit number &quot; cic-2 &quot; The program section is rewritten as the aforementioned program section "ACMn. Then, the telephone management server 1571 forms an IP packet indicating the reception of the aforementioned ACM message, and notifies the media router 1 560 (step

1245997

(N17, N18, N19). 〈Media path continuation table〉 After the step N1 G is completed, the relay control section 5-7 adds media path identifiers 1 to 7 ”to the sound control section 1516. When requesting an address and port number (step 1513-2 in Figure 212), the voice control unit 1516 forms and sends the voice control unit 1516 to the internal voice of the IP transfer network 1500. The communication circuit 1 5 Internal IP address “j A 丨” for encapsulation of IP packets on 0 9 ”, IP address of sender ΠΑ3 &quot; and port number of UDP packet” 5 008π, reply to relay control unit 1 5 1 3 (Step 1 5 1 6-2). The sound identified by the media path identifier passes through Lu Lu, according to the I ρ address ("I a 3, EA3, ..." ') And the port number ("5004, 500 6, ..."), can determine the majority of voice communication channels. In addition, the sound control unit 丨 5 丨 6 ensures the logical sound communication circuit received from the switch 1518, determines its identifier, CH_y (received channel: represented by Channel-R), and records it in the media path connection table 1528-3 (Figure 216). The relay control unit 1 5 1 3 receives the internal IP address “IA1” in the sound control unit 1516 and the external IP address of the transmitting end ffEl3n ^ UDP packet port number “5008” from the sound control unit 1 5 1 6 and determines the correspondence. The internal IP address "IA3" at the ip address &quot; EA3 "is written to the CIC management table 1513 -1 (Figure 207), and the knot / Φ becomes the CIC management table 15 13-2 (Figure 217) (and, Does not include proxy server = management server address). In addition, the relay control unit 1513 stores an internal IP address for the voice control unit on &amp; in advance, one of the internal IP addresses is used as the internal IP address. π ΙΑ3Π. &lt; &lt; CPG message transmission &gt;

1245997

&gt; When telephone 1 520 reports the outbound call to switch 1519 (step N20), switch 1519 forms and transmits a signal unit (CPG message) that informs the outbound call that the signal unit arrives via switch 518 (step N2i): following control 1513 (Step N22) The relay control unit 1513 refers to the address continuation table 1 525_ 丨 (Fig. 209) according to the received tag information of the aforementioned signal unit to obtain the address information used to form the IP packet. A CPG message 1 552 (FIG. 220) is formed in the form of a p packet, and the aforementioned IP packet is transmitted to the telephone management server 1571 (step N23). The telephone management server 1571 notifies the aforementioned telephone call 1580 via the media router 1560 (steps N25 to N28). When the relay control unit 1513 forms the aforementioned cpg message, it obtains the external I address &quot; EA3 &quot; and internal IP address &quot; IA3 of the transmitting end in the voice control unit from the CIC official table 1 5 1 3-2 (Figure 2 17). ", And the port number of the UDp packet ,, 5008 ,, 'and write it to the CPG message 1 552. The phone management server 1571 can take the external IP address from the received CPG packet 1 552" EA3 ", internal lp address IA3 and port number π 5008π 'and write it to the management table 1571 — 2 (Figure 205). &lt; &lt; Transfer of ANM message >〉

Secondly, when the user of the telephone set 1520 answers the outgoing call (step N30), the switch 1519 forms and transmits a signal unit (ANM message) for notifying the response, and the aforementioned signal unit reaches the relay via the switch 1 5 1 8 (step v 31). The control unit 1513 (step N32). The relay control unit 1513 refers to the address continuation table 1 525_ 丨 (Fig. 209) according to the received tag information of the aforementioned signal unit, and forms an ANM message 1 5 5 3 (Fig. 2 1) in the form of an IP packet. The IP packet 1 5 5 3 is transmitted to the telephone management server 1571 (step N33). Then, the telephone management server 1 71 receives the notification of the aforementioned telephone call via the media router 5 6 0 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd flute] 0 100 '1245997

5. Description of the invention (195), informing the telephone set 1508 (steps N 35 to N38). That is, the IP packet 1554 (FIG. 223) is sent from the telephone management server 1571 to the proxy telephone server 1570 (step N 3 5), and the IP packet 1 5 5 5 (FIG. 2 2 4) is transmitted from the proxy telephone server 1 5 70 is sent to the branch office device 1 544 (step N36), and the IP packet 1 556 (FIG. 225) is sent from the branch office device 1544 to the media router 1560 (step N37).

When the relay control unit 1 5 1 3 forms the aforementioned ANM message, it obtains the external IP address of the sender in the voice control unit from the IC management table 1 5 1 3-2 (Figure 2 17), "EA3", internal The IP address &quot; I A3 &quot; and the port number of the UDP packet &quot; 5008, f are written to the ANM message 1 553. The telephone management server 1571 can take out the external IP bit from the received response packet 1 553 Address "eA3", internal IP address "ια3π and port number π 50 08π, and write it to the CIC management table 1571-2 (Figure 205)." <Writing sequence of CIC management table 1571> "Phone management server 5 71 Take out the external IP address &quot; £ a 3 ', the internal IP address,' I A3 &quot; and the port number &quot; 50 08 &quot;, and write the sequence into the CIC management table 1571-2. Step N23 of receiving a CPG message or step N33 of receiving an ANM message is performed. &Lt; &lt; Setting of the IP communication record through the relay control section &gt; &gt; Management table 1513 one 3

(Fig. 2 2 2) inside the record, take out the IP address "e A 3 &quot;, E A1" ,, IA 3π, π ΙΑ1 ", and transfer it to the table management server 1 57 6 (step N41), the table The management server 1 576 is set as the communication record "ΕΑ3, Ε1, ΙΑ3, ΙΑ1" of the address management table in the network point device 547 (step N42). In addition, the form and bit of the record of the aforementioned address management table The address setting method is described in other embodiments.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 199 1245997 V. Description of the invention (196) &lt; &lt; Setting of IP communication record via telephone management server &gt; Similarly, 'Phone management server 1 5 71 series In the aforementioned step n 3 5, the IP address &quot; ΕΑΓ1 ,, ΕΑ3Π, ΠΙΑ1 »,` `ΙΑ3 &quot; is taken from the record of the CIC management table, and is transmitted to the table management server 1 573 (step N43), the table The management server 1 5 7 3 is set as the communication record π EA1, EA3, I Al, ΙΑ3Π of the address management table in the network device 1 5 4 4 (step N44). &lt; &lt; Communication stage >〉 The telephone communication between the user of the telephone 150 and the telephone 1520 is the same procedure as described in the other embodiments, and the IP address of the address management table inside the network device 544 is recorded. That is, the reading of ΠΠΕΑ1, Ε3, ΙΑ1, ΙΑ3Π, the communication record of the tongue and the address management table in the network device 1 5 4 7, the records of ε a 3, EA1, IA3, and IΑΓ are used. The voice of the telephone 1508 is digitized and added to the payload of the Ip packet 1561 (FIG. 2 2 6). Here, the address of the trusted terminal and the UDP frame number obtained in the aforementioned continuation phase are used. That is, the address of the transmitting end is the IP address '' Ε Α Γ of the media router 1560, and the address of the receiving end is the internal IP of the voice control unit 1 5 1 6 connected to the telephone of the receiving end 1520. Address "£ a 3π, the UDP port number used by the media router to transmit sound is" 5006 ", and the UDP port number used by the sound control unit 151 6 to transmit sound is" quote 5.0 ", analogy The sound is transmitted from the electric machine 1 508, and it is digitized at the media router 560. The sound is digitized into a voice IP packet 1561 (Figure 226), and sent to the branch office device 1 544. In the branch office device, The IP communication record "EA1, EA3, IA1, IA3" is used for IP encapsulation, and becomes ^ packet 1 562 (Figure 227). It passes through the IP communication circuit, and then passes through the router 524 and reaches the outlet.

1245997 Description of the Invention (197) Set to 1 547. Here, the aforementioned IP communication record "EA3, EA1, IA3, ΙΑΓ" is used for inverse encapsulation to become "packet 1 563 (Fig. 228)", and the IP packet 1 5 6 3 storing the digital voice reaches the IP voice control Department 1 5 1 6. The voice control unit takes out the IP address of the sender included in the IP packet 1 563, "ΕΑΓ", the port number of the sender π 5006π, the IP address of the receiver "EA3", and the port number of the receiver "50 08", referring to the media path connection. Table 1 528-3 (Figure 216). Using the media path record of the sender's IP address ΠΕΑΓ, the sender's original number "50 0 6", the receiver's IP address EA3π, and the receiver's port number "5 008", the digitization in I ρ packet 1 563 The voice is converted into a voice code frame 1 564 (Figure 229) transmitted by the voice communication circuit 1506. The voice code frame 1 564 reaches the switch 1519 through the switch 1518. The voice is output from the telephone 1520 and stored in the slave 15 The sound of the sent out voice code frame is transmitted to the telephone set 1 5 0 8 in the opposite direction to the above. &Lt; &lt; Release Phase >〉 § When the user of the mobile phone 1508 notifies the release of the telephone communication (Fig. Step N50 of 198), the media router 156 sends a call release notification to the telephone management server 1571 (steps N51 to N53), and the telephone management server 1571 notifies the media router 156 of the release completion response (steps N64 to N66).

In addition, the telephone management server 1 5 71 sends an I ρ seal f 1 565 (Figure 230) to notify the release of the telephone call to the relay control unit 1513 (step N55), and the relay controller 13 notifies the Ip of the release completion The packet 1 5 66 (Fig. 231) sends a letter to inform the electric management server 1 5 7 1 (step N 6 2). The relay control unit 1 5 1 3 sends a call release notification to the relay switch 1518 (step N56), and the relay switch 1 5 1 8 notifies the relay control unit 1 5 1 3 of the release completion response (step N6 1).

Page 201 1245997

In addition, the relay switch 1518 notifies 1519 of the telephone call release (step N57), and the switch 1519 returns a call for the completion of the release to the relay switch 1518 (step N60). Step N58). θ ~ &lt; &lt; Clearing of media path records >〉 In the foregoing step N55, the relay control section 1513 instructs to clear the media path connection table 1 5 1 6 on the sound control section 1 5 2 8-3 (Fig. 2 1 6) The record of the media path (step 1513-3 in FIG. 213), and the sound control unit 151 ^ reports to clear the record of the media path (step 1516-3). In addition, this record can be used for the above-mentioned telephone call (connection / call / release) (optional). '&lt; & Clear of IP communication record and CIC management table record >〉 After step N55, the telephone management server 1571 transmits the circuit number n CIC-2π written in the released IP packet 1 5 6 5 to the table management The server 1 573 (step N73) clears the IP communication record "EA1, EA3, IA1, IA3Π" corresponding to the circuit number nCIC-2 "in the branch office device 1 544" (step N74). And, the record of the telephone set in the CIC management table 1571-2 (FIG. 205) managed by the telephone management server 1571 is cleared. Further, the telephone management server 1571 can use this record for the operation record (optional) of the aforementioned telephone call (connection / call / release). The relay control unit 1 51 3 transmits the electric and circuit numbers nCIC-2n written to the end-of-release IP packet 1 5 6 6 to the table management server 1 576 (step N71), and clears the IP inside the network device 1 547 Communication records' EA3, EA1, IA3, and IAl (step N72). Then, the record of the telephone set in the CIC management table 1513-3 (FIG. 222) managed by the relay control unit 1513 is cleared. Also, this record can be used for

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 202 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (199) Application Record. The summary is as follows. Between the terminal gateway with the capsule function and the relay gateway, the connection control IP communication circuit of the telephone and the voice IP communication circuit are separated, and are sequentially passed through the telephone 1, the terminal gateway with the capsule function, and the relay gateway. , NN I interface communication circuit, public telephone exchange network, and telephone set 2 can perform telephone communication between two telephone sets. In addition, the electricity in the terminal gateway with the capsule function

The call management server and the relay control unit in the Λ relay gateway have separate CIC management tables, and use the aforementioned individual CIC management tables to manage circuit numbers. The relay control unit in the relay gateway uses the address continuation table containing the address information inside the IP packet and the tag information in the signal unit to convert the IP packet and the signal unit. The relay control unit searches the signal station address management table and prompts the telephone number of the telephone of the receiving end to obtain the signal station address of the switch that manages the telephone. The relay control unit determines the circuit number and signal link selection based on the rules predetermined by the public switched telephone network. The voice control unit uses the relay gate connection table to store the digital information circuit. The voice communication circuit contains the IP address inside the IP packet. The IP packet and the letter are used to transmit and receive the IP packet. Table setting. In addition, the voice control network receives or transmits the logical voice channel in the voice control section of the media channel voice IP packet and transmits the voice of the NNI communication. In addition, the conversion of the bit unit of the tag information using the and signal units is performed. The voice control unit has a packaged IP address to provide the media path. The system ensures that the circuit is used to exchange telecommunications from the public telephone and determines its identifier. have

1245997 V. Description of the invention (200) &quot; The terminal gateway of the capsule machine includes relay control unit and network device, the network has the functions of IP encapsulation and reverse encapsulation, and the relay control unit includes the electronic controller. Server, phone number server, proxy phone server, meter management feeder, input from media router to lp packet of outlet device, call home, control IP packet is forwarded to relay control unit, voice 丨 p packet It is branched to the sound 1? Communication circuit. As a result, the telephones 1508 and 1520 can perform telephone communication via the IP transfer network 15 00 and the public telephone exchange network 丨 5 丨. 1 4 · The fourth embodiment of using IP forwarding as a relay network: In FIG. 232, the '1400-series IP forwarding network, and the 1401 and 1402 relay gateways' 1 4 0 3 series have The gateway of capsule function, 丨 405 to 丨 4 07 is the public electrical switching network (PSTN), 1 408 to 1411 is the subscriber switch, 1412 and 1 41 are 3 relay switches, [41 5 and 1 41 6 is a control communication circuit suitable for the common line signal method, 1 4 1 7 and 1 41 8 is a voice communication circuit. The control communication circuit 1415 and the audio communication circuit 1417 are NNI communication circuits between the switch 1412 and the relay gateway 1401, and the control communication circuit 1416 and the audio communication circuit 141 are 8 switches 1 41 3 and the relay gateway 1 4 0 2 NN I communication circuit. 1438 and 1439 series address continuation table, 1441 and 1442 series gateway address management server '1 4 4 3 and 1 4 4 4 series signal station address management server. 1 4 2 9 and 1 4 3 0 are media continuity tables. In the present invention, the common line signal method uses a dot to indicate a signal office, and a dot code to indicate a "signal office address".

The IP address of the relay gateway 1 4 0 1 is ”GW 〇5M, and the relay control unit 1 4 2 3 stores the IP address n GW05”. Similarly, the relay gateway! For the n GW 0 6 '' 'relay control section 1 4 2 4 save the aforementioned IP address "g W 0 6 &quot;. &lt; &lt; Communication between telephone 1420 and telephone 1421 &gt; &gt;

1245997 V. Description of the invention (201) First, the description will be made from the telephone set 1420 through the public telephone exchange network 丨 405, the IP transfer network 1400, the public telephone exchange network 1406, and the telephone communication terminal to the telephone 1421. Communication connection control method. &lt; &lt; Connection stage >〉 When picking up the handset of phone 1 420, the outgoing signal is transmitted to switch 1 408 (step HA01 in FIG. 233), switch 1 408 confirms the outgoing call (step HA02), and switch 1 408 calls The call setting request notifies the relay exchange 1412 (step HA03). Then, the relay switch 1412 receives the call setting request and forms a signal unit of the common line signal method. The numbering unit 1451 is transferred to the relay control unit in the relay gateway β 1401 via the control communication circuit 1415. 1 423 (step Η Α04). The signal office code of the receiving end of the signal unit 1451 is 1? (:-Γ, the signal office code of the transmitting end is &quot; 〇Ρ (&gt; 1 &quot;, the signal link selection is &quot; SLS-Γ, and the circuit number is &quot; CIC —丨 &quot;, the message is ΙΑΑΜ, the parameter is Para-1Π, the content of the aforementioned parameter "para-1" includes the telephone number "TN- 丨" of telephone 1 420 and the telephone number TN-2 of telephone 1421. Figure 232 As shown in the message in the signal unit 1451, MSG-Γ indicates, 'ιαμπ 〇 &lt; <operation of the relay control unit 1 4 2 3 >>

The relay control unit 1 423 receives the signal unit 1451 (step HA04). Figure 2 5 6 shows the procedure for the relay control unit 1 4 2 3 to convert the signal unit 1 4 5 1 into an IP packet. The relay control unit 1 4 2 3 receives the signal unit 1 4 5 1 (step S1461-2 in FIG. 2 5 6) 'take out the signal bureau mark inside the signal unit 1451' DPC-i, OPC-1, SLS-1, CIC -ln (step S1461-3), check that the signal office flag is inside the address continuation table 1 438, that is, the signal office code of the receiving end is included

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (202) (DP /), sender signal office code (〇pc), signal link selection (child magic, circuit number (CIC) records exist (steps 1461_4). In this example, = there is no consistent record in the address continuation table 1438- 丨 (Figure 244), and write another signal signal mark to the address continuation table 1 438 (step 5146, 5) , The relay control unit 1423 takes out the telephone number 1421 in the parameter &quot; 卩 技 ^ 一 丨 &quot;, the telephone number &quot; TN-2 &quot;, the relay control unit 1 423 queries the gateway address management server 1441, and obtains Manage the answer of the ιρ address of the gateway of the aforementioned telephone number &quot; TN_2 &quot; (step S146 to 6). In this example, get the = address of the relay gateway "" &quot; D-ad-x &quot;. Therefore, the gateway address management server 丨 and 丨 and "" enter all or the first 6 digits of the 10-digit telephone number (city outside bureau number and telephone bureau ring), and output the gateway of the management inquiry telephone number P The IP address of the gateway. ❿ Furthermore, the gateway address management feeders 1441 and 1442 can benefit from putting the phone number back on the domain name. The domain name feeder (dns) is well-known technology to realize it. Moreover, when the number of inquired telephone numbers is small, the IP address management table (Figure 234) can be used instead of the gateway address management feeder. Here, The IP address management table is a table that summarizes the correspondence between the telephone number and the address of the relay gateway. When the phone number is specified, the IP address of the corresponding relay idle channel can be obtained. In addition, the 115 address management table is The purpose of the output circuit table of the 1P transfer network described in other embodiments is the same? That is, it is used to retrieve the match between the telephone number and the IP address. The relay control unit 1423 stores the "address of the relay gateway 1401". &quot; s_ad_x :, the receiving end 115 address forming the 1P packet 1452 ° IP packet 1452 is • D-ad-x &quot;, the sending end IP address is "S_ad_x &quot;, the circuit number is &quot; cic_x, and the message is &quot; IAM &quot;, parameter &quot; Para —x &quot; is a telephone that includes the telephone i42〇

1245997 V. Description of the invention (203) Blunt code ‘TN-Γ and the phone number“ TN_2 ”of the telephone 1421. The foregoing information and parameters are respectively obtained by the signal unit 1 4 5 1 (refer to FIG. 2 3 6). The relay control unit, | 423 determines the circuit number C 1C-χπ for "s-ad-X" and "D-ad-x" according to certain rules (step S1 46 1-7 in Fig. 256). For example, the value of the circuit number just generated is stored in the internal memory and used to add one by one, and the following calculation formula is used. CI CX = CI C_x + 1 mod 6553 6 The time before 1 is blank, and it is displayed as address continuation table 1 438-1 (Figure 244). When the relay control unit 1 423 forms an IP packet 1 452, 'combined with the tag information inside the signal unit 1451 "DPC-1, 0PC-1, ^ SLS-1, CIC-1" and the tag information inside the IP packet 1 452 "S Ad_x, D-ad-x, CIC-xn 'and decide to request the media path identifier "MP-8Π" for the voice communication path of the voice control unit 1427, and add it to the address continuation table (Figure 256) Step S146 to 8). It is shown in the address continuation table 1438-2 (Figure 245). The address continuation table 1 4 3 8-2 records the internal signal station address items (&quot; DPC-1, 0PC-Γ). The `` DPC-Γ '' on the left holds the address continuation table 1438-2. Continue to the signal office address of gateway 1401. Similarly, in the IP address entry (&quot; S-ad-x, D-ad-x '') of the address continuation table 1438-2, the "S-ad-X" on the left side is the saved address Continue to Table 1 4 3 8-2 for the IP address of the gateway 1 4 0 1. The right end of this record is the media path identifier "jjp_ &amp;". &lt; &lt; Joint operation of relay control section and sound control section &gt; The relay control unit 1423

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 207 1245997

The channel 1 429-1 prompts the aforementioned media path identifier “Mp_8” to the sound control unit 142 * 7 (step 1 423-1 in FIG. 251), and the sound control unit 1 427 confirms that it is provided by the insurance company. The internal IP address &quot; IA5 &quot;, the external IP address &quot; EA5 &quot; of the internal module of the voice control unit 1 427 for voice communication, and the voice communication port number, via the information circuit 1 429-1, Report to the relay control unit 1 423 (step 1 427-10. In addition, the 'sound control unit 1 427 decides to recognize the logical communication circuit identifier of the logical communication circuit that transmits the voice code frame to the audio communication circuit 1417, "CH-1", And decided to identify the logical communication circuit identifier "CH-2" of the logical communication circuit that received the voice code frame from the audio communication circuit 1417, and write the aforementioned logical communication circuit identifiers "CH-1" and "CH-2" to the media Path continuity table 1429 'The result becomes the media path continuity table 1429-i (Figure 248). Moreover, when the logical communication circuit 1417 is the primary group speed interface circuit (PRI) of the ISDN communication circuit, the logical communication circuit identifies the subsystem It consists of the device number of the ISDN communication device and the number that specifies a specific β channel (the logical transmission circuit for user information). The relay control unit 1 4 2 3 will relay the I ρ address of the relay gateway 1 4 〇1 &quot; GW 0 5η, the above-obtained or generated CIC number, 'CIC-2 &quot;, the phone number inside the signal unit 1451 &quot; TN-1 ", &quot; TN-2", the IP address "ΕΑ5" and "ΙΑ5", the port The number &quot; 5010'1 is written to the CIC management table. The result becomes the CIC management table Huy (Figure 240). However, the program section is performed after step HA04, and IAM, and the relay control The unit 1 4 2 3 stores one or more internal I ρ addresses of the sound control unit 1 4 2 7 in advance, and uses one of them as the aforementioned internal 丨 ρ address &quot; IA5 ,.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd

1245997 Description of the invention (205) &lt; &lt; Transfer in the IP transfer network >>> The relay control unit 1 4 2 3 will transmit the IP packet 1 452 formed through the foregoing (step S1 4 6 1 -9 of FIG. 2 5 6). To the IP forwarding network 1400 (step S1461-10), the IP packet 1452 passes through the control communication circuit, the router 1431, and the control pass #circuit 1 4 3 1-2 to the relay in the relay gateway 1 4 〇 2 The control unit 1 424 (step HA05). &lt; <Relay Control Unit 1 424: Setting of CIC Management Table and Address Connection Table >>

The relay control unit J424 receives the IP packet 1452 (step S1462 2 in FIG. 257). Take out the IP address, message, circuit number, and parameters from the IP packet 1452 (step S1 462-3). Here, the IP address of the receiving end is "D —ad_x", the IP address of the transmitting end is "S-ad-χπ, the circuit number is" CIC_X ", and the message is" IAM ·· "

'The parameter is `` Para-X &quot;, the parameter &quot; Para-xn is the telephone number of the telephone 1420 &quot; TN-1 &quot; and the telephone number of the telephone 1421 &quot; TN-2Π. Check the address connection table 1439-1 ( (Figure 246), is there a corresponding IP address &quot; S-ad-X &quot;, &quot; D-ad-x '? And a circuit number (step sl462-4). Since it does not exist in this example, take out the aforementioned IP address "S-ad-χπ ,, D-ad-X, and circuit number address nCIC-xn, and write it to the address continuation table 1 439-1 (Step S1462-5), the relay control unit 1424 presents the telephone number '' ΤΝ-2Π of the receiving end telephone to the signal station address management server 1 444 to acquire and manage the telephone having the telephone number 1′TN-2 ”. The signal office address DPC-2 of the switch 1409 of 1421 (step name S1462-6) 'is written to the address connection table 1439-1 of FIG. 246 (step S1462-7). As a result, the address continuation table becomes 1439-2 (Figure 247). The right end of this record is the media path identifier "mp-9". The relay control unit 1424 is based on the rules predetermined by the public exchange network 1 406.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 209 1245997 V. The description of the invention (206) determines the circuit number "CIC-2", the signal link selection n SLS-2 ", forming the message containing" I AM, "and parameters The signal unit 1453 of Para_2n (step S1 462-8) is transmitted to the control communication circuit 1416 (step S1 462-9). &Lt; <Joint operation of the relay control section and the sound control section &gt; &gt; Refer to the figure 2 3 2 for explanation. The relay control unit 1 4 2 4 uses the information circuit 1 430-1 to identify the aforementioned media path identifier “MP-9” and the internal IP address of the module in the previously acquired voice control unit 1 427 ”. IA5 ,, external IP address "ΕΑ5Π, and the port number of the sound control unit 1 4 2 7 for transmitting sound" 5 〇 〇 ,, to the sound control unit 1428 (step 1424-1 in Figure 252) The sound control unit 1428 assigns the internal IP address “ΙΑ6” of the internal module of the sound control unit 428, the external IP address “ΕΑ6”, and the port number used by the sound control unit 1 428 to transmit sound &quot; 5012 " To report to the relay control unit 1424 (step 1 428-n. In this procedure, the sound The control unit 1428 assigns 2 to 1 {) addresses and port numbers (external 1? Address "EA5" and port number "5010", internal IP address "IA6", and external IP address EA6 and port number 5012 ") Write to the media connection table 143〇. In addition, the voice control system $ 18 decides to recognize and transmit the voice code frame to the voice communication circuit. ! Router's logical communication circuit identifier, CH-3 ', and the decision 2 Ui t #circuit 1418 logic communication circuit receiving the voice code frame "CH-3" and "CH-4" ^ = to: two: will The aforementioned logical communication circuit recognizes the old π pull connection to the media path connection table 1430, and the result becomes the media path connection table 1 430-1 (FIG. 249). Media path continuation table 1 4304 3 &quot; EA5 ", sender port number" 5 ^^ 疋 Although I received the receiver terminal 1? Address terminal number "5012, IP packets (. Pay = terminal 1P address, , EA6 &quot;, trusted, payload is UDP), the UDP payload is within 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd

Page 210 1245997

The digital voice transmission "Feng Biezi" "CH-3" "When from; i = t communication circuit 1418 logic communication circuit to recognize the sound, the t b "Yin" to digitally sign the letter port number "5.12", stored at the sender's 1p address "EA6", send "5010", and the 1P address "EA5", the trusted port number department .. (Payment system: ϋ »»), and transmit it to the IP forwarding network 1400. It is decided to use the audio communication circuit, and it is decided to write the logic and the Chun number to the media path together. Table 1 430-1 〈< Public telephone exchange network 1 4 0 6 Signal unit 1453 Arrival unit 1453 is forwarded to public machine 1 409 (step HA07). Whether or not the telephone 1421 is allowed to set requirements (letter notification)

The tone is transmitted to the logic communication circuit identifier "CH-2" of the voice communication circuit 1418, and the IP address body path is connected to Table 1 430. The written result is (Figure 249). Action >> Relay switch 1413 (step HA06), the signal telephone exchange network 1 4 0 6 and then arrive at the exchange switch 1 409 to check the letter with the telephone number &quot; TN-2 ', if permission is granted, Then, the telephone is called to the telephone 1421 (step HA08). Next, the 'switch 1 409' forms a signal unit 1454 shown in FIG. Inside the signal unit 1 454, the receiving end signal office address is DPC-3 ", the transmitting end signal office address is" quot; 0pc —3 ", the signal link selection is 1 SLS-3, and the circuit number is" CIC " -3 ". Here, the value of &quot; opc-3, "is the value of DPC-2, the value of &quot; DPC-3" is the value of 0PC-2, and the value of "SLS-33Γ" is SLS-2 ", The value of" CIC-3 "is the value of" CIC_2, ". That is, the address of the signal office is the value of the signal link selection and circuit number of the sender's signal office and the signal of the receiver's signal station in the previous steps.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 211 1245997

Switch 1 409 forwards the signal unit 1454 to the inside of the public telephone switching network 1406. Unit k 1454 passes through the switch 1413 (step HA11) and reaches the relay gateway via the control communication circuit 1416. 4 02 Relay control inside Part 1 424 (step HA12). The relay control unit 1 424 receives the signal unit 1454 (S146 and 2 in FIG. 256). 'Remove the signal bureau mark (sl461-3) inside the signal unit 1454, and check whether there is a signal bureau mark in the address connection table 1 439. DPC-3, OPC-3, SLS-3, CIC-3 "with the same contents (step S1462-4). In this example, because there is a consistent record in the address continuation table 1439_2, an IP packet 1455 (S1461-9 in Figure 256) is formed as shown in Figure 238, and is transmitted to the IP forwarding network 1 400 (S1461 -10). The IP address of the sender and receiver in the packet 1455 is ’’ S-a d-uπ, and the IP address of the receiver is, d-a d-u,, and the circuit number is ’, CIC-un. Here, the value of "S-ad-ιΓ" is the value of "D-ad-χπ" "The value of D-ad-un" is the value of "S-ad-xn", and the value of "CIC-ιΓ" is " ; The value of CIC-χπ. That is, the address of the relay gateway is the value of the sending end and the receiving end of the IP address of the IP packet 1452 exchanged in the foregoing step ΗΑ 05, and the value of the circuit number is unchanged. The IP packet 1 4 5 5 passes the control communication circuit 1 4 3 1-2, the router 1 4 3 1, the control communication circuit 1 4 3 1-1, and reaches the relay control section 1 423 (step HA13 in Fig. 233). The relay control unit 1 423 receives the IP packet 1 455 (S1462-2 in FIG. 257), and takes out the IP address 'S-ad-u' and "D-ad-un, circuit number" CIC from the IP packet 1 455. -u &quot;. Then, since the address continuation table 1 438, the tag information `` S-ad-un and, D-ad-x, coincides with the tag information n D-ad-u '' and `` S -ad-xn is the same, the circuit numbers "ciC-u 1 and" CIC-xn are the same, and the signal unit 1 456 shown in Fig. 239 (Fig.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p.212 1245997 Description of the Invention (209) 257 (S1462-8). Then, it is transmitted to the control communication circuit 1415 (S1462-9), the signal unit 1456 reaches the relay switch 1412 (step HA14), the signal unit 1 456 is transferred to the public telephone switching network 1405, and reaches the switch 1 408 (step HA1 5). On the other hand, the telephone set 1421 receives the letter notification via step HA08, and returns the signal unit indicating that the phone is outbound to the exchange 1409 (step HA20). 6 message) notifies the switch 1413 (step HA21). The switch 1413 transmits the aforementioned signal unit to the relay control unit 1 424 of the relay gateway 142 via the control communication circuit 1416 (step HA22). The relay control unit 1424 refers to its internal address connection table 1 439-2, Through the aforementioned same procedure shown in FIG. 256, an IP packet is notified to inform the aforementioned telephone call. The IP packet formed as described above reaches the relay control unit 1 423 through the control communication circuit 1431-2, the router 1431, and the control communication circuit (step HA23). The relay control unit 1 423 receives the IP packet 'to form a signal unit notifying the aforementioned telephone call and transmits the aforementioned signal unit to the control communication circuit 1415 (S1462-9). The aforementioned signal unit passes through the relay switch: | 412 (step HA24) and reaches the switch 1 408 (step HA25). The exchange 1408 notifies the telephone set 1420 while the telephone set 1421 is being called (step HA26). Second, when the user of the telephone set 1421 responds to the outgoing call (step HA30), the signal unit notifying the response is transmitted from the switch 1409 through the parent switch 1 41 3 (step HA 3 1) to the relay control. Part 1 &amp; 2 4 (step HA32). The relay control unit 1 424 refers to the address continuation table 1 439 to form a notification response IP packet (ANM). The aforementioned IP packet passes control communication 1245997

The circuit 1431-2, the router 1431, and the control communication circuit 1431- 丨 reach the relay control unit 1 423 (step HA33). The relay control unit 1 423 refers to the address continuation table 1 438 to form a signal unit for notification response, passes through the control communication circuit 1415, and then passes through the switch 1412 (step HA34) to reach the switch 1408 (step HA35). The exchange 1 408 sends an answer signal to the telephone set 1 420 (step HA36). "<Completion of the address continuation table>" The description will be made with reference to Fig. 232. The relay control unit 1 423 sets the media path identifiers 1 to 8 above, and the internal addresses of the modules in the sound control unit 1 428 obtained above. &quot; IA6 &quot;, external IP address "EA6", port number of voice control unit 1 428 used to transmit voice &quot; 5012 "when prompted to voice control unit 1 427 (step 1 423-2 in Figure 253), voice control Department 1 427 wrote the aforementioned IP address &quot; U6, ΕΑ6Π, and the aforementioned port number "50〇2π into the media path connection table 1 429m (Figure 248), and completed the media path connection table 1 42 9-2 (Figure 25) And report to the relay control unit 1 4 2 3 (step 1 4 2 7-2). In the aforementioned continuation phase, the circuit number &quot; CK- 丨 set by the public telephone exchange network 1405, which is used to set the telephone circuits of the telephone sets 丨 4 2 0 and 丨 4 2 丨, and the circuit set with the IP transfer network 1 400 The number "CIC — x" has a corresponding relationship in the address continuation table 38. The circuit number CIC-X set by the IP forwarding network 1400 and the circuit number set by the public telephone switching network 1406, CiC_2 &quot;, φ in The address connection table 1439 has a corresponding relationship. These two correspondences are always constant in the telephone communication of the telephones 1 420 and 1421. &lt; &lt; Communication stage >〉 Through the above procedure, communication between the telephone set 1420 and the telephone set 1421 is performed.

2049-3793-PFiRAY.ptd 1245997

Through the above procedure, it becomes possible to make a telephone call with the telephone set 1420 to perform voice communication (step H). :, Sent out =: After being fooled and exchanged in the exchange coffee 8, it was sent to the switch 丨 4 丨 2, through ^ circuit U17, and then through the sound in the relay gate 1401 The control unit i / u passes through the voice communication circuit 1 433-1, router 1 433, voice 1 433-2, and the voice control unit 1 428 in the relay gateway 1 402, via the communication circuit 1 41 8, and the switch 1 4 1 3, Switch 1 4 09, arrived at the phone 1421. Telephone 1421 to telephone 1420 are opposite to

In turn, the communication circuit for voice and telephone connection control can be separated between switch 1408 and switch 1409. 〃 &lt; &lt; Release stage 〉〉 When the user puts down the receiver, the release of the communication is notified from the phone 1420 to the switch 1 408 (step HA40 in FIG. 23), and the switch 1408 notifies the switch of the release message (REL). 1412 (step HA41). Switch 1412—Receive the release §fl message 'and send the release end message (r l C) back to switch 1408 (step HA55). Switch 1412 notifies the relay control unit 1 423 of the release message (REL) (step HA42). The relay control unit 1423 returns a release end message (RLC) to the switch 1412 (step HA54), the relay control unit 1 423 notifies the relay control unit 1 424 of the release message (REL) (step HA43), and then, the relay The control unit 1 424 returns a release end message (RLC) to the relay control unit 1423 (step HA53). The relay control unit 1424 notifies the switch 1413 of the release message (REL) (step HA44), the switch 1413 returns a release end message (RLC) to the relay control unit 1424 (step HA52), and the switch 1413 sends

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 215 1245997 V. Description of the invention (212) The release message (REL) informs the switch 1409 (step HA45). The exchange 1409 returns a release completion message (RLC) to the exchange 1413 (step HA51), and the exchange 1409 notifies the telephone set 421 of the release notification (step HA46). When the relay control unit 1 423 determines in step HA42 (step S1463- 2 in FIG. 258) that the aforementioned signal unit is a release message (REL) (steps sl 463-3, S1 463-4, and S1 463-5), it clears This record of the address continuation list (step S1 463-6). As a result, the record of the address continuation table 1 439-2 (FIG. 247) becomes an empty column as shown in the address continuation table 1439-1 (FIG. 246). <& Clearing of Media Path Records >> The relay control unit 1423 instructs to clear the media path connection table 1 429 —2 on the sound 1 control unit 1 427 in the aforementioned step HA43. 25〇) of the record of the media path &quot; MP-8 &quot; (step 1 423_3 of FIG. 254), the sound control unit 1 427 reports the erasure of the record of the media path connection table (step 1 427-3). Also, in step N53, the relay control unit 1 424 instructs to clear the media path continuation table 143 of the sound control unit 1428 (see FIG. 24 9) for the media path == record = step 1424-2), The control department reported. By media path, the record of the table is cleared (step 1 428 —

This record can be used for operational records. I &lt; <Communication between Telephone 1 42 0 and Telephone 1 422》 From telephone 1 422, via media router 1404, the terminal gateway 14G3, which functions as a glue, and the phone's magic channel, with encapsulation, call The communication between the terminals of the telephone 1421, that is, related to the telephone 1—the media router—the radio control method, the network exchange—the communication between the terminals of the telephone 2, and the method is as follows:

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 216 1245997 丨 a 丨 _ _-5. Description of invention (213). In the opposite direction to the aforementioned telephone 2_Public electricity-IP transfer network-Media router-Telephone κ Terminal communication = Method Through approximately the same procedure, the telephone 1 420 can be implemented according to an easily analogous procedure, via the public telephone exchange network 1405 ^, Via the channel &quot; ^, the inter-terminal channel 1403 with an encapsulation function, the media routing relay 1404, and the inter-terminal communication connection control by calling the telephone 1 422 ^, indicating that there is encapsulation in other embodiments The function of the functioning gateway can be implemented through the same procedures as in the previous tour. In addition, from the telephone set 142 ′ through the public electrical live network switching network 1 405, and then through the relay gateway 1 401, the terminal gateway 1 4 03 with the capsule function, the media router 1 404, and the UNI Communication circuit 1419, public telephone exchange network 1407, and a method for controlling inter-terminal communication connection of a telephone set 1 2 2 3, explaining the inter-terminal communication through the public telephone exchange network via the UN I communication circuit in other embodiments The continuation control procedure can be implemented by the same procedure as that described above. The summary is as follows. In the indirect continuous control of the terminal between the two telephones, the telephone 1, the public telephone exchange network 1, the NNI interface communication circuit 1, the relay gateway 1 and the relay gateway 2, and the NNI interface to which the IP forwarding network belongs are sequentially connected. Communication circuit 2, public telephone exchange network 2, telephone 2. The other methods are sequentially through the telephone set 1, the public telephone exchange network 1, the NNI interface communication circuit 1, the relay gateway 1 to which the IP forwarding network belongs, and the gateway, media router, and telephone 2 with the capsule function. 1 5. The 5th embodiment without encapsulating the sound line IP · This embodiment is to change the outlet device in other embodiments to not IP glue 2049-3793-PF »RAY.ptd Page 217 1245997 5 2. Description of the invention (214) The encapsulated terminal device is changed to an unencapsulated terminal gateway, and the relay gateway is changed to an unencapsulated relay gateway. The sound lp packet is not encapsulated in IP, and the table management server and proxy telephone server are removed. / In Figure 260, 1 600 series IP forwarding network, 1601 series public telephone switching network, 160 series non-encapsulated terminal gateway, 1603 series terminal device, 1604 series terminal gateway control unit (SEP) 1 60 5 series non-encapsulated relay gateway, mm 'series relay control section (STP), 16 07 series sound control section, 160 series relay switch, 160 series 9 subscriber switch, 161. Department of telephone number &quot; TN- 丨 &quot; electric machine '1 611 Telephone of telephone number &quot; TN-2 &quot;, 1 6 1 2 and 1 6 1 3 control IP communication circuit, 1 6 1 4 and 1 61 5 series voice I p communication circuit, i 6 丨 6 series common line signal control communication circuit, 1 6 丨 7 series voice communication circuit, U20 series address management table, 1671 series telephone management server, i672 series telephone number server. The unencapsulated relay gateway 605 is a relay gateway that can communicate with the unencapsulated terminal channel 1602. You can use media routers. 66 or external devices such as telephones. IP addresses are called external. P addresses are not allowed. IP forwarding networks are not available. 1 6 are external devices such as p.丨 6 00 internal dedicated IP address is called the internal IP address. The telephone management server 1 6 71 has an external IP address &quot; EA91 &quot; and an internal IP address, 1 I Α9Γ, which can be used separately to improve intelligence security. &lt; &lt; Continuation stage >〉 ▲ Let's take a telephone communication from the telephone 1610 to the telephone 1611 as an example. When the receiver of the telephone 1610 is picked up, the outgoing call signal is transmitted to the media router 1 660 (step B01 in FIG. 261), and the media router 1660 confirms the outgoing call (step B02). Then, it contains the address of the sending terminal, ΙΑπ, the receiving terminal I! Page 218 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 5. Description of the invention (215) IP address', ΕΑ91Π, phone number `` TN -1 ", phone number &quot; TN-2 &quot;, itch 5 tiger code for voice transmission" 5〇〇 6π, additional information "Inf〇_2" ιρ packet 163〇 (Figure, 262), and send it to The terminal device 1 603 (step B03). Here, the IP address EA1 is the media address of the media router, 66 address, π address, and EA91 &quot; is the external IP address of the telephone management server 1671, and the payload part of the IP packet 1630 is a UDP packet. 'The port numbers of the sender and receiver are both, 5 0 6 0 π. &lt; <packet filter via terminal device >>

When the terminal device J 6 03 receives the IP packet 1 63 0, it checks the sender IP address "EA1", the sender port number &quot; 5〇〇〇, and the recipient IP address "ΕΑ9Γ contained in the 1? Packet. 3. Whether the port number of the trusted terminal, 5060, has been registered as the internal record of the address management table 1620. In this example, since it contains a record that is used as the jth row of the address management table 丨 6 20 — 丨 (Figure 263), the heartbeat device 16 0 3 sends the IP packet 1 6 3 0 as the trusted end I p Address &quot; E a 9 丨 "is converted to the internal IP address of the telephone management server" A91 "(times, according to the designation of the record in the address management details (the right side of the interface &quot; IF 1612") And sends it to the control IP communication circuit 1612 as the ιρ packet 1631 (step B04). Furthermore, the IP address and port number inside the received Ιρ packet 1630 are not registered in the address management table 丨 6 2 〇 In this case, the IP packet 1630 is discarded. As described above, the packet is filtered.

&lt; &lt; Formation of CIC Management Table 〉〉 The telephone management server 1671 receives the IP packet 1631, and sends the internal IP address I A9 Γ 'of the telephone management server 1 671, the program section "J AM", and sends it to the end phone No. ,, TN-Γ, telephone number of the receiving end "TN-2", the aforementioned 1-digit "address π ΕΑΓ", the aforementioned port number for voice transmission "5000", the time of writing (year

1245997 V. Description of the invention (216) ^ Day, hour, minute and second) n St 6 &quot; is written to the record of the CIC management table stored in the telephone management server 1671 as the CIC management table 1671-1 (Figure 264). Secondly, the phone management server 671 will ask the IP address of the receiving end "tn — 2 ,, 1 63 2- 1 (Figure 265) and display it on the phone number server 1 672 (step B06), and the phone number server 1 672 stores the IP address "GW03" in the 1? Packet 1632-2 (Figure 266) and answers (step β〇7). Here, the aforementioned IP address' 'GW0 3' is a 1? Address of the relay gateway 1660. &lt; &lt; Management of Circuit Numbers &gt;> The telephone management server 1671 decides the cic number &quot; CIC-2, and, based on the Cl C number formation rule determined for the IP address "IA91π and the IP address" "GW03". The IP address `` GW0 3 '' is written into the CIC management table. The result is recorded in the CIC management table 1671-2 (Figure 267). Then, the telephone management server 1671 refers to the IP packet 1631 and the CIC management. Table 1671-2 forms the IP packet 1 634 (Figure 268) (IAM packet), and transmits the ip packet 1 634 to the relay gateway 1 605 (step B09). << Action of the relay control unit> When the control unit 1 606 receives the IP packet 1 634 (Figure 268) (step B09), it takes out the sending end IP address “ΙΑ 9ι”, the receiving end IP address `` GW03'1, the circuit number &quot; CIC -2 ", program section &quot; ΙΑΜΠ, sender's phone number π ΤΝ-1", recipient's phone number &quot; τν-2 ,,, external IP address &quot; ΕΑ1 &quot;, voice transmission port number "5006 π, with the time &quot; St-7 ·, write the record together as the internal c saved in the relay gateway 1 6 0 5 Records of the IC management table 1 605-1 (FIG. 26 9), and the relay control unit 1 60 6 searches the signal station address management table 1 62 7 (

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 220 1245997 V. Description of the invention (217) '---------, prompt the phone number m' to obtain the management telephone 1611 ^ change ^ _, signal bureau Address &quot; Pc, &quot;. The relay control unit 1606 determines the signal link selection and the first electric power code C ~ 3 according to the "selection rule" of the network 160L. The relay control unit 1 60 6 sets the relay gate ^ 0, the office address "PC-3", the "PC-09" obtained above, the foregoing. Said link selection "SLS-3", the foregoing circuit Number &quot; CIC_3 &quot;, front, IP address &quot; IA91 &quot;, circuit number &quot; cic_2 &quot;, and the new media path identification Khan &quot; MP-7 &quot; —are written as the address continuation table 25 The new record. As a result, the address continuity table becomes as shown in (Figure = 1). Then, the relay control unit 1 06 composes the signal office address 09j and "PC-3", and the aforementioned signals. The link selects "SLS_3" and the circuit unit "C-3", message "IAM", telephone number "TN-i" and "TN_2" signal unit 1635 (Figure 272), and transmits it to the control communication circuit 1616 (step β1 〇). &lt; &lt; Joint operation of the relay control section and the sound control section &gt;> The relay control section 1 6 0 6 sets the aforementioned media path identifier &quot; Mp_7 &quot;, the aforementioned external IP address &quot; EA1 &quot;, for voice transmission The port number &quot; 5000 &quot; is notified to the voice control unit 1607 via the intelligence circuit 1 629. The voice control unit 1607 writes the above-mentioned communication information as a record of the media path connection table 6 2 8 In addition, the sound control unit 16 0 7 determines a logical communication circuit for transmitting sound from the sound control unit 6 07 to the sound communication circuit 1617, and writes the logical communication circuit identifier n CH-1π as a medium. Record of path continuity table 1 628. The above results are shown in media path continuity table 1 628-1 (Figure 273). &Lt; &quot; Operation of switching network and ACM information &quot;> Switch 1 6 0 8 is controlled by communication circuit 6丨 6 receiving signal unit 1245997 V. Description of the invention (218) 1 635 (step B10), transfer the signal unit 1 63 5 to the switch 1609 (step B11). The parent switch 1 6 0 9 receives the signal unit 丨 6 3 5. Check if the phone number “TM-2” of the trusted end included It is possible to write a letter, if it is possible to write a letter, know, know the phone 1611 (step B12). And, form and send back the signal unit 1 635_ 丨 (Figure 27 5) received by the signal unit 1 635 (Figure 27 5) The signal unit is via the switch 16 0 8 (step b 1 3) and reaches the relay gateway 1 6 05 (step B 1 4). The relay control unit 1 6 0 6 is based on the received signal unit 6 3 5 — 丨 Marking information 'refers to the address continuation table 1 625- 丨 (Figure 271), and obtains the address information used for the formation of 1 {) packets. The IP packet 1651 (ACM message) is formed (Figure 2 76), and the IP packet is 1651 is sent to the telephone management server 1671 (step β15). The telephone management server 1671 takes out the circuit number "CIC-2" and the program section "ACM" from the received 1? Packet 1651, and checks the telephone management server CIC management table 1671-2 saved in 1671 (Figure 26 7), find out the record of its own IP address &quot; IA91 "| 2 object's IP address &quot; GWO3", circuit number "CIC-2", put nc The program section block of this record in Official Table 1 671-2 was rewritten as "ACM". Next, the telephone management server 1671 forms an IP packet indicating reception of the aforementioned ACM message, and notifies the media router 1660 (steps B18, B19). &lt; <Media path continuation table >> In parallel with the foregoing step B10, or after the end of step B10, the relay control unit 1 606 presents the media path identifier, "MP-7" to the sound control unit 1 6 0 7, The IP address and port number are required at the same time. Therefore, the voice control unit 丨 6 〇7 sends the voice control unit 16 07 to the voice IP communication phone 1615 to send the IP address “EA7” of the 1 packet of the packet and the port of the UDP packet. The number, 5008, answers to the control and control unit 1 60 6. The sound control unit 16 07 ensures the logic 2049-3793-PF received from the switch 1680; RAY.ptd Page 222 1245997 V. Invention Explanation (219) The audio communication circuit "records its identifier" CH-2 "on the record of the media path connection table 1 628-2 (Fig. 274). The left side of the record of the media path connection table becomes the voice control unit 1 607 IP address "EA7" and port number "50 008", the right side becomes the IP address of the communication target "ΕΑΓ and port number" 50〇6π. The relay control unit 1 60 6 receives the IP address "ΕΑ7 &quot; The port number &quot; 5008 ,, is written into the c 1C management table 1 60 5- 1 (Fig. 2 6 9). The result becomes the cic management table 16 0 5-2 (Figure 279). &lt; &lt; CPG Message Transmission 〉〉

When the telephone reports the outgoing call to the switch 1609 (step B2〇) 'The switch forms and transmits a signal unit (CpG message) that informs the outgoing call of the telephone, and the aforementioned signal unit arrives via the switch 6104 (step B2 丨) and arrives at Relay gateway 1 6 05 (step B22). The relay control unit 16 0 6 refers to the address continuation table 丨 625 — 丨 (Fig. 271) based on the received tag information of the aforementioned signal unit, obtains the address information used to form the IP packet, and forms cpG in the form of an IP packet. Message 1 6 5 2 (Figure 2 7 7). The IP packet is transmitted to the telephone management server 6 7 i (step B23), and the telephone management server 1671 notifies the aforementioned outgoing call via the media router 1660 to notify the telephone 1610 (steps B2 6 to B 28).

When the relay control unit 1 606 forms a CPG message, it obtains the external IP address ΠΕΑ7Π and the port number, 5008π, from the CIC management table 1 605-2 (Fig. 279), and writes it into the Cpg message 162. The telephone management server 1671 can take out the external IP address "ea7" and the port number "5008" from the received cpG packet 1 6 52 and write it into the management table 1671-2 (Fig. 267). &Lt; &lt; AN Μ message transmission >> then 'when the user of telephone 1611 answers the outgoing call (step

2049.3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 223 1245997 V. Description of the invention (220) B30), the switch 1 6 09 forms and transmits a notification response signal unit (ANM message), and the aforementioned signal unit passes the switch 1608 (step B31) To reach the relay control section 1660 (step B 3 2). The relay control unit 16 0 6 refers to the received addressing table 1 625-1 (Fig. 271) of the tag information of the aforementioned signal unit, and forms an ANM message 1 65 3 (Fig. 278) in the form of an IP packet. The IP packet 1 65 3 is transmitted to the telephone management server 1671 (step B33), and the telephone management server 1671 notifies the telephone 1610 of the aforementioned response notification via the media router 1660 (steps B36 to B38). That is, the IP packet 1656 (Fig. 282) is sent from the telephone management server 1 671 to the media router Is 1660 via the terminal device 1 603 (step B36) (step B37). When the relay control unit 16 0 6 forms the AN M message, it obtains the external IP address “ΕΑ3,1 and the port number” 5008 &quot; from the IC management table 16 0-5-2 (Figure 279), and writes the ANM message 1 6 53. The telephone management server 1671 can retrieve the external IP address "EA7" and the port number "5008" from the received response packet 1 653, and write the second management table 1671-2 (Figure 267). &lt; & Writing sequence of CIC management table 〉〉 The telephone management server 1671 takes out the aforementioned external IP address “EA7” and the port number “5 008” and writes it into the cic management table 1671-2 to form the CK management table 167. The sequence of Bu 3 (Fig. 28 0) is the step of receiving cp (J message B23 or ANM message step B33 in the foregoing description. &Lt; Writing the address management table &gt; &gt; The telephone management server 1671 From the CIC management table 1671_3 (Fig. 28), take out the external-address &quot; EA1 &quot; and the media router 166 of the media routing test fi0, which is connected to the sender's telephone 1610. The external code is = 2

1245997 V. Description of the invention (221)-1 · 5 0 6, internal and external 丨 p address of the sound control unit 丨 p address &quot; £ a 7 &quot;, and the port number used by the sound control unit to transmit sound, "5008", and write it to the address management table 1620 of the terminal device 1603 together with the sound output interface IF1614 '(step B39). This result is shown in line 3 of the address management table 1620-2 (Figure 281) § Recorded EA1, 5006, 5008, IP1614 ,. &lt; &lt; Communication Phase >〉 The telephone communication between the user of the telephone 1610 and the telephone 丨 6 丨 丨 is the same as that used in the other embodiments. The analog voice of the telephone 1610 is digitized and placed on the payload of the IP packet 1661 (Figure 283). The sending end address of the IP packet 1661 is the “p address” EA of the media router 1666, and the receiving end address is the IP address inside the sound control unit 1607 obtained from the aforementioned “EA7”. The number of the voice transmission port of the media router is "5006", and the number of the UDP port used by the voice control unit 1607 to transmit voice is "f 5 0 08". ^ Because the IP address and port number inside the 1p packet 1661 are included in the third line of the address table 1620-2, EA1, 5006, EA7, 5008, IF1614 &quot;, the IP packet 1661 passes through the output circuit interface "The designation" jF1614 "is sent to the voice IP communication circuit 1614 as the IP packet 1 6 62, via the router 1 624, the voice IP communication circuit 1615, and reaches the voice control section 1606 of the relay gateway 1606. The control unit 1 6 0 7 takes out the IP address and port number from the received IP packet 1 6 6 2 &quot; EA1, 50 06, EA7, 5 008 &quot;, and connects to the media path in Table 1 6 28-2 (Figure 2 74), retrieve records with the same IP address and port number. Here, because the lp address contained in the record of the first line of the media path continuity table is consistent with the port number, IP packet 1 662 is regarded as a regular IP packet, and 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (222) is received. When inconsistent, the aforementioned p packets are discarded. Next, the digitized voice in the IP packet 1 662 is converted into a voice code box 1 664 (Figure 284) in the form transmitted by the voice communication circuit 1617, and the voice code box 1 6 6 4 reaches the switch 16 through the switch 1 6 08. 〇9, the sound is output from the telephone set 1 61 1 and the sound stored in the voice code frame transmitted from the telephone set 1 611 is transmitted in the reverse direction and reaches the telephone set 16 1 0. &lt; &lt; Release Phase >〉 When the user of the telephone 1610 notifies the release of the telephone communication (step B50 in FIG. 261), the media router 1 660 sends a telephone call release notification to the telephone management server 1671 (steps B51 to B52) The telephone management server 1671 returns the release completion to the media router 166 (steps B64 to B66). The telephone management server 1 6 71 sends an IP packet 1 665 (FIG. 285) to notify the release of the telephone call to the relay control unit 1 60 6 (step B55), and the relay control unit 1606 sends an IP packet 1666 notifying the release completion The call is returned to the telephone management server 1671 (step B6 2), and the relay control unit 1606 sends a telephone call release notification to the relay switch 1 6 08 (step B56). The relay switch 1 608 returns the release completion to the relay control unit 1 60 6 (step B61), the relay switch 1 608 sends a telephone call release notification to the switch 1609 (step B67), and the switch 1 609 releases the release end It returns to the relay switch 1608 (step B60), and the switch 1 609 sends the telephone call disconnection signal to the telephone 1611 (step B58). &lt; 1 &lt; &lt; Clearing of media path records &gt; &gt; In the foregoing step B55, the relay control section 1 60 6 instructs the sound control section 1 607 to follow the media path connection table 628-2 (Fig. 274), Instructs the clearing of the record of the media path set previously, and instructs the CIC management table 1660-2

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 226 1245997 V. Clearing of the record of the description of the invention (223) (Figure 279). Further, the record of the address connection table 1 6 2 5-1 (FIG. 2 7 1) set in the connection control of the aforementioned telephone communication is cleared. &lt; &lt; Clearing of address management table and Cl C management table &gt; &gt; The electric 4 management server 1 6 71 instructs the terminal device 1 6 〇3 to clear the CIC management table 1671 set in the above-mentioned telephone communication connection control. -3 (FIG. 280), and clears the address management table 1620-2 (FIG. 281) managed by the terminal device 1 603 (step B 69). &lt; Change of terminal device &gt; &gt; The terminal device 1603 may not change the function of the internal address of the received IP packet (N AT function). In this example, the external IP address "EA 91π" of the telephone management server is consistent with the internal IP address "I A9 1,". &Lt; <Other changes of terminal device >> The address inside the terminal device 1603 The management table 1 62 0 may not include an ip address, but is expressed as an address management table 丨 62〇-3 (Figure 287). In this example, the registration without an IP address is indirectly controlled by the terminal of the telephone. Use port speaking code 5 0 60, use the phone number "5 004" to "5048" in the voice communication of the phone, and discard 1 packet of other port numbers. Therefore, IP packets other than the phone are prohibited From the above, the telephones 1610 and 1611 can perform telephone communication through the IP transfer network 160, and the public telephone exchange network 1601. The relay gateway includes a relay control section, a sound control section, and a relay control section. Contains the connection correspondence table and the signal station address management table. The sound control section includes the media path connection table. The sound control section specifies the logical communication channel in the sound communication circuit 1617, and writes the channel identifier `` CH-Γ '' to the media path connection table. .use Encapsulated gateway and terminal

The first 6 1245997 of the switching network and the description of the invention (224) Set up the dagger, dust gateway, according to the terminal equipment inside the non-encapsulated terminal gateway, through the registration 1 IP address and port number 1 P packet, dagger filter. Or, according to the aforementioned address management table, IP packet transition through packets can be performed ... Telephone communication can be performed between the telephones connected to the parent port, the ancestral temple, and the telephone connected to the IP transfer network. 1 6 · Control line Example separated from the voice line and connected to the public telephone: In Figure 288, 1 700 and 1701 are IP forwarding networks, 1702 is the public telephone exchange network (PSTN), and 1 703 and 1 704 are terminals with encapsulation function. Gateway, 1 07 05 is the relay gateway connected to the control circuit 1 738 of the common line signal mode, 1 0 07 and 1 7 0 7 are relay gateways connected to the IP communication circuit, 7 j 〇 to 1 71 3 and 1 71 8 are relay control sections, 1 7 1 4 and 1 71 5 are branch point devices, 1716 and 1717 are sound control sections, 1 720 and 1721 are telephones, 1 72 5 to 1729 are control communication circuits, 1731 to 1736 are sound communication circuits. 1725 to 1736 are IP communication circuits. 1738 is a common line signal control communication circuit and 1739 is a voice communication circuit. The branch point devices 1714 and 1715 have a capsule function, which is added in other embodiments. Note. The IP forwarding network ^ 〇〇 and 170 1 are different Communications use of individual point transfer network I p, j p sealed packet via the communication circuit 1727 and 1734 according to any one of the other party can be transferred to.,

The relay control unit 171 in the terminal gateway 1 70 3 having a capsule function, as described in other embodiments, includes a telephone management server, a proxy power server, a telephone number server, and a meter management server. The ground relay control unit 1 7 1 3 also includes a telephone management server, an agent telephone server, and a mine ^

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p. 228

1245997 V. Description of the invention (225) Number server and table management server. &lt; &lt; Continuation stage >〉 Take telephone communication from the telephone set 1 720 to the telephone set 172 as an example. In 289, uoom indicates the range of the IP forwarding network 1700, and 17 is an example. ^ Indicates the IP forwarding network π ”. When the telephone 1720 is picked up, the outgoing signal is transmitted to the media router 1 722 (step E01). ), The media router 1 722 confirms the outgoing call (step E 02). Next, the media router 1722 forms a telephone containing the telephone number &quot; TN-1 &quot; of the telephone 1720 as the sending end and the telephone 1721 as the receiving end. If the number is ιτν-2 &quot;, then the IP packet required for connection is called and transmitted to the network device 丨 7 丨 4. The network point device 1714 inputs the aforementioned IP packet, which is suitable for the “encapsulation” described in the other embodiments to form an internal IP packet, and transmits the aforementioned internal IP packet to the relay control unit 1710 in the terminal gateway 1 70 3 having an encapsulation function ( Step E03) The network point device 1714 returns the IP packet returned in the foregoing step e03 to the media router 1 722 (step E04), forms an IP packet 1750 required for the telephone call connection, and sends it to the control IP communication circuit. 1725. 1? Packet 1 750 reaches the relay control unit 1711 via the control IP communication circuit 1 726 (step E05) αIP packet 1750 contains the sender IP address "S-ad-4" and the recipient IP address nD_ad-4 " , Circuit number "CIC-4n, message", "iam", parameter "Para-4". The aforementioned parameters include the telephone number "TN-1" and "TN-2,". The IP address of the trusted end &quot; D- ad-4Π is the second example of the IP address of the relay control section 1 713 and the second example of the IP address of the relay control section 1 7 1 2. In the foregoing i-th example, the IP packet 1 750 directly passes Control communication circuit reaches relay gateway 丨 71 2

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 229 1245997 V. Relay control unit 1712 in the description of the invention (226) (step e〇6). The relay control unit 1 7 11 and 1 7 1 2 internally record from the IP packet 1 7 5 〇 p address &quot; S-ad-4 &quot;, "D-ad-4", circuit number "CIC —4" , "UM", phone numbers "TN-1 and TN-2", etc., as the IC management table 1711-1 (Figure 2 90) as described in the other embodiments. The following control section 1712 is stored in other The telephone number server described in the embodiment. In the second example described above, when the relay control unit 17 12 receives the IP packet, it uses the aforementioned telephone number server to retrieve the IP packet 175 from the telephone number "TN-2" of the receiving end. The new trusted end IP address in the 1 {) forwarding network 1701 is used as the trusted end 1 {) address of the IP packet 1750. The IP packet 1751 sent by the relay control unit 1712 is the same as the lp packet 1750, or a packet with a new IP address set as described above. The IP packet 1751 passes through the control communication circuits 1 728 and 1 729 to the relay control unit 1713 (step e0G.) Of the terminal gateway 1 704 with the packet function. The relay control unit 1 7 1 3 is described in other embodiments. Telephone manager, agent telephone server, telephone number server, and table management server. The internal telephone management server of the relay control unit 1713 is based on p packet 1751, and sends a 1? The media router 1723 receives the aforementioned IP packet (step. The media router 1 723 notifies the telephone call setting request 1721 (step E09), and sends back the notification reception step 1 1 to the packet E11). The relay control unit 1713 forms and sends Return the ACM packet (step f ^ The ACM packet arrives through the relay control unit 1 71 2, 1 7 1 1 and arrives at '1717 (steps E13, E14). When the telephone 1721 will call out the relay control unit router ( Step E20), notify media edge 1 and relay control via media route 5 | σ

1245997 V. Invention Description (227) Sections 1713, 1712, 1711, 1710, and Media Router 1722 were notified to the telephone 1720 during the outgoing call (steps E21 to E26). When the telephone 1721 answers, it passes through the media router 1 7 2 3. The relay control unit 1 7 1 3, 1 7 1 2, 1711, 1710, and the media router 1 72 2. The response of the telephone 1721 is notified to the telephone 1 7 20 To make a call (steps E30 to E36). Voice communication is performed between the telephone 1720 and the telephone 1721 (step E38). The voice transmitted from the telephone π 20 is digitized and stored in the media router 1 722. The ip packet passes through the branch point device 714, the communication circuit 1731, 1732, 1733, the sound control unit 1716, the communication circuit 1734, and the sound control. Part 1 717, communication circuit 1 73 5, 1 736, and branch office device 171 5 'reached the media router 1723' the digitized voice becomes analog voice 'and reached the telephone 1 7 2 1. In the outlet devices 17 1 4 and 17 15, the encapsulation and reverse encapsulation of IP packets are described in other embodiments. When the telephone set 77.2 asks for release (step E40), as explained in other embodiments, after a series of procedures for releasing and ending the telephone call, the telephone communication ends (steps E41 to E45, steps E51 to E55). &lt; &lt; Connection of various networks> &gt; Fig. 291 shows the connection between the public telephone switching network and the p-transmission network, and includes drawings of other embodiments. 1 7 6 0 and 1 7 61 are public telephone switching networks (PSTN), 1 762 and 1 7 63 are IP forwarding networks, 1 764 and 1 765 are subscriber switching networks (LS), 1 766 and 1 767 are trunks Switchboards, 1 768 to 1771 series terminal gateways with encapsulation, 1 7 7 2 and 1 7 7 3 series relay gateways, 1 7 7 6 to 17 79 series media routers, 1 78 0 to 1 785 series telephones . Each switch includes a relay control unit and a voice control unit, a terminal gateway with an encapsulation function, and

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 231 1245997 5. Description of the invention (228) The relay gateway also includes a relay control unit and a sound control unit. The switch and the question channel are connected by a control communication circuit and a sound control circuit. Set up a network point device between the relay gateway 1 7 7 2 and the terminal gateway with the capsule function 丨 7 6 8 and 丨 7 6 9, and the relay gateway 773 and the capsule with the capsule function A network point device is installed between the control circuits between the terminal gateways 1 70 and 1 771. Since this point is described in other embodiments, it is omitted in FIG. 2 i. Due to the above, for example, the telephones 1 7 82 and 1 785 via Π76 &gt;. TMf ^ 1 772 gateway 1 7 73, the gateway 1771 with the capsule function, the media router 1779, can be controlled through communication between terminals Communication: ^ Between phone 1 7 80 and phone Π85, via exchange &amp; 1 764, parent switch 1 766, relay gateway 1 772, relay gateway 1 773, and gateway functioning as a right gland. 1671. The media router 1 779 can perform telephone communication through continuous control of terminals. In addition, between the telephone 178 and the electric section j, through the switch 1 764, the switch 1 766, and the relay gateway, the switch 1 76 6 and = 7, 3 can be changed: switch 1 765. Control, can enter telephone communication. However, this example is effective for the case where Jiao 1767 is geographically distant. &Lt; &lt; Example of using an unencapsulated terminal gateway &gt;> The connection system of various networks similar to the above is shown in Figure 292. Terminal gateways 1768 to 1771, not 'unusual' terminal gateways 1 768 x 771 x. Instead of using closed trunks, use terminal gateways with non-encapsulated functions, 2 and 1 773 encapsulated relay gateways 1772x and 1773x.互通 # 的 非

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 232 1245997 V. Description of the invention (229) ~ --- &quot;-

As explained above, between the telephones 1 782 and 1 785, between the telephones 1 780 and 1785, and between the telephones 1 780 and 1781, the communication between the terminals can be controlled through the same communication as described above. . Due to the above, via the telephone gateway 1, the media router 1, and the IP forwarding network 1 to which the terminal gateway and the relay gateway having the capsule function belong, via 1 = other relay gateways to which the relay network 2 belongs and other capsule gateway functions The terminal's idle lanes can be used for telephone and communication between the two telephones through the media router 2 and the telephone 2 in this order. Via the non-encapsulated terminal gateway and the non-encapsulated relay gateway that the telephone 1, the media router 1, and the IP relay network 1 belong to, and the other relay gateways that belong to the IP relay network 2 and other capsules The functional terminal gateway can perform telephone communication between two telephones via the media router 2 and the telephone 2 'in this order. From the 丨 p transfer network i 7 〇 used by the communication company X to the IP transfer network 1 7 0 1 used by the communication company γ, the relay control unit 丨 7 丨 2 of the 丨 p transfer network 丨 7 丨 is used as the trust In the example of the IP packet input from the remote end, when the aforementioned relay control unit 丨 7 丨 2 receives the aforementioned IP packet, it queries the telephone number server to obtain the connection of the trusted party's telephone number &quot; TN_2 "included in the aforementioned IP packet. The IP address of the other relay control unit 1 71 3 of the IP transfer network forwards the IP packet set by the aforementioned update of the obtained IP address to the other relay control unit.

1 7 · Seventeenth embodiment for performing multicast communication: This embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 2 3 to 2 9 5. Network branch devices 1801 to 180 and 1 80 7 to 1809 are installed inside the IP transfer network 1 800. The branch device and the router are connected through the IP communication circuit directly or through the ground between the branch device and the router. Terminals 1810 to 1810 with IP packet sending and receiving functions-

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd

1245997 V. Description of the invention (230) 1 9 is connected to the outlet device via the IP communication circuit. 1 8 丨 丨 —1 to 丨 8 丨 5 An address management table for i-series network devices, 1 8 1 7-1 to 1 8 1 9-1 router table. Figure 2 9 4 of 1 8 6 8 is the main server class that realizes the function of connection control between terminals in multicast communication. 1 857 is the multicast management server. 1 855 and 1 85 6 are the users. Service server, 1 853 and 1854 are recipients, 1851 is a multicast service provider, 1 852 is a multicast service purchaser '1 8 5 0 router, 1 8 5 9 tree construction server, 1 8 5 8 series IP forwarding network 1 8 0 0 resource management server, 丨 8 6 丨 to 丨 8 6 3 series table management

server. 1 8 4 1 to 1 8 4 When the 5 is a multicast record setting, a communication circuit is output in which an IP packet that is out of schedule is output. IP transfer network 丨 〇 〇 Internal servers or routers are given IP addresses and have IP communication means that can exchange mutual information by transmitting and receiving 1? Packets. In this embodiment, the terminal or server has a unique IP address and can be assigned a plurality of multicast lp addresses. Terminal 1 81 0-2 In the multicast service, a 1 terminal for transmitting multicast data. The multicast data includes so-called multicast data including digitized audio or facsimile data, still images, and moving images. &lt; &lt; Communication history >〉 '

The rows of the address management table are called communication records or communication records. For example, the second row of the address management table 1811-1 "I〇1, E〇1, 6, I26, and G〇3 F02 are called external IP addresses &quot; E〇1, t and external address &quot;; ㈣ &quot; communication ^, or decided to have an external address "E〇1", the terminal 1810-2 and have the evening: 甬 广 端 1810, the contents of the record are &quot; a, b, c, d, e, f "_u ^

Page 234 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (231) 1 a ”, the second item is“ bn The third address item is called &quot; c The same below. When the item is an address, for example, the first item of the ## self-recorded, called Yanlachan, is identified as the logic end of the sending and receiving side. (4, Branch contact) The internal IP address of the remote end. The second item is called the IP address of the external end of the transmitting end. The IP address is F. The third line is the external IP address of each mountain. The 4 item is called the grant A% is again 仏 钿 ^ ^ Only the internal IP address of the trusted end of the logical terminal of the Xing cultural side, the 5th item is called Neiqiu τ p # spoonΜ 仏 山 + 幻 又 彳 口 知 q 门 4 The designation of the output position of the IP packet, and the "β" item is referred to as the designation of the output position of the external IP packet. The b &lt; &lt; &lt; 2 IP transfer between terminals >〉

The external IP address is granted to the terminal 1810-2 in FIG. 293, and the internal IP address is granted to the terminal 1801 side of the network device 1822 on the communication path. The terminal 1810 is shown in FIG. -16 grants external IP address "E26", and the communication circuit 1 8 2 6 6 network point device 1 8 0 4 side terminal grants internal 丨 p address "丨 2 6". The address management table of the network device 1811 — 18 to 1815_ 丨 internal values, through the same method described in other embodiments, shows the status of the initial value is set ′ will be described below by IP packet transfer.

The terminal 1810-2 sends the external IP address 1 of the sending end, E〇1 ", the external IP address of the receiving end" E26 "to the communication circuit 1822, and the network device 1801 receives the external IP packet. . Next, the outlet device! 801 confirms the record of the second line of the address management table 1811-"101, E〇1, 6, I 2 6, G 0 3, F 0 2" including the previously acquired 3丨 p address, that is, internal 1 {&gt; address &quot; 1〇1 &quot; of the terminal part of the communication circuit 1810-2, receiving = external IP packet 1 8 2 9 -1 sending end external I p address "£ 〇1", the external IP address of the trusted end "E 2 6", the &quot; j 〇ij 2 6 '' contained in the previous record,

1245997 Description of the invention (232) Form an internal IP packet and send it as internal IP packet 1 829_2 to the communication circuit specified by "603" contained in the aforementioned record 1 82 3_2. In the aforementioned 11) encapsulated program, due to the communication Record, IIOI, E01, E26, I 26, G03, F0 2 "internal packet output designation" G03 "(item 5) is other than 0, lp gel, capsule, formation and output of internal IP packets, in In the case where the aforementioned internal packet output is designated as 0, the '忒 IP packet is not encapsulated, and is forwarded to the extra communication circuit 1841 of the branch device.

The router 1809 receives the internal IP packet 1829-2, and sends the internal IP packet 1 829-3 obtained by copying the internal IP packet 1 829-2 to the output interface specified by the path table 1819-i &quot; G21 &quot; communication circuit 1 824_2 The branch device 1804 received the internal IP packet 1829-3, and the record in the third line of the address management table 1814_ "126, E26, E01, 101, G36, F16" confirmed that it contains the internal "packet 1 829-3 The three IP packets &quot; I26, E01, 101 &quot; are decapsulated by removing the IP header of the internal IP packet 1829-3, replying to the external 1? Packet, and sending it to the output interface contained in the record. F 丨 6, the designated communication circuit 1 8 26-6 is used as the external IP packet 1 829-4. The terminal 1810-16 receives the external IP packet 1 829-4. &Lt; <type of terminal >>

Terminals 181 0-1 to 1810-1 9 are data terminals with data transmission receiver capabilities, telephones with the function of transmitting and receiving digitized sound, and voice transmission terminals capable of transmitting digitized sound (that is, for wired sound transmission, )) ,,, sound receiving terminal that can receive digitized sound (ie, receiver for wired sound transmission), sound and video sending and receiving terminal or τν conference terminal with digitized sound and video transmitting and receiving function, can transmit digital Turn into

1245997 V. Description of the invention (233) Audio and video transmission terminal (also known as wired audio and video transmitter) for sound and moving images, an audio and video reception terminal (also known as cable TV receiver) that can receive digital audio and dynamic images. The terminal may be a combination of the media router described in the other embodiments and any one of a data terminal, an electric machine, or an audiovisual device connected to the media router. Since the transmission data or the trusted data of any of the aforementioned terminals is also stored in the payload portion of the IP packet, the multicast technology described below can be applied to all terminals. &lt; &lt; Multicast communication. Preparation for implementation >〉 The terminal 1 8 1 0-2 is a multicast transmission terminal, and the terminals 1810 -11, 1810-13, 1810 -14, 1810 -17, 1810-18 are In the case of multicast transmission of a trusted terminal, an inter-terminal communication connection control method between the sending terminal and the trusted terminal. Figure 2.6 shows the cost of the communication circuit between the network device and the router in the internal connection of each communication circuit in the IP transfer network with a positive integer. The communication cost between the network device 1801 and the router 1 807 is "Γ The communication fee between the branch device 1801 and the router 1 809 is “2”, the communication fee between the branch device 1802 and the router 1 807 is “2”, and the communication cost between the branch device 1802 and the router 1 809 is &quot; 1 ”, the communication cost between router 1 8 07 and router 1 808 is ΠΓ, the communication cost between router 1807 and router 1809 is“ 3 ”, and the communication cost between router 1 80 8 and router 1 80 9 is &quot; 3” The communication cost between the router 1 8 08 and the branch point device 1 80 3 is' Γ, and the communication cost between the router 1 8 08 and the branch point device 1 8 04 is “4”, and the router 1 80 9 and the branch point device 1 8 0 4 The communication fee between the routers is π1, and the communication fee between the router 1809 and the network device 1805 is "1".

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 237 1245997

V. Description of the Invention (234) In the interior of the IP forwarding network 1800, FIG. 296 includes, in addition to other routers or communication circuits, a router or a network device for calculating communication costs. The communication cost of the transmitting circuit is "2", the communication cost of the receiving circuit is π 3π, and the like is determined according to the difference between the sending direction and the receiving direction. In this embodiment, the communication costs of the sending circuit and the receiving circuit are set to the same value. 0 Figure 294's network resource management server 1 8 58 stores the functions of various resources such as routers or server communication circuits inside the 1-transmission network in the internal database. FIG. 297 is a table 1869 showing the communication cost of the communication circuit between the network device and the router stored in the network resource management server. The symbol "N18〇1" in the fee schedule 1 8 69 indicates the network device 18001, and "R1 8 07" means the router 1 8 07. The fee schedule 1 869 shows the communication circuit fee shown in FIG. 296 in the form of a list. For example, π 1 π in the 7th column of the row 1 86 9 indicates that the communication cost from the branch device 丨 8 〇 丨 to the router 丨 8 〇 7 is 1 and the "2" in the 2nd row and 9th column of the fee table 1869 The communication cost from the installation and installation of 1801 to the router 1809 is "2", and the "2Π" in the third row and column 7 of the fee table 1 869 indicates that the communication cost from the network device 1802 to the router 1807 is "2", "1" in the third row and the ninth column of the fee table 1 86 9 indicates that the communication fee from the network device 1802 to the router is π 1 ', which is expressed in the same manner below. Next, a procedure for multicast communication will be described with reference to FIGS. 998 to 300. The sender of the multicast data, etc. 1851 (Figure 294) applied to the receiver 1 8 5 3 'connect terminal 1 § 1 0-2 to the network device 1 8 〇1 as the transmission terminal of multicast data, etc. (Fig. 3 Step 1). Recipients 1 85 3 will

1245997

The transmission identification information and the payment method are input to the user service server 1855 (step Ms2) together with the transmission terminal situation 1870 (Fig. 298). Here, the "transport terminal information 1 870" includes information for connecting the multicast terminal 1810-2 to the branch terminal device 1801. The symbol &quot; N1 8 0 Γ in the sending terminal information 187〇 indicates the network device 丨 8 〇 丨, „τ 1 8 丨 〇-2, which indicates the terminal I, 8 If-2. The user service server 丨 855 will obtain The delivery identification information or delivery fee payment method is transmitted together with the delivery terminal information 丨 87 ° to the multicast management server 1 857 (step MS3), the multicast management server "'1 857 will receive the aforementioned Information is stored in this database (step μ§4). Next, examples of the users of the terminals 1810-11, i81〇-13, 181 ()-14, 1 8 1 0 -1 7, 1 8 1 0-18, etc. will receive multicast data. These users 1 852 apply to the recipient 1 854 for receiving multicast data, etc. (step MSI 1). The acceptor 1 854 inputs the user identification information or the payment method, and the trusted terminal information 1871 to the user / service server 1 856 (step MS12). Here, the trusted terminal information 1871 (Figure 2 99) includes a terminal that receives credit for multicast data—and 1810-13 connected to the network device 1 8 0 3 'connects the terminal 1 8 1 0 -1 4 to the network. | 詈 1w, the symbol "N1 8 03" in the trusted terminal information 18 71 indicates the network device 1803, and T1810-11 &quot; indicates the terminal 1810-11. The other methods are the same. The user service server 1 856 transmits the previously-obtained trusted identification information or payment method 'and the trusted terminal information 1871 to the multiple = send the management server 1 857 (step MS13), and sends the management feeder 1857 in multiple points. Keep the aforementioned information received in its database (step msh) / Dangdu

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 239 1245997

When the transmitting official server 1 8 57 receives both of steps MS4 and MS14, the multi-point shipping identification information ID-k is given to the transmitting terminal information 丨 8 7 〇 and the user's final information 1 8 7 1 and so on The information is sent to the tree construction server 8 5 9 (Fig. 294) (step MS18). The tree construction server 859 requests the resource management server 1858 for the fee list 1869 (step MS19), and obtains the fee list 1869 (step MS20). The tree construction server 1 8 59 calculates the module using the multicast tree structure, 1 859 -1 (Figure 294), and determines the multicast tree structure determined by the multicast identification ID — k (Figure 3 0). 1), that is, the use of multicast technology to determine the communication path of IP packet forwarding, to form the address management of the network device

The table additional information (Fig. 3 02 to Fig. 3 05) or the router's path table additional information (Fig. 306 to Fig. 308) are stored in the tree construction server 1859 (step MS21). &lt; <The structure of sending a tree structure through the multi-point transmission of the tree structure server is the next, the tree construction server 1 8 5 9 sends to the table management server 1 § 61 requests additional information for the address management table 1 8 11- 2 Added to the address management table

1811-1, adding route table additional information 1817-2 to route table 1817-1 (step MS22), the table management server 1861 reports the setting for the aforementioned request (step MS25), and the tree construction server 1859 reports to the table management server 1862 required to add address management table information 1 81 3-2 to the address management table 1813-1 and add address management table information 181 4-2 to the address management table 1814-1 to add path tables The information 1818-2 is added to the route table 1818-1 (step MS23). Then, the table management server 1 862 reports the setting of the aforementioned requirements (step MS26), and the tree construction server 1859 requests the table management server 1 8 6 3 to add the address management table additional information 1 81 5-2 to the respective positions. Site management

〇49-3793.PF; RAY.ptd Page 240 1245997 V. Description of the invention (237) Processing table 1815-1, adding path table additional information 1819j to path table 1819-1 (step MS24). Here, the table management server "is connected to a router located close to the network. The meaning of the address management table addition information or the path table addition information is explained in the flow of IP packet transfer. When the tree construction server 1 8 59 Confirm that at the end of steps MS25 to 仏 27, by adding multicast information to the address management table or router's path table in the network device, the end report of the tree structure construction required in step MS18 will be increased. Click the delivery management server 1 85 7 (step MS28). Through the above procedures,

The first half of the communication connection control between terminals for multicast communication, that is, the end of the construction of the tree structure. &lt; &lt; Multicast Transmission Tree Structure &gt; &gt;

The meaning of the aforementioned multicast tree structure shown in FIG. 301 is as follows. When the external IP packet sent by <缟 1 8 1 0 2 arrives at the network device 1 8 0 1, it becomes an internal IP packet. The internal IP packet diverges in two directions of router 1807 and router 18 0 9 and reaches the router. Inside the 1807, the packet passes through the router 1807, and then passes through the router 18 () 8 to reach the network device 18 () 3. The other inner 4IP packets reach the router 1809, and the router 1809 sends the aforementioned inner ^ packets in two directions, that is, it sends them to the network device 1804 and 1805. The branch device 1 803 decapsulates the received internal packet and returns it as an ip packet, and sends the returned external packet to the terminal 181011 and 1810 13 branch device 1 8 0 4 sends the received internal packet. Reverse the capsule and return to an external IP packet, and externalize the response to -14. The outlet device 1805 will receive the ^ and reply to an external packet, which will return 1245997. V. Description of the invention (238) 1810-17 and 1810- 18. As mentioned above, in multicast communication, the shape of the communication path seen as the ιρ packet is forwarded to the tree structure is called the multicast tree structure. The shape of the path &lt; &lt; Construction of tree structure >> In the previous steps 22 to 24, the communication system from the tree construction server 1 8 59 to the table server 1861 to 1 863 communicates with Tcp with high communication reliability) However, a plurality of table management servers are connected to most routers in the relay network, and share the address management table of the network device or the initial setting or record rewriting function of the router's path table. This embodiment 1 at least ( 3) called routing For example, in other embodiments, the number of routers in the IP forwarding network is set to be a majority, for example, the number of routers is 100,000, and the number of table management servers is also quite large. In this work, from the tree-building server to most table management servers, send additional information or routing table additional information, communication traffic is too contaminated: L 5 method. Therefore 'used to build from the tree The server forwards the records of the above 100,000 units: the address management table additional information or the path table additional information to the record of the route =, which is set to each router when the money transfer network is built :: 2 ί The communication record of each router All the 1P packets are forwarded to many glands ^-Large structure. In this way, it is possible to suppress the addition of information from the tree construction server to the majority of address management tables or the addition of path tables &lt; <address management table &gt; &gt; 309 to 311 are used to explain Nichiji. The address management table 1811 includes the address management additional information 1811-2 on the first frame, and the address management table

1245997 V. Description of Invention (239) The first line of 1813 contains address management additional information 1813_2, and the first line of address management table 1 8 1 4 contains address management additional information 1 8 1 4-2, The first line of the address management table 1815 contains address management additional information 1815-2. The internal point IP address "101" is granted to the terminal device 1 8 〇1 of the communication circuit 1 8 2 2 in Fig. 3 09, and the terminal 803 side of the network point device 1 826-1 to the communication circuit 1 826-1 in Fig. 311 Internal IP addresses "120" and "IM2" are granted, and network point devices 1 8 2 6-2 on the communication circuit 1 8 0 3 are granted internal IP addresses "122" and "I M2 ", The internal circuit IP address is granted to the terminal on the network device 1 8 04 side of the communication circuit 1 826-3" 124 "and" IM2 ", the terminal on the network side 1 8 0 5 side of the communication circuit 1826-4 The internal I p address &quot; I 2 7, and &quot; I 2 &quot;, the network point device of the communication circuit 1 8 2 6-5 and the internal I p address are granted to the terminal 1 8 0 5 I 28 "and" IM2Π. Here, the internal IP address &quot; m21, is an embodiment of an address for multicast transmission. &lt; &lt; Representation method of the address management table >〉 The address management table 18 11 to 1815 records the order of recording internal items. In the description of the prior art, the internal items of the record are passed through "E1, E 2, 11, I 2" ; The order indicates that, in this embodiment, the order change position of the items is γ1, E1, E2, 12 ", which is only different in terms of expression, and there is no difference in essence. The IP packet sent from the terminal 181 0-2 whose 1P address is "Ε01" 1 83 0 is transmitted to the branch device 1801 through the communication circuit 1 82 2 〇 The IP address 1 8 30 is the trusted end address "M2" Multicast external IP address as a specific value, such as "224 · 1 · 2 · 3", where "224" represents the multicast address specified by the IETF. Multicast sends an internal 1? Address The specific numerical value of "丨 M2", such as &quot; 225 1 2 · 3Π. · · M 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 243 1245997 V. Description of the invention (240) &lt; &lt; Route table of the router >〉 A description will be given with reference to FIG. 3, and a communication circuit including a routing table 1 8 1 7 to 1 8 1 9 is written to transmit and receive an IP packet. The second line of the routing table 1817 includes a routing table additional information 1817- 2. Include route table additional information 1818-2 on the second line of the route table 1818 'Include route table additional information 18 19-2 on the second line of the route table 1819. For example, on the second line of the route table 1817 In the line record, the 1? Packet with the IP address of the receiving end "IM2" is the communication circuit designated by the logical communication circuit name G12. 824_ In the record of the second line of the path table 1 8 1 8, the IP packet with the IP address of the receiving end as &quot; 丨 M2 &quot; is the communication circuit 825 designated by the logical communication circuit name G27. Also, the path The record in the second line of Table 1819 writes IM2, and, G21, G22, and IP packets of the recipient's IP address are forwarded to the communication circuit 1824-2 designated by the logical communication circuit name "1 and through the logic Communication circuit 1 824-3 designated by communication circuit name G22. &lt; &lt; Transfer of IP Packets &gt;> Next, the steps of a series of IP packet transfers from the transmission of an external IP packet from the terminal 18 1-2 will be described. 180-1 in FIG. 312 indicates the IP transfer network 1800. Transmission and reception of IP packets within. The terminal 1810-2 transmits the external IP packet 1 830 to the communication circuit 1 822 (step D1 in FIG. 312). When the network device 1801 receives the external IP packet 1830, it is authorized to enter the communication circuit 18 of the input packet 1830. 2 2 The internal part of the terminal (logic terminal) 丨 p address is &quot; 丨 〇 丨 ”, confirm that the external IP address of the trusted end of IP packet 1 830 is, M2”, retrieve the address management table 1 8 11 internal 'The beginning of the sender's internal 丨 p address is "丨 〇 丨", and then retrieve the record containing the external IP address of the trusted end as &quot; M2 ,, (the first packet packet connection

--- Page 244 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (241) Acceptance check), and then check whether the ip packet 1 830 of the sender outside the searched record contains 1 {) bit outside the sender Address, E〇1 f, (2 ιρ packet reception check) In this example, find &quot; ΠΠ, E〇1, M2, IM2, G02, G03, 0 "record, using the IP address" I 〇1 "and" 丨 M2 "inside this record to form the sending end 丨 p address is ,,,

The IP address of the receiving end is "IM2" (IP packet is encapsulated), and it is sent to the communication circuit 1 823M for the encapsulated logical communication electronic name G02 as the internal IP packet 1831-1 (Step D2 ) And send it to the communication circuit 1 82 3-2 for the encapsulated logical communication circuit name G03 as the internal IP packet 1831-2 (step D3). In the foregoing procedure, when the address 1 of the trusted end 1 of the external IP packet 1 830 is not included in the address management table an, the external lp packet 1830 is discarded (the first ip packet reception check). The aforementioned step of checking whether the sender's external 1 'address'' E0 1 &quot; in the IP packet 1830 in the previously retrieved record can be omitted. At this time, the aforementioned second IP packet receiving check is not performed.

The internal IP packet 1831-1 forwarded by the communication circuit 1823-1 reaches the router 1807. Since the address of the trusted end 1 of the internal IP packet is &quot; IM2 &quot;, according to the second line of the path table 1817, "IM2, G12", It is sent to the communication circuit 1 824-1 for the logical communication circuit name G12 as the internal IP packet 1831-3 (step D4). Here, the IP packet 1831-1 is copied to become the IP packet 1831-3. Internal The IP packet 1831-3 arrived at the router 1808. Because the IP address of the trusted end of the internal IP packet 1831-3 is, IM2 ", it is sent to the logical communication circuit name according to" IM2, G27n "in the second line of the path table 1818.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 245 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (242) The communication circuit 1825 for G27 is called as the internal IP packet 1831-4 (step D5). Here, the packet 18 3 b 3 It is copied into an IP packet 1831 -4. On the other hand, the internal IP packet 1831-2 transferred through the communication circuit 1823-2 reaches the router 1809. Because the trusted IP address of the internal IP packet 1831-2 is "IM2fl, according to the second line of the path table 1819, "2,621, G22" is sent to the communication circuit 1 824- $ for logical communication circuit name G2i as the internal IP packet 1831 -5 (step D7), and is sent to the logical communication circuit name G22 The communication circuit 1 824-3 is used as the internal IP packet 1831-6 (step D8). Here, the IP packet 丨 83 丨 -2 is copied to become the IP packet 183 1-5 and the IP packet 183 1-6. The router The route table 1817 = 1,81 9 and the route table of the outlet device may have a well-known mask, which is omitted in this example. The department ^ packet 1831-4 arrives at the outlet j via the communication circuit 1 825 in the address management table Record of the 1st line of 1813 "IM2, M2 II", I01, 〇, F10, F12 "4 items from the left" "IM2, M2, e〇i, M2" ^ Department 1P packet 1831-4 The first four addresses are "101, IM2, and E01. The internal 1P packet is 1831M, as explained in other embodiments." Reply external packet 183〇 1p. Responded

F1M is sent to the internal communication interface F1 of the first line of the record. F12 The designated communication circuit of F12, that is, output? F10I,] as an external IP packet 1832-1 (step 20: the communication of 疋 to the communication circuit 1 82 6 designated by the output interface F12, and send ⑽ 32-2 (step M3) 〇ip packet ⑻ ^ 到 2: As an external Π packet 1832-2 arrives at the terminal 1810-13.] 达 "端 1810-H '

1245997 V. Description of the invention (243) &quot; &quot; &quot; &quot; _ Similarly, the internal IP packet 1831-5 passes through the communication circuit 1 824-2 to ·, and is set to 1804. Due to the record in the first line of the address management table 1 814, E01, 101, 0, and F14 "4 items from the left" IM2, M2, g, 101 "and 4 of the internal IP packet 1831_5 Address &quot; I01, IM2, = consistent, internal IP packet 1831-5, as described in other embodiments, de-hop, implement inverse encapsulation, reply external IP packet 1830. Reply m /! ^ 述 / P The packet is sent to the output interface inside the record of the first line. If the communication circuit is designated, that is, the communication circuit 3 designated by the output interface F14, as an external 1p packet 1 832 -3 (step D1 4). IP packet «1832-3 Arrived at the terminal 181〇— η. # ° 卩 1p packet 1 832 6 arrived at the branch, pm 05 via the communication circuit 1 824-3. Due to the record in the first line of the address management table 1815" IM2, M2, 101, 〇, F17, F18 &quot; 4 items from left "" IM2, M2, E01, /, 4 addresses in the internal IP packet 183 and 6 "&quot; I01, IM2, e〇i, M2-to ' The internal IP packet 1831_6, as explained in other embodiments, removes ιρ ί ^ ^ reverse inverse encapsulation, and returns an external 1P packet 1830. The returned former FU / one line ^ is given to the first line The internal output interface F1 7 and 4 circuits, that is, the communication circuit 2 designated by the output interface F17, ^^ Wide packet 1 832_4 (step _7), the output interface 1M sundial communication circuit § circuit 1 82 6_5 As an external ιρ packet 1 832 5, step D18) ° IP packet 1832-4 arrives at terminal 1810-17, IP 1832-5 arrives at terminal 1810-18. &Lt; <Prevention of burst of ACK packet or NACK packet> Terminal 181 0-11 sends a message to receive external IP packet 1 832 1

1245997

V. Description of the invention (244) The terminal terminal 1810-2 reports that M2, M2, and M2 are recognized. The terminal 1 8 1 0 — 1 1 forms the external IP address of the sender and sends the external IP packet m3 to the general address “EO1”. Consider the case where the point device 1 803 receives the external H1 (step D21 in FIG. 312). When the packet in the network packet is sent as the end; when packet 1 833 is received, the received external 1p is received. The received external Ip = mu Z address &quot; M 2 &quot; is a multicast address, the aforementioned 1843. Forwarded to a cover? ^ Packet overflow communication circuit packet 5 packet communication circuit 1 843 of the aforementioned external 1p receiving external HP 2h Similarly, when the branch device 1 804 is connected from the terminal 181 0_14 (step D22), or the branch device 1 805 is from the terminal- 7 When receiving an external 1? Packet (step D23), the previously received external is directly transferred to the communication circuit 1844 or 1845. The external IP packet that was forwarded to the circuit overflowing the communication circuit 1844 or 1845 is discarded. Next, the specific method for the branch point device 1 033 to forward the received IP packet 1 8 33 to the overflowing communication circuit 1843. The branch point The device 丨 803 confirms that the internal IP address of the terminal (logical terminal) of the communication circuit 1826-1 that is input to the IP packet 1833 is "IM2", and the external IP address of the trusted end of the IP packet 1 833 &quot; E 0 Γ '' Retrieve the internal communication record of the address management table 1 81 3, and search for the internal IP address of the sender that starts with &quot; I jj 2 ,, and then the external IP address of the receiver π E 0 Γ ' Communication record, and check whether the sender's external I ρ address "2" in the IP packet 1 8 3 3 in the previously retrieved record is included. In this example, since the first to third address items of the address management table 1813 are all based on the above-mentioned 'all terminals that can inhibit the reception of multicast data are sent to the multicast data sender terminal and the IP packet of the terminal's individual report is sent. As a result, the ACK packet or NACK packet in the IP forwarding network can be prevented from being full.

For this reason, I chose this record, and because the 5th item (designation of the internal packet output) of this communication record is ".", I will not enter the correction package 18. The two items: directly forward the 1P packet 1 8 33 Give overflow communication circuit 1 843/1245997, description of the invention (245) ^ In the slave terminals 1810 ~ 13, 1810-14, 1810-17, 1810-18 will be = the IP address of the client "M2", the IP address of the recipient &quot; E〇1 &quot; In the case of an external seal, which is transmitted to the branch network device, it is transferred to the overflow communication circuit of each branch network device through the same procedure as described above. As described above, from the trusted terminal 18 1 0 1 1 to Send &gt; fs-end terminal 1 8 丨 〇2, even if sending ACK packet to confirm receipt of the aforementioned IP packet sent by the eve, since it does not pass through the network device 1803, it can prevent IP caused by ACK implosion. Congestion of the transfer network. The use of 1? Packets on the communication circuit of the packet overflow will be described later. The sequence of the day is 'determining the time of IP packet transfer in advance through such as multicast technology' even if the IP packet is not delivered at a predetermined time. In the case, NACK packets are also transmitted. &Lt; &lt; Wired Implementation of broadcasting> Terminal 1 81 0 _ 2 is a voice transmission terminal capable of transmitting digital audio, and terminals 1810-11, 1810-13, 1810-14, 1810-17, and 1810-18 are digital audio receiving terminals. The transmission of the IP packet 1 8 3 0 becomes a wired audio broadcast. In addition, the terminal 1 8 1 0 -2 is an audio dynamic image transmission terminal capable of transmitting digital audio dynamic images, and the terminals 1 8 1 〇-1 1, 1 8 1 0 -1 3, 1 8 1 0 _ 1 4, 1 8 1 0 -1 7, 1 8 1 0 _ 1 8 When it is a digital audio dynamic video receiving terminal, I p

Instead of the ACK packet, when the network device 1803 receives the NACK packet from the terminal, the NACK packet can be discarded according to the same principle, which can prevent the NACK packet from being full. Terminals 1810 —n to 1810 —19 transmit NACK packets

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 249 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (246) —-The transmission of packet 1 8 30 becomes a cable broadcast. &lt; &quot; Revision of the multicast tree structure &quot;, and the increase or decrease of the receiving terminal through the multicast data transmission, etc., the multicast tree structure can be corrected. The recipient 854 obtains and saves the correspondence between the contents of the multicast service and the multicast identification information ID ~ k (k = 1, 2, X X X) from the multicast management server 1 857 in advance. The user 1 85 2 requests the recipient 1 8 5 4 to use the terminal connected to the network device 丨 8 〇 4 丨 8 丨 ○ 5 to apply for the reception of the multipoint transmission service data (step MS31 in FIG. 313). Recipient 1 854 obtains trustee identification information, fee payment method, and terminal connection information from user 1 852 (using network device 1 804 and terminal Uio —; 5), and sends the content of the service from the multicast obtained by the user The specific multicast ID k is transmitted. The recipient 1 8 5 4 inputs the information to the user service server 1 856 (step MS32). Next, the user service server 1 8 5 6 transmits the above-obtained trustee identification If report, payment method, terminal connection information, or multicast identification information ID-k to the multicast management server 1 857 (step MS33), the multicast management server 1 857 stores the aforementioned trusted terminal information in its database (step MS34). The multicast management server 1 857 transmits the multicast identification information ID-k and the terminal-related information (use of the branch device 1 804 and the terminal 181 〇 — 15) to the tree construction server 1 8 5 9. The tree construction server 1 8 $ 9 requests the resource management server 1 858 to request the fee list (step MS36), and obtain the fee list (step MS37). The tree construction server 1 8 5 9 uses the multicast tree structure calculation module 1 859-1 to calculate the additional multicast identification information ID — k &amp; terminal related information

1245997 5. The multicast tree structure of the description of the invention (247) generates additional information to the management table of the branch device and routing table change information of the router (step MS38), and is stored in the tree construction server 1 859. Next, the tree construction server 1 859 uses the address management table 1814 that adds address management change information to the network device 1804, and requests the table management server 1 8 62 (step MS40), and the table management server 1 8 6 2 Report the setting of other requirements (step μ § 4 1), the tree building temple server 1 8 5 9 sends to the multicast management server 丨 8 5 7 reports the end of the change to the multicast tree structure (step MS42) . The multicast management server 1 85 7 ends the application procedure of the user 1 8 52 in step MS31, passes the user service ^ server 1 856 (step MS43), and passes the recipient 1 854 (step MS44) to the user. Report by 1 85 2 (step 1 ^ 45). The address management table 1 8 1 4 is set through the table management server 丨 8 6 2. The address management table change information adds the F14 ft of item 6 in the i-th row of the address management table 1814 to (F14, F15) n, and adds the terminal 18 10-15 which is connected to the logical communication circuit "F 15" As a trusted terminal. As a result, the record in the first line of the address management table 1814 was changed to &quot; IM2, M2, E (Π, 101, 0 '(F14, F15) n °

In the case where the terminal 18 10-11 abolishes the reception of the multicast data, the user 1 8 52 applies to the recipient to cancel the multicast data reception of the terminal 1810-11. As a result, from the address management table 1813 in FIG. 311 In the i-th line of "M2, M2, E01, I01, 〇, (F10, F12)", "6" (fi0, π2) π, specify the clear, and continue to the terminal 1810 — 丨! Logical communication circuit "F1〇 ,. As a result, the i-th row of the address official table 1813 is changed to, im2, m2, E01, 101, 〇, F12 &quot; 〇

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 251 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (248) This conventional example generates a path table change to the router 1807 without changing the path table from the router to 1809. Letter ^ == Changes to the address management table. Bits of the path table or network device &lt; &quot; Release of the multicast tree structure &quot; The manager 1 854 pre-manages the multicast management server M ”and saves the correspondence between the content of the multicast service and the multicast identification information 1,2, XXX). The delivery of multicast data, etc., goes through the aforementioned procedures. Release of the formed multipoint relay (step MS60 in FIG. 313). The recipient 1 853 inputs the release of the multicast tree structure to the user service server according to the transmission identification information and the multicast identification information 11} 4. 1 8 55 (step MS61). The user service server 1 8 55 sends the aforementioned transmission identification information together with the release of the multicast tree structure to the multicast management server 1 8 57 (step MS62). The delivery server 1 8 5 7 records the end of the multicast service in the data based on the received transmission identification information and the release information of the aforementioned multicast tree structure (including the multicast identification information ID-k). Database (step MS63). Second, the multicast management server 1 857 instructs the tree construction server 1 859 to allow identification information to be transmitted through the multicast ... ^ The release of the identified multicast tree structure (step MS64). 252 pages 2049-3 793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (249) The tree construction server 1 859 sends the identification information ID-k according to multiple points, and instructs the table management server 1 8 6 1 to 1 8 6 3 to install the network device. The additional information of the address management table 1811 -2, 1813-2, 1814-2, 1815-2 (Figure 302 to Figure 305) is cleared from the address management table 1811, 1813, 1814, 1815, and the path of the router The table's additional information 1817-2, 1818-2, and 1819-2 (Figures 306 to 308) are cleared from the route tables 1817, 1818, and 1819 (steps MS66 to MS68), and the report is received (steps MS70 to MS72). Then, The tree construction server 1 85 9 requests the resource management server 1 858 to set the multicast identification information I Dk and the multicast tree structure. The IP forwarding network 1 8 0 0 which provides multicast communication The resource is returned to the resource management server 1 858 (step MS73), and the report is received (step MS74). The tree construction server 1 859 reports to the multicast management server 1 85 7 the end of the procedure for releasing the multicast tree structure ( Step MS7 7). Also, the multicast management server 1 85 7 sends the multicast tree structure After the release procedure is completed, go through the user service server 1 85 5 (step MS78), and go through the steps of detailing the data to decorate the soil, and report to the data sender 1851. \ ((;; 〇)) The manager also 'omit step MS78 To MS80 is also a good choice. Through the above procedure, the second half of the inter-terminal communication connection control using the multicast technology, that is, the release of the multicast tree structure is ended. &lt; &lt; Use of Overflow Communication Circuits &gt;> A description will be given of how to use the overflow communication circuits 1843 to 1845. Figure 314 of 1801 to 1 805 series of network point devices, 1810-2 series of terminals to transmit multicast data '1810-11 to 1810-13 series of terminals to receive multicast data, 1880 to 1 882 series connected to output circuit 1 843 to 1845 Overflow communication circuit servo

1245997 V. Description of the invention (250) Devices 1 880 to 1 88 2. The "packet 1833" of Figure 311 sent from the terminal 1810 ~ 1 丨 is the IP address of the sender "M2", the 1 packet of the receiver 1 address, Ειι ,, through the address management table 1813 The record of the first line "IM2, M2, EOM, 101, 0, F10, F12 &quot; internal 5th item value &quot; 〇 &quot; is transferred to the overflow communication circuit 1843. The internal packet output designation (item 5) of the aforementioned record is &quot; 〇n. The aforementioned IP packet is transferred to the overflow communication circuit, and when the internal packet output is designated as &quot; (other than Γ, the IP packet is not transferred to the overflow communication circuit. Illustrated with reference to FIG. 315, an IP packet with an external IP address of &quot; M2 &quot; sent from the terminal 1810_u reaches the network point device 1803 (step κ, the aforementioned IP packet reaches the overflow through the overflow communication circuit 1 843) Server 1 880 (step MC2). When the sender 1? Address is "M2" ^ is sent from the terminal uio-u, the IP packet reaches the network point device 1803 \ MC3), the aforementioned IP packet passes The overflow communication circuit 1 843 reaches the overflow second circuit server 1 880 (step MC4). When the IP packet outside the sender's IP address is sent from the terminal 1810_13, the 1 packet is set to the set 1 803 (step MC5), The aforementioned IP packet passes through the overflow communication circuit 丨 "^ to the overflow communication circuit server 1 880 (step MC6). In this example, the overflow communication circuit server 188 receives the external address of the receiving terminal &quot; M2 &quot; 1? Address is more IP address = IP packets. 1810_Ui181013 transmitting terminal Ip ^ 5 messenger sending terminal address is described in the end of the IP packet, '

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p.254 Due to the decision rules, the terminal 1810_u is set to be outside the sender = that is, &quot; E20 &quot;, and the terminal 1810_12 is the external IP address of the sender &quot; ^ 广 = = mo -13 is the external IP address of the sender "E22", overflow communication circuit = 1245997 1245997

5. Description of the invention (251) to 1 882 can use the IP address of the terminal on the telecom terminal, and specify the external IP address of the terminal on the sender terminal. Therefore, when the transmitting terminal can ACK or NACK, the transmitting terminal can be specified. The overflow communication circuit 1 880 can sum up the information of the three parties obtained through the above method through the branch device 1 8 03 (step MD1), and then transfer to the internal network 1 8 00 and the branch device 1801 (step MD2). The transmission terminal 1810-2 for transmitting data is clicked (step MD3). In order to implement steps 〇1 to MD3, it is possible to forward IP packets between the overflow communication circuit server 188 and the terminal 1810_2, in the address management table 1811 in the branch point device 801 and the branch point device 1 80 3 Inside the address management table ι813, records of ° Ip encapsulation and reverse encapsulation are set. As a result of the above, the multicast data sending terminal 丨 8 丨 〇 _ 2 can know whether the terminal ^ 1810-11 to 1810-13 received the multicast data (delivery confirmation function). At this time, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of IP packets transmitted through the ACK packet or the NACK packet, etc., and increase the traffic in the IP transfer network 1800. From the overflow communication circuit server 1 880, use the multicast address "M2," 'Transfer IP packets to the terminals 1810-Π to 1810-13 (steps me 1 to ME4)' or "From the overflow communication circuit server 1 8 8 〇, using IP address "e 2 1,", to set a record containing the address for encapsulation on the address management table 1813, can send 1? Packets to the terminal 1810-12 (step 1 〇1, 〇2). Explained with reference to FIG. 3, 16, the overflow communication circuit server 丨 8 8 〇 when transmitting and receiving IP packets' can exchange information with the multicast transmission terminal 丨 8 丨 2 — (step MG1 To MG3). In addition, when the overflow communication circuit server 丨 881 transmits and receives IP packets, it can exchange information with the multicast transmission terminal 1810-2.

Page 255 1245997 V. Description of the invention (252)

(Steps MH1 to MH3), when the overflow communication circuit server 1 882 transmits data, it can exchange information with the multicast transmission terminal 1810_2 (steps to J 13). From this, the "overflow communication circuit server transmits and receives the multicast data receiving terminal of each continuous point device" packet 2 to ,: The data transmitting terminal 1810-2 must transmit and receive IP to all multicast points. Packets can reduce the workload of multicast data sending terminal & ^. In the case where terminal 181 0-11 requests not to receive the IP packets of the multicast data part, etc., the defective IP packet can be transmitted via overflow communication The server server &lt; <other embodiment of the address management table >> The address management table 1811 of FIG. 309 can also be implemented in the form of the address management 1811-5 of FIG. 317. The address is omitted in the embodiment. The second item of the management table i record (the external IP address on the sender side) forms the address management table and records of 1 8 11-5. For example, the address management table i 8 丨 work record "" 01, E01, E26 is omitted " , 126, G03, F02, and the second item &quot; E0] T ,; the record in the third line of the site management table 1811-5 becomes "101, E26, 126, G03, F02". The dot modification function when the second item is omitted is also described in this embodiment. ^ The address management table 1811 of FIG. 309 can also be implemented in the form of the address management table 1811-6 of FIG. 318. This example uses the &amp; mask technology of ιρ outlets. ^ In the corpse gelation, from the internal IP address of the terminal, I or the communication circuit 1 8 22, when the input external IP address of the receiving end is Π26 ", and the external IP address of the transmitting end is Ε〇 When the external IP packet of Γ is equivalent to the address management table! From 811_6

1245997 V. Description of the invention (253) The records of the first and third rows, the records about the external IP mask "Mt 2" and the above description: check the trusted end address &quot; E26 &quot; and ,,, The calculation result: The IP address “M2x” of the external ip position of the trusted end in the dagger is the same (the following is not the same as the record in the third line of the trusted client ’s external relations in the first line of the record. The trusted line is not consistent in this example. , There is an external part of the trusted end in the ip packet; p bit two ;, the act, whether the aforementioned outside is the result of the and 'calculation of the external end in the third line record, (6)). In this example, it is 1, 2 P / ^ 26x &quot;-the same (comparison of the following (7) below.), Β knows that the 1P address is also transmitted through

If C’M-t2 &quot; and &quot; Ε26 ”= &quot; Μ2χ &quot;) χ χ

If (&quot; M-t26 and &quot; Ε26 &quot; = &quot; Μ26 &quot;) χ χ χ (β

If (&quot; M-hOl &quot; and '· Ε〇1 = &quot; ΜΟΙχ &quot;) χ χ χ (7) Based on the above comparison results, select the internal record in the record in the third line &quot; 101 &quot; and &quot; 126 &quot; Part 1? Packet used for _I. The address management table 1811, which is used for encapsulation to form the internal map 309, is shown as tables 18U-7 and 18 &quot; _8 shown in Figure 319 and Figure 320, respectively, and can be implemented on this type of memory. Table. That is, the first record &quot; m, E01, M2, IM2, G02, G03, 0 &quot; of the address management table 1811 is divided into the record of the i-th row of the table 18n_7, "101, E01, M2, IM2 , MT-1, 〇 &quot;, and the record of the first line of table 18u_8 &quot; MT-i, G02, G03 &quot;. That is, divergences regarding multicast transmission are recorded in Table 1811-8. The information of the multicast service provider and the information of the multicast service purchaser are received by the user service server, so that

1245997 V. Description of the invention (254) ^ Multi = setting of sending tree structure. In addition, the tree-building temple server uses the communication circuit between 3 or routers to inquire the resource management server for the surname m 2 to continue the information or communication circuit cost, so as to send the tree shape using multiple points. Structure setting. The tree construction server will add information to the address management table in the network device or additional information to the routing table in the router, and notify the "table management server" to decide the multicast tree structure. And, we serve! 2? The multicast communication record is set on the route table. From the tree construction, the multicast communication record can be used to transfer the address management table additional information for the multicast service tree or the route table additional information to the table management server. By the way, ff pass ^ 1-way feeder and the terminal connected to the outlet device individually communicate with each other by 'pointing and transmitting data at multiple points' to achieve a high degree of reliability: the terminal receives digital sound .: and two = The audio video is duplicated to make the video. Furthermore, the U-Video terminal receives the digital audio dynamic IP shovel, the internal packet output of the official table is designated as &quot; 0 &quot;, and the P packet is forwarded to the overflow channel. During thunder, IP packets are not forwarded to 2. If the parameter is "Judgment value other than", "if there is a fixed value circuit. The internal packet output is specified to include a multicast IP address as t, which can be other The specific value of. Checking and discarding the IP packet, when it is possible to sort 1 packet at the U / transport terminal address, it is used as the address registration terminal and is sealed in the address management of the network device. Click on the sending address to register, and enter the outside of the input point device. 2020-3793-PF; RAY.ptd _ page 258 1245997 Description of the invention (255) The multicast address in the header of the packet is not When registered on the address management table, 'the network device can discard the IP packet to prevent it from being mixed into the IP forwarding network by discarding the IP packet. Similarly, as the second address registration check, it will send the end bit. When the address is registered on the address management table of the branch device, when the sender address in the header of the external packet that is input to the branch device is not registered on the address management table, the branch device discards the packet. It can prevent IP packets outside the registration from being mixed into the IP transfer network. By not registering the multicast address on the address management table of the network device on the Λ-recipient side, the I-packet recipients are sent from the multicast to the multiple Point sending IP packet sender's IP packet receiving acknowledgement ACK The packet cannot pass through the network device, which can prevent the congestion of the IP forwarding network caused by the fullness of the ACK packet or the fullness of the NACK packet. If the I ρ address of the router is used as the trusted end address, login is not allowed and the multicast table is not sent. Dangerous 丨 ρ packets such as rewriting are sent from the outside of the ρ transfer network to the router inside the IP transfer network, or registration of multiple addresses sent from the IP transfer network using the management server ’s IP address is not allowed. 〗 It is impossible for the outside of the ρ forwarding network to access the internal application management server of the ρ forwarding network to improve the security of the information. As the second address registration check, the sending end of the IP packet containing the multicast data is limited to suppress The occurrence of wrongdoing by wrongdoers. In addition, it is easy to specify the sending end of a packet when the wrongdoing is performed, which can improve the information security of the IP transfer network. 1 8 · Eighth Embodiment for Multicast Communication: This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 321 to 324. Set up branch devices 1901 to 1 905 and routers 1 907-1 to 1 907-4 inside the IP forwarding network 1 90 0

1245997 V. Description of Invention (256). The branch point device and router are connected directly or indirectly through the branch point device or router through the IP communication circuit. Terminals with IP packet sending and receiving functions 1 9 1 0-2 to 19 1 0-7 0 are connected to the outlet device via the IP communication circuit. 1 g 11 to 1 9 1 Address management table for 5 series outlets. 1 9 11 -3, 1 9 1 1 -4, 1 9 11-5, 1 9 1 2-3, 1 9 1 2-4, 1 91 2-5 series multicast service proxy server '1913-3 , 1913-4, 1913-5 series overflow communication circuit servo, 1 9 4 1 to 1 9 4 5 series overflow communication circuit. In this embodiment, in addition to the fixed IP address, the terminal or server also has a plurality of multicast IP addresses, exchanges IP packets, and can exchange information with each other. &lt; &lt; Transmission terminal and transmission transaction server &gt; &gt; Terminals 1910-2 and 1910-5 are transmission terminals that transmit multicast data in a multicast service. The terminals 1910106 and 1920-008 are transmission service servers for multipoint transmission services. The transmission server has a database or an information processing organization, and exchanges information with the multicast service agent server, and at the same time, it shares the information processing of the multicast transmission terminal. &lt; &lt; Designation of Root Source of Communication Records 〉〉

The fifth item of the communication record of the address management table is referred to as the output $ of the internal IP packet. It is determined that the value of the foregoing item is specified other than &quot; 0 ", and the value of &quot; 0 &quot; is not provided. , The sixth item of the address management table communication record, two = part IP, is specified at the output of the packet, and the value of the aforementioned item is not specified when it is set to 0 &quot; other than &quot; 〇 &quot;. For example, the relevant bit Address management table F3〇1 Communication record of the second one, IM2, M2, E02, I02, 0, (F1U right 'The output of the internal IP packet is designated as &quot; 0, which is also the name of the "1 source" The output of the external IP packet is specified as, FI 1 to F30,

Page 260 1245997

F91n 'also means the logical communication circuits fii to F30 and F91. Here, the logic communication circuits F11 to F30 are communication circuits 1960— 丨 丨 to ^ “-other, the communication circuit F91 is a communication circuit 1960_91. &Lt; <Overflow communication circuit >> The overflow communication circuit server is from The trusted terminal collects the IP packets such as ACK packets or NACK packets returned to the sending terminal via the overflow communication circuit, and forwards them to the multicast service proxy server with a different multicast address. &Lt; &lt; Multicast IP packets Forwarding 1 &gt; ° From the terminal 1 9 1 0-0 2 in Fig. 3 21, the external IP address "e 〇2" of the sender and the external IP address 1 930 of the external IP address "M2" of the receiver are Submit (step Q1 in Fig. 325) 'arrive at the outlet device 1 9 〇1, use the address management table 1 9 丨! The communication record of the first line of "102, E02, M2, IM2, XXX, 〇" forms internal IP packets 1931-1 and 1931-2, and the internal IP packets reach the router 1 9 07-1 (step Q2) and become internal The IP packet 1931-3 arrives at the network point device 1903 (step Q3). On the other hand, the internal IP packet 1931-12 arrives at router 1 907-2 (step Q4). In router 1907-2, the internal IP packet 1931-2 is duplicated and divided into two, and the internal IP packet 1931-4 arrives at the branch. ^ Set 1 904 (step Q5), the internal IP packets 193 to 5 reach the outlet device, 1 905 (step Q6). &amp; When the branch device 1 90 3 receives the internal IP packet 1931-3, it uses the communication record of the first line of the address management table 1913 &quot; IM2, M2, E02, I 〇2,], F11 to F30, F91 ", Encapsulate the internal IP packet 1931-3 in reverse IP, and reply to the external IP packet (the same content as the external IP packet 丨 93 丨 3). Repeatedly “reply the external IP packet according to item 6 of the aforementioned communication record. ',

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p.261 1245997

^ 11 to F3 0, F91 "'Send to the terminal to the agent agent feeder 191 &quot; (step_7, Q7x). Here and U, to / 910-30 in addition to being granted an external IP address &quot; E11 &quot; to &quot; E3〇 „

Uli and multicast address &quot; Mr. Multicast service proxy server M / with external IP address, E91 &quot;, and multicast address. Xidianfating service agent server 1911_3 and terminal 1910ii 1910-30 receive the data of the multicast service at about the same time (the characteristics of this embodiment. J is-when the network device 1 904 receives the internal 1 {) packet 1931_4 ,

The communication record of the first line of the address management table 1914 "IM2, M2, E02, ι〇2〇, F31 to F50, F93", encapsulate the internal IP packet 193, 4 reverse 1? The IP packet sends the external IP packet of the aforementioned reply to the terminal 1910-31 to 1910-50 and the multicast service proxy server 1911_4 (steps Q8 and Q8x). Here, the terminals 1910_31 to 1910_50, in addition to the IP addresses &quot; E31 &quot; to &quot; E5〇 &quot; of the fisheries department, are also granted multicast addresses &quot; M2 :. Evening point delivery service proxy server 1 9 11-4 was granted an external IP address &quot; E 9 3 &quot; &quot; multicast address &quot; M2ff.

μ When the branch device 1 90 5 receives the internal IP packet 1931-5, the communication record of the first line of the address management table 1915 is used. "IM2, μ, e〇2, 102, 0, F51 to F70, F95 ", Encapsulate the internal IP packet 1931-5 with reverse lp, = return to the external IP packet. Then, send the returned external IP packet to the terminal, 1910-51 to 1910-70 and the multicast service proxy feeder. Μ &quot; 5 (steps Q9, Q9x). Here, the terminals 1910-51 to 1910-70 are also granted multicast addresses in addition to the external IP addresses &quot; E51 &quot; to &quot; E70 ,. site"

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 262 1245997

&lt; 〈Send IP packet through a trusted terminal 丨 〉〉 Terminals 191G-U to 191HQ will normally receive each ACK packet to the ACK terminal of the terminal, and notify the sending terminal of the NACK packet if it is not received properly, and others, for example, to answer The enquired 1 {) packet is transmitted to the sending end terminal 1910—02 of the IP address of the crotch, and the procedure description is as follows. However, the sending address is a multicast IP address &quot; M2, &quot;, IP address, &quot; E02, &quot; as an example. The person 丨 〇 The terminals 1910-11 to 1910_30 form a packet transmitted to the terminal ^ "(^ Q10) 'Send to the outlet device (step Qu). When the outlet device 1 903 receives an external IP packet, the outlet device corresponds to the aforementioned The input address of the external IP packet address management table 1913! The communication records of "IM2, M2, E02, I02, 0, F11 to F3〇, F91" are specified and not specified at the output of the inner packet, that is, The fifth item of the communication record is &quot; 〇 &quot;, the aforementioned IP packet is directly transferred to the packet overflow output circuit 943 (step Q12). &Lt; &lt; Function of the overflow communication circuit server J &gt; The server 1913-3 received the IP packet 1 946-1 from the overflow communication circuit 1 943 (Figure 328) (step MPS1 of Figure 327), and confirmed that the IP address of the sender of the external IP packet 1946-1 was "M2" (step Mps2). Then, the form is sent to the processing based on the multicast address &quot; M2, the multicast service proxy server of the specific multicast service 191 丨 3 3 IP packets 1 94 6-2 and sends the aforementioned IP Packet (step MPS3). Here, the IP address of the sending end of the IP packet 1 946-2 is the IP address “E9〇” of the overflow communication circuit server 丨 913_3, and the recipient

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 263 1245997 5. Description of the invention (260) --- The end IP address is the "address" of the multicast service proxy server 1911-3. 1 P packet 1 9 4 6 — 2 is sent from the overflow communication circuit server 1 9 1 3-3 (step Q1 3 in Fig. 3 25), and reaches the multicast service agent feeder 1911-3 through the network device 1903 (step Q14). At the time, the communication record "I90, e90, E91, I91, χ χ χ, F90" in the 12th line of the address management table 1913 and the communication record in the 10th line are used, I91, Ε9ι, Ε9〇, ΐ9〇 , Χ χχ, F 9 1π ° The multicast service proxy server 1911_3 requests the retransmission of multicast data when the previously received 1 {) packet is a NACK packet. The multicast service, generation, feeder 1911 3 Receive the multicast data distinguished through the IP address M2 in the previous step q7x in advance. This multicast data can be used for the aforementioned re-transportation requirements. The multicast service proxy server 丨 9 丨 丨 3 will be required The retransmitted multicast data is retransmitted to the network device 1903 (step Q1 5), and the multicast data reaches the terminal 191. — 丨 丨 to ““ —30 (Step Q16). At this time, 'Use the communication record of the third line of the address management table 1 9 丨 3' ”9 丨, E9 1, M2, IM2, XXX, F91” and Communication record of the second line "IM2, M2, E91, I91, 〇, F11 to F30 &quot; 〇 &lt; <function of multicast service proxy server 丨 &gt; &gt; multicast service proxy server 丨 9 丨 丨_ 3 Check the contents of the received 丨 p packet 1 94 6-2 'to form an IP packet, which stores information indicating that the ACk ^ packets that have been confirmed by the trust are collected in a list or the like, or that indicates the notification of receiving a bad notification received from the terminal. The NACK packet is collected in the information such as the list, the number of terminals, and the report, etc., and sent to the sending terminal 191 〇_〇2, or the ιρ packet received from the sending terminal 1910-02 (Figure 325) step

1245997 V. Description of the invention (261) Here, the IP address of the aforementioned IP packet is the external IP address of the server 191-3 of the multicast service "E91", and the external 1 P bit of the transmitting terminal y 〇2 Address 11 Ε〇2π, using the 7th line of the address management table 1 91 3 = communication record "Ι91, Ε91, Ε〇2, ΙΟ2, χ χ χ, F9i &quot; and address official table 1911 2 Communication records &quot; I〇2, E〇2, E91, I91, xxx, F02 to F3 0n 0 &lt; &lt; Ip packet 2 sent through a trusted terminal 2> &gt; ^ 舳 1 9 1 0 31 to 1 9 1 〇- 50 0 Receive multicast data in step Q 8 = 91 0-31 to 19 10-50 form the IP packet for confirming the trusted IP address (/ 詈 of the network of the network 詈 ΓΙ / sent to the network device 1 904 (step Q2i ). When \ ^ 2 邛 1 p packet, due to the communication record corresponding to the first line of the official table 1914 of the aforementioned external IP packet, IM2, M2, E〇2, 102, iF31 / F50, F93 ) &quot; The designation of the internal IP packet output does not refer to the ambiguity: the nail item recorded in the letter record is "the external packet will not be blocked). It is encapsulated and directly transferred to the packet overflow output circuit 1 944 (step Q22 <&lt; overflow communication circuit server 2 &gt; &gt; receiving outside IP pass through% circuit ^ server 1913-4 series from overflow communication The circuit 1 944 is connected, and the stubborn mountain endures the sender 1 p address of the external 1 P packet as &quot; M2 &quot;. Sending service 'of: Point: f based on the multicast address, M2, 'Specific multi-point service, multi-point shipping service agent server i9n-4 inspects the packet, and sends the server from the circuit 191-4-1 to the multi-point sending service agent. Step 2 of the thunder government 5 . In this example t, it is characterized by overflow communication circuit server 1913-4 and multicast service proxy server

1245997 V. Description of the invention (262)

1 911-4 are connected by a communication circuit 1 91 4 — 丨. << Function of Multicast Service Agent Server 2 &gt; &gt; The multicast service agent server 1911_4 receives the multicast data before the foregoing. Multicast service agent servo =; China Affairs. Multicast data requested for retransmission is then transmitted to the network point (step Q25), and the multicast data arrives at the terminals 1910_31 to ΐ9ι〇_5〇 = (step Q26). At this time, the third line of the address management table 1914, ^^, F93 &quot; and the second line, IM2, M2, E93, 193, 〇, F3 ^ F5〇 "are used. 〇Record multicast service proxy server 1911 —4 Check the content of the received ιρ packet to form a 1 packet that stores ACK packet collection information, NACK packet collection information, and terminal individual collection information, and sends it to the sender terminal 1910-02, or from the sender terminal 191. — 〇2 Receive the returned IP packet (steps Q4 5 to Q48 in FIG. 325). Here, the communication record of line 7 of the address management table 1914 is used. ”193, EI93, EO2, IO2, χ χ χ, ρ93 "and the communication record of the third line of the address official form 191 1 1 &quot; 丨 〇2, E 0 2, E 9 3, 193, χ χ χ, F021 丨. 〈〈 Trusted terminal Send IP packet 3 &gt; &gt; Terminals 1910-51 to 1910-70 receive the multicast data in step Q 9. The terminals 1910-51 to 1910-70 generate IP packets to confirm the trust etc. (step Q30 in Figure 325) And sends it to the branch office device 1905 (step q3i). The branch office device 905 forwards the aforementioned external jp packet to the packet overflow output circuit 19. 45 (Step Q32). The overflow circuit communication server 1913-5 receives the external I p packet from the overflow communication circuit 1 9 4 5 and the aforementioned p packet passes the communication circuit.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 266 1245997 V. Description of the invention (263) Route 1915-1 is sent to the multicast service proxy server 1911-5 (step Q34 in Figure 325). The multicast service proxy server 1 9 11-5 receives the multicast data first in the previous step Q9 X. Multicast service proxy server 丨 9 丨 丨 -5 Retransmit the multicast data required for retransmission to the network device 1905 (step Q35) 'The multicast data arrives at the terminals 191051 to 19101 7〇 (Step Q36) 〇Multicast server 19 U-5 checks the contents of the received ιρ packet 'forms an ip packet storing ACK packet collection information and sends it to the sending terminal 1910-〇 2, or receive the returned IP packet from the sender terminal 1910-02 (steps Q4 9 to Q52 in Figure 3 25). The multicast service proxy server 1911-5 directly transmits and receives IP packets to and from the terminal 1910-70 to exchange information (steps Q38 and Q39). At this time, the communication record of the ninth line of the address management table 1915 "I95, E95, E70, I70, χ χ χ, F95 &quot; the communication record of the tenth line" I70, E70, E95, I95, χ χ χ, F7〇r. In this example, it is characterized in that the multicast service proxy server 1 g 1 1-5 provides a service for directly communicating with the terminals 1910-70. ', &Lt; &lt; Multicast IP address &quot; M5 &quot; Packet Forwarding &gt; &gt; = Terminal 1910-05 in Figure 322 sends out the sender's external ^ address &quot; e〇5 &quot; 詈 = Γ, 1 section Γ The external 1p packet 1 932 of the spring address &quot; M5 &quot; is encapsulated by 1? Via the branch device 1 90 2 and becomes the internal 115 packets 1 933_1 and 1933-2, respectively via the routers 1 9 07-3 and 1907 — 4. Here, the internal bag is reverse-encapsulated and set to 1 903 to 1905 91 51Qln Qn, which is transmitted to the terminal 191 0-21 to 191〇-3 () and terminal 191 () _ 41 To 191 () _ 5 {),

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p. 267 1245997

1910-70. The foregoing procedure is shown in Figure 326, and the first point of FIG. 3 is to replace the sending terminal 1910_02, and the main terminal is the sending terminal, instead of the routers 1907-1 and 1907-2. -4. The change in the system of forwarding IP packets is as described above. As mentioned above, the plural trusted side connected to the branch device has its own external address, and it has more than one% of the services except knife services. One or more multicast transmissions &lt; &lt; transmission transaction server &gt; &gt; Furthermore, the main second point is that the multicast service agents 1912-3 to 191 2-5 collect the aforementioned ACK information ip packets, Nack It can send IP packets, 1-packets containing the aggregated information of individual terminals, and send them to the monthly transaction server 191 0-08. At the same time, it can receive data sent from the transmission transaction server 1910-08. The transmission transaction server 1910_08 and the transmission terminal 1910-05 also transmit and receive IP packets to exchange information (step R55 in FIG. 326). The transmission and reception of IP packets between the multicast service proxy server 1912-3 (IP address "E92") and the transmission transaction server 1910-08 (IP address "E08") uses an address management table The communication record of the fifth line of 1912 "108, E08, E92, 192, xxx, F08n and the communication record of the eighth line of the address management table 1 913" "192, E92, E08, I08, x XX, F92". The multicast service proxy server 1 9 1 2-4 (IP address π E 9 4u) and the transmission transaction server 1 9 1 0-0. The transmission and reception of IP packets are performed using the address management table 1 9 1 The communication record of the 6th line of 2II08, E08, E94, I94, XXX, F08, and the address

2049-3793-PF ϊ RAY.ptd Page 268 1245997 V. Description of the invention (265) Communication record in line 8 of management table 1914 "I94, E94, E08, 108, XXX, F 9 4 π 〇 Multipoint transmission service The proxy server 19 12-5 (IP address &quot; E96 &quot;) and the transmission service server server IP packet between 1 9 1 0-0 8 are transmitted using the 7th line of the address management table 1912 Record, communication records of 108, E08, E96, 196, XXX, F0 8n and the 8th row of the address management table 915, "196, E96, E08, I08, XXX, F96n. The transmission and reception of IP packets between the transmission server 1910-08CIP address π E08 ”and the transmission terminal 191 〇-〇5 (IP address &quot; E05 ,,) uses the 8th address management table 1 91 2 OK

4 Lu records Π08, E08, E05, 105, F08n, and the ninth line of communication 4 Lu Geji 105, E05, E08, I08, XXX, F05n, &lt; overflow communication circuit controller It is the same as the multicast service proxy server 〉〉 overflow, circuit server, and multicast service proxy feeder b, and the multicast IP address fl Μ 2 &quot; example. When the overflow communication circuit 1913-3 is inputting an IP packet from the overflow communication circuit 1943 (step MPS1 in FIG. 327), check that the multicast IP address of the IP packet is &quot; M2 "or, M5" Special ( Step MPS2) 'distribute to the multicast service agent feeder igii-g and the multicast service agent server 1912-3 (step MPS3). &lt; <Initial Setting and Cancellation of Multicast IP Addresses >>

The administrator of the IP transfer network 1 9 00 has the authority to rewrite the address management table of the network point device 1 9 11 to 1 9 1 5. On the address management table 1911 in the network device 1910, a communication record π I 07, E07, M7, IM7, ', 0 "used by the multicast service terminal 1910-7 for credit is added. (However, "M7" is a multicast IP address), the multicast address,

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 269 1245997 V. Description of the invention (266) '---- The path information of M7 is added to the path table of router 1907- 丨 to i9〇7-4 at the outlet Add multiple points to the address management table 19 丨 3 in the device 1 903, and serve the credit-receiving terminals. 910 —n to 1910-20, the communication records, | 7, M7, E07, 107, 0, F11 to F20, F91-1 ". However,

Mr ^ 疋 is the same multicast address as "M7", pi 1 to F20 are connected to the end ^ 1910-11 to 1910-2 output circuit interface, F91-1 is connected to the new a and 疋The output circuit interface of the multi-point sending service proxy server. 丨 9 〇 Use the official system to send the multi-point sending IP address "M7" on the terminal 1 91 〇 j to 1910-20. »Similarly, to the address management table 1914 in the branch point device 1 904, the communication records used by the multicast service receiving terminal 丨 9 丨 〇_ 31 to 1 9 1 0-4 0 are added, 'IM7, M7, E07, I〇7, 0, F31 to F40, and P9 3-Γ, add the multicast service receiving terminal 1 9 1 to the address management table 1915 in the branch device 1 90 5 Communication records used from 1 91 0 to 60 &quot; IM7, M7, E07, I07, 0, F51 to F60, F95-ln. Through the above procedures, terminals 1910-11 to 1910-20, terminals 1910-31 to 1910-40, and terminals 1910-51 to 1910-60 accepted the new multicast service. Terminal 1 91 0_3 0 accepts multicast IP services that can be identified by the IP address &quot; M5 &quot;, and uses the communication record of line 4 of the address management table 19 13 &quot; IM5, M5, E05, I05, 0, (F21 to F30, F92) "Item 6," (F21 to F3 0, F92) n and the communication record of line 5 of the address management table 191 3 "1 ^« 5, 1 «5, £ 92 , 192, 0, (? 21 to? 30), within the 6th item &quot; (F21 to F30). Since the record nF30 "corresponds to the terminal 1910-30, the record is changed. That is, as the communication record 2049-3793-PF in the fourth row of the address management table 1 9 1 3; RAY.ptd page 270 1245997 5 , Description of the invention (267) '' IM5, M5, E05, 105, 0, (F2 1 to F2 9, F92), and the 4th record of the 5th line '· IM5, M5, E92, I92, 0, (F21 to F29) 11. By changing the above communication records, the terminal 丨 9 丨 〇_3 〇 can cancel the multicast service that can be identified by multicast IP address π M5 ". &Lt; <continued delivery A branch point device of the transaction server; &gt;; &gt; In the foregoing embodiment, the transmission terminal 1 9 1 0-〇5 and the transmission transaction server 19 1 0-0 8 are connected to the same branch point device 1 9 〇2 The terminal 1 91 〇-〇7 (IP address &quot; E07π) connected to the network point device 1 901 is reset to the transmission transaction server, and the terminal 1 9 1 〇-〇8 (IP address &quot; E08), Do n’t need to send mail service feeder 'In the state where the sending terminal 1910_〇5 is connected to the outlet device 1902', the sending mail server 191 0 — 07 can also be connected Continue to the network point device 19 (Π. That is, 'the transmission terminal and the transmission transaction server can be connected to different network point devices. At this time,' the transmission transaction server 丨 91 〇-〇7, the multicast service agent transmitting and receiving IP packets The server 1 912-3 to 1912-5 and the transmission terminal 1910-05 changed the address of the transmission transaction server to &quot; E〇7 &quot;. Furthermore, the record in the eighth line of the address management table 1913, 1 192, E92, E08, 108, XXX, F92 "changed to" i92, E92, E07, I07, xxx, F92 "'The record in the 8th row of the address management table 19-14, 194, E94 , E08, 108, xxx, F94 &quot; changed to "I94, E94, e07, i07, XXX, F941 ', the record in the eighth line of the address management table 1915 &quot; 196, E96, E08, 1〇 8, X χ χ, F96 "was changed to" ι96, E96, E07, 107, xxx, F96 丨 丨. And 'the transmission transaction server 1910-07 and the transmission terminal 1910105 1245997 5. Description of the invention (268) Communication record of delivery π I 07, E07, E05, 105, X xx, FQ7n. Transaction server 1910-07 and multicast service agent Server communication records between g and 1912-5 "I07, E07, E92, 192, ^ x 〇3 F07, Ι07, Ε07, Ε94, Ι94, χχχ, f〇7 ,," 1〇E07, E96, 196, χ χ x, F07 ”are added to the address management table ΐ9ι ′. Further, a record "105, E05, E07, 107, X X X, F05" for address management between the end of transmission 1910-05 and the transmission transaction server 1910-7 is added to the address management table 1912. In addition, the communication record between internal terminal 19 10-08 and transmission terminal 191 〇—〇5 &quot; ι〇8 / except E08 / E05, I05, XX x, F08 '' or with the multicast service proxy server 1912-3 Communication records from 1912-5 "I08, E08, E92, ° I92, xxx, F08n, etc. &lt; &lt; Integration of transmission terminal and transmission transaction server &quot; Furthermore, the transmission terminal 1910-02 is given the same IP as the transmission transaction server 1910-16, and the function of the transmission transaction server 1910-6 can be provided. It is integrated into the function of the transmission terminal 1910-2. Here, the function of the transmission server 1910-06 and the function of the transmission terminal 1910-02 are distinguished by the TCP port number or the UDP port number. &lt; &lt; Change of overflow communication circuit &gt; &gt; The overflow communication circuit server 1913-5 of FIG. 324 distinguishes the "multicast transmission of the IP packet received from the overflow communication circuit 1 945" into the communication circuit 1915 The transmission means 1 and 1915-2 are changed as this means, and the method for setting the overflow IP packet classification function unit will be described. Figure 32 9 of 1 90 5-1 series of network device, 1915-1 series of address management table, 1 92 5 — 丨 External

Page 272 1245997 V. Description of the invention (269) Circuit interface, 1911-5X is a multi-point sending IP address with the same function as 19 U-5 in Figure 32 "M2 π specific multicast service proxy server 19K-5 × is a multicast service proxy server with the same function as that shown in Figure 324-1912-5. 1913-And the overflow communication circuit server 丨 91 3-5 similar function of the overflow packet classification function. If the overflow IP packet classification function unit receives a 'part 1ρ packet that sends a multicast address from the sending end, when the specified value of the overflow parameter of the communication record is determined, the sending end judges the multicast address of the IP address via or 1915-2 × Forwarding to the multicast service agent feeding service ^ Road 1915 &lt; <Implementation of Cable Broadcasting or Media Distribution Communication System &gt; &gt; The multicast data contains digital audio, fax data, and can be: status Like any kind of multicast data. When the terminal 1910-〇 / is a voice transmission terminal capable of transmitting digital sound, and the terminal ^ 丨 ❶- 丨 工 到 i 士 Mi — 70 * is a digital voice receiving terminal, the transmission of IP packet 1 930 becomes broadcast. Transmission, can realize the wired sound broadcast communication system using Ip transfer. In addition, the terminal 1910-02 is a digital audio and video transmission terminal capable of transmitting digital and shirt-like images, and the terminals i 9 丨 0-1 i to 1910-1 70 are digital audio and video transmission terminals at the end, ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ The same method can be used to realize a wired facsimile communication system that uses transmission and reception to digitize still to 1 / transfer of images. Digitized voice trusted terminal or voice dynamics. Trusted data (broadcast content) with multi-point transmission data. II = 1245997 V. IP packet of individual information at the end of the invention description (270) is transmitted to the sending terminal 1910102. The multipoint delivery proxy server receives packets from a plurality of trusted terminals, and can transmit information such as the integrated list of information contained in the packet iU 3 or the aggregated information of short texts to the delivery terminal or the delivery transaction server. In addition, the sender can send a packet containing the received information to the receiver]. The packet: 2 s flat IP packet is returned to the multicast service proxy server code. Β can now send multicast data. The cable broadcast communication system and system that exchange data with multiple points. As described above, the multi-point transmission server 2 mediates the multi-point transmission data sending side and the multi-point transmission information exchange. The media to be transmitted is books or newspapers A, music or :: Send through the letter system can realize the digital storage of information on the sound and moving pictures of books as a multicast service. Temple &lt; &lt; Summary 〉〉 The IP communication circuit is connected to the external address of L in the copper paper trap. In addition to the settable terminal, in addition to the fixed-point multi-point reverse transmission ## | There are multiple sending terminals that send IP addresses and send # points to send data. And, many of them are transferred and sent to multiple terminals by sending = sending services in the second network. The receiving-side terminal relies on relying ^ The J 2J user who resets or cancels the multicast service, can send the service agent to the server at any time, and can continue to the second point to send the service to the multicast service agent server $ 可 # Trunk #. # Τ &lt; Continue to Multipoint Delivery Service Agent

1245997 V. Description of the invention (271) More than one terminal of the network device connected by the server collects the packet information, hidden packets, and individual terminals: the end packet, and transmits it to the multicast service. Send to 仏, 钿, 钿, or 彳 5 transaction servers. Multicast service transmission, reception confirmation notification (ACK packet) of transmission data, poor reception notification. Xi (NACK packets), etc., can provide high-quality services. By suppressing ACK packets or NACK packets or individual reports of the recipients, the communication flow within the network can be increased. In addition, it is possible to prevent unauthorised transfer; ^ == 发送 'to send data. It is easy to implement the use of multiple devices to communicate and receive IP packets to exchange information. Multicast service agent, the multicast data transmitted from the sending terminal is stored in the department's service, and the point service service server uses the multicast function of the branch device,

The specific device on end D of the branch device connected by the feeder is used to exchange information: In the communication record of the method of “encoding ... the branch device miP encapsulation and reverse IP encapsulation. There are private internal IP packet output Designated capsule

When the specified value is specified at the output of the internal IP packet, then = line = work,: Second, the output of this IP to the external IP packet exceeds the communication power. Via the J circuit server, the external IP packet exceeds the communication circuit.

Hi Page 275 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (272) Externalized IP books f-n r-n i are served by the network circuit of the outlet. When the function value is included, when the value is reached, the IP sealing device forwards to the most: Send = = Receive the heart report, and then pass the connection. The communication circuit including the IP packet server will be transferred at the same time. Send the service to the external IP packet = to: == server. Inside the communication record, there is a designated outer === to perform reverse IP encapsulation, and no external IP packet is specified = capsuled, and the internal IP packet is output ‘inner packet exceeds the communication circuit. 19. 9th embodiment for performing multicast communication: The flP transfer network 2000 has internally installed network point devices 2000 to 2005 and routing nodes 2007 to 20 09. The branch point device and the router are connected directly or indirectly through the branch point device or router through the IP communication circuit. 2 〇 丨 1 to 2 〇 j 5 address management table of the branch device, register the IP address of the terminal connected to the branch device via the communication circuit. Path table for 2 0 16 to 20 20 series network point devices, path table for 2021 to 2023 series routers. The terminals 2025 to 2039 have the function of sending and receiving IP packets, and are connected to the outlet device through the IP communication circuit. 2045 to 2049 are out of communication circuits that output unscheduled IP packets. 2050 Multipoint · Delivery service proxy server. The terminal 2026 is a transmission terminal that transmits multicast data in a multicast service. The multicast data includes any kind of multicast data such as digitized audio, fax data, still images, and moving images. The terminal 2 0 7 is a transmission transaction server for multicast service.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 276 1245997 V. Description of the invention (273) &lt; &lt; Transfer of IP packet >〉 Next, we will explain a series of transmissions from the external IP packet 2040 via the transmission terminal 2026. IP packet forwarding steps. Terminal 2026 sends the external address E02 of the sender and the external 11} of the external IP address of the sender to the external 11} packet 2404 to the communication circuit 2 05 1 (step DD1 in Figure 3 33). The device 2000 checks whether the IP address of the sender of the received IP packet 2040 "E02" is registered on the address management table 2011 (IP packet reception check). In this example, since the communication circuit 205J The logical communication circuit name &quot; F02, and IP address &quot; E02 &quot; are registered as the record "", m E02 "in the second line of the address management table 2011, and the IP packet 2040 is received. In In the case of no login, the received IP packet is directly forwarded to the packet exceeding the communication circuit 2045, and the IP packet is discarded. ^ Second, the record of the first line of the path table 2016 "Msk—m2, M2, G0 2, G0 3n, check the first item "Msk — m2" of the record and the "and IP address of the trusted IP address" M2 "of the IP packet 2040, and calculate the result / consistent with the second item" M2 "of the previous record (the following (Eq. (8)). In this example, it is consistent. Here, the value of '' Msk-m2, '' is 255.255.255.255.

If (n Msk-ra2n) and MM2M = n M2, f) · · (8) Secondly, regarding the third item of the record, GO 2 and G03, send the IP packet 2041 to the logical communication. The circuit name is &quot; The communication circuit 2053 of step G2 (step DD2), and sends the IP packet 2042 to the communication circuit 2054 of the logical communication circuit name G03 (step DD3). IP packets 2041 and 204 2 are generated by duplicating IP packets 2040 at the same time. In the foregoing procedure, when the IP address of the trusted end of the ip packet Mα is not included in the path table 206, the external IP packet

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 277 1245997 Description of the invention (274) 2 040 is discarded (register check of multicast address). 1? Packet 2 04 1 arrives at router 2007, according to the record "M2, G12, 'in the second line of the path table 2021, it is sent to the communication circuit 2055 with the logical communication circuit name G1 2 as the IP packet 2043 (step DD4). The IP packet 2043 arrives at the router 2 008, and is sent to the logical communication circuit according to the record "M2, G27n" of the second line of the path table 2022. What is the name? The communication circuit 2058 is used as the IP packet 20 34 (step DD5). On the other hand, the IP packet 2042 sent to the communication circuit 2054 reaches the router 2009. According to &quot; M2, G21, G22 &quot; in the second line of the path table 2023, the IP packet 20 35 is sent to the logical m communication circuit name 121 " Communication circuit 2056 (step DD6), and sends an IP packet 2036 to the communication circuit name "G22" of the logical communication circuit 2057 (step DD7). IP packets 2035 and 2036 are generated by duplicating IP packets 2042 at the same time. The routing tables 2021 to 2023 of the router may have the same mask as the routing table 2 016 of the branch point device, and the description is omitted because it is well known. The IP packet 2 0 3 4 passes through the communication circuit 2 0 5 8 and reaches the outlet device 2 0 3. Have

Regarding the record of the first line of the path table 2018 "Msk-m2, M2, F10, F12, F22n, check the first item recorded in this § &quot; Msk-m2n and the IP address of the trusted end of the IP packet 2034 &quot; Whether the calculation result of "2" of "M2" is consistent with the second item "M2" of the previous record (formula (9) below). In this example, it is the same. Here, &quot;

The value of Msk-m2 &quot; is 255. 255. 255. 255.

If (MM sk-m 2M) and 11 M 2M =,! M 2M) ... (9) Secondly, the third item F10, F12, F22 related to the record, and send an IP packet 2038 to the logical communication circuit. The name is &quot; F1〇 &quot; communication circuit 2606 (step DD11) 'Send IP packet 2039 to the logical communication circuit name, F12'

Page 278 1245997 5. Communication circuit 20 6 1 (step DD13) of the invention description (275), sends an IP packet to the communication circuit 2059 (step DD9) of the logical communication circuit name "F22". Terminals 2 03 1 and 2 0 3 3 receives the multicast data via the communication circuit 2 0 6 0 and 2 0 61. The multicast proxy server 2 0 5 0 stores the received multicast data via the communication circuit 2 0 5 9 The network device 2 00 4 receives the IP packet 2 035, and uses the record of the first line of the path table 201 9 `` Msk-m2, M2, F13n, the same procedure as the network device 20 03, will copy the IP Λ packet The IP packet 2040 of 2035 is sent to the communication circuit with the logical communication circuit name 1'F13 &quot; 2062 (step DD14). The branch device 2005 receives the IP packet 2036 and uses the record of the first line of the path table 2020 nMski2, M2, F16, F17 The same as the procedure of the branch office device 2003, the IP packet 2041 of the duplicated IP packet 2 036 is sent to the communication circuit 206 3, and the IP packet 2042 is sent to the communication circuit 2064 (steps DD17 and DD18). &lt; &lt; Prevention of ACK or NACK packet from being full &gt; &gt;

e. The terminal 2031 reports the information related to the reception of the IP packet 2038, that is, the ACK packet of the trusted report, the NACK packet of the trusted bad report, or the terminal's individual report, etc., to the sending terminal 2026 to form a transmission. The external IP address of the remote end is "M2", and the external IP address of the trusted end is "E02" and the IP packet 2044 is sent to the communication circuit 2060 (step DD21 in Fig. 333). Similarly, the terminal 2033 In order to send the receiving packet 039 to the sender terminal "" Reporter, ", the sender's external address is" M2 ", and the recipient's external IP address is, 〇〇 口 2 ,, ip packet Send to the communication circuit 2061 (step DD22).

Final ---- When the IP packet reported by the end 20 26, check the external I

1245997

Address 丨 丨 M2Π record, then DD26) 〇 = No login in the address management table 2013. Since in this example, the 1P packet that is not hometown is directly forwarded to the communication circuit 205 9 (steps / times are sent from all the terminals receiving the multicast data to the negative terminal, and the "packet sent individually by the terminal" can be sent. Prevent the ACK or NACK packets in the IP forwarding network from being full c &lt; <Transmitting data using multicast proxy server> To multiple results

Evening point sending proxy server 20 50 In the foregoing step DD9, the multicast data transmitted by the terminal 2 0 2 6 is received and stored in the internal database, = terminals 203 1 and 20 33 are in the foregoing steps DD21 &amp; DD22, Request for retransmission 'When the multicast data is described, the previously saved multicast data is sent to the terminal 2301 (step DD28) via the network 2 device 2 003 (step DD27), and it can be sent to the terminal 20 33 ( Step DD29). At this time, use the first line of the route table 2018 in the network device 2003 &quot; Msk-m2, M2, F10, F12, F22 ,, &quot; to transmit the multicast data. &lt; &lt; Data Transmission and Reception Between Sending Terminals》 The multicast service proxy server 2 050 transmits the IP packet formed by storing the above-mentioned aggregated information to the sending terminal 2026, or receives the returned ip packet from the sending terminal 2026 ( The steps in Figure 333 are "to!)!)"). in

The IP address of the aforementioned IP packet is the IP address "E22 of the multicast service proxy server 2050, and the IP address of the sending terminal 2 026" E 02 ", using the address management table 201 3 Communication record on line 4 &quot; F22, E22π and record on line 5 of the path table 2018 &quot; Mski2, E22, F22n, and communication record on line 2 of the address management table 2011 &quot; F0 2, E02 &quot; and path Table 2016 line 3

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 280 1245997 Five 'Invention (277) ———— One——One One ::: ”m2 E 〇2, F 〇2 f ° so' multicast delivery service agent Servo is the sending terminal of the multi-point service that can be connected to the Guan Shixi point delivery service proxy server, and sends and receives lp packets to exchange information. ", X k &lt; <data transmission and reception between sending k transaction servers> ; &gt; The multicast service proxy server 2050 transmits the IP packets of the aforementioned storage report (ACK packet collection information, NACK packet collection information, individual end-of-month goodness) to the delivery transaction server 207, Or you can: 22, the IP packet sent back by the transaction server 202 7 (step DD46 of Figure 333 == 5. Here, the IP address of the IP packet is a multicast service proxy feed, F. 1? Bit = 122, and the communication record of the fourth line of the address official table 2013 of the IP address of the transmission server 2 02 7 ， F22, ”# 控 表 20 18 The fifth line of the record 1gu — 1112, 5: 22122 ", f &amp; management table 2001 line 3 communication record, F03, E〇3, and record 4 of line table 016 Msk〇3, e〇3, f〇3 ,. In this way, the multicast proxy server II can connect with the proxy server that implements the multicast service ▲ two if delivery service server, send and receive 1 p packets and The parent exchanges information. << Information exchange between the transmission terminal and the transmission weight k and the seven transaction servers> The ^^^ side exchanges 1 p packets with the transmission transaction server, which can be performed in order to say, X 1 ^ Service information exchange (step DD 5 1 in Figure 3 3 3) 〇 And, the award i Guan pull ^ can be: ^ plug ° ς 2 0 2 6 is the same as the delivery service feeder 2 0 2 7 1 P 'can be used to: The function of the device 20 7 is included in the function of the terminal 2026 of the transmission terminal 20 26. * The function of the transmission server 2027 and the transmission end use the TCP port number or UDP number. Distinguish.

Page 281 1245997 Fifth invention description (278) &lt; &lt; Spot device for connecting to transmission server &gt; &gt; In this embodiment, the transmission terminal 20 2 6 and the transmission server 2027 are connected to the same The branch office device 2 0 01 will reset the terminal 2028 (IP address &quot; E〇4 ") connected to the branch office device 2000 to the transmission server, and n ^ 2 0 2 7 is not used as the transmission terminal 5 is that the sending terminal and the sending server can connect to different network devices. At this time, the sending server 2 0 2 8. The multicast service proxy server 2050 that sends and receives I ρ packets and the sending terminal 20 26 Sends and receives IP packets with "Ε〇4" as the ^ address of the sending transaction server. &Lt; &quot; Changes in branch device &gt; &gt; The branch device 2 in Figure 330 can be separated into the block shown in Figure 334. The address management module 2090 and the router 2091 are implemented as shown. However, the address group 2090 and the router 20 9 1 can exchange information through the circuit 2092. The address management table 2 in the address management module 2090 〇11χ contains the same information as in the address management table 2 in the bathroom 1, The router = i is equipped with a built-in route slave table 201. The 6X series contains information about the route table 20 and the network point device 201. The address management module 2 090 is implemented as a server or hardware module. Ho of the fine temple &lt; &lt; &lt; &lt; Transfer of IP packets using the address management module &gt; &gt;> With reference to FIG. 3 34 'Description of the IP packet 209 in the IP forwarding network 2000 1 Received externally via the communication circuit 2 () 51 Ιρ ° 二 2G51 is connected to the outside of the router ...

1245997 V. Description of the invention (279) The address management module 20 90 checks whether the IP address "E02" of the sender of the received IP packet 2040 is registered on the address management table 201 lx. In this example, the logical communication circuit name "F〇2" of the communication circuit 20 51 and the address 1 &quot; e〇2 ,, are confirmed to be registered as the second address management table 2 〇 丨 丨 χ Record F0 2 and E02π, and inform the router 2091 of the confirmation result. The router 20 receives the ιρ packet 2040 according to the report of the address management module 20 90. It is reported that the aforementioned IP packet is not registered In the information, the received Ip packet is sent directly to the packet that exceeds the chip circuit 2045, and the Ip packet is discarded. It is "Mk f f router 2091, the record G on the first line of the path table 201 6X 〇2, &lt; G〇3 ", check the first item of the record nMsk — m2" = 〇40's trusted end 1? Address 12 "&quot; and" calculation results, it is recorded "item 2" &quot; M2 &quot; Consistent (Formula (10) below). In this =

The value of Tf, flu Msk m2 is 255.255.25 5.2 55. 1 “Msk —m2”) and ”M2” = ,, M2 ,,) · · · (1〇) 204 〖Two t〒 If there is the third item G02 and G03 of this record, 1P will be packed and two : The logic communication circuit name is 'G02', the communication circuit 205 3, and sends the IP packet 2 042 to the logic box, s &gt; ① &lt; 丨 ZUW, the circuit 2054. 4, the circuit name is `` 603 &quot; Communication diagram 332 of the network point device 2003 address management module and router combination The same function of the bit management module contains the address management including the replacement of bit 2 Table, the aforementioned replacement routing test: Table 2013 reports the same information. Through the same principle, the network = an address tube that contains the same functions and the same functions as the routing table 2Gi8_ and 2005 can be replaced with routers with front,,, and routers, respectively.

1245997 V. Description of the invention (280) Contains information about the bits contained in the outlet device 2004 to 2005. g table or path table &lt; &lt; Implementation of cable broadcasting or media distribution communication system &gt;> Terminal 2 02 6 is a digital voice that can be transmitted 203 to 203 9 is digital voice 2: Zhuo Er send terminal, The final transmission becomes a wired sound broadcast. Now, a communication system using a wired sound broadcast is described. When terminal 2026 is a sound dynamic image transmission terminal capable of transmitting digital images, when terminals 2031 to = two dynamic sound dynamic image receiving terminals, the front ^: nTvr transmission can be used. II? The same method can be used to realize the transmission and reception of digital still scenes; ί ΐ ί wired fax communication system. The digital voice is used as an image. The receiving terminal can send individual information of the receiving end including the receiving value of the multicast data and the sentiment, etc. to the packet. The terminal 2026 'multipoint transmission service agent feeder Plural: Receive IP packets '1' can transmit 115 packets containing the information contained in the 1 packet into 5 tables or the collected information in New Zealand to the sending terminal or sending server. The sending terminal or sending service feeder can send the ιρ packet containing a comment on the result of receiving the IP packet containing the aggregated information back to the multi = sending service proxy server 'result, which can realize the multi-point sending of data | ^ Cable broadcast communication for exchange of information between the L side and the multicast data receiving side. As described above, the multicast proxy server mediates the multicast data = k and exchanges information with the multicast data receiving side. Media to be transmitted: ,,, books or newspapers, music or video, cable broadcasting communication system can be realized m page 284 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (281) 'For the multicast service Book distribution communication system or newspaper distribution communication system 'music distribution communication system or video distribution communication system. Here, video is information composed of audio and dynamic video / images stored on video tapes, CD 4DVDs, etc., exponentially. ^ I. '&lt; &lt; Summary >> The terminal is connected to the router connected to the address management module via the communication circuit, and the sender IP address is registered on the address management table of the aforementioned address management module. When the sender's IP address in the header of the IP packet input by the router is registered on the address management table in the address management module, the packet is forwarded. When not registered, the IP packet is forwarded to the router. The method exceeds the communication circuit to prevent unscheduled IP packets from being mixed inside the AIP forwarding network. In addition, when the multicast IP address of the trusted end in the header of the IP packet input by the router is not registered in the aforementioned route table of the router, the method of forwarding the IP packet to the router beyond the communication circuit prevents the unplanned 1? Packets are mixed into the IP forwarding network. The IP address has a packet on the address management table registered to the outlet device, and when the IP packet is not registered, it is forwarded to more than communication = discarded, then it is sent to the multicast agent proxy server 2 nights% IP bit The address is registered to the network, and the recipient sends a 1p packet. The recipient sends an IP packet to the multipoint. The ACK packet and the ACK packet are used to confirm the receipt of the packet. Send 2 = IP packets to multiple points on the receiving end, etc., the headers of the IP packets of the external network device entered by the network device are accepted,

At the terminal, the IP route is transmitted. If the IP seal is not permitted on the schedule, the notification is received from the believer to receive the trusted status.

1245997 V. Description of the invention (282) ____ When the multicast address is forwarded and registered on the routing table of the routing table, the packet is discarded through the network device to prevent the unregistered IP packets from being mixed into the IP forwarding network. The unscheduled multicast delivery service proxy server receives the data sent from the delivery cooker and saves it inside, and the multicast multicast is sent to the terminal that is connected to the multicast delivery service ==== the sending data is set. Σ The network equipment of the connection and connection can connect more than one terminal including the network connection from the connection to the allowable 1 ,, and the network device: service :: server connection to the implementation of the multi-point delivery service ;: =: = The packet sender: 10. The final multicast or service transaction multicast service is the multicast service that the proxy server continues; the send = service agent sends and receives IP packets, and the service server service The proxy server uses information including IP packets sent by / j and the aforementioned multiple points. 3 ^ Received by a 1P packet over the communication circuit, using a voice transmission terminal, acoustic image, or still image that can transmit digital images, etc. Video mail It can realize the use of ^ p ^ ,,, = image transmission terminal, still image cable TV broadcast communication system, system = yes, line sound broadcast communication system, and letter terminal can include the rules of the trusted terminal; ^ f system. Cable The result of the broadcast receiving terminal can be more than a few minutes. The monthly ip packet is sent to the sender.

1245997 V. Description of Invention (283) A cable broadcast communication system for information exchange between data receiving sides. Multicasting The proxy server mediates the exchange of information between the multicast data sending side and the multicast data receiving side. '

The multicast service provides high-quality services by requesting improved acknowledgement notifications (ACK packets) and bad notifications (NACK packets) of multicast data. Communication companies can suppress ACK packets, NACK packets, or individual recipients. It is reported that the increase of the communication traffic inside the IP forwarding network can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to prevent delivery of multicast data that has not been contracted with a telecommunications company, and it is easy to implement a charge for using the multicast service. 20. 20th Embodiment of Multicast Communication: This embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 335. The management range 2101 of the communication company X and the management range 2102 of the communication company γ are set on the IP transfer network 2100, and the branch point devices 2103 to 2114, the routers 2115 to 2115-11, and the router 2 116 are set. The branch point device and the router are connected directly through the communication circuit or indirectly through the branch point device or router. The terminals 2 11 7 to 2 1 3 with the IP packet sending / receiving device are connected to the network device via the IP communication circuit. 2 1 4 0 to 21 4 3 series multicast IP service proxy server, 2 1 4 4 to 2147 series multicast service proxy server, 2148 to 2151 series

Communication circuit server. The communication company X and the communication company γ jointly manage the router 2116. The outlet devices 2103 to 2114 are limited to devices that all have "encapsulation and 1 inverse capsule function", or all devices that do not have 1? Capsule and inverse capsule 2 functions. The internal structure of each outlet device is implemented through other embodiments Explanation: <Transmission terminal and transmission server of communication company>

Page 287 1245997

V. Description of the invention (284) Distinguish the newsletter distribution service of the newspaper A. The news distribution service of the broadcasting station &amp; private ,,, and n send P service, and the service of B company X Yinghui Λ ㈣. Terminal 21 17 series of communication points for sending data, terminal, line, ^ ^ multi-smoke, Λ ^ terminal 2120 is a transmission terminal managed by communication company Y, and terminal 2122 is a transmission managed by communication company γ ^ 21 23 # 'A ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 21 1 7 d 20 will send the newsletter produced by the newspaper A to the server 2 11 8 通通 俨 八 qv 的 俨 古. a Division X's operation # affairs related to the distribution of electronic newsletters contact multiple points of communication: = 2 ^ 2119 is a terminal managed by 8 broadcasting stations, audio, dynamic video m news delivery service is transmitted to the communication company broadcast x = audio or communication The company's delivery service feeder 2122 is related to the business of electronic newsletter distribution. The multi-point transmission Q service is the final delivery service feeder 2118 on behalf of the communication company. Newsletter ί = I 进 Λ ', sample broadcast delivery server 2122 on behalf of Tong Erji, into the affairs of the transmission of multicast data &lt; &lt; forwarding of multicast IP packets &gt;; &gt; electronic Reports are stored as digital information in most packets. Newspaper A will send electronic newsletter 2 from terminal 2123 of newspaper A :: The delivery service server 2118 of Dakko 3X (step 216 in FIG. 336).

IM

Page 288 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (285) 2115-10, 2115-7, 2115-6, 2116, 2115-5, 2115-3, 2115-1, outlet device 2103 , Arrived at the delivery transaction server 2118. The transmission of the telegram IP packets from the terminals 21 to 23 to the transmission server 2118 can be performed using a known UDP communication technology (non-connection communication) or TCP communication technology (connection technology).

The delivery server 2 11 8 stores the received electronic newspaper IP packet in an internal database (step 2161). Next, the transmission transaction server 2118 transmits the received and saved telegram IP packet to the transmission terminal 2 n 7 (step 2162), and the transmission terminal 2 117 saves the received electronic packet ip packet. At this time, the transmission of the e-mail ip packet from the transmission transaction server 2 118 to the terminal 2 117 can be performed using a well-known UDP communication technology or TCP communication technology. The transmission terminal 21-17 sends the aforementioned saved electronic newspaper IP packet to the network point device 2103 (step 2163). Here, the address of the receiving end is a multicast address MX. Then, the sent electronic newspaper IP packet is simultaneously forwarded internally in the dedicated IP relay network 2 1 5 2 for multicast, and reaches the network device 2 1 06 to 210 8 (step 2 171 to 2174), the electronic newspaper The multicast terminals 2124 to 2128 (steps 2175 to 2177) of the trusted terminal of the IP packet arrive at multicast at the same time? The service proxy servers 2140 to 2141 (step 2178).

When the terminals 2124 to 2125 transmit the ACK packet notifying the normal receipt of the electronic newspaper IP packet or the NACK packet notifying the aforementioned ^ packet error (step, the ACK packet to the NACK packet is forwarded to the multicast P service proxy server responsible for the electronic newspaper distribution service) 2140 (step 2183). Similarly, the terminals 2126 to 2127 transmit notification 1? The reception status of the packet 仏} (packet 戍 1 ^ (^ When the packet is received (step 2182), the aforementioned ACK packet to NACK packet is forwarded at most.

1245997 V. Description of the invention (286) The P service proxy server 2141 is sent (step 2184). Sending an ACK packet to a NACK packet from the terminal 2128 is the same procedure. The multicast service agent servers 2140 and 2141 send the e-mail packet to the terminals 21 24 to 21 27 as multicast data (steps 2 1 8 5 and 2 1 8 6). The multicast service p server 2j 4 0 and 2 J 4 j form a p packet that reports the reception status of the electronic packet IP packet, and send it to the network device 2106 to 2107 (step 2187). The IP packet is forwarded via 1? The network 2152 (step 2188) passes through the network point device 2103 to the delivery transaction server 2118 (step 2189). The transmission server 2 managed by the communication company X uses the information about the distribution of the IP telegram IP packets in steps 2 162 and 2189 to calculate the usage fee of the IP network 2 101 managed by the communication company X. The delivery transaction server 2118 uses the information including the contents of the received IP packet to form an IP packet including the report item to the newspaper A, and transmits the formed IP packet to the terminal 2123 of the newspaper A (step 2190). Here, the IP packet arrives at the terminal 2123 via the network device 2103, the router 2115], 2115-3, 2115-5, 2116, 2ii5 6, 2115-7, 2115-10, and 2111. The Eight News Agency received the “Dagger” and confirmed the newsletter 1] that depends on the communication company X. The distribution of the packet. After the company ’s steps _, the electronic newsletter 1P packet was sent from A newspaper Xi Bancong 9 to Tong # 公司 Y Sending transaction server 2122 (Figure 2111, 玖 ± 1 f4). At this time, the electronic message 1 P packet is sent to the sending transaction server Z122 via the outlet device service show 2, 122 and outlet 4 4n0. The sending service transaction server 122 The device 2122 saves the previously received packets into an internal database (step 2 1 6 5). Page 290 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 5. Description of the invention (287) ---- Send #Transaction Server 2 1 2 2. For the sending terminal, the sending transaction server 2122 accepts the certificate of the regular sending transaction server that is qualified to transmit the electronic message 1? Packet (step 2260), and the sending transaction server 2122 receives the previously received and stored electronic The IP packet is transmitted to the transmitting terminal (step 21W), and the transport terminal 2 120 saves the received electronic packet IP packet. Also, in step 216j, the terminal 2123 of the newspaper A, for the communication company γ ’s transmission transaction server 21 22, Acceptable on Terminal 21 23 of A Newspaper Bad certification

The transmission terminal 2120 sends the aforementioned electronic newsletter lp packet to the network point device 2109 (step 2167). Here, the address of the trusted end is the multicast address &quot; My &quot;. The aforementioned IP packet sent by the newsletter is simultaneously transferred within the IP forwarding network 2 1 5 3 that is dedicated for multicast transmission, and arrives at the network device 211 2 to 2114 (steps 21 91 to 2194), the trusted terminal of the IP packet of the newsletter The terminals 2129 to 2133 (steps 2195 to 2197), and at the same time, arrive at the multicast service p server 2142 to 2143 (step 2198). Terminals 2129 to 2133

When transmitting an ACK packet or a NACK packet notifying the reception status of the aforementioned IP telegram IP packet (step 220 1, 2202), the ACK packet to the NACK packet is forwarded to the multicast P service proxy server 2 which is responsible for the newsletter distribution service. 42 Or 2143 (step 22 03 or 2 204) 〇 ° ^

The multicast P service proxy server 2142 or 2 143 retransmits the electronic newspaper IP packet to the terminals 2 129 to 2 133 as the multicast data (steps 2205, 2206). The multicast service proxy servers 2142 and 2143 form IP packets that report the reception status of the electronic packet IP packets, and send them to the network devices 2112 to 2113 (step 2207), and the IP packets are forwarded through the 1? Forwarding network 2153 (

291 1245997 V. Description of the invention (288) Step 2 2 0 8) 'and via the network point device 2 1 0 9 to the messenger server 2122 (step 22 09) 〇 &quot; the messenger server 2 managed by the communication company Y 1 22 Calculate the usage fee of the IP network 2102 managed by the communication company γ. From the information including the content of the ip packet received before, a p packet containing the report item to the newspaper A is formed, and the formed IP packet is transmitted. To the terminal 2123 of the A newspaper (step 2210). Here, the IP packet arrives at the terminal 21 23 via the branch point device 2 1 1 0, the router 2 11 5- 10, and the branch point device 2111. Newspaper A receives the IP packet and confirms the delivery of the IP packet, which depends on the newsletter Y of the communication company. When a multicast Q service is implemented, it can also be implemented by the same method as described above. &lt; &lt; Authentication Procedures &gt;> There are various disclosed techniques for the authentication procedures of steps 22 to 60, and an example will be described with reference to FIG. 337. The transmission transaction server 2122 and the transmission terminal 2120 store the common function y = f (a, b) and the secret authentication key "?" Internally. The delivery server 2 1 2 2 transmits the information identifying the delivery server 2 1 2 2, ID 21 2 2, to the delivery terminal 2120 (step 2160-1). The sending terminal 2120 receives the information that identifies the sending transaction server 2122 &quot; ID 2122 ,,, and generates random numbers &quot; R ,,, calculates and saves Cl = f (K, R), and transmits the random numbers &quot; R &quot; to The transmission transaction server 2122 (step 2160-2). The transmission transaction server 2122 calculates C2 = f (K, R) using the received "quotation number" R ", the authentication key" K "and the function" f ", and transmits C2" to the transmission terminal 212 (step 216〇-3). The sending terminal checks whether the “c 1” generated and saved is consistent with the received “C 2”, if it is the same, “Since it can be confirmed that the sending transaction server 2 丨 2 2 keeps the regular The authentication key K 'can therefore authenticate the transmission transaction server 21 to 22 as a regular transmission transaction

Page 292 1245997 V. Description of the invention (289) Server. &lt; &lt; Changes &gt;> With reference to Fig. 3 38, the internal setting of the IP transfer network 2 丨 〇〇— 丨 is set by the official scope of the company X 2101-1 and the management scope of the communication company 2201 μ Network branch devices 2104-1, 2105-1, 2107-1 to 2114- 1, routers 2230 and 2 232, address management modules 2231 and 2233, routers 2115-j to 2115-11, and router 2116. Outlet device 2104 -1, 2105-1,

All of 2107-1 to 2114-1 are devices that do not have the functions of Ip encapsulation and reverse encapsulation. The specific internal structure is the same as that described in the other embodiments. The router 2230 and the address management module 2231 are connected by a circuit. The router 2230 and the address management module 223 1 are integrated into one unit and realize the same function as the network point device. Similarly, the router 2 2 3 2 and the address management module 2 2 3 3 are connected by a circuit, and become a whole and realize the same function as the network point device. From the above, a multicast service similar to the multicast service described with reference to FIGS. 335 to 336 can be implemented. From the terminal 2123 of the A newspaper company that provides the multicast service, the e-mail IP packets are transmitted to the delivery transaction servers 21 18 and 2122. The delivery transaction servers 2118 and 2122 can pass the aforementioned received e-mail IP packets through the "transmission network 21 01-1 and 2 102-1 are distributed to the trusted terminals 2124 to 2133 through the multicast technology. The results of the aforementioned distribution are reported to the delivery transaction server 2118 and 2122, and the aforementioned trusted terminals 2124 to 2133 can be charged. Or, the IP forwarding network 21 5 2 and 2153 need not be dedicated IP forwarding networks for multicast transmission, and share the IP forwarding for IP phone or data forwarding, audio and video forwarding described in the other embodiments, or implement the previously described Send more

1245997 V. Description of Invention (290) Delivery service. &lt; <Setting of Address Management Table or Path Table >> The management range 2101 of the communication company X and the management 2102 of the communication company γ The internal address management table or router waypoint transmission service inside the network device sets individual bits Address management: table or routing table of routing benefits (setting of multicast tree structure), the method described in other embodiments. In addition, the technology described in other embodiments, such as increasing the number of multicast service users, changing more multicast tree structures, or stopping multicast, can be applied to this implementation. example. &amp; / 3 blades &lt; <Summary >> By the method described above, a plurality of multicast service: $? Implementation of the IP forwarding network of the letter company. Multi-point multi-point cigarettes, "two * communication company's agent fee business. Bei Λ communication company x's delivery service feeder two send; 22 two S i.'S delivery service feeder, the aforementioned communication company X manages The Da 4 transaction server sends data through communication and sends it to the continuous broadcast… two V, ^, and will pick up a reason why she will receive ^ κ on the IP forwarding network of the multi-pass company γ & quot For a reason, the terminal will send the multicast data to the following terminals: Department Y tube: the multiple terminals of the heart network. The communication company X or the general agent forwards the service to the temple, and the distribution results are within the temple. Delivery service via multi-point. Communication company x or communication company's delivery service server

1245997 V. Description of the invention (291) Effects of the invention The method and device for controlling communication between terminals using an IP transfer network. IP terminals, such as multimedia terminals, that is, personal computers with IP communication functions, etc. The audio and video device is connected to any one or more of the branch point device, idle channel, or media router of the integrated transmission network, and can perform terminal communication connection control for terminal communication using the IP transfer network. Here, the 'media router' is installed outside the integrated IP forwarding network, and forwards the host name made up of a telephone number for identification, such as a telephone number for identification, through the integrated IP, and performs mutual communication such as information exchange between the media terminals. The used cm media router is connected to the public telephone exchange network * telephone, and the telephone connected to the public telephone exchange network is forwarded through the integrated IP p! Pulling τ Α and changing the network I, the communication between the terminals. In addition, a single: a mobile phone can access electronic books, etc. = a multimedia terminal becomes a sender, and can be 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd is the media routing of the first embodiment of the present invention

Page 295 1245997 V. Description of the invention (292) The supplementary diagram of the function of the device or the function of the gateway of the second embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 5 is a diagram for explaining one type of IP packet of the media router or gateway function of the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 6 is a supplementary diagram schematically showing the configuration of the media router according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and explaining the operation of the media router. Fig. 7 is a supplementary diagram schematically showing the configuration of the media router according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and a procedure for explaining the operation of the media router. Fig. 8 is a diagram illustrating an address management table inside the network device according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a type of IP packet appearing for communication between two IP terminals. Fig. 10 is a diagram illustrating a type of an IP packet appearing in communication between two IP terminals. Fig. 11 is a diagram illustrating a type of IP packet appearing in communication between two IP terminals. Fig. 12 is a diagram illustrating the types of IP packets appearing in communication between two IP terminals. Fig. 13 is a diagram illustrating the types of IP packets appearing for communication between two IP telephones. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating the types of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. Fig. 15 is a diagram illustrating a type of IP packet appearing in communication between two IP telephones.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 296 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (293) Figure 16 is a diagram illustrating the type of ιρ packet that appears between two IP telephones for communication. Fig. 17 is a diagram illustrating a type of p packet appearing in communication between two IP telephones. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a type of a p-packet appearing in communication between two IP phones. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a type of a 1 packet which appears in communication between two telephones. Λ «Fig. 20 is a diagram illustrating a type of a ρ packet that appears in communication between two I ρ telephones. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a type of an I p packet that appears in communication between two IP telephones. Fig. 22 is a diagram illustrating a type of an Ip packet appearing to communicate between two IP telephones. Figures 23 and 3 are diagrams illustrating the types of IP packets appearing in communication between two IP telephones. Fig. 24 is a diagram illustrating the types of Ip packets appearing in communication between two IP telephones. Fig. 25 is a diagram illustrating the types of Ip packets appearing in communication between two IP telephones. ° Figure 26 is a diagram illustrating the type of I ρ packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. Fig. 27 is a diagram illustrating the types of Ip packets appearing in communication between two IP telephones.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 297 1245997

Types of IP packets for inter-phone communication Figure 28 illustrates the appearance of two IP states. Fig. 29 is a diagram illustrating the type of ιρ packet appearing for communication between two IP telephones. Fig. 3 is an example of a media router status table showing the inside of the media router. Fig. 31 is a block diagram showing the conceptual configuration of an independent IP telephone. Fig. 32 is a block diagram showing the conceptual configuration of a stand-alone IP audiovisual device. Fig. 3 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of p packets that appear between two p telephones for communication. FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of ip packets that appear in communication between two IP telephones. FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of the ιρ packet that appears to communicate between two IP telephones. FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of the ιρ packet that appears to communicate between two ιρ telephones. Fig. 37 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of an ip packet appearing to communicate between two ip telephones. FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating other implementation types of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. Figure 39 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. @ 4 0 系 ， Describes the other IP packets that appear in the communication between 2 IP phones

2049.3793-PF; RAY.ptd p. 298 1245997

V. Description of the invention (295) Scheme of his implementation. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of the IP packet that appears between two IP telephones for communication. Fig. 4 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of the IP packet that appears between two IP telephones for communication. Fig. 4 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of 1 P packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. Fig. 44 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of the 1 P packet for communication between two IP telephones. Figures 4 and 5 are diagrams illustrating other implementations of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. Figure 46 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. Figures 4 and 7 are diagrams illustrating other implementations of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. Fig. 48 is a diagram illustrating another implementation type of the ΪP packet that appears in the communication between two IP phones in the first embodiment of the present invention.

Fig. 49 is a diagram illustrating another implementation mode of an IP packet appearing in communication between two 1-phones in the i-th embodiment of the present invention. ^ da 〇 is a diagram for explaining the RAS management of the media router in the first embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 5 The surface of the 1-series model is too large. Η is also%. Structure of the gateway of the second embodiment of the invention

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 299 1245997 V. Description of the invention (296) A subsidy chart that describes the procedures of the operation of this gateway at the same time. Fig. 5 is a diagram of other implementation types of IP packets that δ Erming appears in the communication between two IP telephones. Fig. 5 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of Ip packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. 〃 Figure 5 5 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of ρ packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. Fig. 56 is a diagram illustrating another embodiment of an IP packet that appears in communication between two IP telephones in the second embodiment of the present invention. Figures 5 and 7 are diagrams illustrating other implementations of Ip packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of I ρ packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating other implementation types of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating other implementation types of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. Φ Figure 1 is a diagram illustrating other implementation types of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating other implementation types of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating other implementation types of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. Figure 64 illustrates other types of IP packets that appear in communication between two IP phones.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 300 1245997 V. Description of the invention (297) Schematic diagram of his implementation. Fig. 65 is a diagram illustrating other implementation types of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of the p-packets that appear in communication between two IP phones. Fig. 67 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of ιρ packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of the ιρ packet that appears to communicate between two IP telephones. Fig. 69 is a diagram illustrating another address management table inside the branch point device according to the second embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 70 is a schematic diagram of the gateway state table in the second embodiment of the present invention. Example 0 Fig. 71 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a media router implemented in the CATV system in the third embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 72 is a diagram illustrating a method of successively using various terminals to accommodate wireless terminals and gateway devices in the fourth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 73 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a gateway in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 74 is a block diagram showing a configuration example when a telephone communication control server is used in the sixth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 75 is a flowchart for explaining a sixth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 76 is a diagram for explaining a sixth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 7 is a diagram for explaining a sixth embodiment of the present invention.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 301 1245997 V. Description of the invention (298) Figure 7 for 8 series Figure 7 for 9 series Figure 8 for 0 series Figure 81 for series 81 Figure 82 for series 8 Figure for 84 series Figure 8 is used in Figure 5 Figure 8 is used in Figure 6 Figure 8 is used in Figure 7 Figure 8 is used in Figure 8 Figure 8 is used in Figure 9 Figure 9 is used in Process Chart. Figure 9 is a diagram of the Division 1). Figure 9 for 2 series Figure 9 for 3 series Figure 94 series. Figure 95 is a diagram of a table. Figure 96 is a block diagram of an example. To explain the hair to explain the hair to explain the hair to explain the hair to explain the hair to explain the hair to explain the hair to explain the hair This is a flowchart illustrating the sixth embodiment of the present invention to explain the present phone number. Illustration of the sixth embodiment of the invention. Illustration of the sixth embodiment of the invention. Illustration of the sixth embodiment of the invention. Illustration of the sixth embodiment of the invention. Illustration of the sixth embodiment of the invention. Illustration of the sixth embodiment of the invention. Illustration of the sixth embodiment of the invention. The flowchart of the sixth embodiment. Illustration of the sixth embodiment of the invention. Illustration of the sixth embodiment of the invention. Illustration of the sixth embodiment of the invention. The flow of the sixth embodiment (release stage) of the Ming Dynasty is to explain the flowchart of the sixth embodiment of the present invention (the communication company is the first embodiment of the 6th embodiment of the invention. The flowchart of the sixth embodiment of the next embodiment. Figure of the example The example of the telephone management server classification table without a phone number shows the structure of the media router 2049-3793-PF of the seventh embodiment of the present invention; RAY.ptd page 302 1245997 V. Description of the invention (299) Figure 9 7 is a diagram for explaining a seventh embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the structure of the eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an operation example of the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Flow chart. Fig. 10 is a diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 10 is a diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 102 is a diagram showing the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Flow chart of an operation example of the eighth embodiment. Fig. 10 is a diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 104 is a diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 1 0 5 is a diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. 8 embodiment diagram. Fig. 107 is a diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 108 is a diagram for explaining the sixth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 1 is for 09 The diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 111 is for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention (another example of a media router) ). Fig. 11 is a diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 11 is a diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 114 is a diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Illustration of the eighth embodiment. Fig. 115 is a schematic diagram showing a connection state between a part inside the media router and the IP terminal or LAN connected thereto. Fig. 116 is an example of a transmission priority control management table. Figure 11. Figure 7 is a diagram showing an example of a 5 priority control management table. Figure 11 is a diagram for explaining a ninth embodiment of the present invention.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p. 303

1245997 V. Description of the invention (300) Fig. 1 9 is a block diagram showing the structure of a ninth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 120 is a flowchart illustrating an example of operation of the ninth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 12 is a diagram for explaining the ninth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 12 is a diagram for explaining a ninth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 2 3 is a diagram for explaining a ninth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 12 is a diagram for explaining a ninth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a ninth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 26 is a diagram illustrating a ninth embodiment of the present invention using dates. Fig. 1 2 7 is a diagram for explaining a ninth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 1 28 is a block diagram showing the structure of a tenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 29 is a flowchart for explaining an operation example of the tenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 130 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 31 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 34 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 135 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 136 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 37 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 38 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 39 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 140 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 304 1245997 V. Description of the invention (301) Figure 42 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 14.6 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 47 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 54 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 156 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 158 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 159 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 160 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 161 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the tenth embodiment of the present invention. Figure 16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the 10th embodiment of the present invention. 0 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 305 1245997 V. Description of the invention (302) Figure 164 shows the first of the invention 〇 Flow chart of the operation example (TCp-IAM) of the embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example (τ c p _ a C M) of the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example (τ c p _ c P G) of the tenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 167 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example (τ c ρ-a NM) of the 10th embodiment of the present invention. Λ FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example (tcp-rEL) of the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example (tcp-RLC) of the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 170 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 171 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 74 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 175 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 76 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 180 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 181 is a block diagram showing the structure of an eleventh embodiment of the present invention.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 306 1245997 V. Description of the invention (303) Fig. 82 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the eleventh embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 183 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the eleventh embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 184 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the eleventh embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 185 is a block diagram showing the structure of a twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 86 is a diagram for explaining a twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 87 is a diagram for explaining a twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 88 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 1 89 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 1 90 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 191 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 192 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 193 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 1 94 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 195 is a diagram for explaining a twelfth embodiment of the present invention.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 307 1245997 V. Description of the invention (304) Figure 196 is a diagram for explaining the second embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 197 is a block diagram showing the structure of the third embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 198 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 199 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 0 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 201 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 202 is a diagram for explaining a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining a 13th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 204 is a diagram for explaining a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 205 is a diagram for explaining the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 206 is a diagram for explaining a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 207 is a diagram for explaining the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 20 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 211 is a diagram for explaining the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 13 is a diagram for explaining a 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 308 1245997 V. Description of the invention (305) Figure 2 1 9 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the invention. FIG. 2 0 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 21 is a diagram for explaining a 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 22 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 2 3 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 224 is a diagram for explaining the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 25 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 226 is a diagram for explaining the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 227 is a diagram for explaining the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 228 is a diagram for explaining the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 29 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 30 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. 2 to 31 are diagrams for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 3 2 is a block diagram showing a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 is a flowchart showing an example of operation of the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 234 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 35 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 236 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 237 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 238 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 39 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 240 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 241 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 309 1245997 V. Description of the invention (306) Figure 2 42 is a diagram for explaining the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Figures 2 to 3 are diagrams for explaining the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 24 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 245 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. 2 to 6 are diagrams for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 247 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Figures 2 to 8 are diagrams for explaining the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. 2 to 9 are diagrams for explaining the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 50 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 25 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 53 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 254 is a diagram for explaining a first embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 25 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 25.6 is a flowchart showing an operation example of the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 257 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 58 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Figs. 2 to 5 are flowcharts for explaining an operation example of the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 60 is a block diagram showing a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 261 is a flowchart for explaining an operation example of the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 310 1245997 5. Description of the invention (307) Figure. FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. Figures 2 to 6 are diagrams for explaining the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 264 is a diagram for explaining a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 65 is a diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 6 is a diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 6 7 is a diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 68 is a diagram for explaining a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. Figures 2 to 6 are diagrams for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 70 is a diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 27.1 is a diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 272 is a diagram for explaining the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 73 is a diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 274 is a diagram for explaining the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 27.5 is a diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 27.6 is a diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 277 is a diagram for explaining a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 78 is a diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 79 is a diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 280 is a diagram for explaining the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 281 is a diagram for explaining the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 282 is a diagram for explaining the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 83 is a diagram for explaining the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 84 is a diagram for explaining the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 311 1245997 V. Description of the invention (308) Figure 285 is a diagram for explaining the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 28.6 is a diagram for explaining a fifth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 7 is a diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 28 is a block diagram showing a sixth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 8 9 is a flowchart for explaining an operation example of the 16th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 0 Fig. 2 9 0 is a diagram for explaining the 16th embodiment of the present invention. Figure 2 91 is a diagram illustrating the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention using g.

Fig. 29 is a diagram for explaining a sixteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 293 is a part of a block diagram showing the structure of a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 294 is a part of a block diagram showing the structure of a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 295 is a part of a block diagram showing the constitution of the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 296 is a diagram for explaining a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 297 is a diagram for explaining a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 98 is a diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 299 is a diagram for explaining the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 0 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 301 is a diagram for explaining the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 302 is a diagram for explaining a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 303 is a diagram for explaining the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 30 is a diagram for explaining a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 312

1245997 V. Description of the invention (309) Figure 3 05 is used to explain the 17th implementation of the present invention. Figure 3 06 is used to explain the 17th implementation of the present invention. Figure 3 0 7 is used to illustrate the first implementation of the present invention Fig. 17 is a diagram for explaining the 17th implementation of the present invention. Fig. 3 is a part of the diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 31 is a part of a drawing for explaining the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 311 is a diagram showing part of a drawing in the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 31 2 is for explaining the 17th implementation of the present invention Fig. 31 is for explaining the 17th implementation of the present invention Fig. 314 is for explaining the 17th implementation of the present invention Fig. 31 is for explaining the present invention The 17th implementation of FIG. 3 16 is used to explain the 17th implementation of the present invention. FIG. 31 is the 17th implementation of the present invention. FIG. 31 is the 17th implementation of the present invention. FIG. 31 9 is for explaining the 17th implementation of the present invention. FIG. 320 is for explaining the 17th implementation of the present invention. FIG. 321 is a part showing the 18th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 322 shows a part of the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 323 is a diagram showing an example of the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. Example schema. Example schema. Example schema. An example of the address management table of the address management table. Example schema. Example schema. Example schema. Example schema. Example schema. Example schema. Example schema. Example schema. The composition of the block diagram The composition of the block diagram 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 313 1245997 5. Part of the description of the invention (310). Fig. 3 24 is a part of a block diagram showing the structure of the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 3 2 5 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 3 2 6 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 2 7 is a diagram for explaining the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 28 is a diagram for explaining the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. Figs. 3 to 29 are drawings for explaining the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention by using cymbals. Fig. 3 30 is a part of a block diagram showing the structure of the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. Figs. 3 to 31 are part of a block diagram showing the constitution of the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 3 32 is a part of a block diagram showing the structure of the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 333 is a diagram for explaining a nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 334 is a diagram for explaining the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 335 is a block diagram showing the structure of a twentieth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 336 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 37 is a diagram for explaining a twentieth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 338 is a diagram for explaining a nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. Figure 339 is a block diagram showing the outline of an integrated IP forwarding network. Figure 340 is a block diagram illustrating the relationship between a switch and a signal network. Fig. 341 is a diagram showing an example of a signal unit of the No. 7-common line signal method.

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 314 1245997 V. Description of the invention (311) Figure 3 42 is a flowchart for explaining the relationship between the switch and the signal network. Figure 343 is a flowchart illustrating the relationship between the switch and the signal network. Figure 344 is a flowchart illustrating the relationship between the switch and the signal network. Figure 345 is a flowchart illustrating the relationship between the switch and the signal network. Figure 346 is a block diagram showing the basic functions of the gateway. Figure 347 is a diagram showing an example of call control data in an IP packet. Figure 348 is a diagram showing an example of audio data in an IP packet. Figure 349 is a diagram showing an example of image data in an IP packet. Fig. 3 50 is a block diagram showing the basic principle of the integrated information communication network. Fig. 3 51 is a block diagram showing the basic principle of the integrated information communication network. Fig. 3 52 is a block diagram showing the basic principle of the integrated information communication network. Fig. 53 is a block diagram showing the basic principle of the integrated information communication network. Fig. 3 54 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a multicast IP forwarding network. Fig. 35 is an example of a multicast table used in a multicast IP transfer network. FIG. 356 is a diagram for explaining the present invention. Figures 3 5 and 7 are diagrams for explaining the present invention. Fig. 3 58 is a diagram for explaining the present invention. Figure 359 is a diagram for explaining the present invention. Fig. 3 60 is a diagram for explaining the present invention. Explanation of the symbols 1 ~ IP forwarding network; 1-1, 1-2 ~ terminals; Bu 3, Bu 4 ~ Media router; Bu 5, 1-6 ~ Connection server;

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 315 1245997 V. Description of the invention (312) 1-7 ~ relay connection server; 1-1 0 ~ IP transfer network; 1-1 1, 1-1 2 ,; 1-1 3, 1-1 4 ~ outlet equipment; BU 15-1-2 0 ~ router; 2 ~ integrated IP forwarding network; 3 ~ IP data network; 4 ~ IP telephone network; 5-1 ~ IP audio and video Network; 5-2 ~ Best effort network; 6-1 ~ Range of IP forwarding network managed by communication company X; 6-2 ~ Range of IP forwarding network managed by communication company Y; 7-1, 7-2 , 7-3, 7-4 ~ Communication company X operation and management of point devices; 8- 1, 8-2, 8-3, 8 ~ 4 ~ Communication company Y operation and management of point devices; 9-1, 9- 2 ~ Gateway; 10-1 ~ 10-8 ~ Integrated communication network of IP 1 external communication network; 1 1 -1 ~ 1 1 -1 0 ~ IP terminal; 12-1, 12-2 ~ independent IP telephone ; 12- 3 ~ independent IP audio and video device; 13- 1, 13-2, 13-3, 13-4 ~ non-independent IP telephone; 14- 1, 14-2, 14-3, 14-4 ~ Media router; 15-1, 15-2 ~ LAN; 16-1, 16-2, 16-3, 16-4 ~ non-independent audio and video devices; 17 -1, 17-2, 17-3, 17-4 ~ public telephone circuit; 18- 1 ~ 18-8 ~ analog telephone; 19- 1 ~ 19-19 ~ router with IP transfer function; 20- 1 to 20 -4 ~ router used in LAN or media router;

2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 316 1245997 V. Description of the invention (313) 21-1 to 21-5 ~ routers used between different IP forwarding networks of communication companies; 2 2-1, 2 2- 2 ~ connection control unit; 2 3-1, 2 3-2 ~ Η 3 2 3 terminal unit; 24-1, 24-2 ~ SCN interface; 27-1, 27-2 ~ ATM network; 2 7-3 ~ Optical communication network; 2 7-4 ~ code frame relay switching network; 3 0-1 to 3 0-4 ~ domain name server dedicated to IP data network; 3 1-1, 3 1-2 ~ IP telephone network Dedicated domain name server; 3 2-1, 3 2-2 ~ IP audio and video network dedicated domain name server; 3 3-1, 3 3-2 ~ best effort dedicated network domain name server Server; 35- 1, 35-2 ~ IP data service operation management server (DSS); 36- 1, 36-2 ~ IP phone service operation management server (TES); 37- 1, 3 7-2 ~ IP Audio and video service operation management server (AVS); 3 8-1, 3 8-2 ~ best effort service operation management server (BE S); 4 8 _ 1, 7 8-1 ~ domain name server.

2049-3793-PF: RAY.ptd Page 317

Claims (1)

"90105465 __%", the scope of patent application is L. An Internet Protocol (IP) communication system, which includes a network and a temple: an Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network, which includes at least two network devices. : The network device and the server are connected to a destination network device and a destination (feeding into an internal network). The network device contains a packet-shaped packet based on the internal Internet protocol network. Network:;: ϊ (: = ί (ΙΡ) packet function and restore the aforementioned external Internet Protocol (IP) packet according to the function of the aforementioned internal network u) The packet = the network device is connected to at least one media router; Media Router $ ^ iOi _ ;,: 彳 Si Internet Network Association (M) packet side a, and before = 定 (ιρ) ί Ξ: ::: J Π :: used in the aforementioned Internet Cooperative method: The aforementioned destination network = ::: == Description of the packet Internet protocol tf ,,,, ^ 1 port 'Inter-terminal communication connection control system: Net: 7 common channel signal channel signal system call control I 2 1 does not contain No. 7 common packet, executes one end η δ = ί the internal control of the Internet Protocol (IP) lights ~ ^ communication connection control. 2. If the patent application scope letter system, where the end of the address message / Internet Protocol πρ) communication 3 statement The Internet Protocol (IP) protocol described in section 2049-3793-PF4.ptc, page 318, 1245997 ^^ MK 9Q1Q546B VI. Patent application scope IP (IP) communication between terminals including communication communication (IP) communication including communication between call terminals (IP) Communication between terminals (IP) communication terminal The IP address (IP) is controlled by the Internet Protocol (IP) communication connection that is connected to at least the audio data. ㈨Packaging to implement 0. As stated in item 1 of the patent scope, the aforementioned internet protocol agreement of the 2nd and 2nd Road Association⑽packet, 1 1 · As applied for the patent scope of the first letter system, in which the aforementioned internet protocol internet Road Association calls the Internet Protocol for controlling data ((Transfer network connection receiving control. Power up) packets to implement the final message system, such as the Internet Protocol Connection described in the second patent: the first item. The terminal identification number at the time of the system is electric 4Γ for the control of the system: 2. The Internet protocol described in the first item of the patent scope is the Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network. 1〗 The terminal address of Nissei is the Internet Protocol (IP) bit. • The Internet Protocol described in item 1 of the patent application, where the aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding network is transparent 7 The gateway device of the relay signal point of the common line 仏 system, a public telephone exchange network. 丄 / 1 5 · The Internet Protocol (Γ p) as described in item i of the scope of patent application is communicated with L 糸 ,, The gateway I system contains at least one N NI interface, and describes the Internet protocol I p) through the gateway routing network connecting means at least a public switched telephone network. Page 320 2049-3793-PF4.ptc Case No. 90105465 1245997 Amendment Date VI. Patent Application Range _ 1 6 • If you apply for the first letter system of patent coverage, the aforementioned Internet. Household = 2 Internet Protocol (IP) communication relay signal of the common line signal system No. 2 is used as a public telephone exchange network, and it is connected to at least code). The gateway device includes a point code (p.int 1 7 · If the patent application for the first park of the patent application system, the card of the aforementioned Internet protocol = road agreement π) channel i is connected to the aforementioned point device The helmets l, and are controlled by a gate.彳 么 # ， Executive terminal communication ^ 8 · If the patent application system of the patent application, the sending and receiving includes wireless, U Internet Protocol (IP) communication protocol (ip) packets. ", Y" is called the Internet of control data. 9 · If the patent application scope of the information system, its sending and receiving includes wireless communication; Internet Protocol (IP) communication (IP) packets. The sound of the "," and "V" voices is a kind of lean Internet protocol 2 〇 · If the patent application scope is the first letter system, where the aforementioned Internet protocol ⑽ channel device continues the aforementioned site dream t = 疋 () the transfer network is borrowed by Brake communication connection control. Inter-terminal for transmitting and receiving multimedia data-an Internet Protocol (IP) communication system, including, "Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network, human /, and server, characterized by.. Contains at least two outlet devices, separately mentions the establishment of the outlets, and feeds the cry. Reads and talks about the internal network of the AH transfer network. 2 m is connected to a destination outlet device and a destination network through the Internet Protocol (IP) P line. Purpose Feeding 2049-3793-PF4.ptc Page 321 1245997 The categorized network device includes the function of restoring the foregoing according to the external internal Internet protocol (lp) packet protocol (IP) M; the function of the external Internet protocol (IP) packet and the function of the external Internet protocol according to the foregoing internal network ( IP) packets' and use the transmission and reception to connect to the aforementioned network device Y "media routers at least — the external Internet Protocol (1?) Packets :: set communication; fixed (Ip; 3, point device and description The server communicates with the destination network device and destination server by sending and receiving the aforementioned internal Internet Protocol (IP) packets within the aforementioned Internet protocol. The Internet protocol (IP) forwarding According to the H323 common channel signal province and 1, the terminal communication connection control method, to send and receive the aforementioned internal Internet protocol (IP) packet containing the call control data of the H323 common channel and the number system to perform an inter-terminal communication connection 22. · An Internet Protocol (IP) communication system, which includes an _Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network, which includes at least two network devices and a feed station. The aforementioned network point device and server are connected to a destination network point device and a destination server via a line; the aforementioned network point device is connected to at least one media router; the aforementioned media router is connected to at least one terminal device, and transmits and receives Internet protocol ( IP) packets to communicate with the aforementioned point device; the aforementioned point device and the server communicate with the aforementioned destination point device and the destination server by sending and receiving the aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) packets; and 2049-3793-PF4.ptc Page 322 1245997 銮 90105465 __Year Month _Amendment_ ^ VI. Scope of Patent Application The aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network according to the No. 7 common channel signal system communication connection between terminals A control method for performing an inter-terminal communication connection control by sending and receiving the aforementioned Internet Protocol (丨 p) packet including call control data of the No. 7 common channel signal system. 2 3-An Internet Protocol (IP) communication system, which is characterized by: The Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network includes at least two connection servers; let alone the connection server through a line Connect to a destination server 5 | continuation;, mouth, and description of the connection server is to send and receive an Internet Protocol (丨 p) packet to communicate with the aforementioned purpose connection server; and Ke, connection server According to the control method between two terminals of the 77 common channel signal system, the above-mentioned Internet Protocol (IP) packet containing the gate and system information of the No. 7 common channel signal system is transmitted and received, and an inter-terminal communication is performed. Connection control. is The Internet Protocol (IP) as described in item 23 of the scope of the patent application. The system meets the requirements of the Internet, the public, the private, the private, the communication, and the communication. Zu Zan, and, to send and receive call control connection control including the aforementioned sip system. Cooperative (1 P) packets to perform communication between terminals 2 5-a gateway installation system in which the Internet ^ 罔 政 & amp ~~ "Internet Protocol (IP) communication system devices and servers · a protocol (IP) transfer network includes at least two network protocol (ip) transfers, said network device and server through the aforementioned Internet purpose Server; one of the lines, connected to a destination branch device and January 1J branch device includes an external Internet Protocol 2049-3793-PF4.ptc page 323 1245997 j number 901QFi4fiR 6. scope of patent application (jP ) The packet forms an internal Internet protocol (I? Describes the function of the internal Internet protocol (ιρ) packet meaning and according to the work of the Internet, b 'Keshu network device connected to the Internet protocol, not to mention the media router Connect at least-Qin Zhixi A media router routes the aforementioned external Internet Protocol (IP) packets, and uses two transceivers to communicate; the aforementioned network point device and the aforementioned J (and the aforementioned network point device = protocol UP) forward the internal network to transmit and receive the aforementioned; the aforementioned Internet 3 packets The method is to install with the aforementioned destination network protocol (IP): Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network for channel signal system call: to send and receive including N. ·? Common packet, implement _mosquito end ^ 4 different internal Internet Protocol (IP) and Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network and at least —KU Ziya and the aforementioned gateway device contains a large number of live fathers Network, the lower control lever slant 1, +, λ in the tortoise control clothing, used to control the communication connection of the public telephone exchange network in a same 2fi 41. Said road installation ° placed Λ expertly _ Zhi Bao 3 just described a point code of the public telephone exchange network. In the system, J: A gateway device is used for an Internet Protocol (IP) communication system. An Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network includes at least two outlets. Π ρ> 'The outlet split and temple server described in the month 11 are connected to a destination outlet device and a mesh seal via one of the aforementioned Internet 6Λ ^ transfer networks /' The outlet device includes an external Internet connection The function of forming an internal Internet Protocol (IP) packet within the protocol (IP) 5 and restoring the aforementioned external Internet protocol according to the aforementioned, Internet Protocol (1 p) packet mi 2049-793-PF4.r Page 324, Rev. 1245997-Ml 90inB4RH 6. Application for patent coverage (^ p) packet function; the aforementioned outlet device is connected to the media router connected at least-= media routing theft; external Internet Protocol (IP) ^ , Using the method of sending and receiving the aforementioned two ('1 ;; =, the aforementioned server one), the sending and receiving of the former two means that the internal Internet protocol (ip) packet describes the Internet device and the target feeder. Communication; front and back The communication connection control method is to execute the first packet sending and receiving packets. ==, the internal Internet Protocol (IP) packet protocol (IP) forwarding network i to = controls the aforementioned intermediary exhibition connection The Internet 2] switch uses a dot code to identify the gateway device: Λ spoon-type seed feeders in Mody phones are used in an Internet protocol ... It contains at least two 1-channel Cooperative (IP) communication system (IP) forwarding network; the aforementioned network points ^ and, the Internet Protocol protocol (IP) forwarding network of the server-line, = server state through the aforementioned Internet destination server; The aforementioned outlets are continued to a destination outlet device and one; = Γ Department Internet 2 = Internet Protocol (IP) π Internet Protocol (IP) packets, and packets according to the aforementioned IP); the aforementioned outlets are connected: :: The external Internet Protocol router is connected to at least one terminal; ^ At least-the media router; the aforementioned media: protocol (IP) packet mode, fish ΐ = use of the aforementioned external network = point device and the aforementioned feeding service: Great Point The device performs communication; Set the protocol of the Internet Protocol (IP) packet. 2049-3793-PF4.ptc Page 325 1245997 Μ Modified M3l 901QR4RR Six. Patent application scope, with the aforementioned destination network device and destination Internet protocol claw) According to NO.7 common: = J = the method for controlling the communication connection between networks to send and receive packets k L number, the charging terminal's call control information of the aforementioned internal Internet ^ communication J, number: unified terminal Communication connection control, the aforementioned servo cries 7 = (IP) packets, executes the correspondence table of Internet Protocol (IP) addresses, and 7 addresses of telephone numbers and Internet Protocol (IP) packets. That is, the telephone number is converted into a network 2 9. A kind of network point device, which includes a network protocol with at least two network protocols (⑴ Communication System Protocol (IP) forwarding network; One line of the Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network with the server ^, D, the server is through the aforementioned Internet-destination server; the aforementioned branch device:-the destination node device and (ip) packets form the internal Internet Road Association 3 According to the external Internet protocol, the aforementioned internal Internet Protocol (11)) ·) packet function and the function according to the UP) packet; the aforementioned network external network coordinator; the aforementioned media router connection at least two \ Connect at least ^ media routes to the aforementioned external Internet protocol (丨 p), end devices, and use transceivers to communicate; the aforementioned network method, fine-point device network protocol (IP) forwarding network internal network, server system Use the aforementioned internet packet mode to communicate with the aforementioned destination network internal internet protocol (IP) letter; the aforementioned internet protocol (丨 P) shoe II and destination server to communicate between the terminals of the system System t, 'Feng's call control data of the signal system based on No. 7 common communication. The first two transceivers contain No. 7 common communication packets, which are executed-communication between terminals is connected to the internal Internet Protocol (IP) 2049-3793- PF4.ptc Page 326 1245997 Scope of patent application :: Front = Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding network is performing the above-mentioned two-terminal continuous connection control. It is the registration of an original Internet Protocol (ιρ) address at the address of the network device. Management table. Refer to 〇 · A media router for Internet Protocol (IP) communication and feeders; the aforementioned network devices and feeders are connected to the destination network through a line of the aforementioned IPi transfer network. Device and ~, servo, and Lishu outlets include the function of forming an internal Internet Protocol (IP) packet based on an external Internet protocol ^) packet, and restoring the aforementioned external Internet according to the 2 internal Internet Protocol (IP) packet Network protocol (IP) packet function; the aforementioned outlet device is connected to at least one media router: the aforementioned media router is connected to at least one terminal device, and the sending and receiving = network = network protocol (1?) Packet is used to communicate with the aforementioned outlet device Mingxingtong 2 Θ said network device and the aforementioned server use the internal Internet protocol (IP) I / P method to send and receive the internal Internet protocol (IP) I / P within the Internet and the Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network, and the target network device It communicates with the destination server through the Internet protocol (（p). The transfer control method for inter-terminal communication connection according to the No. 7 common channel signal to the transmission network includes the No. 7 common The above-mentioned internal Internet protocol (IP) seal of the call control data of the 5 tiger system performs the connection control of communication between terminals. The aforementioned media router transmits and receives call control data to and from a connection server through a different network device. Internet Protocol (IP) packets. ,,,, 31 · The media router according to item 30 of the scope of patent application, wherein the media router described above includes a multimedia material. 2049-3793-PF4.ptc Page 327 ------ t ^ i〇105465 "Tao Zheng VI, Patent Application Scope-, 32 · A media router, in use, of which the Internet Protocol (0- ^ Internet) IP protocol communication server and server; the aforementioned node installation) forwarding network includes at least two lines of one of the IP protocol forwarding network, and the server is in the servo state through the aforementioned Internet destination; the aforementioned node device A packet, a ..., a destination network device and a 2P) packet form the internal Internet g. According to the external Internet protocol, the function of the internal Internet protocol (IP) packet and the packet are defined according to ( IP) packet function; the aforementioned outlets | restore the aforementioned external Internet Protocol 2; the aforementioned media router is connected to; 24, and at least one media route is connected to the aforementioned external Internet Protocol (IP) S 勹 terminal device, and the use of transceivers Communication; the aforementioned branch device and A ^ method, and the aforementioned branch device network protocol (IP) forwarding network internal receiving server uses the aforementioned internet packet method to communicate with the aforementioned destination internal internet protocol ( IP) ; The above-mentioned Internet Protocol (IP) 置 t and target feeders communicate with each other through the system terminal connection connection system t ,,, 罔 according to the 1 ^ 0 · 7 common channel signal channel signal system beer control: ί Material L,:, contains N for sending and receiving. · 7 common communication packets, performing one communication between two terminals. The internal Internet Protocol (IP) passes the aforementioned network devices to the front network; the two media routers mentioned above pass through the 4 network with digital audio data. : = (== Transfer network send and receive packets to win J. Pottery Seeds: Some :::: Lost to 'for-Internet Protocol (IP) communication devices and feeders; the aforementioned outlets are set up to include at least The protocol of the two network points is UP. 4: The setting network is through the aforementioned Internet destination server; the aforementioned network location is set up by the destination network device and-the device contains the IP address according to the external Internet protocol I, page 328 2049. -3793-PF4.ptc I245997 Month __Case No. 90105465 VI. Scope of Patent Application _____ (^ p) Packets form the Internal Internet Protocol: the internal and Internet Protocol (IP) packets are returned before and according to ^ Function of Ip2 packet; the aforementioned network device connection should be at least :::::: _ ,,, and other media routers should be connected at least _ final media routing 2 3 External Internet Protocol (IP) packet party 2: j仃 Communication; the aforementioned branch point device and the aforementioned branch point device_ 路Set (IP) network internal routing packets ;; =; Ito utilizing the Internet; packet mode, with the purpose of the network protocol (IP). The aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding network and the server perform communication implementation-terminal generation-communication call setting Internet packet to form the aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) packet and packet, and use the transmission network to initiate a communication Continuation phase. Distinguish the Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding 34 · — a kind of terminal device, using the Internet Protocol (IP) packet of the address, 苴 勹 = live 5 tiger horse or the Internet protocol as the terminal location and feeder Yes; two network devices are connected to a destination network device:: = η) to the network of 'f', connected according to an external Internet protocol, the network device contains packets to form an internal Internet protocol 2049 -3793-PF4.ptc Page 329 1245997-Month Case No. 90105465 VI. The function of applying for IP (Patent Scope) packets and restoring the aforementioned external Internet Protocol (IP) (C IP) based on the aforementioned internal Internet packets Close the connection at least-the media ship router; (previous connection ;;; point finalization and use the method of sending and receiving the aforementioned external Internet Protocol II: to communicate with the aforementioned network device; the aforementioned network server is used in the aforementioned The Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding network describes the internal Internet Protocol (IP) packet to communicate with the aforementioned destination network device and destination server; the aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding network is based on No. 7 Common channel letter Method for controlling communication connection between terminals of the system No. 7 to send and receive call control internal, network protocols (including packets, implementation-terminal-to-terminal system) including the No. 7 common channel signal system, it is described that the terminal device is through a media router and an outlet Device, which is included in the Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding server and contains the Internet Protocol (IP) packets. 35, a terminal device for an Internet Protocol (IP) communication In the system, the Internet Protocol (Iρ) transfer network includes at least two network devices and servers; the aforementioned network devices and servers are one of the Internet Protocol (IP) transfer networks: ^ ^ σ, Green Road Connected to a destination network device and a destination server, the above-mentioned network Pei Zhi contains the function of forming an internal Internet Protocol (Iρ) packet based on an external Internet Protocol (I ρ) packet and according to the foregoing. 卩Internet, fixed (IP) packet restores the function of the aforementioned external Internet Protocol (^ P) packet; the aforementioned branch device is connected to at least one media router; Fast routing means connecting at least one terminal, and the external transceiver using the Internet Protocol (IP) packets of the embodiment, with the network device 2049.3793-PF4.ptc Page 330 1245997 2 .; The aforementioned branch point device and the aforementioned server communicate with the aforementioned destination point device and destination server by sending and receiving the aforementioned internal Internet protocol (丨 p) packet within the aforementioned Internet Liding (IP) forwarding network. Communication; ^ The above-mentioned Internet Protocol (1?) Forwarding network according to N0.7 == inter-terminal communication connection control method to send and receive the aforementioned internal Internet Protocol (I㈠) containing call control data of νο.7 ==: system The packet ^ performs communication control between terminals; 'The aforementioned multimedia data includes at least text, digitized still images, digitized animation, digitized sound, and digital data. 36. A terminal device for an Internet Protocol (IP ) Communication system association 1, TP includes an Internet network with at least two network devices and servers; slightly df; the aforementioned network devices and devices are connected to a purpose through the aforementioned Internet == forwarding network Branch device ;: Purpose: server; the aforementioned branch device includes the function of forming an internal Internet Protocol (IP) packet according to the external Internet and the function of packet The aforementioned outlet device is connected to at least one media router. The media router is connected to at least one terminal device, and the sending and receiving method is used to communicate with the aforementioned outlet device. The aforementioned internal Internet Protocol (IP) has j = type, and performs the protocol (IP) transfer network with the aforementioned destination network device and destination server according to No. 7 common channel signal, prior, and inter-communication communication connection control method To send and receive common ', The scope of the patent application: the aforementioned internal Internet protocol (IP) with call control information of the t number, including the destination address Γ-communication connection control between terminals, the aforementioned terminal device transmits a packet agreement (ιρ! Ϊ́number of the Internet) Road Protocol (IP) packets to the aforementioned Internet Internet Protocol (ιρ) forwarding network converts the aforementioned Internet: m packets are destination protocol (IP) bits corresponding to the aforementioned destination phone number, and Communicate the above-mentioned Internet Protocol (IP) packet including the aforementioned destination Internet address to the end-a type of Internet Protocol (IP) communication system, its' ^-Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding network, Contains at least two settings; 〇3 masters and one less point to install the illusion point device, which includes a packet-shaped Internet Protocol (UP) packet that is converted into an internal Internet Protocol (IP) packet according to the external network to restore the aforementioned external network. Function: 1 w U network protocol (IP) packet. The aforementioned network device is connected through a router with multi-address dial-back and the main line connects at least two destination network devices via the two lines. At least one media router in the aforementioned Internet protocol, Ύτρ, ± neighbors, and 疋 dP) transfer the aforementioned network point device outside the network to connect at least one terminal device. The media router connects to at least one terminal device. The packet j method is used to perform the connection with the aforementioned network point device = Internet Protocol dP) Uranium, and the 'point network device are used to transmit and receive the internal Internet Protocol (IP) protocol (IP) transfer network within the Internet. , The package method, and the purpose of the 1245997 amendment date _901Q54RB VI, patent application network location f set communication; and the manufacturer described in the Internet Protocol (1 P) transfer network according to a multiple access communication control ^ ' 'In order to send and receive the aforementioned internal Internet Protocol (IP) packets, perform communication control between one, two, and three. 3 8 4 ^ General communication system · The Internet Protocol (IP) agreement (1 pt) described in item 37 of the scope of patent applications When the Internet Protocol (IP) address is not registered in the aforementioned Internet. ^ When an address management order is issued, the aforementioned network device discards the available | 7Γ ,,,, and Kushiro Protocol (IP) packets. 3 g _ h types of terminal communication methods, which are implemented in the Internet Protocol (IP) communication system as described in the first patent application scope, which include: the terminal device transmits a packet (IP) packet 6 s meaning 5 purpose This is the Internet protocol for addressing blunders, and the Internet protocol (丨 p) forwarding network is described, and the (IP) address is set and the J packet is transmitted.-The destination Internet protocol The protocol (IP) is a packet that corresponds to an Internet Protocol (IP) address. The terminal device receives a transmitted Internet Protocol (IP) packet 4 ^ ° 5: packet, and root and external packets Form the internal logic terminal on the receiving side; the terminal dream and the ▲ 铒 editor identify the alum and decide to describe the logic side on the sending side子 戋 前 社 ^ 1 u through the k line path, which is connected to the front 子 子 or scribe letter logic terminal, using the call 2049-3793-PF4.ptc Page 333 1245997 Correct the internal packet of control data, and execute the communication connection control between terminals. 41 · The internet protocol (IP) transfer network as described in item 40 of the scope of patent application ', which is call control data of the common channel signal method of forming internal packets according to the logic terminals on the sending side and external packets. 4 2 · According to the Internet Protocol (I P) transfer network described in item 40 of the scope of the patent application, it uses the SIP method call control data of the internal packet to form the internal packet according to the logical terminal on the sending side and the external packet. 4 3 · The Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network as described in item 40 of the scope of patent application, which forms the phone number of the internal packet according to the logical terminal on the sending side and the external packet. 44. The Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network as described in item 40 of the scope of patent application, which is connected to the public telephone exchange network. 45. The Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network described in item 44 of the scope of patent application, wherein the terminal device is a telephone. 4 6 · The Internet Protocol (I p) transfer network as described in item 40 of the scope of patent application, wherein the terminal device includes a wireless interface function. ,,, 47. The Internet Protocol (Ip) 1 ^, ', 所述 described in item 40 of the scope of the patent application, which is connected to a media router, and contains media call control information with the media router L. Internet Protocol (IP) packets. ,,, 48. The Internet Protocol (Ip) described in item 40 of the scope of the patent application, which is connected to a media routing filter and collects data with the media router. An Internet Protocol (IP) packet for call control data in U N I mode. 49 · Internet Protocol (ιρ) as described in item 40 of the scope of patent application 2049-3793-PF4.ptc Page 334 1245997 、 Applicable patent scope ~~ 11 network 'It is connected to a media router, and receives media control packets with the media router ^ 彳 ° s SI p mode beer call control information Road Agreement (I p) packet. w50. The Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network as described in item 40 of the scope of the patent application, wherein the terminal device is identified by a telephone number. 、 // 51 · The Internet Protocol (IP) network as described in Item 40 of the scope of patent application, wherein when the communication connection control between terminals is in the call phase, sending or receiving messages between terminals contains digital media Internet Protocol (IP) packets. 5 2 · The Internet Protocol (〖p) forwarding network as described in item 40 of the scope of patent application, in which the Internet Protocol (IP) address is formed according to the telephone number ° 53. If the scope of patent application is item 52 The described "Internet Protocol (IP) transit network" contains information that telephone numbers and Internet Protocol (IP) addresses have a one-to-one correspondence. 54. The Internet Protocol (ιρ) transfer network described in item 40 of the scope of patent application, which is connected to more than one public telephone exchange network through a gateway device. &quot; 55. The Internet Protocol (1?) Forwarding network as described in item 40 of the scope of the patent application, which is viewed from the public telephone exchange network and is connected to the public through the gateway device of the signal exchange office of the public telephone exchange network. Telephone exchange network. 56. According to the Internet Protocol (ιρ) transfer network described in Item 40 of the scope of patent application, one of the wireless transceiver units is connected to the Internet Protocol (ιρ) transfer network, and the aforementioned wireless transceiver unit is used to send and receive wireless Form of call control information Case No. 1245997; Revision date of 90105465. VI. Scope of Patent Application. 5 7 · One of the wireless transmission and reception units connected to the Internet Protocol (Ip) transfer network described in item 40 of the scope of patent application is connected to the Internet Protocol (丨 p) transfer network. Send and receive phone numbers. 5 8 · According to the Internet Protocol (I p) transfer network described in Item 40 of the scope of patent application, one of the wireless transceiver units is connected to the Internet Protocol (〗 p) transfer network. To send and receive sound signals. 5 9. According to the Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network described in item 40 of the scope of patent application, one of the wireless transceiver units is connected to the Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network. The aforementioned wireless transceiver unit is used to Send and receive digital media. 6 0 · The Internet Protocol (丨 p) forwarding network as described in item 40 of the scope of the patent application, which distinguishes between communication lines used to send and receive internal packets containing call control data and those used to send and receive sound data. Internally sealed communication lines. 61. The Internet Protocol (ιρ) 1 Send Network as described in Item 40 of the scope of patent application, in which an Internet Protocol (IP) terminal &amp; Internet Protocol (IP) is registered on a branch device Address, when an Internet Protocol (IP) packet X containing an unregistered send = source Internet Protocol (IP) address is received, the raindrop device discards the aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) packet. 6 2. The Internet Protocol (I p) transfer network as described in item 40 of the patent application scope, in which the Internet Protocol (the final Internet Protocol (IP)) is registered on the branch device Address, when an Internet Protocol (IP) packet X containing an unregistered outgoing = destination Internet Protocol (IP) address is received, the network device discards the aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) packet. 2049-3793-PF4.ptc Page 336 1245997 Month Amendment 丄 -j No. 90] 054 叩 / 、, patent application scope 6 Li 3 · — a kind of Internet Protocol πρ) transfer network, its logical end, , Λ ^ The network side device on the letter side forms internal logic 3 ::, the external packet sends the received logical terminal of the internal packet. The network point device is based on the logical terminal of the packet; the terminal is equipped with two:], decides that it should receive the internal transmission The side logic terminal or the aforementioned receiving path is connected to the contents of the previous control data. The "logical" &amp; child's use includes a call to a type of Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding, control, and device; where the external packet is It uses the sending side which includes 2 packets with Internet access $, and uses the network equipment on the receiving side to change to the internal network. Devices use internal packets to communicate; :::; external packets, routes, and connections to the aforementioned sending side Network point device or: Set; use communication line to set up the use of internal network points containing call control data to install connection control. The communication between terminals 65. An Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network, point device 'the aforementioned point device contains more than two; edited 2 :: \ Internet = system profit' point side device conversion ^; The sub-packet / and outside; and the network device on the k side restores the aforementioned external packet, part of the sentence i 隹; T 1,. U, ″ ″, within I, only f / I communication; editing device Then use the communication line path to connect to the network device on the daemon side or the network on the trusted side. Perform the second, sub-identification ... and internal packet of call control data to order the final communication connection control. 66.—An Internet Protocol (10 Forwarding Network 'which has 2 Internet access pages, page 337 2049-3793-PF4.ptc, said _correction point set', the seven-person line of the network is fixed with logic: 1 0 32 or more communication lines, each communication logic terminal, and each terminal ^ Among them, each of the network device on the transmission side, each packet of the network device forms an internal packet; the aforementioned external packet on the receiving side ; Sub, respectively restore the aforementioned internal packet to the sending-side logical terminal or = to use the communication line path to connect to the aforementioned logical terminal including call control and the heart-side logical terminal, and the terminal device is profitable. The internal packet is used to control the communication between the terminals. 6 • A branch cluster contains more than 2 logical terminals according to the logic of the sending side. It has an internal seal spoon and a eve. And the function of the root terminal, the logical terminal identification information of # Γ, +, = determines the logic code on the receiving side. 4 The internal packet contains the call control data and the phone number 6 8. If the patent application is intercepted, it will be based on the sending side. The outlet device described in item m of the logic terminal, in which the way of signalling the beer! Part of the packet forms a common communication letter of the internal packet 6: as described in Item 67 of the logical application series—the logical wise and the external packet Form the internal call control information. 70. A SIP method. A branch device, i sentence? Indium, l, the suppression device on the side device has the function of sending internal packets according to the sending side :::, J And the network on the trusted side uses = bu ;; the logical terminal identification information of the internal packet received by the packet determines the function of the logical terminal of the packet. 2049-3793-PF4.ptc Page 338 1245997 # 1 ^^ 90105465 6. Scope of patent application. Month Θ The internet protocol of the point device is UP = 糸; the point device of the above point device is converted to 3 ;: It uses the sending side to restore the external packet.罔 2 is used for internal transmission through the internal packet. · The device is connected to the front by the communication line path. The end-point device on the trusted side is used to perform communication connection control between terminals before using call control data. Packet, kinky = · 一 = 罔 point device 'It is set up in an Internet protocol with more than 2 nets, and contains more than 2 logical terminals UP) /', net,:, and external packets System, use the outlet device on the sending side to change the delivery package, and use the outlet device on the receiving side to restore the external, network: seal the result to the aforementioned outlet device on the sending side or the above-mentioned road waste. Package to perform communication connection control between terminals. H control the internal seal of the gastric cavity 73.-a kind of network vibration, which contains more than two signal lines are fixed with logical terminals ... on the sending side of the two: the mother through the logical end of the external packet to form an internal one Each logical terminal of the network point device is divided into the aforementioned external packet on the receiving side; the terminal devices use the packet 1 ^ 11 卩 packet to restore the internal packet for communication. 5 ^ Called control data 74 · — A gateway device, which is located in the Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network as described, ^ Target 40 Item This gateway device is connected to 1245997 Amendment == fixed (IP) transfer network and public telephone exchange network, = = device, which uses tree telephone exchange: 75,] to subscribe to the connection control. The said network ^ terminal device 'is set in a fixed transmission network such as the number 50 in the scope of patent application, sending (IP) forwarding, = Internet Protocol (IP) packets to the aforementioned Internet Protocol telephone number is As described above, the Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network forms a corresponding address, and θ is transmitted to the terminal device through a corresponding Internet Protocol (IP) bit. J 7 6. ~ Baby A. The logic terminal is connected to the Internet &amp; Road Protocol (IP) forwarding network, which is based on the inner side and the outer side of the sending side, and the packet forms an inner packet. Terminal; one of the logical terminal identification information of the aforementioned packet determines a logical terminal device on the receiving side ^^ The logical terminal on the receiving side or the logical terminal on the receiving side is connected with an internal packet, continued 'using an address including multicast (mul ticast) No. 7 7 · Ru Shen ^ 亍 Communication connection control between terminals. Forwarding Network · Applied Application_Internet Protocol (IP) 78 as described in Item 76 of the Patent Scope 78, such as, ^ The aforementioned internal packets contain sound data. Forwarding Network, the Internet Protocol (IP) 79 described in item 76 of the patent scope, such as, Chinese ^ The aforementioned internal packet contains electronic news. The forwarding network re-applies the Internet Protocol (IP) described in item 76 of the scope of patent application. // The internal packet contains dynamic data. The forwarding network, the Internet Protocol (IP) 81_ described in item 76 of Fumingyi Patent, and the aforementioned internal packets contain digital information. Internet Protocol (丨 p) forwarding network, which includes _ 网点 装 2049-3793-PF4.ptc Amendment 340 Tribute 1245997 _ Case No. 901054 Zhan Yue VI. The scope of the patent application package is equal to V. Among them, the network device on the logical side of the sending side is based on the household; the receiving is: a partial packet; Upon receiving the message, it is determined that the logic of the internal packet should be received = the logical terminal of the packet identifies the path of the data line, and continues to the aforementioned sending p =; the terminal is set to use the communication terminal, including multi-point transmission; using °: = 子 or the aforementioned receiving side Logic communication connection control. Only internal packets are executed between the terminals. 8 · · A variety of Internet Protocols (Internet Protocol (IP) Transfer: Internet 'is characterized by: placement; of which external packets are enclosed by 3 Internet access points. "Packaging" and use the network device on the receiving side to convert to the internal enclosure and use the internal packet to communicate; finally, the U-line I is connected to the aforementioned transmitting-side network points f1 and 彳 5. Letter-side network point device, continued control. &Lt; 円 $ packet, execute communication between terminals 83.-a kind of Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network, where the Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network has 3 or more The rain-spot network device contains more than two logic terminals. Among them, the network device on the 罔 side uses the network-side device on the transport side to convert to an internal packet. The terminal device uses the communication line path to continue to send ^ = _ devices or the aforementioned network device on the receiving side to make =; edit the terminal to identify the internal packets of the poor message and the multicast address. ^ Control of communication between terminals. Hold仃 1245997 _Case No. 901054 叩 ^ 'Application for patent scope Λ Revision 8 4 ·-a kind of network point device, 苴 tetrino, in which the logical terminal on the sender side is outsourced, and the packet forms an internal packet, and the root; :: ::: Internet Protocol (IP) sub-identification information determines the logic on the receiving side ::::: The logical end of the packet is connected to the aforementioned logical end on the sending side, and is connected to the G line. Multi-bit transmission bit; speech-side logical end-message continuity control. 卩 Packets to perform inter-terminal communication. 85. A network point device, which is characterized in that the network point device including the external it side has a logic U based on the transmission side. 卩 Packets The function of forming an internal packet, and compiling information and f according to the logical terminal identification of the received internal packet ^ Information *? The farmer has the short g of the aforementioned internal packet for 5 days. Function, the terminal device is controlled by the above-mentioned sending-side network device or the receiving-side communication connection control. 丨 Implemented the conversion between the terminal-based network device and the internal packet is sent using the The side is replaced by an external packet. The network device on the receiving side is used to make the packet stronger, t, and the node devices communicate with each other using internal packets. The frame line, f] is connected to the aforementioned transmission point node, w &lt; Envelopes between execution terminals = Intermediate network with two addresses for sending and receiving, its T has 3 nets nested with Internet access points) transit network; among them, the outer packet is the net on the sender side, page 342 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 1245997 Amendment ---, 90105465 Helmet-Day 6-Patent application scope-'___ The point device is converted to internal use and received as an external packet, and the network point device is replaced with an internal packet: letter line Passing through, it is connected to the aforementioned outlet on the transmission side; y :: Γ is set, and the address including the multicast address is used to control the communication between terminals. A terminal device that includes a wireless interface device that is connected to: 0 Internet protocol transfer 8 9 · _—a terminal device described in the scope of patent application 46, which is applicable to an Internet protocol ( I p sends the network. In the aforementioned Internet Protocol (ιρ) transfer network, an internal packet is formed according to a series of = and an external packet, and a trusted side is determined according to the logical terminal identification information of the = part of the packet. Logic sub; Lishu terminal device includes a wireless interface device, and uses the non-receiving section and communication line path to connect to the aforementioned transmitting-side logical end type and the aforementioned receiving-side logical terminal. $ 9 0 · A terminal device, which is suitable for An Internet Protocol (I ρ) transfer network. The aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network includes two network point devices. The network point device includes more than two logical terminals. The sending side ^ The network point device is based on the sending side. The logic terminals and external packets form an internal packet; the network device on the trusted side decides to receive based on the logic terminal identification information of the received internal packet. Terminal portion of the logical packet; the terminal device, the apparatus comprising a wireless interface, and using a wireless transceiver unit and a communication path circuit, connected to the reading-side logic messenger or the receiving end terminal of the terminal logic. 2049-3793-PF4.ptc Page 343 1245997 Amendment No. 90105465 6. Scope of patent application 91 · A terminal device, which is suitable for — sending networks, the aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) transfer, gateway / internet Road Protocol (IP) transposition, where the external packet is packaged with two Internet access points on the sending side, and the network point devices ',', 罔 = devices on the receiving side are converted into internal sealing devices to contain logical terminal identification. ^ The external packet is described in principle, and the terminal device at the network point includes an internal packet for communication; the internal and communication line paths are connected to the front and back, and wirelessly transmit and receive the network point device on the trusted side. ^ The network point device on the side of the letter or the front 92 · — a kind of terminal device, which is suitable for — network delivery, the aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) transposition ^ Internet Protocol (ip) transposition, the aforementioned network point device includes There are two fixed logic terminals. Among them, on the transmission side network ^ line terminals, • an external packet is used to form an internal packet, and ^ ^ logic point devices on each of the receiving side logic terminals, and the t side network is the aforementioned For external packets, the aforementioned terminal f is set by the person: 2 = the packet is restored and the wireless transmission and reception unit and the communication line are used to connect the two: J set: the side logic terminal or the aforementioned trusted side logic terminal. S 刖 a delivery 9 ”. Two types of Internet Protocol (IP) transfer networks, which are characterized by: 2 of them are farmed with Internet access points, and the network device on the sender side 4 packets are converted into internal packets, and the network device on the trusted side It also includes information that the network device communicates with the internal packet; the terminal device ^ is connected to the network device on the sending side or the network device on the receiving side, and uses the logic terminal identification information and call control on the receiving side. Data, internal packets, and control of communication connections between terminals; of which, at the branch device, page 344, 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 1245997, amends the number of people 901054 (6), the Internet Protocol (CIP) for patent application addresses Network Protocol (Internet Protocol) (packet. Τmonth | J v outlet device discards the above, ^ a network device installed 4 'It is on the side of the case where there are 2 devices connected to the Internet; convert external packets to The internal packet is enclosed by the envelope, and the outlet device is called by the internal message and beer. The material is f: f M contains the identification information of the trusted terminal and terminal identification. If the core end is lost, the packet is executed. When the internet connection device controlled by the communication connection is set with the terminal source internet protocol (ί p address = Internet Protocol (IP) packet containing an unregistered outgoing message and the aforementioned point is missing , ,, .-I will discard the described Internet Protocol (IP) packets. Set up 9 continued 5 to definite (IP) transfer network 'It is a terminal installed in a closed path φ ^ ^ ° § When the device communicates with the public ^ ^ live machine, the communication connection control using the Internet protocols fTP, B ^ ^ ^ Φ M including call control resources is included. The "inter-chain" Internet protocol (ιρ) transfer network described in item 95 of the patent scope includes a wireless interface device. Placement = · to eighteen Internet protocol (IP) transfer networks, It is through the installation of the Qai Shi, and Bei A public telephone network. When the connected terminal device communicates with the public ', the live network's electric live machine, it uses the 2049- 3793-PF4.ptc Page 345 1245997 Amended Case No. 90105465 VI. Application Benefits: It is called the Internet Protocol (IP) packet of control data, which controls the communication connection between the terminal device and the phone. · An Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network, which is connected to the gateway through a gateway device. A, electricity management network. When the connected terminal device and the electric home device connected to the public 3 :: are communicating, the Internet Protocol (IP) packet containing call control data including common line information is used. , To control the communication connection between the terminal device and the telephone.,, The Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network, which has access to the public through the gateway through the gateway to the public security Leigu received yellow $ eight “% Electrical Network” When communication between the terminal device being performed and the package 2 is called the second data 2f, the device has the use of Internet Protocol (ιρ) packets to perform the terminal device. Communication between machines and connection control function. 100. An Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding network, with terminal devices on the beans, and using the Internet address of the device according to Lei Ye 铼 /, 接 ,,, and 2 to use the == === device (-) The packet is sent to the end of the connection = = ：:; On the agreement: ^: Internet protocol Π) forwarding network, whose 丄 ί =. Address, two with call; use: Internet protocol niches (, package, type for terminal device two = • an Internet protocol (Ιρ) to transfer to the terminal device, using call control data including two, male to 2 Packets are used for communication between terminal devices. 4. Qianqi Agreement GP) Page 346 2〇49-3793-PF4.ptc 1245997 --- Case No. 90105465 _______ Year 6, Date of Patent Application 1 0 3 -An Internet Protocol (Ip) transfer network that connects to more than two terminal devices and uses Internet Protocol (IP) packets that contain call control data for a common line signal method to perform communication connection control between terminals. 1 0 4 · — An Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network that connects to more than two terminal devices and uses Internet Protocol (IP) packets that include call control data in the SIP method to perform communication connection control between terminals . 105 · —An Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network, which is connected to two or more terminal devices, and uses Internet Protocol (IP) packets containing call control data in the H323 method to perform communication connection control between terminals. 106. An Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network, which has two Internet point devices, the aforementioned network point devices are connected to terminal devices, and registered with the Internet Protocol (IP) bit Address, when receiving an Internet Protocol (IP ^ packet containing an unregistered sending source Internet Protocol (IP) address, the aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) packet is discarded, and it contains call control data. Internet Protocol (IP) protocol connection control. 疋 仃 ,,,,,,,,,,,, and 107. An Internet Protocol (IP) relay network, which is connected to the device, and has a terminal and a Kushiro protocol based on the telephone number. (IP) address function, and the use of packet owing: ,, :::: (? Ρ) packets, communication between terminals and Internet Protocol (IP) transfers with different companies 108 ·-a terminal device, which Shuttle network, the aforementioned Internet protocol such as P) transfer network protocol deduction P) transfer j is the use of call control including 2049-3793-PF4.ptc page 347 1245997 said amendment 6, patent application-^ material agreement Π) package ' Inter-terminal communication connection (Determined) Internet protocol agreement of the telephone number of the terminal device of the letter holder, Internet protocol (IP protocol) forwarding network, the aforementioned Internet terminal device fM generates the receiver and server according to the received telephone number. The Internet Protocol King also uses the received URL # ^ w and returns it to the terminal device, J's own Internet Protocol (ίΡ) address to the letter. A terminal device can communicate with each other. 109. A kind of terminal device, the Internet protocol (IP; transfer; Internet application patent scope No. 105! 5) described in the disease item, a terminal communication method, which is applicable to the front line. Honest Fanganla, to an Internet Protocol (IP)), it is connected to the network system, and uses the Internet Protocol (IP) packet that contains the call data to perform communication control control protocol (IP) between terminals. ) Marshalling a phone that contains the recipient ’s terminal device: The aforementioned terminal device sends a packet to the aforementioned Internet Protocol (Ιρ = έ 马 = Internet Protocol (IP) packet (IP) forwarding network according to the received U ; The Internet Protocol (IP) address set by the aforementioned Internet protocol and ^ = produces the terminal installation device of the recipient using the returned recipient to the terminal device; the aforementioned final address and its own Internet The Internet Protocol (IP) set in the Road Protocol 1 communicates.) The address and the recipient's terminal device in. An Internet Protocol (including 2 access points) to the Internet, which is characterized by: an end device, and Use of a dot network device Continue to the final guard 丨 J Internet Protocol (IP) 2049-3793-PF4.ptc Page 348 丄 245997 ^ 901Q54RR said, the scope of patent application ____ ^ 'for communication between terminals ... 丨 :: The address is included in the registration ::::; to: external packet, when it is sending ^, it will be changed to ;; the external packet of the branch device sends the packet to the second party, and the network point, dagger, and text # side of the network point The device is also h. The communication between x devices is through internal packets. 112 · An Internet Talk 6 which includes two transfer networks with Internet access (P), which is characterized by: At the end, the Internet protocol (丨 P) of the two systems for inter-terminal communication is included in the address control; for external packets, when they are received in the address, the address is changed to internal. : Two: the external envelope of the branch device is received by the envelope; and the J device of the branch device is included in the Si? Second Association (IP) transfer, the network 'is characterized by: J device, and the use of the included,' strictly described the branch device continues to Final: packet, for terminal-to-terminal communication 贤 = reputable Internet Protocol (IP) Ai is replaced with an internal packet, the network is strong 1, the message is installed at the network device on the sending side, and the network is installed on the receiving side: The internal packet is used to send the external packet through the included external packet ^ 'The external packet registered in the received internal packet is included in the network device package on the trusted side. h "When the address is restored, this external cover is restored. 4 kinds of Internet Protocol (IP) clocks, ^ which contains 2 to reach the Internet and: 'characterized by: __ Asia and the use of call control 2049- 3793-PF4.ptc Page 349 1245997 Amendment date No. 9010541 ^ VI. Apply for a patent range (IP) packet for communication control between terminals-heart =, = :; change: clever packet, included in the network device Receiving side :: The address of the recipient of the external packet contained in the second packet. When it is the address, the recipient of the registered external packet is restored. ^ T ^ ί m IP) # ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ The device, 廿, 罔 is set at 4 points. In each of the network device, the position of the (IP) packet is ^, detailed and generated based on the phone number. The Internet protocol is included on the sending side :: ;; :::: (2) Sealing: When the address of the sender uses the address of the sender that contains the call control information, the communication between the terminals is controlled. ", Internet Protocol (IP) packets, Finally ^ 6 · —A kind of Internet Association which contains more than 2 marriages to ^ conveying Qiao 'is characterized by: Connected to the terminal device, the second device is set in the description of each network device,…) the address of the packet, when the = code is generated, the Internet protocol is included in the sender ’s network, and the address of the recipient of the packet is used. Contains call control data: When the address of the trusted recipient is recorded, the end-to-end communication connection is controlled. The weekly protocol (π) packet is used to transfer the two types of Internet protocols, including two Internet access points. The network is characterized in that: it is connected to the terminal device, and in each of the other network device, the address of the packet, when the network; :: Xiedian; (with ^^ __ sender address package only 2049 -3793-PF4.ptc Page 350 1245997 Correction Case No. 901054 ^ VI. Scope of patent application _ refers to the network included in the trusted side. When the sender address registered in the call control data f is used, the communication between terminals is controlled. y ', 罔, 、, 罔, and Kushiro Protocol (IP) packets, to carry out the final 118 ·-a kind of gateway system, the return network and the public telephone network, t,', "are connected to the Internet protocol (IP) to a terminal device, the aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding network is connected by the aforementioned public telephone network ^ ^ The telephone network is connected to a telephone, and the Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding 2 is considered to have The function of the signal office; packetization with the aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP), L = the use of the function of the aforementioned signal station = communication with a network containing call control data, communication between the aforementioned telephone set and the aforementioned public telephone network ^ e 仃 communication, and in the aforementioned terminal device and 119.-type gateway device ;; system; and the public telephone network, and connect, connect, and chew to the Internet Protocol (IP) Transfer Protocol (IP) packets and Connected to the Internet set of 22 ft call control data for communication, and used as a terminal of the 8 :, Zhou Road Protocol (IP) transfer network, Pei continued to the function of Qianmei telephone network number office, and connected 1 2 0 · —A kind of Internet Association, 苴 中 裉 摅 ～ 于 协 疋 ( The IP) transit network is characterized by: a packet, and an internal envelope-side logical terminal formed according to the opened envelope A &quot;envelope; the foregoing: the logical terminal identification information of the packet determines the source address and only The header part that contains the packet does not include the internal packet of the delivery material and uses the call control information to subscribe to the last-minute communication connection control. 1 Its 21 Internet Protocol (ίρ) forwarding network 'is characterized by: 3 fixed to the internet point device, the aforementioned network point device contains 2 imm 2049-3793-PF4.ptc page 351 1245997 a case number 90105465 6. Patent application scope of more than logical terminals, including the network side installation terminal on the transmission side and external package To form an internal packet, A = according to the logic of the sending side, according to the logic of the internal packet received | the logical terminal of the network device on the letter side, the header of the aforementioned internal packet does not determine the trusted side address and only contains the recipient's bit Address, and use the packet containing the source of the message to control the connection between the terminals. 1 Control data 122. An Internet protocol (ιρΙtransfer The network includes two network access point devices, which are characterized by: to form an internal packet, and the / f on the trusted side is based on an external packet, and the network device uses the aforementioned internal ^ spoon and encounters the aforementioned external packet. Contains the identification information of the logical terminal on the receiving side ^ ^ = letter; the aforementioned internal 2 does not include the transmission source bit only: ::: The header of the packet uses the internal address containing call control data 'and is controlled. Vanadium and terminal communication Connection control 123 · —A kind of Internet where the network of device installations is a packet transfer network, which is characterized in that: the circuit is fixed with logical terminals, and the communication is above the line. Each of the foregoing communication logical terminals is transmitted to the network on the sending side. In the outlet device on each side of Pei Zhiling: the internal packet is formed according to the external packet. If the device is on the upper side, the aforementioned outer packet is restored; the header part of the packet does not include I = the packet for communication; the aforementioned internal Address, and uses two or two source addresses and only contains the receiver's bit communication connection control. The internal package of the industrial system is poor, and the execution terminal is 2049-3793-PF4.ptc, page 352, 1245997, which is the amendment No. 90105465. 6. The scope of patent application 124. A kind of network device, which is characterized by: It contains more than two logical terminals Earlier, the inner packet was also formed by the driver, the child, and the outer packet, and the logical terminal identification packet of the logical end packet on the sender side was used to determine the header part of the inner packet. Xunzi, the address of the person, and use the scoop Ϊ \ address to include only the receiving JL and use the inter-terminal communication connection control including the call control data. σ, dagger, execute ~ 1 2 5. —A kind of network point device, which is characterized in that it has more than 2 logical terminals, and the Gan φ j ping-pong device recognizes the data according to the logical end 1 of the received internal packet = soil $ = Logical terminal on the receiving side. The header part of the aforementioned internal packet does not include the source address and only the address of the recipient, and an internal packet containing call control data to perform communication connection control between terminals. 126 · —A kind of outlet device, which is characterized in that: the worker has two or more logic terminals, in which the outlet device on the sending side is packaged to form an internal packet; the outlet device on the receiving side restores the packet of the outlet and the outlet The devices use the aforementioned internal packets for communication. The internal packet contains the identification information of the logical terminal on the receiving side, and the header part of the former j: part of the packet does not include the address of the sender but only the address of the recipient. And use the connection control including communication control data between terminals.乂 円 一 钉 〇127. —A kind of network point device, characterized in that: the network point device is connected to more than 2 communication lines, each of which is connected through I 2049-3793-PF4.ptc page 353 1245997 Λ_Β Second, --- -Case No. QmnM Lang ^ ㈣ Patent scope ___ ϊ :: logic terminals are fixed, in which the sending terminal is located on the terminal: the terminal is based on the external] of each of the network devices in the network device 3 = Internal packet, which is the standard of the trusted packet; The packet encapsulation is performed at t 3 and k is received 3 times, and the source address including k L is used to perform communication connection control between terminals. Control data internal 128+ _ kinds of Internet Protocol Jp) transfer network, in which the terminal device has more than 2 toilets, which is characterized by: ^ = side of the network device is based on the external Internet network device, its front Internet Protocol (IP) packet, the receiving side, defines the (IP) packet to distinguish the internal Internet Protocol II network device from the packet, and sends the aforementioned :: Network Protocol II Protocol (= packet, implementation The line end U controls the Internet Protocol (IP) sealing lamp of the material ~ the connection control of the Zhijian communication. ^ 9 · A network point device, which is characterized by the above and Q) :: There are 2 terminal devices in the network External Internet Protocol 2j2: The network device on the side of Sinotec is based on the packet, trusted) to form the internal Internet Protocol (IP). Before the packet is restored, # ^ 点 1 is set from the aforementioned internal Internet. The protocol (IP) network device communicates with the aforementioned industrial network ff: (IP) packet, and the aforementioned network protocol (J p: the network device UP of the Bay 1) uses the aforementioned intranet (UP) packet for communication between the transmitting side, and Use of call control information 2049-3793.PF4.ptc Page 354 1245997 2049-3793-PF4.ptc Chapter 355